Chromatographe en phase gazeuse - ThermoQuest - TRACE GC Serie2000 - Manual EN

TRACE GC 2000
™
Gas Chromatograph
Service Manual
Prod uct Ty pe
Trace GC 2000 Service Manual
Part Number M 317 09 270, Rev. B
© 1999 CE Instruments, a subsidiary of ThermoQuest Corporation. All rights reserved.
Printed in the Italy.
Published by TMQ-Milan, Technical Publication, Strada Rivoltana, 20090 Rodano (Milan)
Tel: +39 02 95059355 Fax: +39 02 95059388
Printing History: Rev. B, June 1999
Disclaimer
Technical Information contained in this publication is for reference purposes only and is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been
made to supply complete and accurate information; however, ThermoQuest corporation assumes no responsibility and will not be liable for any
errors, omissions, damage, or loss that might result from any use of this manual or the information contained therein (even if this information is
properly followed and problems still arise).
This publication is not part of the Agreement of Sale between ThermoQuest and the purchaser of a TRACE GC system. In the event of any conflict
between the provisions of this document and those contained in ThermoQuest’s Terms and Conditions, the provisions of the Terms and Conditions
shall govern.
Reference to System Configurations and Specifications supersede all previous information and are subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
TRACE™ is a trademark of ThermoQuest Corporation. Other brand and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
Special Printing Instructions:
All schematics in Section 5 (Electronic Board Description) must be printed either with the “Fit to Page”
item selected or with Tabloid size paper in order to be viewed correctly. This applies only to the schematics
sections of Section 5. The Section 5 chapters themselves can be printed on normal Letter or A4 Letter size
paper.
Declaration
Manufacturer:
ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A.
ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A. is the manufacturer of the instrument described in this
manual and, as such, is responsible for the instrument safety, reliability and
performance only if:
•
installation
•
re-calibration
•
changes and repairs
•
have been carried out by authorized personnel, and if:
•
the local installation complies with local law regulations
•
the instrument is used according to the instructions provided, and its operation
is only entrusted to qualified and trained personnel
ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A. is not liable for any damages derived from
noncompliance with the aforementioned recommendations.
ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A.
Strada Rivoltana
20090 RODANO (MI)
ITALY
Warranty
Please complete, date and sign the Quality Form accompanying the instrument.
Your new instrument is covered against manufacturing defects for the period
agreed within the sales terms which is generally a period of 15 months from the
invoice date or 12 months from the date of installation, whichever occurs earlier,
specific agreements excepted. Warranty does not cover consumables, damage
caused by the improper use of the instrument and damage due to transportation.
Service contracts are available from your area CE Instruments representative or
directly from our headquarters Customer Support department at the following
numbers:
CE Instruments Customer Support
Tel. + 39 02 95059 355
Fax. + 39 02 95059 388
The warranty will be invalidated (specific agreements excepted) if the instrument
is removed from its original packaging in the absence of an authorized CE
Instruments Customer Service Engineer.
Contents
About This Manual ................................................................................................................................... xvii
Overview...................................................................................................................................... xvii
Conventions Used in This Manual.................................................................................................xxi
Instrument Markings and Symbols .............................................................................................. xxii
Using Hydrogen ...........................................................................................................................xxiv
Using the Hydrogen Sensor ............................................................................................xxiv
SECTION I
Introduction
Chapter 1.1
GC Base Unit..................................................................................................................................................3
TRACE GC 2000 System Components ............................................................................................4
Pneumatic Compartment......................................................................................................4
Analytical Unit.....................................................................................................................4
Electronic Compartment ......................................................................................................5
Keypad and Display Panel ...................................................................................................5
Chapter 1.2
Pneumatic Systems.......................................................................................................................................7
Gas Control .......................................................................................................................................8
Digital Pneumatics ...............................................................................................................8
Analog Pneumatics ..............................................................................................................8
Mixed Pneumatics................................................................................................................8
Carrier Gas Control..............................................................................................................8
Column Evaluation .................................................................................................9
Leak Check ............................................................................................................9
Gas Saver Function...............................................................................................13
Detector Gas Control .........................................................................................................13
Chapter 1.3
Injection Systems ........................................................................................................................................15
Injection Systems Overview ...........................................................................................................16
Split/Splitless Injector........................................................................................................16
On-Column Injector ...........................................................................................................16
HOT Cold On-Column Injector .........................................................................................16
Large Volume On-Column Injector...................................................................................17
Packed Column Injector.....................................................................................................17
Purged Packed Column Injector ........................................................................................17
Chapter 1.4
Detection Systems ......................................................................................................................................19
Detectors .........................................................................................................................................20
Flame Ionization Detector..................................................................................................20
Electron Capture Detector..................................................................................................20
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector...........................................................................................20
Multidetector System .........................................................................................................21
Detector Base Bodies.........................................................................................................21
Service Manual
iii
Contents
SECTION II
Specification Summary
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven ...............................................................................................................................................25
Column Oven Overview ................................................................................................................. 26
Oven Safety ....................................................................................................................... 28
Column Oven Configuration .......................................................................................................... 29
Oven Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 31
Chapter 2.2
Injectors .......................................................................................................................................................35
Split/Splitless Injector Overview.................................................................................................... 36
Septum ............................................................................................................................... 39
Liners ................................................................................................................................. 40
Packed Columns ................................................................................................... 41
Split/Splitless Injector Menus......................................................................................................... 42
On-Column Injector Overview ....................................................................................................... 46
Primary Cooling System.................................................................................................... 46
Secondary Cooling System................................................................................................ 47
Optional Devices ............................................................................................................... 48
Auxiliary Purge Line ............................................................................................ 48
Automatic Actuator .............................................................................................. 48
High Oven Temperature (HOT OC) Device ........................................................ 48
Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI) ..................................................... 48
On-Column Injector Menu ............................................................................................................ 49
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview ..................................................................................... 50
Optional Devices ............................................................................................................... 50
Auxiliary Purge Line ............................................................................................ 50
Solvent Vapor Exit Valve..................................................................................... 51
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Menu ........................................................................................... 52
Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview............................................................................... 53
Auxiliary Purge Line ......................................................................................................... 54
Large Volume On-Column Injector Menu ..................................................................................... 55
Packed Column Injector Overview................................................................................................. 56
Septa .................................................................................................................................. 56
Liners and Adapters........................................................................................................... 57
Packed Column Injector Menu ....................................................................................................... 58
Purged Packed Column Injector Overview .................................................................................... 59
Septa .................................................................................................................................. 60
Liners ................................................................................................................................. 60
Purged Packed Column Injector Menu........................................................................................... 61
Chapter 2.3
Detectors......................................................................................................................................................63
Flame Ionization Detector Overview.............................................................................................. 64
Jet....................................................................................................................................... 64
Selectivity .......................................................................................................................... 64
Temperature....................................................................................................................... 64
Carrier and Detector Gases................................................................................................ 65
FID Menu........................................................................................................................................ 67
Flame Out Conditions........................................................................................................ 68
iv
Service Manual
Contents
Electron Capture Detector Overview ............................................................................................. 69
Wipe Test .......................................................................................................................... 70
Carrier and Detector Gases................................................................................................ 70
Operating Principle............................................................................................................ 71
Molecular Structure and Detector Response ..................................................................... 71
Constant Current Operating Mode .................................................................................... 72
Base Frequency ................................................................................................................. 73
ECD Menu...................................................................................................................................... 74
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview..................................................................................... 75
Thermionic Source Lifetime ............................................................................................. 75
Carrier and Detector Gases................................................................................................ 76
NPD Menu...................................................................................................................................... 77
SECTION III
Functional Tests
Chapter 3.1
Info Messages ............................................................................................................................................. 81
Info Messages ................................................................................................................................. 82
Chapter 3.2
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 85
Error Messages ............................................................................................................................... 86
Chapter 3.3
Diagnostic Messages.................................................................................................................................. 89
Diagnostic Messages ...................................................................................................................... 90
SECTION IV
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 99
Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 100
Replace the Oven Motor............................................................................................................... 101
Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 101
Required Parts ................................................................................................................. 101
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 101
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle ................................................................................................... 108
Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 108
Required Parts ................................................................................................................. 108
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 108
Replace the Flapper Motor ........................................................................................................... 116
Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 116
Required Parts ................................................................................................................. 116
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 116
Remove the Power Control Module ............................................................................................. 119
Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 119
Required Parts ................................................................................................................. 119
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 119
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit ............................................ 125
Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 125
Service Manual
v
Contents
Required Parts.................................................................................................................. 125
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 125
Chapter 4.2
Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases....................................................................................129
Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules ....................................................................................... 130
DPFC Purged Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module........................................................... 130
DPFC Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module ....................................................................... 131
DPFC On-Column Carrier Pneumatic Module ............................................................... 132
DPFC for S/SL and PTV Carrier Pneumatic Module...................................................... 133
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................. 134
Calibration ....................................................................................................................... 134
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................ 135
Chapter 4.3
Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases......................................................................................137
Detector Gas Flow Control Modules............................................................................................ 138
Hardware Configuration AA, Option 401 ....................................................................... 138
Calibration .......................................................................................................... 138
Hardware Configuration AB, Option 402 ....................................................................... 139
Calibration .......................................................................................................... 139
Hardware Configuration AC, Option 403 ....................................................................... 140
Calibration .......................................................................................................... 140
Hardware Configuration AD, Option 404 ....................................................................... 141
Calibration .......................................................................................................... 141
Hardware Configuration AE............................................................................................ 142
Detector Gas Connections ............................................................................................................ 143
Chapter 4.4
Handshake Cables ....................................................................................................................................145
TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 Handshake Cable .................................................................... 146
TRACE to TSQ Handshake Cable ............................................................................................... 147
TRACE to Generic Data System Remote Start ............................................................................ 148
TRACE to GCQ............................................................................................................................ 149
Autosampler Handshake Cables ................................................................................................... 150
SECTION V
Electronic Board Description
Chapter 5.1
Analytical Unit ...........................................................................................................................................157
General Description ...................................................................................................................... 158
Chapter 5.2
Control Unit................................................................................................................................................161
General Description ...................................................................................................................... 162
Chapter 5.3
Motherboard ..............................................................................................................................................167
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 168
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 173
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 173
vi
Service Manual
Contents
Chapter 5.4
Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................................................................................ 183
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 184
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 186
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 187
Chapter 5.5
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O.................................................................................................... 197
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 198
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 201
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 201
Chapter 5.6
Power Control Module.............................................................................................................................. 217
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 218
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 219
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 219
Chapter 5.7
Digital Pressure Flow Control.................................................................................................................. 227
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 228
Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 228
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 229
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 229
Chapter 5.8
Keypad and Display Panel ....................................................................................................................... 235
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 236
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 236
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 236
Chapter 5.9
Theory of Detector Cards......................................................................................................................... 239
Block Diagram for Detector Cards............................................................................................... 240
Chapter 5.10
Flame Ionization Detector Controller ...................................................................................................... 241
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 242
Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 242
Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 243
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 243
Calibration Adjustments.................................................................................................. 243
Special Notes ................................................................................................................... 243
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 244
Chapter 5.11
Electron Capture Detector Controller ..................................................................................................... 255
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 256
Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 256
Detector Heat................................................................................................................... 257
Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 258
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 258
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 258
Service Manual
vii
Contents
Chapter 5.12
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller............................................................................................265
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 266
Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 266
Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 267
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 267
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 268
Chapter 5.13
Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD)........................................................................................275
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 275
Circuit Functions ............................................................................................................. 275
Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 277
Adjustment Procedure .................................................................................................................. 277
Protection Circuits ........................................................................................................................ 277
Special Notes ................................................................................................................................ 277
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 278
Chapter 5.14
Photoionization Detector Controller (PID) ..............................................................................................285
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 285
Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 285
Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 287
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 287
Protection Circuits ........................................................................................................................ 287
Special Notes ................................................................................................................................ 287
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 288
Chapter 5.15
Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD) ...................................................................................295
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 295
Circuit Functions ............................................................................................................. 295
Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 297
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 297
Protection Circuits ........................................................................................................................ 297
Special Notes ................................................................................................................................ 297
Schematics and Component Information...................................................................................... 298
Chapter 5.16
Thermocouple Preamplifiers....................................................................................................................305
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 306
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 306
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 307
Chapter 5.17
On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator ......................................................................................................311
Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 312
Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 312
Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 312
viii
Service Manual
Contents
SECTION VI
Service Equipment
Chapter 6.1
Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................................................. 319
PCB Replacement......................................................................................................................... 320
Digital Flowmeter......................................................................................................................... 320
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)............................................................................................................. 320
Oscilloscope ................................................................................................................................. 320
Leak Test Meter............................................................................................................................ 320
Chapter 6.2
TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit..................................................................................................................... 323
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 324
SECTION VII
Replacement Parts List
SECTION VIII
Service Information
Chapter 8.1
Service Notes (TSB).................................................................................................................................. 333
Chapter 8.2
Additional Technical Information ............................................................................................................ 335
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector ....................................................................................................................... 343
About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 344
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 345
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit ........................................................................ 345
Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 345
Transformer for FID ........................................................................................................ 345
Getting Started.............................................................................................................................. 346
Removing the GC Panels ................................................................................... 347
Installing the FID Control Card ......................................................................... 348
Mounting the FID on the GC ............................................................................. 350
Reinstall the GC Panels...................................................................................... 352
Restarting the GC ............................................................................................... 352
Configuration................................................................................................................................ 353
Set FID Parameters....................................................................................................................... 354
Range Parameter................................................................................................. 355
Appendix B
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector ............................................................................................................... 357
About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 358
Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 359
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit ........................................................................ 359
Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 359
Transformer for NPD ...................................................................................................... 360
Service Manual
ix
Contents
Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 361
Removing the GC Panels.................................................................................... 362
Installing the NPD Control Card ........................................................................ 365
Removing the Power Control Module................................................................ 368
Install the Transformer for Detector................................................................... 371
Reinstall the Power Control Module .................................................................. 373
Mounting the NPD on the GC ............................................................................ 373
Reinstall the GC Panels ...................................................................................... 375
Restarting the GC ............................................................................................... 376
Configuration................................................................................................................................ 377
Hardware Configuration ..................................................................................... 377
Detector and Make-up Gas Configuration ......................................................... 377
Set NPD Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 379
Appendix C
Flame Photometric Detector ...................................................................................................................381
About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 382
Introduction................................................................................................................................... 383
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit......................................................................... 383
Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 383
Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 385
Removing the GC Panels.................................................................................... 386
Installing the FPD Control Card......................................................................... 388
Mounting the FPD on the GC............................................................................. 391
Reinstall the GC Panels ...................................................................................... 394
Restarting the GC ............................................................................................... 394
Configuration................................................................................................................................ 395
Set FPD Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 396
Appendix D
Photoionization Detector .........................................................................................................................399
About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 400
Introduction................................................................................................................................... 401
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit......................................................................... 401
Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 401
Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 403
Removing the GC Panels.................................................................................... 404
Installing the PID Control Card.......................................................................... 406
Mounting the PID on the GC.............................................................................. 409
Connecting Capillary Column and Exit Line ..................................................... 414
Reinstall the GC Panels ...................................................................................... 414
Restarting the GC ............................................................................................... 415
Configuration................................................................................................................................ 416
Set PID Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 417
Appendix E
Electron Capture Detector .......................................................................................................................419
About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 420
Introduction................................................................................................................................... 421
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit......................................................................... 421
Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 421
Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 423
x
Service Manual
Contents
Removing the GC Panels....................................................................................424
Installing the ECD Control Card ........................................................................426
Mounting the ECD on the GC ............................................................................429
Reinstall the GC Panels ......................................................................................430
Restarting the GC................................................................................................431
Configuration ................................................................................................................................432
Set ECD Parameters......................................................................................................................433
Appendix F
Transformer Installation ..........................................................................................................................435
Transformer Overview..................................................................................................................436
Standard and NPD Transformers 437
Getting Started ..............................................................................................................................438
Removing the GC Panels....................................................................................438
Remove the Power Control Module ...................................................................440
Install the Transformer for Detector ...................................................................443
Reinstall the Power Control Module ..................................................................445
Reinstall the GC Panels ......................................................................................445
Restarting the GC................................................................................................445
Configuration ................................................................................................................................446
Appendix G
Reagent Safety Information .....................................................................................................................447
ACETONE..........................................................................................................447
METHANOL ......................................................................................................448
TOLUENE ..........................................................................................................448
Appendix H
Customer Communication .......................................................................................................................449
How To Contact Us and Order Spare Parts ..................................................................................449
Technical Support ............................................................................................................451
Reader Survey..................................................................................................................452
Glossary .................................................................................................................................................... 453
Index .......................................................................................................................................................... 459
Figures
Figure 1.1-1.
Figure 1.2-1.
Figure 2.1-1.
Figure 2.1-2.
Figure 2.1-3.
Figure 2.2-1.
Figure 2.2-2.
Figure 2.2-3.
Figure 2.2-4.
Figure 2.2-5.
Figure 2.2-6.
Figure 2.2-7.
Figure 2.2-8.
TRACE GC 2000 Compartments ........................................................................................4
Leak Test Parts ..................................................................................................................10
Injector/Detector Locations and Fittings ...........................................................................26
Oven Air Circulation .........................................................................................................27
Cryogenic Air Circulation .................................................................................................28
Split/Splitless Injector .......................................................................................................37
Septum Purge System ........................................................................................................38
Split/Splitless Injector Components ..................................................................................39
S/SL Wide-Bore Injection Tapered Liner .........................................................................40
S/SL With a Packed Column .............................................................................................41
On-Column Injector ..........................................................................................................46
Primary and Secondary Cooling Systems .........................................................................47
HOT Cold On-Column Injector ........................................................................................50
Service Manual
xi
Contents
Figure 2.2-9.
Figure 2.2-10.
Figure 2.2-11.
Figure 2.3-1.
Figure 2.3-2.
Figure 2.3-3.
Figure 4.1-1.
Figure 4.1-2.
Figure 4.1-3.
Figure 4.1-4.
Figure 4.1-5.
Figure 4.1-6.
Figure 4.1-7.
Figure 4.1-8.
Figure 4.1-9.
Figure 4.1-10.
Figure 4.1-11.
Figure 4.1-12.
Figure 4.2-1.
Figure 4.2-2.
Figure 4.2-3.
Figure 4.2-4.
Figure 4.2-5.
Figure 4.3-1.
Figure 4.3-2.
Figure 4.3-3.
Figure 4.3-4.
Figure 4.3-5.
Figure 4.4-1.
Figure 4.4-2.
Figure 4.4-3.
Figure 4.4-4.
Figure 4.4-5.
Figure 5.2-1.
Figure 5.2-2.
Figure 5.3-1.
Figure 5.3-2.
Figure 5.3-3.
Figure 5.3-4.
Figure 5.5-1.
Figure 5.5-2.
Figure 5.9-1.
Figure 8.2-1.
Figure A-1.
Figure A-2.
Figure A-3.
Figure A-4.
Figure A-5.
Figure A-6.
Figure A-7.
Figure B-1.
Figure B-2.
xii
TRACE GC 2000 Configuration for Large Volume On-Column Injection ..................... 53
Packed Column Injector .................................................................................................... 56
Purged Packed Column Injector ....................................................................................... 59
Flame Ionization Detector ................................................................................................. 64
Electron Capture Detector ................................................................................................. 69
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector .......................................................................................... 75
Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover ......................................................................... 103
Pneumatic Flow Module Propped on the GC Upper Deck ............................................. 104
Tab Adjustment Screws and Tab Screws on the Oven Heater Baffle ............................ 105
Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover ......................................................................... 110
Right Side View of GC Rear Panel ................................................................................. 111
Right Side View of GC Front Panel ................................................................................ 112
Tab Adjustment Screws and Tab Screws on the Oven Heater Baffle ............................ 113
Clamp for Oven Heater Temperature Sensor .................................................................. 114
Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover ......................................................................... 120
Right Side View of GC Rear Panel ................................................................................. 122
Right Side View of GC Front Panel ................................................................................ 123
Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover ......................................................................... 126
DPFC Purged Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module .......................................................... 130
DPFC Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module ...................................................................... 131
DPFC On-Column Carrier Pneumatic Module ............................................................... 132
DPFC for S/SL and PTV Carrier Pneumatic Module ..................................................... 133
DPFC Electronic Diagram of the Carrier Pneumatic Module ........................................ 134
Hardware AA, Option 401 for ECD Only ...................................................................... 138
Hardware AB, Option 402 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID Without Make-Up ................ 139
Hardware AC, Option 403 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID With Make-Up ..................... 140
Hardware AD, Option 404 for NPD, ECD, PID, FPD, and FID Without Make-Up ...... 141
Hardware AE for Auxiliary Gas Control ........................................................................ 142
TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 handshake cable, # b119521-0002 ............................ 146
TRACE to TSQ handshake cable, #3801-4004 .............................................................. 147
TRACE to generic data system remote start, #23043457 ............................................... 148
TRACE to GCQ, # 3801-4003 ........................................................................................ 149
Connections for AS2000 Interconnect Cable and Dual Autosampler Start Cable ......... 150
Block Diagram of Base Unit ........................................................................................... 162
Expanded Block Diagram of Circuit Functions .............................................................. 163
Front View of Timed Event Connector (J38, 15-Pin Female) ........................................ 170
Front View of Generic Handshake Connector ................................................................ 170
Front View of Autosampler Connector ........................................................................... 171
Front View of Oven Cryo Valve and Inlet Cryo Valve Connector ................................ 172
Block Diagram of Temperature Feedback Circuit .......................................................... 198
Detailed Block Diagram of Temperature Feedback Circuit ........................................... 199
Block Diagram for Detector Cards ................................................................................. 240
Install New TRACE 2000 Software Dialog Box ............................................................ 337
TRACE GC 2000 ............................................................................................................ 346
TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 347
TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel .......................................................................................... 348
Extension Slots Top View ............................................................................................... 349
Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 349
Jet for FID ....................................................................................................................... 351
Installation of the FID ..................................................................................................... 351
TR ACE GC 2000 ........................................................................................................... 362
TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 363
Service Manual
Contents
Figure B-3.
Figure B-4.
Figure B-5.
Figure B-6.
Figure B-7.
Figure B-8.
Figure B-9.
Figure B-10.
Figure B-11.
Figure B-12.
Figure B-13.
Figure C-1.
Figure C-2.
Figure C-3.
Figure C-4.
Figure C-5.
Figure C-6.
Figure C-7.
Figure C-8.
Figure D-1.
Figure D-2.
Figure D-3.
Figure D-4.
Figure D-5.
Figure D-6.
Figure D-7.
Figure D-8.
Figure D-9.
Figure E-1.
Figure E-2.
Figure E-3.
Figure E-4.
Figure E-5.
Figure E-6.
Figure F-1.
Figure F-2.
Figure F-3.
Figure F-4.
Figure F-5.
Figure F-6.
Figure F-7.
TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 364
GC Rear Panel Fixing Screws ......................................................................................... 365
Extension Slots Top View .............................................................................................. 366
Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 367
TRACE GC 2000 Right Side View ................................................................................ 369
TRACE GC 2000 Rear View .......................................................................................... 370
Transformer Installation .................................................................................................. 371
Transformer Assembly Identification Parts .................................................................... 372
Installation of the Transformer for NPD ......................................................................... 373
Jet for NPD ..................................................................................................................... 374
Installation of the NPD ................................................................................................... 375
TRACE GC 2000 ............................................................................................................ 386
TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 387
TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 388
Extension Slots Top View .............................................................................................. 389
Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 390
Jet for FPD ...................................................................................................................... 392
Installation of the FPD .................................................................................................... 393
Cables Connection .......................................................................................................... 393
TRACE GC 2000 ............................................................................................................ 404
TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 405
TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 406
Extension Slots Top View .............................................................................................. 407
Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 408
PID General View ........................................................................................................... 410
Explose of the PID Components ..................................................................................... 411
PID Installation Result ................................................................................................... 413
Capillary Column and Exit Line Connections ................................................................ 414
TRACE GC 2000 ............................................................................................................ 424
TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 425
TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 426
Extension Slots Top View .............................................................................................. 427
Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 428
Installation of the ECD ................................................................................................... 430
Standard and NPD Transformers .................................................................................... 437
TRACE GC 2000 View .................................................................................................. 439
TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 440
TRACE GC 2000 Right Side View ................................................................................ 441
TRACE GC 2000 Rear View .......................................................................................... 442
Transformer Installation .................................................................................................. 443
Transformer Assembly Identification Parts .................................................................... 444
Tables
Table 2.1-1.
Table 2.1-2.
Table 2.2-1.
Table 2.2-2.
Table 2.2-3.
Table 2.2-4.
Table 2.2-5.
Table 2.2-6.
Configure Oven Menu ......................................................................................................29
The Oven Menu ................................................................................................................31
Liners Sizes and Applications ...........................................................................................40
Inlet Menu in Split Mode ..................................................................................................43
Inlet Menu in Splitless Mode ............................................................................................43
Inlet Menu in Surge Splitless Mode ..................................................................................44
Inlet Menu in Split Mode ..................................................................................................49
Inlet Menu for On-Column Injectors With the HOT Device ............................................52
Service Manual
xiii
Contents
Table 2.2-7.
Table 2.2-8.
Table 2.2-9.
Table 2.2-10.
Table 2.3-1.
Table 2.3-2.
Table 2.3-3.
Table 2.3-4.
Table 2.3-5.
Table 2.3-6.
Table 2.3-7.
Table 2.3-8.
Table 3.1-1.
Table 3.2-1.
Table 3.3-1.
Table 4.2-1.
Table 4.3-1.
Table 5.3-1.
Table 5.3-2.
Table 5.3-3.
Table 5.3-4.
Table 5.3-5.
Table 5.3-6.
Table 5.3-7.
Table 5.4-1.
Table 5.4-2.
Table 5.4-3.
Table 5.5-1.
Table 5.5-2.
Table 5.5-3.
Table 5.6-1.
Table 5.7-1.
Table 5.8-1.
Table 5.10-1.
Table 5.11-1.
Table 5.12-1.
Table 5.16-1.
Table 5.17-1.
Table 6.2-1.
Table 6.2-2.
Table 6.2-3.
Table 6.2-4.
Table 6.2-5.
Table 6.2-6.
Table 6.2-7.
Table 6.2-8.
Table 6.2-9.
Table 6.2-10.
Table 6.2-11.
Table 6.2-12.
Table 8.2-1.
Table 8.2-2.
xiv
Inlet Menu for Large Volume On-Column Injectors ........................................................55
Liners and Adapters for Packed Column Injectors ...........................................................57
Inlet Menu for Packed Column Injectors ..........................................................................58
Inlet Menu for Purged Packed Column Injectors ..............................................................61
FID Carrier Gases. ............................................................................................................65
Typical Operating Conditions ...........................................................................................65
FID Menu ..........................................................................................................................67
ECD Carrier Gases. ...........................................................................................................70
Relative Response to Some Organic Compounds .............................................................72
ECD Menu ........................................................................................................................74
NPD Carrier Gases ............................................................................................................76
NPD Menu ........................................................................................................................77
Info Messages ...................................................................................................................82
Error Messages ..................................................................................................................86
Diagnostic Messages .........................................................................................................90
DPFC Input and Output Voltages ...................................................................................135
Detector Gas Connections ...............................................................................................143
Non-DPFC Gas ON/OFF Control Connectors ................................................................169
Timed Event Connector ..................................................................................................170
Generic Handshake Connector ........................................................................................171
Autosampler Connector ..................................................................................................172
Oven Cryo Valve and Inlet Cryo Valve Connectors .......................................................172
Other Connectors ............................................................................................................173
Motherboard Schematics .................................................................................................173
Select Lines and Devices ................................................................................................185
TPU Channels and Functions ..........................................................................................186
CPU Schematics ..............................................................................................................187
Temperature Controls .....................................................................................................199
External Input/Output Signals .........................................................................................200
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Schematics .......................................................201
Power Control Module PCB Schematics ........................................................................219
Digital Pressure Flow Control Schematics .....................................................................229
Keypad and Display Panel Schematics ...........................................................................236
FID Controller Schematics ..............................................................................................244
ECD Controller Schematics ............................................................................................258
NPD Controller Schematics ............................................................................................268
Thermocouple Preamplifiers Schematics ........................................................................307
On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator Schematics ..........................................................312
Electronics .......................................................................................................................324
Oven ................................................................................................................................325
Injector Assemblies .........................................................................................................325
Injector Consumables ......................................................................................................325
Large Volume Injections .................................................................................................326
Detector Assemblies .......................................................................................................326
Detector Consumables ....................................................................................................327
Fans .................................................................................................................................327
Pneumatics ......................................................................................................................328
AS 2000 Left/Right .........................................................................................................328
HS 2000 ...........................................................................................................................328
Service Tools ...................................................................................................................328
Configure Menu ..............................................................................................................338
Configure Menu ..............................................................................................................339
Service Manual
Contents
Table 8.2-3.
Table 8.2-4.
Table 8.2-5.
Table 8.2-6.
Table 8.2-7.
Table 8.2-8.
Table 8.2-9.
Table H-1.
HIDDEN CONFIGURATION Menu .............................................................................340
Config Right Inlet Menu .................................................................................................340
Config Right Inlet Type Menu ........................................................................................341
Left Inlet Menu ...............................................................................................................341
Left Carrier Col Flow Rates Menu .................................................................................342
Valves Menu ...................................................................................................................342
Left Valves Menu ...........................................................................................................342
Transformer Types ..........................................................................................................436
Operating Procedures
Replace the Oven Motor............................................................................................................................ 102
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle ................................................................................................................ 109
Replace the Flapper Motor ........................................................................................................................ 117
Remove the Power Control Module .......................................................................................................... 120
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit ......................................................... 126
How to Update Your TRACE GC 2000 Software .................................................................................... 336
Using the Configure Menu ........................................................................................................................ 337
Using the Hidden Configuration Menu ..................................................................................................... 338
Controlling LVOCI Inlet Parameters ........................................................................................................ 341
Installing FID Upgrade Kit........................................................................................................................ 346
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ................................................................................................... 353
Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 354
Installing NPD Upgrade Kit ...................................................................................................................... 362
Configuring Hardware, Detector and Make-up Gas.................................................................................. 377
Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 379
Installing FPD Upgrade Kit ....................................................................................................................... 386
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ................................................................................................... 395
Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 396
Installing PID Upgrade Kit........................................................................................................................ 404
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ................................................................................................... 416
Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 417
Installing ECD Upgrade Kit ...................................................................................................................... 424
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ................................................................................................... 432
Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 433
Installing the Transformer ......................................................................................................................... 438
Hardware Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 446
Service Manual
xv
About This Manual
Overview
The TRACE GC 2000 Service Manual provides detailed information for installing,
servicing, and repairing the TRACE GC 2000 gas chromatograph. This manual is
written primarily for certified service representatives.
This manual is organized as follows:
Section I, Introduction, provides an introduction to the basic components and systems
of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 1.1, GC Base Unit, describes the base unit of the TRACE GC 2000 and
its components.
Chapter 1.2, Pneumatic Systems, describes the pneumatic systems available for
the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 1.3, Injection Systems, describes the injection systems available for the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 1.4, Detection Systems, describes the detection systems available for use
in the TRACE GC 2000.
Section II, Specification Summary, provides a summary of specifications for the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 2.1,Column Oven, describes the column oven of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 2.2, Injectors, describes the injectors available for use with the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 2.3, Detectors, describes the detectors available for use with the
TRACE GC 2000.
Section III, Functional Tests, provides information about alarm, diagnostic, and error
messages of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 3.1, Info Messages, contains information to help identify and
troubleshoot info messages on the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 3.2, Error Messages, contains information to help identify and
troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 3.3, Diagnostic Messages, contains information to help identify and
troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000.
Section IV, Maintenance & Troubleshooting, provides maintenance and
troubleshooting for various components of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 4.1, GC Base Unit, contains procedures for replacing the components
associated with the frame and oven assembly. It also explains how to remove the
Power Control Module, the CPU, and the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O
unit.
Service Manual
xvii
About This Manual
Overview
Chapter 4.2, Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases, contains
information about the Digital Pressure Flow Control modules of the
TRACE GC 2000. It also addresses maintenance and troubleshooting issues.
Chapter 4.3, Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases, contains information
about the Detector Gas Flow Control modules of the TRACE GC 2000. It also
addresses maintenance and troubleshooting issues.
Chapter 4.4, Hand Shake Cables, contains information regarding the different
types of handshake cables and connections used with the TRACE GC 2000.
Section V, Electronic Board Description, provides a description of the electronic
boards in the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.1, Analytical Unit, describes the Analytical Unit of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.2, Control Unit, describes the Control Unit of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.3, Motherboard, describes the Motherboard of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.4, Central Processing Unit (CPU), describes the PCB for the Central
Processing Unit (CPU) of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.5, Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O, chapter describes the
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.6, Power Control Module, describes the PCB for the Power Control
Module (PCM) of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.7, Digital Pressure Flow Control, describes the PCB for the Digital
Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.8, Keypad and Display Panel, describes the PCB for the Keypad and
Display Panel of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.9, Theory of Detector Cards, contains a representative block diagram
for the following 6 detector chapters.
Chapter 5.10, Flame Ionization Detector Controller, describes the Flame
Ionization Detector (FID) controller of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.11, Electron Capture Detector Controller, describes the Electron
Capture Detector (ECD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.12, Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller, describes the Nitrogen
Phosphorous Detector (NPD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.13, Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD), describes the
TRACE GC 2000 Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) controller.
Chapter 5.14, Photoionization Detector Controller (PID), This chapter describes
the TRACE GC 2000 Photoionization Detector (PID) controller.
Chapter 5.15, Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD), describes the
TRACE GC 2000 Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) controller.
Chapter 5.16, Thermocouple Preamplifiers, describes the PCB for the
thermocouple preamplifiers of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.17, On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator, describes the PCB for an oncolumn semiautomatic actuator of the TRACE GC 2000.
xviii
Service Manual
Overview
About This Manual
Section VI, Service Equipment, provides specifications for recommended test
equipment used with the TRACE GC 2000. The TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit is also
included.
Chapter 6.1, Recommended Test Equipment, provides test equipment
specifications that should enable isolation of problems, repair, and calibration of
the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 6.2, TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit, provides a list of the parts found in the
TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit. Part numbers are included.
Section VII, Replacement Parts List, provides a list of replacement parts and
component part numbers for the TRACE GC 2000.
Section VIII, Service Information, provides service and technical information for the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 8.1, Service Notes (TSB), contains service notes and Technical Service
Bulletins (TSBs) for the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 8.2, Additional Technical Information, contains additional technical
information for the TRACE GC 2000.
Appendix A, Flame Ionization Detector, contains the manual FID Installation
Instructions (PN M 317 09 327), which provides instructions for installing and
configuring the Flame Ionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Appendix B, Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector, contains the manual NPD Installation
Instructions (PN M 317 09 329) which provides the instructions to install and
configure the Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Appendix C, Flame Photometric Detector, contains the manual FPD Installation
Instructions (PN M 317 09 331) which provides the instructions to install and
configure the Flame Photometric Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Appendix D, Photoionization Detector, contains the manual PID Installation
Instructions (PN M 317 09 333) the instructions to install and configure the
Photoionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Appendix E, Electron Capture Detector, contains the manual ECD Installation
Instructions (PN M 317 09 335) which provides the instructions to install and
configure the Electron Capture Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Appendix F, Transformer Installation, contains the manual Transformer Installation
which provides the instructions to install and configure a transformer on your TRACE
™ GC 2000.
Appendix G, Reagent Safety Information, contains the chemical references for the
solvents mentioned in this manual.
Service Manual
xix
About This Manual
Overview
Appendix H, Customer Communication, contains contact information for
ThermoQuest offices worldwide. Use the Reader Survey in this section to give us
feedback on this manual and help us improve the quality of our documentation.
The Glossary contains definitions of terms used that may be used in this manual. This
also includes abbreviations, acronyms, metric prefixes, and symbols.
The Index contains an alphabetical list of key terms and topics in this manual,
including cross-references and the corresponding page numbers.
xx
Service Manual
Conventions Used in This Manual
About This Manual
Conventions Used in This Manual
The following symbols and typographical conventions are used throughout this
manual.
Bold
Bold text indicates names of windows, menus, dialog boxes,
buttons, and fields.
Italic
Italic indicates cross references, first references to important terms
defined in the glossary, and special emphasis.
Monospace
Monospace, or Courier, indicates filenames and filepaths, or to
indicate text the user should enter with the keyboard.
Monospace
Bold
Monospace Bold indicates messages or prompts displayed on the
computer screen or on a digital display.
»
This symbol illustrates menu paths to select, such as
File»Open….
KEY NAME
Bold, uppercase sans serif font indicates the name of a key on a
keyboard or keypad, such as ENTER.
CAUTION
This symbol alerts you to an action or procedure that, if performed
improperly, could damage the instrument.
NOTE
This symbol alerts you to important information related to the text
in the previous paragraph.
This symbol alerts you to an action or procedure that, if performed
WARNING! improperly, could result in damage to the instrument or possible
physical harm to the user. This symbol may be followed by icons
indicating special precautions that should be taken to avoid injury.
This symbol indicates electric shock hazard.
This symbol indicates danger from hazardous chemicals.
This symbol indicates danger from high temperature surfaces or
substances.
This symbol indicates a fire hazard.
This symbol indicates an explosion hazard.
This symbol indicates a toxic hazard.
Service Manual
xxi
About This Manual
Instrument Markings and Symbols
This symbol indicates the presence of flammable materials.
This symbol indicates the presence of radioactive material.
This symbol indicates an operation or procedure that must NOT
be performed by the user. A ThermoQuest authorized Customer
Support Engineer must perform this procedure.
This symbol indicates all metal objects, such as watches and
jewelry, must be taken off.
This symbol indicates an eye hazard. Eye protection must be
worn.
This symbol indicates the user must wear a protective screen when
performing the procedure.
This symbol indicates the user must wear protective shoes when
performing the procedure.
This symbol indicates the user must wear protective clothing
when performing the procedure.
This symbol indicates the user must wear gloves when performing
the procedure.
Instrument Markings and Symbols
The following table explains the symbols used on ThermoQuest instruments. Only a
few of them are used on the TRACE GC 2000 gas chromatograph.
Symbol
Description
Direct Current
Alternating Current
Both direct and alternating current
Three-phase alternating current
3
Earth (ground) terminal
Protective conductor terminal
xxii
Service Manual
Instrument Markings and Symbols
About This Manual
Symbol
Description
Frame or chassis terminal
Equipotentiality
On (Supply)
Off (Supply)
Equipment protected throughout by DOUBLE
INSULATION or REINFORCED INSULATION
(Equivalent to Class II of IEC 536)
Indicates that the user must refer to the manual for
specific Warning or Caution information to avoid
personal injury or damage to the product.
Caution, risk of electric shock
Caution, hot surface
Caution (refer to accompanying documents)
In-position of a bistable push control
Out-position of a bistable push control
Service Manual
xxiii
About This Manual
Using Hydrogen
Using Hydrogen
The use of hydrogen as a carrier gas or as fuel for certain flame detectors requires the
operator’s strict attention and compliance with special precautions due to the hazards
involved.
Hydrogen is a dangerous gas, particularly in an enclosed area when it reaches a
concentration corresponding to its lower explosion level (4% in volume). When mixed
with air it can create an explosive mixture. An explosion hazard could develop in the
GC oven when hydrogen is used as a carrier gas if oven elements are not perfectly
connected to each other, or if the connection materials are worn out, broken, or
otherwise faulty.
Use the following safety precautions when using hydrogen:
•
Ensure that all hydrogen cylinders comply with the safety requirements for proper
use and storage. All hydrogen cylinders must be equipped with safety valves and
automatic safety systems.
•
Make sure the gas supply is turned completely off when connecting hydrogen
lines.
•
Perform a bubble test to ensure that the hydrogen lines are leak-tight before using
the instrument.
•
Ensure your GC column oven has a ThermoQuest hydrogen sensor. A hydrogen
sensor continuously monitors the hydrogen level in the GC column oven.
If your GC oven does not have a hydrogen sensor already installed, contact your
ThermoQuest sales representative. To comply with instrument safety
requirements, a ThermoQuest CSE or authorized service technician should install
the sensor.
If you plan to use a sensor other than the recommended ThermoQuest sensor, you
must verify its ability to perform the functions listed above before installing it. It
must comply with your local safety regulations, or with the IEC 10101 regulations
if local regulations do not exist.
Using the Hydrogen Sensor
The lower limit of the hydrogen sensor is 0.5% in volume. You should adjust the
detection threshold to 1% in volume, which is 25% of the hydrogen lower limit of
explosion (4% in volume).
In cases where the connections begin to leak or the column breaks, the sensor alerts
the operator. Then it automatically cuts off the gas supply and heating to the active
zones, and sweeps the column oven with forced air ventilation.
1.
xxiv
IEC 1010-1, First Edition, September 1990; IEC 1010-1, Amendment 1, September 1992; IEC 1010-1,
Amendment 2, June 1995.
Service Manual
Using Hydrogen
About This Manual
If the sensor detects anomalies or leaks during GC operation due to instrument
malfunction, the operator must immediately:
•
close the hydrogen supply
•
switch off the gas chromatograph
•
air out the room
The reliability of the sensor depends on careful maintenance. After the sensor is in
use, you must periodically check its operating performance and calibration as
recommended by the manufacturer. Refer to your hydrogen sensor’s instruction
manual for maintenance guidelines.
WARNING! Never use hydrogen in your TRACE GC 2000 system unless your GC oven has a
hydrogen sensor installed.
NOTE
Service Manual
ThermoQuest CSEs are not authorized to install or repair any instrument using hydrogen as a
carrier gas unless the instrument is equipped with the appropriate sensor.
xxv
About This Manual
xxvi
Using Hydrogen
Service Manual
SECTION
I
Introduction
This section provides an introduction to the basic components and systems
of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 1.1, GC Base Unit, describes the base unit of the TRACE GC 2000
and its components.
Chapter 1.2, Pneumatic Systems, describes the pneumatic systems available
for the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 1.3, Injection Systems, describes the injection systems available for
the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 1.4, Detection Systems, describes the detection systems available
for use in the TRACE GC 2000.
GC Base Unit
This chapter describes the base unit of the TRACE GC 2000 and its components.
Chapter at a Glance…
TRACE GC 2000 System Components........................................................................ 4
Pneumatic Compartment............................................................................................... 4
Analytical Unit.............................................................................................................. 4
Electronic Compartment ............................................................................................... 5
Keypad and Display Panel ............................................................................................ 5
Service Manual
3
Chapter 1.1
GC Base Unit
TRACE GC 2000 System Components
TRACE GC 2000 System Components
The TRACE GC 2000 consists of four major components, as shown in
Figure 1.1-1.
Temp
I n it ia l t
R a m p 1 im e
OVEN
36
0
1 .0 0 <
2 0 .0
VAL VES
1. Pneumatic Compartment
3. Electronic Compartment
2. Analytical Unit
4. Keypad and Display Panel
Figure 1.1-1. TRACE GC 2000 Compartments
Pneumatic Compartment
The pneumatic compartment contains the pneumatic gas control circuits. The circuits
can be completely electronic (digital pneumatics), completely analog, or a
combination of analog and digital components (mixed pneumatics).
Analytical Unit
The analytical unit consists of two subcompartments:
4
•
The column oven
•
The injector and detector cassette
Service Manual
TRACE GC 2000 System Components
Chapter 1.1
GC Base Unit
Electronic Compartment
The electronic compartment consists of two subcompartments:
•
The high-voltage compartment
•
The motherboard for the detector controller cards
Keypad and Display Panel
The keypad and display panel make up the TRACE GC 2000 user interface.
Service Manual
5
Pneumatic Systems
This chapter describes the pneumatic systems available for the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Gas Control ................................................................................................................... 8
Digital Pneumatics........................................................................................................ 8
Analog Pneumatics ....................................................................................................... 8
Mixed Pneumatics......................................................................................................... 8
Carrier Gas Control....................................................................................................... 8
Detector Gas Control .................................................................................................. 13
Service Manual
7
Chapter 1.2
Pneumatic Systems
Gas Control
Gas Control
The arrangement of the pneumatic gas control system depends on the detectors
configured on the base unit. Three possible configurations of the pneumatic
compartment are available:
•
Digital pneumatics
•
Analog pneumatics
•
Mixed pneumatics (analog and digital)
Digital Pneumatics
In GCs equipped with digital pneumatics, carrier and detector gases are controlled
electronically through a series of electronic pneumatic control modules mounted in
the pneumatic compartment. The Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) modules
control the carrier gas flow, and the Detector Gas Flow Control (DGFC) modules
control detector gas flow.
A single DPFC module can alternate the flow of one carrier gas supply between a
split/splitless injector and another (non-split/splitless) injector.
Analog Pneumatics
In GCs equipped with analog pneumatics, detector gases are controlled by a series of
conventional, manually regulated control modules mounted in the pneumatic
compartment. Manual control is also referred to as non-DGFC.
Mixed Pneumatics
In GCs equipped with mixed digital and analog pneumatics, DPFC modules control
carrier gas flow, while conventional, or non-DGFC, modules control detector gases.
The detector gas pneumatic circuits can be configured for up to three detectors at one
time. Each of the three detector gas flows can be regulated separately. You can easily
interchange different detectors.
Carrier Gas Control
Carrier gas control is only available in DPFC format. The DPFC module allows the
digital control of the inlet pressure and carrier gas flow.
8
Service Manual
Chapter 1.2
Pneumatic Systems
Gas Control
The DPFC module features the following:
•
Constant pressure or constant flow operating modes
•
Programmed pressure or programmed flow operating modes
•
Inlet pressure control (in kPa, psi, or bar) and column flow rate control
(in mL/min)
•
Split flow control (in mL/min)
Column Evaluation
For pressure controlled injectors (split/splitless and on-column), control of the column
flow is indirect. This means that the GC regulates pressure to control the flow of gas
through the column. To do this, the GC relies on a column constant. The column
constant is a measure of the column’s pneumatic resistance. You can use the
TRACE GC 2000’s column evaluation feature to automatically calculate the column
constant.
Leak Check
A leak check involves six stages.
1. Leak testing the gas source to the GC
2. Pressurizing the split/splitless inlet system
3. Pressuring the packed injection
4. Pressurizing the detector base body
5. Automatic leak checking
Service Manual
9
Chapter 1.2
Pneumatic Systems
Gas Control
Stage 1. Leak Testing the gas source to the GC
Helpful Materials: Electronic Leak Detector, Cut-Off Valve PN 405 100 23, Pressure Gauge
PN 408 500 07, 1/8” Tee PN 403 200 42
The TRACE DPFC gas input contains on and off solenoid valves that are in the off
position when the GC power is off. Figure 1.2-1 Leak Test Parts provides a detailed
description for the following instruction.
GC 2
GC 3
Cut-off Valve
Pressure
Gauge
GC 1
1/8" Tee with Teflon Tape
to Seal Pipe Threads
Figure 1.2-1. Leak Test Parts
First, connect the gas lines to the GC as outlined in the Site Prep and Installation
manual. While the GC power is still off, turn on all gas supply lines to the GC and set
the input pressure to 420 kPa (60 psig). Allow the gas lines to pressurize for several
seconds. Turn off the input gas source and allow the system to set for several minutes.
The pressure should not decrease. If the pressure drops, locate the leak using an
electronic leak detector. If multiple systems are attached to the same gas source, you
will need to isolate each GC system. An easy way to isolate the GC is to install an
Cut-Off valve (PN 405 100 23) and Pressure Gauge (PN 408 500 07) with a 1/8”
input Tee (PN 403 200 42) in the gas line leading to the GC that you are leak testing,
Be sure the pressure gauge is connected in line between the on/off valve and the GC.
Turn on the gas supply and allow the system to pressurize. Turn off the Cut-off valve
and verify the pressure holds. Keep in mind, this only leak checks the plumbing from
the Cut-off valve to the GC.
10
Service Manual
Chapter 1.2
Pneumatic Systems
Gas Control
Stage 2. Pressurizing the split/splitless inlet system
Helpful Materials: Aluminum Plug PN 290 326 55, M4 Capillary Inlet Nut PN 350 324 23
Turn the GC power on and allow the TRACE GC 2000 to perform its initial self-test.
Insert an aluminum plug PN 290 326 55 (pkg. 10 ea.) into the M4 capillary inlet nut
PN 350 324 23. Attach the nut to the capillary inlet and tighten. On the GC front
panel, press the VALVES button (bottom row). Select Inlet valves. Turn the
appropriate injector split valve and the septum purge valve off. Select the appropriate
Right or Left Carrier. Set the mode to constant pressure. Turn on the gas pressure and
set the inlet pressure to the maximum value. The maximum value can be determined
by moving the cursor to the pressure display line and pressing the Info key on the front
panel. Allow the inlet several seconds to pressurize. The display should show the
selected pressure and the actual pressure. Turn the pressure OFF. The actual pressure
should not change more than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes. If the pressure
begins to immediately drop, use an electronic leak tester and check the split and
septum purge vent, the septum and the fittings on the split vent filter for leaks. Check
all fittings around the inlet.
Stage 3. Pressurizing the packed injector
Helpful Materials: Septum PN 313 032 00, Cap PN 350
010 51
Two types of packed injectors exist on the TRACE GC 2000. One is packed with
septum purge and the other is packed without septum purge. Determine which packed
injector is installed on your GC. Turn the GC power on and allow the TRACE GC
2000 to perform its initial self-test. Seal the inlet using Cap PN 350 010 51. Select the
appropriate Right or Left Carrier. If a packed injector with septum purge is being used,
it will be necessary to turn the septum purge valve off. To turn the septum purge valve
off, press the VALVES button (bottom row) on the front panel. Select Inlet valves.
Turn the appropriate injector septum purge valve off. Select the appropriate Left or
Right carrier. Set the mode to constant pressure. Turn on the gas pressure and set the
inlet pressure to the maximum value. The maximum value can be determined by
moving the cursor to the pressure display line and pressing the Info key on the front
panel. Allow the inlet several seconds to pressurize. The display should show the
selected pressure and the actual pressure. Turn the pressure OFF. The actual pressure
should not change more than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes. If the pressure
begins to immediately drop, use an electronic leak tester and check the septum purge
vent, the septum and all fittings around the inlet for leaks.
Stage 4. Pressurizing the on column injector
The on column injector must be sealed using a short section of capillary column
connected to the injector. Insert the column into the injector as described in chapter 13
of the Operating Manual. Insert the other end of the column into a septa. This should
seal the other end of the column. After the column is in place, turn the GC power on
and allow the TRACE GC 2000 to perform its initial self-test. Select the Left Carrier
and set the mode to constant pressure. Turn on the gas pressure and set the inlet
Service Manual
11
Chapter 1.2
Pneumatic Systems
Gas Control
pressure to the maximum value. The maximum value can be determined by moving
the cursor to the pressure display line and pressing the Info key on the front panel.
Allow the inlet several seconds to pressurize. The display should show the selected
pressure and the actual pressure. Turn the pressure OFF. The actual pressure should
not change more than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes. If the pressure begins to
immediately drop, use an electronic leak tester and check the various parts of the inlet
for leaks.
Stage 5. Pressurizing the detector base body
Helpful Materials: Cap PN 350 061 01, M4 Column Nut PN 350 324 23, Aluminum Plug PN 290 326 55,
Blank Detector Jet PN 404 019 00
Turn the GC power on and allow the TRACE GC 2000 to perform its initial self-test.
Set all detector temperatures to ambient and verify the detector base body has cooled
to ambient temperature. Remove the detector from the base body. Seal the top of the
detector base body using cap PN 350 061 01. If the detector base body contains an
FID or NPD jet, it is not necessary to remove the jet. The seal will fit over the jet. If
the base is configured for capillary columns, remove the column and seal the detector
base inlet using a M4 column nut PN 350 324 23 and aluminum plug PN 290 326 55
(pkg. 10 ea.). If the base body is configured for packed columns, insert a septum
PN 313 032 00 into a septum cap PN 350 010 51 and attach it to the detector inlet to
seal the base body input. Turn on one of the detector gases and allow the detector base
to pressurize.
NOTE
It is not necessary to turn on all the detector gases. With the top and bottom of the base body
sealed, all the gas lines will pressurize back to the flow module. The front panel display will
show different pressures for the various detector gases event though only one of the detector
gases is turned on. Once the base body has pressurized, turn the gas that was used to
pressurize the base body off. The actual pressure should not change more than 14 to 21 kPa
(2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes.
The capillary column base body standard outfit contains a blank Detector Jet
PN 404 019 00. Substituting the existing detector jet with this blank jet will allow the
base body column flow path to be sealed. With this blank jet in place and a column
connected between the inlet and the base body, the inlet can be pressurized and the
complete carrier flow path leak tested. Be sure any H2 and makeup supplies connected
to the base body are turned off when this test is made. Allow several minutes for the
system to pressurize before turning off the column flow. If the system is pressurized
and the split/septum purge vents are off, the actual pressure should not change more
than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes.
Stage 6. Automatic leak check
With the TRACE GC 2000 system you can perform an automatic gas leak check.
When you select the GC leak check function the GC measures the column flow with a
true mass flow sensor and compares it to a calculated flow value obtained from the
original column constant to see if the numbers match. If there is a significant
difference between the two values then the instrument detects a gas leak.
12
Service Manual
Chapter 1.2
Pneumatic Systems
Gas Control
Gas Saver Function
The gas saver function reduces the split flow after an injection to avoid the waste of
expensive gases. It is only available on DPFC systems.
Refer to...
Chapter 4.6 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases
Detector Gas Control
The DGFC module allows the digital control of all the necessary detector gases. The
non-DGFC modules have conventional pneumatic controls which require manual
regulation of detector gases. Both DGFC and non-DGFC gas flows can be
automatically switched on and off using the TRACE GC 2000 keypad.
Refer to...
Chapter 4.7 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases
Service Manual
13
Injection Systems
This chapter describes the injection systems available for the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Injection Systems Overview ....................................................................................... 16
Split/Splitless Injector................................................................................................. 16
On-Column Injector.................................................................................................... 16
HOT Cold On-Column Injector .................................................................................. 16
Large Volume On-Column Injector ............................................................................ 17
Packed Column Injector.............................................................................................. 17
Purged Packed Column Injector ................................................................................. 17
Service Manual
15
Chapter 1.3
Injection Systems
Injection Systems Overview
Injection Systems Overview
The following injection systems are available on the TRACE GC 2000:
•
Split/Splitless Injector (S/SL)
•
On-Column Injector (OCI)
•
HOT Cold On-Column Injector (HOT OC)
•
Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI)
•
Packed Column Injector (PKD)
•
Purged Packed Column Injector (PPKD)
Digital Pressure and Flow Control (DPFC) is available for all injection systems.
Split/Splitless Injector
The Split/Splitless (S/SL) injector minimizes heavy component discrimination with
optimized sample transfer to the column. You can use capillary and wide-bore
columns with the split/splitless injector. With the appropriate adapter kit, you can also
use packed columns.
Refer to...
Chapter 4.2 Maintaining a Split/Splitless Injector
On-Column Injector
The On-Column Injector (OCI) allows you to inject a sample directly into a 0.25 or
0.32 mm capillary column or 0.53 mm wide-bore column. Primary and secondary
cooling systems keep the injection block at ambient temperature and the injection
zone cool to prevent sample vaporization and ensure complete sample transfer from
the syringe to the column.
Refer to...
Chapter 4.3 Maintaining a Cold On-Column Injector
HOT Cold On-Column Injector
The High Oven Temperature cold On-Column (HOT OC) injector is a special version
of the standard on-column injector. It can operate at high oven temperatures. An
optional HOT device is required.
Refer to...
Chapter 4.3 Maintaining a Cold On-Column Injector
16
Service Manual
Injection Systems Overview
Chapter 1.3
Injection Systems
Large Volume On-Column Injector
The Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI) is a special version of the standard
on-column injector. It allows the automatic introduction of large volumes of liquid
sample through the AS 2000 Autosampler.
Refer to...
Chapter 4.3 Maintaining a Cold On-Column Injector
Packed Column Injector
The Packed (PKD) column injector features injection directly into metal or glass
packed columns or into metal or glass packed columns with glass liners.
Refer to...
Chapter 4.4 Maintaining a Packed Column Injector
Purged Packed Column Injector
The Purged Packed (PPKD) column injector allows sample injection and vaporization
into a liner. The sample then transfers to a wide-bore capillary column.
Refer to...
Chapter 4.5 Maintaining a Purged Packed Column Injector
Service Manual
17
Detection Systems
This chapter describes the detection systems available for use in the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Detectors ..................................................................................................................... 20
Flame Ionization Detector........................................................................................... 20
Electron Capture Detector........................................................................................... 20
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector.................................................................................... 20
Multidetector System .................................................................................................. 21
Detector Base Bodies.................................................................................................. 21
Service Manual
19
Chapter 1.4
Detection Systems
Detectors
Detectors
The following detection systems are available for the TRACE GC 2000:
•
Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
•
Electron Capture Detector (ECD)
•
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD)
All detectors are available with both Digital Gas Flow Control (DGFC) and
conventional pressure regulators (non-DGFC).
Flame Ionization Detector
The Flame Ionization Detector (FID) provides optimum sensitivity and linearity. The
FID ensures stable, reproducible, and long-term trouble-free performance.
Refer to…
Chapter 4.8 Maintaining an FID
Electron Capture Detector
The Electron Capture Detector (ECD) features a very low ionization cell volume and
increased resistance to contamination. This ensures high sensitivity and trouble-free
operations.
You can easily remove and clean the collecting electrode without disturbing the 63Ni
source.
The detector can be heated to 400 °C, extending its application range to higher
molecular weight compounds.
Refer to…
Chapter 4.9 Maintaining an ECD
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector
The Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD), equipped with a ceramic matrix thermionic
source, features high sensitivity and long-term stability for analyzing compounds
containing nitrogen and phosphorus.
A special thermionic source is also available for Enhanced Nitrogen Selectivity (ENS)
mode.
Refer to…
Chapter 4.10 Maintaining an NPD
20
Service Manual
Chapter 1.4
Detection Systems
Detectors
Multidetector System
To analyze complex samples, a significant reduction in analysis time and increase in
analytical information may be gained with a multidetector configuration. Detectors
may be arranged:
•
In series with a non-destructive detector (ECD) followed by a destructive detector
(NPD or FID)
•
In parallel to provide a number of chromatograms from each single injection
This may be particularly useful for bulk analysis of product formulations,
biochemical, and environmental applications.
Detector Base Bodies
The ionization detectors are easily interchangeable. This is made possible by base
bodies on the analytical unit that provide a connection between the detector head and
the analytical column.
Two types of detector base bodies are available. The type you can use depends on the
GC base unit configuration.
•
Packed column base body
•
Capillary column base body
Refer to…
Chapter 2.3 Detectors
Service Manual
21
SECTION
II
Specification
Summary
This section provides a summary of specifications for the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 2.1, Column Oven, describes the column oven of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 2.2,Injectors, describes the injectors available for use with the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 2.3, Detectors, describes the detectors available for use with the
TRACE GC 2000.
Column Oven
This chapter describes the column oven of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Column Oven Overview ............................................................................................. 26
Column Oven Configuration ...................................................................................... 29
Oven Menu ................................................................................................................. 31
Service Manual
25
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Column Oven Overview
Column Oven Overview
The TRACE GC 2000 column oven provides a stable heating environment for the
analytical column. It heats and cools quickly, and efficient air circulation ensures a
high degree of thermal stability.
Opening the oven door activates a safety microswitch, which automatically switches
off the oven heating and the motor for the air circulation fans. The oven is heated by
resistor elements powered by a circuit located within the GC control unit.
The column fittings in the oven depend on whether capillary or packed column
injector and detector base bodies are installed. Auxiliary gas lines, if installed, end in
M8x1 male fittings between the injector and the detector base bodies. The oven
temperature is monitored by a PT 100 platinum wire sensor and controlled by the GC
control unit.
Figure 2.1-1 shows the positions of the left and right detectors on top of the oven and
the fittings inside the oven.
Top View
Interior View
LCH Left Channel
RCH Right Channel
LJ Left Injector
RJ Right Injector
LJ* 2nd Left Injector
RJ* 2nd Right Injector
LD Left Detector
RD Right Detector
Figure 2.1-1. Injector/Detector Locations and Fittings
26
Service Manual
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Column Oven Overview
The column oven has the following capabilities:
•
Seven linear temperature ramps
•
A maximum temperature of 450 °C
•
A maximum temperature increase rate of 120 °C/min
•
A minimum operating temperature a few degrees above ambient obtained by two
modulated cooling flaps controlled by the GC, shown in Figure 2.1-2
1. Oven
3. Air
2. Fan
Figure 2.1-2. Oven Air Circulation
•
Service Manual
Temperature control by a combination of heater control and fine control of hot air
exhaust and an ambient air intake. The system allows separation of moderately
volatile components on thick film capillary columns at near ambient temperatures
without the use of a cryogenic system. With a cryogenic option installed, the oven
temperatures can reach –55 °C with liquid carbon dioxide or –99 °C with liquid
nitrogen. Figure 2.1-3 shows the cryogenic system.
27
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Column Oven Overview
1. Oven
5. Heater Baffle
2. Fan
6. Coolant Reservoir (LCO2 or LN2)
3. Air Circulation Path
7. Back Pressure Regulator
4. Heater Coil
8. Coolant Valve (LCO2 or LN2)
Figure 2.1-3. Cryogenic Air Circulation
Oven Safety
Opening the oven door cuts off the power to the oven heater, fan, and the cryogenic
system (if installed). The setpoints are kept in memory. The display shows the
following safety message:
OVEN
Temp
40 Door Open
Initial time
Ramp 1
2.00
Off
To return to normal operation, close the oven door.
WARNING! The oven vents at the rear of the GC discharge hot air during cooling.
WARNING! Hydrogen is a potentially dangerous gas. Refer to Using Hydrogen on page xxiv for
safety information.
28
Service Manual
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Column Oven Configuration
Column Oven Configuration
The CONFIGURE OVEN menu contains the control parameters for the column oven.
Press CONFIG and OVEN to open the menu shown in Table 2.1-1. Refer to Chapter 3,
Configuration, in the Operating Manual for more information about the CONFIGURE
menu.
Table 2.1-1. Configure Oven Menu
Menu
Range
CONFIGURE OVEN
Auto Prep Run
Comments
The title bar.
Off/On
Press ON to enable automatic execution of the Prep Run
without pressing PREP RUN. This feature is useful when
you use the autosampler.
When this item is set to Off, you must press PREP RUN
to activate the Prep Run.
PR timeout
0–999.99 min,
Enter the duration of the prep run. The injection must
occur within this time or the timeout will return the GC
to the Standby condition.
Equil time
0–999.99 min
This is the time required for equilibrating the oven
temperature after the temperature is set or modified.
Ready delay
0–99.9 min
This parameter delays the Ready to Inject condition.
This function is useful for on-column injectors. It allows
the secondary cooling to cool the injector before the
injection. This time must not exceed the PR timeout
value.
Max temp
0– 450 °C
This parameter defines the maximum allowable oven
temperature setpoint to protect the column from
unintentional excessively high temperature. This limit
must be set to the manufacturer's maximum
recommended operating temperature for the column.
Enable
cryogenics1
Yes/No
This function enables the oven cryogenic system when it
is installed and configured (LCO2 or LN2 as coolant).
Press YES to activate the cryogenic system. Press NO to
deactivate it.
Start cryogen1
1.

This parameter defines the temperature at which the oven
cryogenic system regulation occurs. This parameter line
is displayed if Enable cryogenics has been set to
YES.
If the cryogenic system is installed and configured, its parameters are included in the menu.
Service Manual
29
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Column Oven Configuration
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Configure the Column Oven
Use this procedure to configure the column oven.
Configuration Without the Cryogenic System
1. Press CONFIG, then press OVEN or scroll to Oven and press ENTER.
2. Scroll to Auto prep run. Press ON to enable automatic prep run. Press OFF if
you want prep run to be activated by pressing the PREP RUN key.
3. Scroll to PR timeout and set the duration of the prep run timeout.
4. Scroll to Equil time and set the oven temperature equilibration time.
5. Scroll to Ready delay and set the time delay before the GC enters the Ready to
Inject condition.
6. Scroll to Max Temp and set the maximum allowable oven temperature.
Configuration With the Oven Cryogenic System
1. Press CONFIG, then press OVEN or scroll to Oven and press ENTER.
2. Scroll to Auto prep run. Press ON to enable automatic prep run. Press OFF if
you want prep run to be activated by pressing the PREP RUN key.
3. Scroll to PR timeout and set the duration of the prep run timeout.
4. Scroll to Enable cryogenics and press YES to enable the cryogenic system or
NO to disable it.
5. Scroll to Equil time and set the oven temperature equilibration time.
6. Scroll to Ready delay and set the time delay before the GC enters the Ready to
Inject condition.
7. Scroll to Start cryogen and set the cryogenic system regulation temperature.
The range depends on the coolant used.
8. Scroll to Max Temp and set the maximum allowable oven temperature.
30
Service Manual
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Oven Menu
Oven Menu
The OVEN menu contains the parameters for programming the oven temperature from
an initial temperature to a final temperature using up to seven ramps during the
analytical run. It is possible to set a single (isothermal) or multiple ramp program.
Press OVEN to open the OVEN menu, shown in Table 2.1-2.
Table 2.1-2. The Oven Menu
Menu
Range
Comments
The title bar.
OVEN
1
Temp
On/Off, 0–450 °C
Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. This
value is the initial temperature.
Initial time
0–999.99 min
This parameter defines the time the oven remains at the
starting temperature after a programmed run has begun.
Ramp 1
0.0–120 °C/min,
On/Off
This is the temperature ramp rate in °C/minute to reach
the final temperature. Press ON to enable a temperature
ramp.
Final temp 1
0–450 °C1
This parameter defines the temperature the column
oven will reach at the end of the heating or cooling
ramp. This line only appears if Ramp 1 is On.
Final time 1
0.00–999.99 min,
This parameter defines how long (in minutes) the oven
will maintain the final temperature of the ramp.
Ramp 2-7
On/Off,
0.0–120 °C/min
After you program the first ramp, the menu adds the
Ramp 2 parameter lines. If you do not want an
additional ramp, leave this parameter set to Off. To
program the ramp, press ON. The Final temp and
Final time lines for the ramp will be added to the
menu. You can repeat this process to program up to
seven temperature ramps.
Final temp 2-7
0–450 °C1
This parameter defines the temperature the column
oven will reach at the end of the relevant ramp.
Final time 2-7
0.00–999.99 min,
This parameter defines how long (in minutes) the oven
will maintain the final temperature of the ramp.
Post run temp
0–450 °C1
This parameter defines a temperature the oven will
reach after the end of the analytical run. Press OFF if
you do not want a post run temperature. Press ON to
display the setpoint value and the Post run temp,
Post run time, L Post pres, and R post pres
parameters.
Service Manual


31
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Oven Menu
Table 2.1-2. The Oven Menu (Continued)
Menu
Comments
Post run time
0.00–999.99 min
This is the time the oven maintains the post run
temperature.
L/R Post pres
0–700 kPa
This parameter defines the pressure for the Left or
Right carrier during the Post run time when the
system operates in Constant Pressure or Programmed
Pressure mode.
1.
32
Range
With a cryogenic system, the ranges are –99–450 °C (with liquid N2), –55–450 °C (with liquid CO2). The range is
0–500 °C if the oven is configured for high oven temperatures.
Service Manual
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Oven Menu
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Set Up a Single Ramp Temperature Program
This program raises the initial oven temperature to a specified final temperature at a
specified rate and maintains the final temperature for a specified time.
1. Press OVEN to access the Oven menu.
2. Scroll to Temp and enter the initial temperature.
3. Scroll to Initial time and enter the time you want the oven to maintain the
initial temperature.
4. Scroll to Ramp 1 and press ON. Enter the ramp rate in °C/minute for the oven to
reach the ramp’s Final temp.
5. Scroll to Final temp 1 and enter the final temperature for the ramp.
6. Scroll to Final time 1 and enter the time the oven will maintain the Final
temp.
7. To end the single ramp program, Ramp 2 must be Off.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Set Up a Multiple Ramp Temperature Program
This program raises the initial oven temperature to a specified final temperature
through up to seven ramps, each having a specified ramp rate, time and temperature.
1. Press OVEN to access the Oven menu.
2. Scroll to Temp and enter the initial temperature.
3. Scroll to Initial time and enter the time you want the oven to maintain the
initial temperature.
4. Scroll to Ramp 1 and press ON. Enter the ramp rate in °C/minute for the oven to
reach the ramp’s Final temp.
5. Scroll to Final temp 1 and enter the final temperature for the ramp.
6. Scroll to Final time 1 and enter the time the oven will maintain the Final
temp.
7. Scroll to Ramp 2 and press ON. Enter the ramp rate for the second temperature
ramp.
Service Manual
33
Chapter 2.1
Column Oven
Oven Menu
8. Scroll to Final temp 2 and enter the final temperature for the ramp.
9. Scroll to Final time 2 and enter the time the oven will maintain the Final
temp.
10. To end the multiple ramp temperature program, leave Ramp 3 set to Off. To add
additional oven ramps, repeat the steps 7 through 9.
34
Service Manual
Injectors
This chapter describes the injectors available for use with the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Split/Splitless Injector Overview ................................................................................ 36
Split/Splitless Injector Menus..................................................................................... 42
On-Column Injector Overview ................................................................................... 46
On-Column Injector Menu.......................................................................................... 49
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview ................................................................. 50
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Menu........................................................................ 52
Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview............................................................ 53
Large Volume On-Column Injector Menu .................................................................. 55
Packed Column Injector Overview............................................................................. 56
Packed Column Injector Menu ................................................................................... 58
Purged Packed Column Injector Overview................................................................. 59
Purged Packed Column Injector Menu ....................................................................... 61
Service Manual
35
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Overview
Split/Splitless Injector Overview
The Split/Splitless (S/SL) injector, shown in Figure 2.2-1, is optimized for either split
or splitless applications to ensure effective sample transfer into the column,
minimizing heavy component discrimination.
For both split and splitless applications, the sample is injected through a septum into a
glass liner in the vaporization chamber.
The technique used, split or splitless, determines the choice of the glass liner and the
length of the syringe needle employed. You can control the injector temperature from
ambient to 450 °C, although the actual injector temperature you use depends on
solvent choice and thermal stability of the samples.
In GCs with Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC), an electronic device controls the
split flow, while the septum purge flow is kept constant by a calibrated flow regulator.
The S/SL injector is also equipped with electronically actuated On/Off valves for split
and septum purge lines.
Volatile components given off by the hot septum can produce ghost peaks in a
chromatogram. The septum purge system can continually purge the septum with a
flow of gas. This prevents the volatile components from the septum from entering the
column. Figure 2.2-2 shows the septum purge system. Figure 2.2-3 shows the
S/SL injector components.
36
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Overview
1. Septum Cap
7. Graphite Ferrule for Column
2. Septum
8. Capillary Gas Column
3. Liner Graphite Seal
A. Carrier Gas Inlet
4. Glass Liner
B. Split Line
5. Fixing Nut
C. Septum Purge Line
6. M4 Retaining Nut
Figure 2.2-1. Split/Splitless Injector
Service Manual
37
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Overview
1. Spring
6. Liner Graphite Seal
2. Septum
7. Glass Liner
3. Septum Holder
A. Carrier Gas Inlet
4. Septum Support
B. Septum Purge Line
5. Liner Cap
C. Split Line
Figure 2.2-2. Septum Purge System
38
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Overview
1. Septum Cap
10. Securing Bracket
2. Spring
11. Metal Ring
3. Septum Holder
12. Fixing Nut
4. Septum
13. Silver Seal
5. Septum Support
14. Terminal Fitting
6. Liner Cap
15. Fixing Nut
7. Liner
16. Graphite Ferrule for Column
8. Liner Graphite Seal
17. M4 Retaining Nut
9. Injector Body
Figure 2.2-3. Split/Splitless Injector Components
Septum
You should always use good quality septa, such as the BTO septa supplied with the
TRACE GC 2000. Such septa resist deformation, have longer life expectancy, and
have a low bleed level, even at high temperatures.
Service Manual
39
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Overview
Liners
Different types of glass liners may be installed depending on the injection mode used.
Table 2.2-1 shows the liner options currently available.
Table 2.2-1. Liners Sizes and Applications
ID mm
OD mm
Application
5
8
Split Injection
3
8
Split Injection
3
8
Splitless Injection
5
8
Splitless Injection
5
8
Direct injection into wide-bore column
5
8
Split injection at high flow rates or for the most polar
solvents
The glass liner used for direct splitless injection into a wide-bore column is tapered at
the bottom. It is used with 0.53-mm ID columns. Figure 2.2-4 shows the tapered glass
liner.
1. Carrier Gas Inlet
3. Split Line
2. Septum Purge Line
Figure 2.2-4. S/SL Wide-Bore Injection Tapered Liner
40
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Overview
A laminar cup liner is used for split injections at high split flow rates or for the more
polar solvents. This glass liner has a mixing chamber with an extended flow path that
allows complete sample vaporization before the sample reaches the split point.
Packed Columns
With a special conversion kit, you can install packed columns in the S/SL injector, as
shown in Figure 2.2-5.
1. Carrier Gas Inlet
3. Split Line
2. Septum Purge Line
Figure 2.2-5. S/SL With a Packed Column
Service Manual
41
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Menus
Split/Splitless Injector Menus
The INLET (S/SL) menu includes the operating parameters for the split/splitless
injector. The parameters you can edit depend on the operating mode chosen: split,
splitless, or splitless with surge.
Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the LEFT or RIGHT INLET menu for the
split/splitless injector.
LEFT INLET (S/SL)
Temp
Pressure
Mode:
250 250
10.6 10.6
split<
The Mode: menu item displays the current operating mode.
Press MODE/TYPE to open the INLET MODE submenu.
XX INLET MODE
* Split
Splitless
<
Splitless w/surge
Scroll to the mode you want to use and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An
asterisk appears on the left of the operating mode selected.
Tables 2.2-2 through 2.2-4 explain the ranges and functions of the parameters in the
LEFT and RIGHT INLET menus for each of the four operating modes.
NOTE
42
The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu,
that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu and vice versa.
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Menus
The items in the inlet menu vary depending on the operating mode you select in the
LEFT or RIGHT INLET MODE menu. Tables 2.2-2 through 2.2-4 show the
split/splitless inlet menu for the four operating modes.
Table 2.2-2. Inlet Menu in Split Mode
Menu
Range
Title bar.
RIGHT INLET (S/SL)
On/Off,
30–400 C
Temp
On/Off,
2–250 kPa or
3–700 kPa1
Pressure
Mode:
Comments
This line shows the base injector temperature.
Press ON to enable the heater and to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the
heater and to display the actual value.
This line shows the pressure. Press ON to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display
the actual value and to turn off all inlet flows.
This line displays the inlet operating mode selected.
Split
Total flow
Not editable
This line shows the total gas flow consumption,
which is the sum of the column flow, split flow
(or gas saver flow), and septum purge flow.
Split flow
On/Off, 0,
10–500 mL/min
This line shows the split flow.
1–5000
This line displays the actual value of the split ratio.
This value is the ratio between the split flow and the
column flow.
Split ratio
1.
Press ON to enable the split flow and to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to close
the split valve and to disable the split flow.
0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar.
Table 2.2-3. Inlet Menu in Splitless Mode
Menu
Range
Title bar.
RIGHT INLET (S/SL)
Temp
Pressure
Mode:
Service Manual
On/Off,
0–400 C
This line shows the base injector temperature.
On/Off,
2–250 kPa or 3–
700 kPa1
This line shows the pressure. Press ON to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display
the actual value and to turn off inlet pressure,
thereby turning off the flow.
Press ON to enable the heater and to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the
heater and to display the actual value.
This line displays the operating mode selected.
Press ENTER or MODE/TYPE to change the operating
mode.
Splitless
Total flow
Comments
Not editable
This line shows the total gas flow consumption,
which is the sum of the column flow, split flow (or
gas saver flow), and septum purge flow.
43
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Menus
Table 2.2-3. Inlet Menu in Splitless Mode (Continued)
Menu
Range
Comments
On/Off, 0, 10–
500 mL/min
This line shows the split flow.
Splitless time
0–999.99 min
This line shows the splitless time, which is the
duration of split valve closure.
Const sept purge?
Yes/No
Press YES to activate a constant septum purge to
continuously flush the septum with a purge flow of
5 mL/min when using helium or nitrogen as a
carrier gas, or 10 mL/min when using hydrogen as a
carrier gas.
Stop purge for:
0–999.99 min,
This line appears only when Constant septum
purge is set to No.
Split flow
1.

Press ON to enable the split flow and to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to close
the split valve and to disable the split flow.
0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar.
Table 2.2-4. Inlet Menu in Surge Splitless Mode
Menu
Range
Title bar.
RIGHT INLET (S/SL)
Temp
Pressure
On/Off,
0–400 C
This line shows the base injector temperature.
On/Off,
This line shows the pressure. Press ON to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display
the actual value and to turn off inlet pressure, thereby
turning off the flow.
2–250 kPa,
3–700 kPa1
Mode:
44
Comments
Press ON to enable the heater and to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the
heater and to display the actual value.
This line displays the operating mode selected. Press
ENTER or MODE/TYPE to change the operating mode.
Surge SL
Total flow
Not editable
This line shows the total gas flow consumption,
which is the sum of the column flow, split flow (or
gas saver flow), and septum purge flow.
Split flow
On/Off, 0,
10–500 mL/min
This line shows the split flow.
Splitless time
0–999.99 min
This line shows the splitless time, which is the
duration of split valve closure.
Surge pressure
2–250 kPa or
3–700 kPa1
This line indicates the surge pressure. Surge pressure
is activated at Prep Run.
Surge duration
0–999.99 min
This line indicates the duration of the surge pressure.
Press ON to enable the split flow and display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to close the
split valve and to disable the split flow.
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Split/Splitless Injector Menus
Table 2.2-4. Inlet Menu in Surge Splitless Mode (Continued)
Menu
Range
Const sept purge?
Yes/No
Stop purge for:
0–999.99 min,
1.

Comments
Press YES to activate a constant septum purge to
continuously flush the septum with a purge flow of
5 mL/min when using helium or nitrogen as a carrier
gas, or 10 mL/min when using hydrogen as a carrier
gas.
This line appears only when Constant septum
purge is set to No.
0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar.
Service Manual
45
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
On-Column Injector Overview
On-Column Injector Overview
With On-Column Injectors (OCI), you use a syringe to inject a liquid sample directly
into the capillary column.
The upper part of the injector has a needle guide and a rotary valve. The lower part
attaches to the top of the column oven. The standard on-column injector does not have
a septum.
The on-column injector is shown in Figure 2.2-6.
1. Syringe
6. Seal
2. Valve Lever
7. M8x1 Fixing Nut
3. Upper Block
8. Cooling Sleeve
4. PTFE Valve Seal
A. Carrier Gas Inlet
5. Stainless Steel Rotary Valve
B. Secondary Cooling Inlet
Figure 2.2-6. On-Column Injector
Primary Cooling System
The injection block is kept at ambient temperature by the primary cooling system,
which maintains a permanent flow of air across the injector body through a special
cooling fan.
46
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
On-Column Injector Overview
Secondary Cooling System
A stream of gas surrounds the area around the column at the point of injection. This
gas is normally compressed air, but for special applications CO2 can be used. The
secondary cooling flow keeps the injection zone at a temperature below the solvent
boiling point, even when the oven runs at a higher temperature. Elevated oven
temperature helps eliminate peak distortion in the chromatogram caused by flooding
effects.1
The secondary cooling system ensures complete and effective sample transfer from
the syringe to the column and improves reproducibility. Secondary cooling activates
only immediately before an injection and remains on after the injection until all of the
injected solvent has vaporized. The secondary cooling time, which is the duration of
secondary cooling during a run, depends on the oven temperature, the volatility of the
solvent, and the amount injected, but is normally in the range of 3–10 seconds. You
program the parameters for secondary cooling in the INLET menu when an on-column
injector is configured.
Primary and secondary cooling systems are shown in Figure 2.2-7.
1. Injector Upper Block
A. Carrier Gas Inlet
2. Injector Lower Block
B. Secondary Cooling
3. Capillary Column
C. Primary Cooling
4. Syringe
Figure 2.2-7. Primary and Secondary Cooling Systems
1.
Service Manual
Journal of Chromatography, 279 (1983) 241–250.
47
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
On-Column Injector Overview
Optional Devices
Several optional devices and special on-column injectors can be used for special
applications or to help automate certain functions.
Auxiliary Purge Line
The optional auxiliary purge line allows the elimination of excess of solvent that could
accumulate due to incorrect injection conditions. It purges the excess solvent to keep it
from entering other parts of the GC system.
Automatic Actuator
The automatic actuator can semi-automate manual injections by automatically
opening the rotary valve when the syringe needle is inserted. When the needle is
removed, the automatic actuator closes the valve and starts the GC.
High Oven Temperature (HOT OC) Device
The HOT OC device allows on-column operation at high initial oven temperatures,
eliminating the need to cool the oven to a lower temperature for the injection.
Chapter 8, High Oven Temperature Cold On-Column Injector, in the
TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual, describes this device in detail.
Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI)
The LVOCI is a special version of the standard on-column injector that allows large
volume liquid sample analysis with an AS 2000 autosampler. Special software is
required for this injector. Chapter 11, Large Volume On-Column Injector, in the
TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual, describes the principles and hardware for this
injection technique.
48
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
On-Column Injector Menu
On-Column Injector Menu
The INLET menu contains the parameters for on-column injector operations if you
have configured an on-column injector.
Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu, depending on the injector
position.
NOTE
The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu,
that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu, and vice-versa.
Table 2.2-5. Inlet Menu in Split Mode
Menu
Range
Comments
Title bar.
RIGHT INLET (OCI)
Pressure
On/Off,
2–250 kPa or
3–700 kPa1
This line shows the pressure. Press ON to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display
the actual value and turn off inlet pressure, thereby
turning off the flow.
Sec. Cool Time
0–999.99 min,
This line shows the secondary cooling time, which is
the duration of the secondary cooling. If programmed,
the valve opens in the Prep Run stage.
Const Aux Purge?2
Yes/No
Press YES to enable a constant auxiliary purge to
continuously flush the septum with a fixed purge flow.
Stop purge for2
0–999.99 min,
This line only appears when Const Aux Purge? is
set to No. Enter the time the purge flow should be
interrupted.
1.
2.


0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar.
This menu item appears only if the auxiliary purge option is installed and configured.
NOTE
When you press either COLUMN EVAL or LEAK CHECK while the INLET menu in
S/SL mode is displayed, the GC immediately performs the selected function if the instrument
is in the Standby status.
Service Manual
49
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview
The On-Column Injector (OCI) requires an optional device for injection at oven
temperatures at or above 200 °C, regardless of the solvent used. This High Oven
Temperature (HOT) device must be attached below the on-column injector and
configured in CONFIG menu.
As with the standard on-column injector, you can manually inject samples into the
HOT OC injector with or without an automatic valve actuator. Refer to Optional
Devices in Chapter 7 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual for more
information about the automatic actuator. Figure 2.2-8 shows the HOT OC injector.
1. Cold On-Column Injector
4. Cooling Fluid Inlet
2. HOT Device
5. Solenoid Valve
3. Capillary Column
6. Thermocouple
Figure 2.2-8. HOT Cold On-Column Injector
Optional Devices
In addition to the automatic actuator, the OCI with the HOT device can be modified
with an auxiliary purge line or solvent vapor exit valve.
Auxiliary Purge Line
The optional auxiliary purge line allows the elimination of excess of solvent that could
accumulate due to incorrect injection conditions. It purges the excess solvent to keep it
from entering other parts of the GC system.
50
Service Manual
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Solvent Vapor Exit Valve
Large volume injection with the HOT OC technique requires an optional Solvent
Vapor Exit (SVE) valve. This valve allows the venting of the solvent vapors formed
during the sample injection. The SVE valve consists of a specially designed,
electronically activated, heated three-way valve.
The valve inlet is connected to a tee-shaped piece that links the desolvation precolumn to the analytical column. The solvent vapors are vented through the main
outlet which is connected to a solvent reservoir. The SVE valve has a high flow
restrictor. This restrictor, a fine capillary tube, is placed in a special support heated by
the valve. This configuration ensures a very small purge rate (around 0.01 mL/min)
when the SVE valve is closed. This prevents back-diffusion of solvent vapors into the
analytical system.
Service Manual
51
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Menu
HOT Cold On-Column Injector Menu
The INLET (HOT OC) menu contains the parameters for the HOT OC injector when
one has been configured on the GC.
Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu shown in Table 2.2-6.
NOTE
The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu,
that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu and vice versa.
Table 2.2-6. Inlet Menu for On-Column Injectors With the HOT Device
Menu
Range
HOT OC Temp
25 C–initial
oven temp
This parameter defines the injector temperature.
HOT OC duration
0.00–999.99 min,
This parameter defines the duration of the
secondary cooling. When programmed, the
secondary cooling valve is opened during Prep
Run. If set to zero, the valve remains in the
default condition.
Pressure
On/Off,
2–250 kPa or
3–700 kPa1
This line shows the carrier gas inlet pressure.
Press ON to display the actual and setpoint
values. Press OFF or 0 to display the actual value
turn off the inlet pressure, thereby turning off the
flow.
Const Aux Purge?2
Yes/No
Press YES to enable a constant auxiliary purge to
continuously flush the septum with a fixed purge
flow.

Stop purge for2
This line only appears when Const Aux
Purge? is set to No. Set the time the purge flow
should be interrupted.
SVE temp3
On/Off,
0–250 C
(Only for large volume injections) This
parameter defines the solvent vapor exit valve
temperature.
SVE duration3
0.00–999.99 min,
(Only for large volume injections) This
parameter defines the duration of the solvent
vapor exit event. When the duration is set to
zero, the SVE valve remains in the default
condition.
1.
2.
3.
52
Comments
Title bar.
RIGHT INLET (HOT OC)

0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar.
This menu item appears only if the auxiliary purge option is installed and configured.
This menu item appears only if the Solvent vapor exit valve option is installed and configured (for large volume
injections).
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview
Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview
The Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI) is a special version of the standard
on-column injector. It allows the automatic introduction of large volume liquid
samples with the AS 2000 autosampler. The autosampler injects the samples directly
into a fused silica capillary column system as shown in Figure 2.2-9.
1. TRACE GC 2000
5. Analytical Column
2. On-Column Injector
6. Detector
3. Desolvation Pre-Column
7. AS 2000 Autosampler
4. Tee connection
8. SVE Solvent Vapor Exit
Figure 2.2-9. TRACE GC 2000 Configuration for Large Volume On-Column Injection
This injector is equipped with a Solvent Vapor Exit (SVE) valve to allow venting of
the solvent vapor formed during the sample injection.
The SVE valve is an electronically activated, heated three-way valve. The valve inlet
is connected to a tee piece linking the desolvation pre-column to the analytical
column.
The solvent vapors vent through the main outlet, which is connected to a vapor
condenser receptacle provided with a filter to the atmosphere. The outlet is connected
with a high flow restrictor. The restrictor is placed in a special support heated by the
valve. This configuration ensures a very small purge rate (around 0.01 mL/min) when
the SVE is closed. This prevents the back diffusion of solvent inside the system.
Service Manual
53
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview
Auxiliary Purge Line
The optional auxiliary purge line allows the elimination of excess solvent that could
accumulate due to incorrect injection conditions. It purges the excess solvent to keep it
from entering other parts of the GC system.
54
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Large Volume On-Column Injector Menu
Large Volume On-Column Injector Menu
The INLET (LVOCI) menu contains the parameters for large volume on-column
injectors if the GC has been configured for an LVOCI.
Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu, depending on the injector
position.
Table 2.2-7. Inlet Menu for Large Volume On-Column Injectors
Menu
Range
Comments
Title bar.
RIGHT INLET (LVOCI)
Pressure
On/Off,
2–250 kPa or
3–700 kPa1
This line shows the carrier gas inlet pressure. Press
ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press
OFF or 0 to display the actual value and to turn off
the inlet flow.
Sec. Cool Time
0–999.99 min,
This line shows the secondary cooling time. This
parameter controls the duration of the secondary
cooling event. If set to , the solenoid valve remains
in default condition. The valve opens at the
beginning of the standby mode when programmed.
SVE temp2
On/Off,
0–250 C
This line only appears when the optional solvent
vapor valve is installed in the system. This parameter
defines the solvent vapor exit valve temperature.
SVE duration3
0–999.99 min,
This parameter defines the duration of the solvent
vapor exit event. When the duration is set to zero, the
SVE valve remains in the default condition.
Const. Aux Purge?3
Yes/No
Press YES to enable a constant auxiliary purge to
continuously flush the injector with a fixed purge
flow.
Stop purge for3
1.
2.
3.


This line only appears when Const Aux Purge? is
set to No. Set the time the purge flow should be
interrupted.
0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar.
This menu item appears only if the Solvent vapor exit valve option is installed and configured.
This menu item appears only if the auxiliary purge option is installed and configured.
Service Manual
55
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Packed Column Injector Overview
Packed Column Injector Overview
The Packed (PKD) column injector, shown in Figure 2.2-10, is used for injections
with the sample vaporizing directly in the column or in a liner. The PKD standard
injector accepts metal or glass packed columns. The injector temperature may range
from ambient to 400 °C. Injector temperature is regulated by a temperature controller
in the GC CPU board and monitored by a platinum wire sensor.
1. Septum Cap
2. Septum
3. Insert for .04-mm OD Column
4. Column Ferrule
5. Column Retaining Nut
6. Column
A. Carrier In
Figure 2.2-10. Packed Column Injector
Septa
You should use a high-temperature septum with a long life expectancy, good
resistance to deformation, and a low bleed level, even with high temperatures. Use
high-temperature septa for both manual and automatic injections.
56
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Packed Column Injector Overview
Liners and Adapters
You can install different glass liners depending on the type of column used.
Table 2.2-8 shows the liner options currently available. To install an Imperial-size
packed column, you need a liner equipped with a metric/imperial adapter.
Table 2.2-8. Liners and Adapters for Packed Column Injectors
Liner/Adapter
Type of Column
Glass Liner 4-mm OD
Glass Packed Column 6-mm OD (4-mm ID)
Glass Liner 4-mm OD
Metal Packed Column 4-mm OD (2-mm ID)
Metal Packed Column 6-mm OD (4-mm ID)
Service Manual
Metric-Imperial Adapter
1/8-in. Metal Packed Column
Metric-Imperial Adapter
1/4-in. Metal Packed Column
57
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Packed Column Injector Menu
Packed Column Injector Menu
The INLET (PKD) menu contains the parameters for packed columns if the GC has
been configured for a PKD injector.
Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu, depending on the injector
position.
NOTE
The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu,
that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu, and vice-versa.
Table 2.2-9. Inlet Menu for Packed Column Injectors
Menu
Range
Comments
Title bar.
XXXX INLET (PKD)
Temp
On/Off,
50–450 C
This line shows the base injector temperature. Press ON
to enable the heater and display the actual and setpoint
values. Press OFF to disable the heater and to display the
actual value.
Pressure
On/Off,
This line shows the carrier gas inlet pressure. Press ON to
display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or zero
to display the actual value and to turn off the inlet flow.
1
3–700 kPa
1.
0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar.
NOTE
When you press either COLUMN EVAL or LEAK CHECK while the INLET menu in
S/SL mode is displayed, the GC immediately performs the selected function if the instrument
is in the Standby status.
58
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Purged Packed Column Injector Overview
Purged Packed Column Injector Overview
The Purged Packed (PPKD) column injector is a packed column injector with a
septum purge. The PPKD standard injector accepts wide-bore capillary columns. The
sample vaporizes in a liner and enters the wide-bore capillary column. The injector
temperature is controllable from 50 °C to 450 °C. Figure 2.2-11 shows the PPKD
injector.
1. Septum Cap
2. Septum
3. Liner
4. Liner Seal
5. Adapter for Wide-Bore Columns
6. Column Ferrule
7. Column Fixing Nut
8. Column
A. Carrier Input
C. Septum Purge
Figure 2.2-11. Purged Packed Column Injector
Service Manual
59
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Purged Packed Column Injector Overview
Septa
You should use high temperature septa with a longer life expectancy, good resistance
to deformation, and a low bleed level, even with high temperatures. Use
high-temperature septa for both manual and automatic injections.
Liners
Two different glass liners can be used for wide-bore capillary columns:
60
•
2-mm ID
•
4-mm ID
Service Manual
Chapter 2.2
Injectors
Purged Packed Column Injector Menu
Purged Packed Column Injector Menu
The INLET (PPKD) menu contains the parameters for the purged packed injector if
the GC has been configured for a PPKD.
Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu, depending on the injector
position.
NOTE
The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu,
that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu, and vice versa.
Table 2.2-10. Inlet Menu for Purged Packed Column Injectors
Menu
Range
Comments
Title bar.
XXXX INLET (PKD)
Temp
On/Off,
50–450=C
This line shows the base injector temperature. Press ON
to enable the heater and display the actual and setpoint
values. Press OFF to disable the heater and display the
actual value.
Pressure
On/Off,
This line shows the carrier gas inlet pressure. Press ON
to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or
zero to turn off the inlet flow.
1
3–700 kPa
Total Flow
Not editable
This line shows the total gas flow consumption. The
total gas flow consists of the sum of the column flow
and septum purge flow rates.
Surge pressure
On/Off,
3–700 kPa1
This line indicates surge pressure.
Surge duration
0–99.99 s
This line displays the duration of surge pressure after
run start.
Const sept purge?
Yes/No
Press YES to activate a constant septum purge to
continuously flush the injector with a purge flow of
5 mL/min for helium and nitrogen or 10 mL/min for
hydrogen.
Stop purge for
0–99.99 min,
This line appears only when Constant septum
purge is set to No.
1.

0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar.
Service Manual
61
Detectors
This chapter describes the detectors available for use with the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Flame Ionization Detector Overview.......................................................................... 64
FID Menu.................................................................................................................... 67
Electron Capture Detector Overview.......................................................................... 69
ECD Menu .................................................................................................................. 74
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview ................................................................. 75
NPD Menu .................................................................................................................. 77
Service Manual
63
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Flame Ionization Detector Overview
Flame Ionization Detector Overview
In the FID, the effluent from the column is mixed with hydrogen and burned in a
stream of air as it emerges from the jet. The jet acts as polarizing electrode while the
metal collar surrounding the flame forms the collecting electrode.
A polarizing voltage is applied across the electrodes from the electrometer unit to
accelerate and collect the ions that are generated during the combustion process of
organic compounds. The resulting ionization current is sensed by an electrometer
amplifier and converted to a suitable output signal.
Figure 2.3-1. Flame Ionization Detector
Jet
The flame jet, mounted on the detector base body for capillary, wide-bore, or packed
columns is suitable for operating temperatures up to 450 °C. It has ceramic insulation.
Selectivity
The FID responds to almost all organic compounds containing a carbon-hydrogen
bond. The detector does not respond, or responds minimally, to a number of
compounds such as permanent gases, oxides of nitrogen, sulfur compounds, ammonia
and water.
Temperature
The FID is heated from the detector base body. It’s exact temperature is not critical. It
only has to be sufficiently high to prevent condensation of the water vapor formed as a
result of the hydrogen combustion of the flame. It cannot be used with a detector base
body temperature of less than 150 °C. The TRACE GC 2000 will not allow flame
ignition to proceed at temperatures less than 150 °C. The base body temperature is
normally set to the upper temperature limit of the column in use.
64
Service Manual
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Flame Ionization Detector Overview
Carrier and Detector Gases
The stability and analytical performance of the Flame Ionization Detector are greatly
affected by the flow of the various gases through the detector.
The gases normally used with FID are shown in Table 2.3-1.
Table 2.3-1. FID Carrier Gases.
Carrier Gas
Capillary Columns
Packed Column
Helium
X
X
Nitrogen
X
X
Hydrogen
X
Argon
X
The carrier gas flow range depends on the type of the gas used and on the type and
diameter of the capillary or packed column installed.
The fuel and make-up gases used for the FID are:
NOTE
•
Fuel Gas:
Hydrogen or Air
•
Make-up Gas: Nitrogen (recommended) or Helium
Make-up gas is not required when a packed column is used.
The recommended ranges of detector gas flow rates tolerated by the FID are:
NOTE
•
Hydrogen:
30–50 mL/min.
•
Air:
300–600 mL/min.
•
Make-up gas: 10–60 mL/min.
Usually the air flow is about 10 times the hydrogen flow to keep the flame lit.
To gain optimum performance from the FID, you should experiment with the
hydrogen flow rate, keeping the carrier and air flows constant, to obtain the maximum
signal intensity for the components of interest.
Table 2.3-2 shows typical FID operating conditions.
For high-sensitivity applications, it is essential to exclude all traces of organic
contamination from the chromatographic system and/or detector gas lines. Such
contamination may create ghost peaks in the chromatogram or, more often, an
unstable baseline.
Table 2.3-2. Typical Operating Conditions
Parameter
Capillary Columns
Packed Column
200 °C
200 °C
Carrier
2 mL/min
40 mL/min
Hydrogen
35 mL/min
40 mL/min
Oven Temperature
Service Manual
65
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Flame Ionization Detector Overview
Table 2.3-2. Typical Operating Conditions (Continued)
Parameter
66
Capillary Columns
Packed Column
Air
350 mL/min
500 mL/min
Make-up gas (Nitrogen)
50 mL/min
Not used
Service Manual
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
FID Menu
FID Menu
The DETECTOR (FID) menu contains the detector control parameters if the GC has
been configured for an FID. Press LEFT DETECT or RIGHT DETECT to open the menu
shown in Table 2.3-3.
Table 2.3-3. FID Menu
Menu
Range
Comments
Title bar.
RIGHT DET (FID)
Flame
On/Off
This indicates the flame status: On, Off, Igniting, or Out.
Hydrogen and air flow rates are required to light the flame.
Press ON to turn on the hydrogen and air flows. This
happens only if the Base temp is ∫ 150°C. If not, an error
messages is displayed. The IGNITION message is
displayed during the flame ignition sequence. The Out
message is displayed when the flame is inadvertently
extinguished. The Error LED will blink, and the hydrogen
and air supplies will automatically turn off. Refer to Flame
Out Conditions for more information. Press OFF to turn off
the hydrogen and air flows.
Base temp
On/Off,
50–450 °C
This indicates the detector base body temperature. Press ON
to enable the heater and display the actual and setpoint
values. Press OFF to disable the heater and display the actual
value.
Signal pA
Not editable
This parameter shows the collector current in picoamperes
(standing current level). The value displayed is also used to
indicate the flame status. If the value is very low (such as
0.3 pA) the flame is off. When the value displayed is greater
than Ignition threshold, the flame is on.
Ignition thresh 0.0–9.9 pA
Flameout retry
Service Manual
On/Off
The FID produces a small signal current when lit. This
parameter defines the flame ON condition. The TRACE GC
2000 uses this value to determine flame status (on or off)
and control automatic re-ignition. If Flameout retry is
On, the flame will re-ignite if the signal drops below this
value.
This indicates re-ignition status. Press ON to program flame
re-ignition is attempted. Refer to Flame Out Conditions for
more information.
67
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
FID Menu
Table 2.3-3. FID Menu (Continued)
Menu
H2
1
Air1
Range
Comments
On/Off,
0–200 mL/min
for H2,
These indicate the hydrogen and air flow supplied to the
detector. Press ON to turn on the gas flows and to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to turn off the
flows and to display the actual value. These flows can be
turned on independently when the FID is off, but they are
cut off when the FID is turned off, or when the FID fails the
ignition sequence.
On/Off,
0–600 mL/min
for Air
When you have a non-DGFC module, the actual values are
not displayed, and you can only turn the flows on and off.
Mkup1 (XX)
On/Off,
This indicates the make-up gas used with the FID. The type
0–100 mL/min of gas is displayed in parentheses (for example, N2). Press
ON to turn on the make-up gas flow and to display the actual
and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to turn off the flow and
to display the actual value. The flow turns off during the
flame ignition sequence, then it turns back on before the
ignition threshold test. The flow remains turned on when the
FID is turned off.
When you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value is not
displayed and the setpoint allows only On and Off
conditions.
1.
If you have a non-DGFC module, the detector gases H2, air, and make-up, must be measured and adjusted manually
from a pressure regulator located in the pneumatics. The range with the non-DGFC module is On/Off.
Flame Out Conditions
When the flame is accidentally extinguished, either permanently because of exhausted
fuel gas supplies, or temporarily, due to the elution of water, the Flame Out message
is displayed in the menu, and a message is recorded in the Run Log.
If the Retry function is turned On, the system will attempt to re-ignite the flame up to
three times.
68
Service Manual
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Electron Capture Detector Overview
Electron Capture Detector Overview
The ECD has a low-volume ionization chamber and increased contamination
resistance which ensure high sensitivity and reliability. The detector consists mainly
of a stainless steel cylinder housing a 63Ni radioactive source.
The source acts as cathode in the ionization cell while another cylindrical coaxial
electrode acts as an anode (collecting electrode). High temperature resistant insulating
material ensures effective insulation between the two electrodes and the detector body
The detector is heated by a low-voltage resistor controlled by an electronic
thermoregulator.
Figure 2.3-2. Electron Capture Detector
WARNING! The Electron Capture Detector (ECD) contains a 63Ni beta-emitting radioactive source of
370 MBq (10 mCi).
The 63Ni radioisotope, electrically deposited as metal on a nickel foil, is in a cylindrical
source holder made of 6-mm stainless steel. This holder is fixed to the detector body,
also made of stainless steel, to protect it and make it inaccessible from the outside.
The radioisotope is not released by its support at temperatures lower than 450 °C.
This temperature can never be reached by the detector, whose maximum operating
temperature is 400 °C and is protected by a safety device (thermo-resistor regulator
complying with standard DIN 43760) that does not allow overheating to occur.
The normal operation of the detector does not involve any dispersion of solid or
gaseous radioactive material, and therefore the risk of direct or secondary radiation
(Bremsstrahlung) coming from the detector is practically nil.
Service Manual
69
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Electron Capture Detector Overview
For no reason should the detector be opened or handled by the operator. Any
maintenance or service operations involving even partial disassembling of the
instrument must be performed ONLY by qualified personnel at the laboratory expressly
authorized by ThermoQuest and specifically licensed to handle radioactive material.
Wipe Test
The ECD, before leaving the factory, is tested for surface contamination by means of a
wipe test (leak test) method. Each detector is provided with a certificate reporting the
results of the values found and the procedure followed.
NOTE
The users of this detector in the United States are required to perform a wipe test on their ECD
at intervals not to exceed 3 years (36 months) following the reported procedure. For other
countries, please refer to the appropriate agency for equivalent requirements.
Carrier and Detector Gases
In the ECD cell, the 63Ni sources releases ϒ particles that collide with the molecules at
an easily ionizable carrier gas (or make-up gas) to produce low energy electrons.
Nitrogen or argon/5–10% methane are the gases generally used.
Argon/methane is recommended when a higher linear range is required or when
contaminants in the carrier gas make a high mobility of electrons necessary to restore
correct operating values. Both gases should be of high purity and must not contain
more than 1–2 ppm of oxygen or water vapor, since their presence would reduce the
concentration of free electrons and, therefore, the probability of capturing them.
The gases normally used with ECD are shown in Table 2.3-4.
Table 2.3-4. ECD Carrier Gases.
Carrier Gas
Capillary Columns
Helium
X
Nitrogen
X
Hydrogen
X
Argon
Packed Column
X
X
When using helium or hydrogen as a carrier gas with capillary or wide-bore columns,
the detector should be fed with nitrogen or argon/methane through the make-up gas
line.
WARNING! Hydrogen is a potentially dangerous gas. Refer to Using Hydrogen on page xxiv for
safety information.
70
Service Manual
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Electron Capture Detector Overview
Operating Principle
The ECD operates according to the principle of gas phase absorption by electron
capturing molecules.
The primary electrons emitted by the radioactive source (beta emission) collide with
the molecules of carrier or make-up gas (such as nitrogen) and give rise to an
ionization process with the formation of secondary electrons and positive ions
(Equation 2.3-1).
ϒ * + N2
ϒ + N2+ + e–
2.3-1
By the application of a weak electrical field between the electrodes, the electrons are
rapidly collected at the anode generating a small current (standing current), while the
possibility for heavy positive ions to recombine with electrons is negligible.
When an electron capturing substance passes through the detector cell, the current is
reduced because of the absorption of electrons by this substance according to one of
the following reactions (Equations 2.3-2 and 2.3-3).
e– + AB
AB– + h↑
2.3-2
e– + AB
A· + B–
2.3-3
In Equation 2.3-2, an energized negative molecular ion forms, while in
Equation 2.3-3, after the electron capture, the molecule dissociates (dissociative
capture) generating a free radical A· and a negative ion B–.
The energy freed during the capture in Equation 2.3-2 is the measure of the electron
affinity of the molecule.
The succession of phenomena determining the detector response ends by the
neutralization of the negative ions formed by capture. The detector response is
therefore related to the loss of electrons that occurs by capture in the system in
equilibrium.
The decrease in the electron concentration is converted into an electric signal
proportional to the concentration of solute present.
Molecular Structure and Detector Response
The sensitivity and selectivity of the ECD response are determined by the electron
affinity of the substances entering the detection cell and are affected by the operating
parameters and analytical conditions.
In the case of organic compounds, the electron affinity mainly depends on the
presence of electrophores in the molecular structure, such as halogens, nitro groups,
organometals or diketons.
For halogens the ECD response decreases in the following order:
I > Br > Cl > F
Service Manual
71
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Electron Capture Detector Overview
The response factor, and therefore selectivity, can vary between 1 and 106 as a
function of the degree of the electron affinity of molecules, as shown in
Table 2.3-5. These values are also affected by temperature that enhances the detector
response for those compounds capturing electrons dissociatively.
Considering the differences in response, you must calibrate the detector before
performing quantitative determinations. To calibrate the detector, you inject standard
mixtures under the same operating conditions used for the samples to be tested. The
detector sensitivity is also affected by carrier and make-up gas flow rates, since the
detector response is related to the solute concentration of the gaseous mixture.
Table 2.3-5. Relative Response to Some Organic Compounds
Substance
Ethane
Benzene
Butanol
Acetone
Chlorobutane
Chlorobenzene
1,2 Dichloroethane
Relative Sensitivity
1
1–102
Anthracene
Keto-steroids
Tetraethyl lead
Benzyl chloride
Chloroform
Nitrobenzene
102–104
Carbon disulphide
Cinnamaldehyde
Carbon tetrachloride
Dinitrophenol
104–105
Diethyl fumarate
Dinotrobenzene
Hexachlorobenzene
Hexachlorocyclohexane
105–106
Constant Current Operating Mode
The detector control module operates in a constant current pulse-modulated mode.
During pulse application, electrons migrate to the anode, and therefore their
concentration in the cell rapidly drops to zero.
During the interval between pulses, electrons gradually return to their original
concentration and to thermal equilibrium in which the capturing process is favorable.
In the relatively long interval between two short pulses, all electrons not consumed by
capture are collected at the anode that measures the electron flow (cell current) present
at that moment.
72
Service Manual
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Electron Capture Detector Overview
In Equation 2.3-4, the average cell current I is proportional to the concentration of
electrons [e–] collected at each pulse, and to the frequency f of the applied pulses:
I = K[e–]f
2.3-4
In constant current operating mode, the cell current is forced to be constant, at a preset
reference value, through an electric feedback loop circuit that compares the cell
current to the reference current at any time.
When an electron capturing compound enters the detector cell, the electron
concentration [e–] decreases and, according to Equation 2.3-4, the pulse frequency,
required to collect the remaining free electrons, rises to maintain a constant cell
current.
The difference in the frequency when an electron capturing compound enters the cell
and the base frequency, when no sample is present, is converted into an electric signal
which is proportional to the concentration of the compound in the detector.
Base Frequency
Base frequency is an important parameter in evaluating the operating status of the
ECD system.
For a constant concentration of thermal electrons inside the detector cell, the base
frequency is a function of the reference current, pulse amplitude and pulse width
selected. The frequency increases when the reference current is increased, or when the
pulse duration or pulse amplitude are reduced.
For a given reference current, pulse duration, and amplitude, the base frequency
remains constant when only carrier gas and make-up gas flow through the cell. The
frequency generally increases, under the same operating conditions, because of
decreased electron population inside the cell or reduced electron collecting efficiency.
In the latter case, the collecting efficiency can be restored by cleaning or replacing the
collecting electrode (anode).
If the electron concentration has decreased due to contaminants entering the detector
cell, you must remove the source of contamination.
With a high base frequency, probability of electron capture tends to decrease, and
therefore the signal to noise ratio generally decreases.
You must select the appropriate reference current values to maintain the base
frequency at acceptable levels in the DETECTOR (ECD) menu.
Service Manual
73
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
ECD Menu
ECD Menu
The DETECTOR (ECD) menu contains the detector control parameters if the GC has
been configured for an ECD. Press LEFT DETECT or RIGHT DETECT to open the menu
shown in Table 2.3-6.
Table 2.3-6. ECD Menu
Menu
Range
Title bar.
RIGHT DET (ECD)
Base temp
On/Off,
30–400 °C1
This indicates the detector base body temperature. Press ON
to enable the heater and to display the actual and setpoint
values. Press OFF to disable the heater and to display the
actual value.
ECD temp
On/Off,
20–400 °C
This indicates the detector temperature. Press ON to turn on
the heater and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press
OFF to turn off the heater and to display the actual value.
Ref current nA
0.0–3.0 nA
in steps of
0.1 nA
This indicates the cell reference current expressed in
nanoamperes.
Freq kHz
0–999.99 kHz
This indicates the actual value of the pulse frequency rate.
Refer to Base Frequency on page 73 for more information.
Pulse amp V
5–50 V in a
continuous
mode
This indicates the pulse amplitude expressed in volts.
Pulse width us
0.1, 0.5, or
1.0 ℘s
This indicates the pulse width expressed in microseconds.
Press ENTER to open the submenu. An asterisk appears on
the left of the pulse width selected.
Mkup2 (XX)
On/Off,
This indicates the make-up gas used with ECD. The type of
0–100 mL/min the gas is displayed in parentheses (for example, N2). Press
ON to turn on the flow and display the actual and setpoint
values. Press OFF the turn the flow off and display the actual
value.
1.
2.
74
Comments
Up to 500 °C if the GC is configured for high temperature operation.
If you have a non-DGFC module, the make-up gas must be measured and adjusted manually from a pressure regulator
located in the pneumatics. The menu only displays the flow mode On/Off.
Service Manual
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview
The NPD provides selective detection of nitrogen or phosphorous organic compounds.
A ceramic matrix thermionic source, positioned above the jet, is electrically heated in
a dilute hydrogen/air environment to create a hot, chemically reactive gas layer around
the source.
When compounds containing nitrogen or phosphorus atoms impact this hot source,
electronegative decomposition products are formed and ionized by extraction of
electrons from the thermionic source. The negative ions are then collected and
detected through the electrometric amplifier.
A thermionic source with a different surface coating is also available. This source
provides high specificity and sensitivity to certain electronegative molecules when
operating in an inert nitrogen gas environment. This is the Enhanced Nitrogen
Selectivity (ENS) operating mode.
The jet, mounted on the detector base body is suitable for operating temperature up to
450 °C. Figure 2.3-3 shows the NPD.
Figure 2.3-3. Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector
Thermionic Source Lifetime
Source lifetime can vary depending on the individual source, the operating
temperature, and the analytical conditions. The source heating current needs to be just
high enough to produce an active layer around the source itself.
When a readjustment of the source heating current is necessary, the magnitude of the
detector standing current or the response to a standard sample can serve as a guide to
the correct adjustment.
Service Manual
75
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview
To prolong the source lifetime, we recommend you turn off the heating current and the
hydrogen flow when the detector is not being used for a prolonged period of time (for
example, overnight or on weekends), or when the carrier gas flow is interrupted.
Bleed from silicone-based stationary phases or residual silanizing reagents (from
derivatization procedures) may contaminate the source surface with silicone dioxide
and reduce the operative lifetime. Also the extended use of halogenated solvents can
adversely affect the source lifetime by the formation of reaction by-products on the
source coating.
Carrier and Detector Gases
The gases normally used with the NPD are shown in Table 2.3-7.
Table 2.3-7. NPD Carrier Gases
Carrier Gas
Capillary Columns
Packed Column
Helium
X
X
Nitrogen
X
X
Hydrogen
X (only with DPFC)
WARNING! Hydrogen is a potentially dangerous gas. Refer to Using Hydrogen on page xxiv for
safety information.
The carrier gas flow range depends on the type of the gas used and on the type and
diameter of the capillary or packed column installed.
The fuel and make-up gases for the NPD are:
•
Fuel Gas:
Hydrogen, Air
•
Make-up Gas: Nitrogen, Helium
Nitrogen is preferred over helium because it has a much lower thermal conductivity,
and a lower heating current is required for the source.
NOTE
When a packed column is used, a make-up gas is not necessary.
The detector gas flow rates generally used are:
76
•
Hydrogen: 2–4 mL/min
•
Air:
•
Make-up: 10–20 mL/min
40–80 mL/min
Service Manual
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
NPD Menu
NPD Menu
The DETECTOR (NPD) menu contains the NPD control parameters.
Press LEFT DETECT or RIGHT DETECT to open the DET (NPD) menu. The parameters
are explained in Table 2.3-8.
Table 2.3-8. NPD Menu
Menu
Range
Comments
Title bar.
RIGHT DET
(NPD)
Source curr. A
On/Off, 1.000–3.500 A
in steps of 0.01 A
This is the current applied to heat the thermionic
source. It is expressed in amperes. Press ON to
enable the current and to display the actual and
setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the current and
to display the actual value.
Base temp
On/Off,
30–450 °C
This the detector base body temperature. Press ON to
enable the heater and to display the actual and
setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and
to display the actual value.
Signal pA
Not editable
This parameter shows the collector current in
picoamperes (standing current level).
Target level
This is the target level, expressed in pA, to be used
0.0–99.9
as a reference value.
(for input range of 0),
0–999
(for input range of 1–3)
Auto adjust
Yes/No,
0–999 pA
This line indicates the automatic adjustment of the
Signal pA to reach the given Target level.
Press YES to enable auto adjust. The autoadjust
range is limited to 0 to 999 pA.
Polarizer V
1.0–99.0 in steps
of 0.1 V
This indicates the source polarizing voltage in volts.
H2
On/Off,
0–10.0 mL/min in
steps of 0.1 mL/min
This indicates the hydrogen flow supplied to the
detector. Press ON to enable the gas flow and to
display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to
disable the flow and to display the actual value.
When you have a non-DPFC module, the actual
values are not displayed and you can select only On
or Off.
H2 delay time
On/Off,
0.00–999.9 min
This parameter may be set to interrupt the hydrogen
flow during the solvent elution to protect the source.
After this time, the hydrogen flow is automatically
restored. Press ON to enable the delay and to display
the actual and setpoint values.
Service Manual
77
Chapter 2.3
Detectors
NPD Menu
Table 2.3-8. NPD Menu (Continued)
Menu
Comments
Air
On/Off,
0–600 mL/min
This indicates the air flow supplied to the detector.
Press ON to enable the gas flow and to display the
actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the
flow and to display the actual value. When you have
a non-DPFC module, the actual values are not
displayed and you can select only On or Off.
Mkup (N2)1
On/Off,
0–100 mL/min
This indicates the make-up gas used with NPD. The
type of the gas is displayed in parentheses. Press ON
to enable the gas flow and to display the actual and
setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to disable the flow
and to display the actual value. The flow cuts off
during the source ignition sequence. It turns back on
before the ignition threshold test. The flow remains
on when the NPD is off. When you have a
non-DGFC module, the actual values are not
displayed and you can select only On or Off.
1.
78
Range
If you have non-DGFC module, the detector gases (H2, air, and make-up) must be measured and adjusted manually from
a pressure regulator located in the pneumatics. The menu only displays the flow mode and On/Off.
Service Manual
SECTION
III
Functional Tests
This section provides information about alarm, diagnostic, and error
messages of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 3.1, Info Messages, contains information to help identify and
troubleshoot info messages on the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 3.2, Error Messages, contains information to help identify and
troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 3.3, Diagnostic Messages, contains information to help identify
and troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the
TRACE GC 2000.
Info Messages
This chapter contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info messages on
the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Info Messages ............................................................................................................. 82
Service Manual
81
Chapter 3.1
Info Messages
Info Messages
Info Messages
Table 3.1-1 lists the TRACE GC 2000 info messages, which act as an internal help
system. Each info message is accessed by pressing the INFO key. The info message
displayed corresponds to the position of the cursor on a specific line of the display
panel.
NOTE
Messages with AS denote autosampler.
Table 3.1-1. Info Messages
Info Message
Info Message
Info Message
GCInfo
GC UNIT INFO
Displays information
unique to this unit
SN #runs mfg. date
OKFailInfo
DIAGNOSTIC INFO
Displays powersupply
Status as OK or
Failed.
ChanFailInfo
DIAGNOSTIC INFO
Temp Channel Status
OK OPEN SHORTED
NOT USED etc.
MethNoInfo
METHOD NUMBER INFO
Enter the saved
method number to be
loaded (1 to 10).
SpecCycInfo
SPECIFIC CYCLE INFO
Press ENTER to see
how to set the
specific cycle.
SlctDayInfo
SELECT DAY INFO
Pick the day of the
week that the event
should occur on.
ClkEvValveInfo
VALVE EVENT INFO
Press ENTER to see
how to set up a
valve event.
DiagInfo
DIAGNOSTIC INFO
Enter an integer
value for debugging
the heater controls.
DetTypeInfo
DETECTOR TYPE INFO
Pick the detector
type and location
(a=lft b=ctr c=rght)
MakeupGasInfo
MAKEUP GAS INFO
Pick the makeup gas
desired from the
list of choices.
DetectorInfo
DETECTOR INFO
Enter the submenu to
be able to select
the desired detector
ListInfo
LIST INFO
Choose an item from
the list. Current
pick has a * by it.
DblInletInfo
DblPro INLET INFO
Choose Yes if this
GC has double SSL
inlets for DblPro.
DateTimeInfo
DATE & TIME INFO
Displays the current
date and time as set
in CONFIG.
ConfigTimeInfo
ENTER TIME INFO
Enter the time of
day as hhmm with all
4 numbers required.
ConfigDateInfo
ENTER DATE INFO
Enter the date as
mmddyy with all six
digits required.
TEVeditInfo
TIMED EVENT INFO
Choose an item from
the list to be the
event to occur.
ExtEVeditInfo
EXTERNAL EVENT INFO
Press ENTER to setup
the external timed
event to occur.
TEVInfo
TIMED EVENT INFO
Shows a timed event.
Press CLEAR to be
able to delete it.
StoreMethodInfo
STORE METHOD INFO
Indicate the entry
(1-10) to store the
current method in.
LoadMethodInfo
LOAD METHOD INFO
Indicate the entry
(1-10 or default) to
load the method from
82
Service Manual
Chapter 3.1
Info Messages
Info Messages
Table 3.1-1. Info Messages (Continued)
Info Message
Info Message
Info Message
LSMethodInfo
METHOD LD/STR INFO
Indicate the method
to be loaded from or
to be stored into.
DoLSMethodInfo
LOAD/STORE INFO
Indicate whether to
Load from or Store
to the chosen method
SaveDefaultInfo
SAVE AS DEFAULT INFO
Will save this mthd
as the default and
saves into EEPROM.
StoreSeqInfo
STORE SEQUENCE INFO
Indicate the entry
(1-5) to store the
current sequence in.
LoadSeqInfo
LOAD SEQUENCE INFO
Indicate the entry
(1-5) to load the
sequence from.
LeftInlInfo
LEFT INLET INFO
Enter inlet submenu
to choose the inlet
desired on the left.
RightInlInfo
RIGHT INLET INFO
Enter inlet submenu
to choose the inlet
desired on the right
ValveInfo
SAMPLE/SWITCH VALVE
Use ON/OFF in order
to OPEN/CLOSE the
valve.
MultiValveInfo
MULTIPOSITION VALVE
Enter the valve
position# or ON/OFF
to go up/down by one
InletValveInfo
INLET VALVE INFO
Use ON/OFF in order
to OPEN/CLOSE the
valve.
EPCTypeInfo
MODULE INFO
Gives the type of
gas control module
in use for channel.
EPCPresInfo
AMBIENT PRESS INFO
Displays ambient
pressure sensed by
the DPFC controller.
ASInjectInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Shows how many of
the injections have
been done.
ASPauseInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Press ENTER to pause
the sequence at the
end of the run.
ASPriVialInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Shows which vial is
being used for this
priority run.
ASResumeInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Press ENTER to start
the sequence back up
from where it was.
ASRunPriInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Press ENTER to start
a priority sequence
as the next run.
ASStartInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Press ENTER to start
a regular sequence.
ASStopInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Press ENTER to stop
the sequence after
the current run.
ASSubseqInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Shows which vial is
being used for which
subsequence now.
ASRegStatusInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Indicates that a
sequence is active.
ASWaitStatusInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Indicates that an
active sequence is
waiting for the GC.
ASPauseStatusInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Indicates the seq is
on hold. Hit Resume
to reactivate.
ASStopStatusInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Indicates that no
sequence is active.
ASAbortStatusInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
A sequence error was
detected. Fix and
Resume to reactivate
ASNoSeqStatusInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Indicates that no
sequence is defined
so it cant be run.
ASPriStatusInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Shows the state of
the head space
autosampler
Service Manual
83
Chapter 3.1
Info Messages
Info Messages
Table 3.1-1. Info Messages (Continued)
Info Message
Info Message
Info Message
ASRepInfo
SEQ CONTROL INFO
Shows the repitition
of this sample that
is currently in use.
GenericStatusInfo
STATUS INFO
Shows the status of
the GC usually what
it expects next.
TempStatusInfo
STATUS INFO
Temp out of range.
It currently is
but is expecting
OvenTempStatusInfo
STATUS INFO
Fatal temp in heated
zone. Correct and
cycle power on/off.
ErrorStatusInfo
ERROR STATUS INFO
GC in error state.
Contact Finnigan
customer service.
RunStatusInfo
STATUS INFO
This indicates where
the system is in the
oven profile.
ISVialInfo
INT STD VIAL INFO
Enter vial# 1-90 for
int std or 100-103
(a-d) for solv SLV.
QuestionClear
You have requested
clearing the RUNLOG.
Press <YES> to clear
another key to exit.
RunlogInfo
RUN LOG INFO
Shows the deviations
during the run. Use
arrows to see all.
ShowOnlyInfo
DIAGNOSTIC INFO
Displays diagnostic
results and internal
calculated values.
InletInfo
INLET INFO
Enter the submenu to
be able to select
the desired inlet.
HeaderInfo
INFO LINE INFO
This line is for
information only
usually a comment.
SplitRatioInfo
SPLIT RATIO INFO
Displays the split
ratio = split flow/
column flow.
TotalFlowInfo
TOTAL FLOW INFO
Displays total flow=
split flow+col flow+
septum purge.
PressureInfo
PRESSURE INFO
Displays pressure
in psi kPa or Bar
as configured.
StopWatchInfo
STOPWATCH INFO
Displays flow and
time elapsed in the
stopwatch.
DetOutInfo
OUTPUT INFO
Displays detector
output from the V/F
at a 10HZ rate.
SignalpAInfo
SIGNAL pA INFO
Displays the offset
adjusted signal
value in picoamps.
RunPresInfo
PRESSURE INFO
Displays the actual
pressure during the
run.
DblProDlyInfo
DOUBLEPRO DELAY INFO
Displays injection
delay between inlets
using doublepro mode
RunTimeInfo
RUN TIME INFO
Displays a run time
in minutes to two
decimal places.
StartCompInfo
START COMP INFO
Will start the baseline compensation
process.
LoadBasicInfo
LOAD BASIC MTHD INFO
Loads a basic method
in to clear out the
current method.
ColFlowInfo
COLUMN FLOW INFO
Displays the actual
flow on the column
in cc/min.
CARInfo
ONE MOMENT
Setting Carrier
Gas Type
DETInfo
ONE MOMENT
Setting Detector
Gas Type
84
Service Manual
Error Messages
This chapter contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info, error, and
diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Error Messages............................................................................................................ 86
Service Manual
85
Chapter 3.2
Error Messages
Error Messages
Error Messages
Table 3.2-1 lists the TRACE GC 2000 error messages, a brief description, and
troubleshooting options that may appear on the display panel. Errors must be
corrected before proceeding further.
Table 3.2-1. Error Messages
Error Message
CONSTANT
Error Message
CONSTANT
Error Message
CONSTANT
OrderViolation
These entries must
be sequential. Verify adjacent values
& re-enter.
MissingInletJumper
Configuration Error
You have selected
Configure Inlet but
Hdwre shows NO inlet
MethodNum2big
When saving/loading
a Method you requested method # >10
Try with number <=10
ClockError
Error Setting/Reading Clock. Proceed
with CAUTION. Press
Any Key to Proceed.
NoDetTimeParams
XXX Detector has no
time parameters.
Any Key to Proceed.
OvenMaxViolation
New Oven Max Temp is
below a SetPoint(s).
SetPoint(s) will be
reset to new maximum
DetConfError
The DPFC module is
not compatible with
the detector cards.
LeakCheckinProcess
LEAK CHK IN PROCESS
No editing allowed
while leak check is
in process.
ColumnEvalinProcess
COL EVAL IN PROCESS
No editing allowed
while column evaluation is in process.
TempOFFError
Flame ignition can
not be done with Det
base temperature OFF
or set below 150C.
SplitRatioViolation
Error: Calculated
total flow exceeds
max of 500 cc/min.
Press any key.
SplitFlowViolation
Error: Calc'd total
flow exceeds 500 cc/
min. Splt ratio will
be reduced. Any key.
MethodNotSavedorBad
A good copy of the
requested method
does not exist. Try
another or create it
LoadMethodError
LOAD METHOD
Load method not
allowed while GC is
running.
LoadSequenceError
LOAD SEQUENCE
Load sequence not
allowed while GC is
running.
ConfigChecksum
Config saved checksum is bad. Default
is being loaded.
Edit Meth and Cfg!
MethodChecksum
Method saved checksum is bad. Default
is being loaded.
Edit Meth and Cfg!
NoHydrogenSensor
Hydrogen sensor not
available or not
configured.
Any Key to Proceed.
ConfigHasChanged
The GC Configuration
has changed since
Method saved. AnyKey
to Proceed w/Care.
MultipositionValveError
Invalid valve #
Must be 4 6 8 10
12 or 16.
TimeFormatError
Invalid Input.
Input must be 4
digits.
ClockTimeError
Invalid Input.
Must be hhmm where
hh = (0-23) and
mm = (0-59).
DateFormatError
Invalid Input.
Input must be 6
digits.
InActiveEditMode
Can not alter GC run
state while in NONACTIVE EDIT MODE.
86
Service Manual
Chapter 3.2
Error Messages
Error Messages
Table 3.2-1. Error Messages (Continued)
Error Message
Error Message
Error Message
NOInlets
ERROR:
No Inlets have been
installed.
OnlyPKDInlet
ERROR: Only Packed
Inlet(s) installed.
Col. Eval. or leak
check not allowed.
NoSampler
SAMPLER ERROR
No autosampler
installed.
EvalRColPresOFFmsg
R COLUMN EVALUATION
Column must be
pressurized for
evaluation.
EvalLColPresOFFmsg
L COLUMN EVALUATION
Column must be
pressurized for
evaluation.
FaultMsg7
Report to ThermoQuest
Ph: (512)251-1571
Fax: (512)251-1547
Fault 7. Press a key
FaultMsg8
Report to ThermoQuest
Ph: (512)251-1571
Fax: (512)251-1547
Fault 8. Press a key
DPFCPreprunError
DPFC failure during
preprun. Press any
key to resume.
DPFC_OCHOTError
HOTOC failure during
preprun. Press any
key to resume.
DPFC_GasOutError
Loss of carrier.
Oven will shutdown
In 60 seconds.
OvenShutDownError
Oven shutdown
Loss of carrier
Press any key to
Resume.
DSHasAS
Data system has the
autosampler function
locked out.
ASOffline
SAMPLER ERROR
Sequence aborted:
Sampler off-line
ASBadMethod
SAMPLER ERROR
Sequence aborted:
Method download
failure
ASNoStart
SAMPLER ERROR
Autosampler
stopped with no
remote start.
OvenTempError
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
Oven temperature
exceeded the allowed
temperature limit(s)
OverTempError
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
temperature zone(s)
exceeded the allowed
temperature limit(s)
ShortedRTDError
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
Shorted Temp sensor
Run Temperature
Diagnostics
ShortedRTDOvenError
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
Shorted Oven sensor
Run Temperature
Diagnostics
OVENError
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
OVEN is Over Heating
out of Control
Check Sensor
OVENbusted
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
OVEN Not Controlling
and Not Heating
Check Sensor
PTVError
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
PTV is Over Heating
out of Control
Check Sensor
PTVbusted
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
PTV not Controlling
and not Heating
Check Sensor
ISOError
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
Isothermal Zone is
Over Heating out of
control
ISObusted
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
Isothermal Zone is
not Controlling or
Heating
TCDError
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
TCD is Over Heating
out of Control
Check Sensor
TCDbusted
TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN
TCD not Controlling
and not Heating
Check Sensor
Service Manual
87
Chapter 3.2
Error Messages
Error Messages
Table 3.2-1. Error Messages (Continued)
Error Message
Error Message
Error Message
VARIABLE
VARIABLE
OverHardwareError
HARDWARE SHUTDOWN
temperature zone(s)
exceeded the allowed
HARDWARE limit(s)
VARIABLE
TempViolation
Maximum Temp is
To enter a larger
value you must chg
configuration!.
TempViolation
Minimum Temp is
This value will be
entered.
Violation
Mxx. Entry is
for this field.
LimitViolation
ERROR: The range for
the value is between
OffsetViolation
The present signal
can be subtracted by
up to
SplitRatioInformation
Split ratio limited
by max total flow of
500 cc/min. Split
ratio max is
88
Service Manual
Diagnostic Messages
This chapter contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info, error, and
diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Diagnostic Messages................................................................................................... 90
Service Manual
89
Chapter 3.3
Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Table 3.3-1 lists the TRACE GC 2000 diagnostic messages, a brief description, and
troubleshooting options.
Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Message
Description
Troubleshooting
Software Info
Press ENTER to display software
information.
Serial #
The GC serial number is factory
coded.
Ver:
Displays GC firmware version
and year created.
DPFC ROM Ver:
Displays DPFC firmware
version. DPFC firmware
EPROM is located on the DPFC
processor PCB.
Manufactured:
Factory coded with month/day/
year. Displays when the unit is
initially powered up.
Total Runs
Keeps a running total of the
number of times the GC start run
was initiated.
This total is reset when the GC
firmware is replaced or
reloaded.
Temp Diagnostic
Allows the operator to scroll all
GC temperature zones and view
the status.
The status for each zone will
indicate OK, NOT USED, OPEN,
SHORTED, or NOT
CONTROLLING.
Note: All temperature controlled
zones are disabled while this
menu is on the GC screen. The
Temp Diagnostics menu line
will not appear when the GC is
in a run.
HARDWARE CONFIG
Press ENTER to display
hardware configuration.
DPFC ROM Ver:
Displays the DPFC firmware
version.
90
Service Manual
Chapter 3.3
Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued)
Diagnostic Message
L inlet module
R inlet module
Service Manual
Description
Troubleshooting
Identifies the type of carrier flow
module that is installed in this
location (not the inlet type).
Possibilities include OCI, S/SL,
and PKD.
Identification of the carrier flow
module occurs when the GC
power is cycled or turned on. If
the module is unplugged or
defective, it will read None.
Selecting the left or right inlet
identifies the pressure range of
this module. Scroll to pressure
and press the INFO/DIAG key.
The display will identify the
usable range of the module.
91
Chapter 3.3
Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued)
Diagnostic Message
L DET MODULE
R DET MODULE
AUX DET MODULE
Description
Identifies the type of detector
gas flow module in this location.
Possibilities include AA, AB,
AC, AD, AE1, AE2, AE3. All
gas modules have the capability
for three gas paths: H2, Air, and
Makeup. The module type will
determine which gas paths are
present.
Gas path 1 is the H2 gas path.
Gas path 2 is the Air gas path.
Gas path 3 is the Makeup gas
path.
Troubleshooting
If the module is unplugged or
defective it will read None.
Module coding is as follows:
AA = Option 401. Uses gas
module, path 3 only.
AB = Option 402. Uses gas
paths 1 and 2 without the makeup gas path. The ECD make-up
will use gas path 1. The FPD/
FID use gas path 1 for H2, and
path 2 for Air. The PID uses gas
path 2 for sheath gas, and path 1
for Makeup.
AC = Option 403. Uses gas
paths 1, 2, and 3. The ECD uses
Makeup gas path 3 only. The
FID/FPD use gas path 1 for H2,
and path 2 for Air. The FPD can
not be configured for make-up.
The FID uses gas path 3 for
Makeup. The PID uses gas path
2 for sheath gas, and path 3 for
Makeup.
AD = Option 404. Uses gas path
1, 2, and 3. The ECD uses gas
path 3 only. The FID/FPD uses
gas path 2 for Air, and path 3
for H2. The NPD uses gas path 1
for low flow H2, path 2 for Air,
and path 3 for Makeup.
The AE gas module is used for
auxiliary gases. This module
may be configured with gas
paths 1, 2, or 3. This module
uses a proportional
electronically controlled valve
and pressure sensor. It is
designed to furnish flow to a
flow path containing a fixed or
variable restrictor.
92
Service Manual
Chapter 3.3
Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued)
Diagnostic Message
DPFC Temp
Description
Temperature sensor on the
DPFC processor PCB supplies
ambient temperature
information to the GC processor
for front panel display.
This value is updated
continuously every two to three
seconds.
Ambient Press
Displays atmospheric pressure.
The displayed pressure unit is in
KPA or PSIG, depending on the
configuration that was selected
as part of the display pressure
unit configuration page. This
value is updated only when the
Ambient Pres display line is
scrolled out of view then back
into view on the display.
Troubleshooting
The temperature sensor is
located on the DPFC processor
PCs. Temperature sensor
calibration is performed in the
factory. Gross errors in
displayed ambient temperature
require the DPFC processor
board to be recalibrated or
replaced.
The ambient pressure sensor is
located on the DPFC processor
PCB. Pressure sensor
calibration is performed in the
factory. Gross errors in
displayed ambient pressure
require the DPFC processor
board TO be recalibrated or
replaced.
FID Transformer
This line displays the type of
detector transformer present in
the power module when an FID
is to be used on the GC. One
transformer will support two
FIDs.
The transformer is supplied with
a jumper that will connect to J6.
This identifies which
transformer is installed. J6 is a
three-pin connector. Pins 1 and 3
are jumpered to designate an
FID transformer has been
installed.
NPD Transformer
This line displays the type of
detector transformer present in
the power module when an NPD
is to be used on the GC. The
NPD transformer is an
additional transformer that
supports only the NPD. One
transformer will support dual
NPDs.
The transformer is supplied with
a jumper that will connect to J5.
This identifies which
transformer is installed. J5 is a
three-pin connector. Pins 2 and 3
are jumpered to designate an
NPD transformer has been
installed.
STD Transformer
This line displays the type of
detector transformer present in
the power module when an ECD
or FPD is to be used on the GC.
The STD transformer replaces
any existing FID transformer.
The standard transformer
supports the FID, ECD, and FPD
single or dual configuration.
The transformer is supplied with
a jumper that will connect to J6.
This identifies which
transformer is installed. J6 is a
three-pin connector. Pins 2 and 3
are jumpered to designate an
STD transformer has been
installed.
Service Manual
93
Chapter 3.3
Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued)
Diagnostic Message
Description
Troubleshooting
A jumper is not correctly
installed on J5 or J6 or the
jumpered pins are incorrect.
Rework as required.
No DET Transformer
Indicates no detector
transformer is installed in the
power module.
Power Info
Press ENTER to display power
information.
Wired for _____ Volts
Designates if the unit is
configured as a 115 V ac or
220 V ac unit.
AC Voltage:
Continually monitors the ac line
voltage. The display is updated
every 2 to 3 seconds.
Accuracy of this display is
calibrated in the hidden
configuration. To calibrate, press
CONFIG and enter 2000. Once
in hidden configuration, scroll
down to AC. Read the actual line
voltage with a calibrated DVM
and enter this value in volts ac.
Max AC Amps
Limits the GC line current to this
value.
Changes in this value will effect
maximum heating rates. This
value is set as part of the hidden
configuration. To change this
value, press CONFIG and enter
2000. Once in hidden
configuration, scroll down to
Max GC Amps. Enter the desired
value in Amps in the range of 10
to 20.
AC Limit %
Limits the maximum percentage
of power that can be applied to
the oven heater.
+24 Volts:
OK indicates the presence of the
24-volt power supply.
+15 Volts:
OK indicates the presence of the
+15-volt power supply.
+5
Volts:
OK indicates the presence of the
+5-volt power supply.
-15 Volts:
OK indicates the presence of the
–15-volt power supply.
-5
Volts:
OK indicates the presence of the
–5-volt power supply.
94
An OK only indicates the
+24-volt supply exists. It does
not indicate the actual voltage.
An OK only indicates the
+15-volt supply exists. It does
not indicate the actual voltage.
An OK only indicates the +5-volt
supply exists. It does not
indicate the actual voltage.
An OK only indicates the
–15-volt supply exists. It does
not indicate the actual voltage.
An OK only indicates the –5-volt
supply exists. It does not
indicate the actual voltage.
Service Manual
Chapter 3.3
Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued)
Diagnostic Message
Description
Troubleshooting
Oven Info
Chassis Temp
Monitors the temperature around
the analog PCB. U12 on the
analog board is used as a 2.5V
reference device. This device
also has an ambient temperature
output. This output is used in
some of the temperature
calculating algorithms.
Oven Offset
This value is usually set to zero.
Any entry offsets the oven actual
temperature without changing
the oven readout value.
Oven Temp
Monitors the actual oven
temperature.
Oven Power %
Displays the actual percentage
of power that is being applied to
the oven heater. Full on equals
100%.
Oven Predict %
As the oven is heating toward an
entered set point, the
microprocessor calculates the
power required for the oven to
hold the specified set point.
When the oven is equilibrated at
a setpoint temperature, the Oven
Power % and the Oven
Predict % should be nearly the
same value.
Exhaust Doors %
Indicates at what percentage the
oven flapper door is open at the
current oven temperature.
P1
These are displayed values only,
and can be changed only by
factory programmer engineers.
K1
DER
Differences in the actual
temperature in the oven (as
measured by an external
calibrated temperature
measuring device) and the
displayed oven temperature can
be adjusted using the Oven
Offset above.
INTSUM0
INTSUM1
INTSUM2
INTSLOPE
Service Manual
95
Chapter 3.3
Diagnostic Messages
Diagnostic Messages
Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued)
Diagnostic Message
Description
Troubleshooting
Injector Info
Lt Injector
Reads the actual temperature.
A value of 0 indicates a detector
is not present.
Rt Injector
Reads the actual temperature.
A value of 0 indicates a detector
is not present.
P1
These are displayed values only,
and can be changed only by
factory programmer engineers.
K1
DER
INTSUM0
INTSUM1
INTSUM2
INTSLOPE
Detector Info
Lt Detector
Reads the actual temperature.
A value of 0 indicates an injector
is not present.
Rt Detector
Reads the actual temperature.
A value of 0 indicates an injector
is not present.
P1
K1
These are displayed values only,
and can be changed only by
factory programmer engineers.
DER
INTSUM0
INTSUM1
INTSUM2
INTSLOPE
96
Service Manual
SECTION
IV
Maintenance &
Troubleshooting
This section provides maintenance and troubleshooting for the GCQ Plus
base unit and flow control for carrier and detector gases.
NOTE
For maintenance information regarding injectors and
detectors refer to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Manual, PN 31709180.
Chapter 4.1, GC Base Unit, contains procedures for replacing the
components associated with the frame and oven assembly. It also explains
how to remove the Power Control Module, the CPU, and the Temperature
Feedback and Digital I/O unit.
Chapter 4.2, Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases, provides
maintenance and troubleshooting for a Split/Splitless injector.
Chapter 4.3, Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases, provides
maintenance and troubleshooting for a Cold On-Column injector.
GC Base Unit
This chapter contains procedures for replacing the components associated with the
frame and oven assembly. It also explains how to remove the Power Control Module,
the CPU, and the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit.
Chapter at a Glance…
Overview
Replace the Oven Motor
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Replace the Flapper Motor
Remove the Power Control Module
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit
Operating Procedures
Replace the Oven Motor
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Replace the Flapper Motor
Remove the Power Control Module
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit
Service Manual
99
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Overview
Overview
The TRACE central base unit consists of the following:
•
Frame and oven assembly
•
Power Control Module
•
Electronic compartment
The frame and oven assembly consists of the following:
•
Oven blower motor
•
Oven cooling flapper assembly
•
Oven heater baffle
The electronic compartment contains the following:
NOTE
100
•
Motherboard
•
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
•
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit
Since the TRACE GC 2000 is a modular design, the frame and oven assembly and its affiliated
components are the only items requiring detailed maintenance instructions.
Service Manual
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Motor
Replace the Oven Motor
Required Tools
You will need the following tools:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
•
4-mm Allen wrench
•
7-mm nut driver
•
10-mm x 8-mm open-ended wrench
•
Appropriate column wrench for removal of the gas chromatograph columns
•
Flat-tip screwdriver
•
Phillips screwdriver
Required Parts
You will need the following parts:
•
Replacement blower motor—includes mounting plate and grommets
(PN 155 990 00)
•
Silver seal M8 x 1 for column adapter fitting (PN 290 071 00)
•
Tube of anti-seize compound (PN 76460-0014)
Introduction
Removing the blower motor will require the removal of several GC parts and
assemblies.
To access the oven baffle, the following items will be removed:
•
GC top cover
•
Rear panel
•
Analytical column(s)
•
Detector capillary column adapter(s)
To access the blower motor, the following items will be partially removed or
disassembled:
•
Pneumatic flow module (partial)
•
Oven heater baffle
•
Oven fan
Read the entire procedure completely to familiarize yourself with the disassembly
process before you proceed.
Service Manual
101
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Motor
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Replace the Oven Motor
1. Reduce the oven temperature to 25 °C. Turn off all temperature zones. Allow the
oven to cool.
CAUTION
Be sure that the oven has cooled to room temperature.
2. Turn off all carrier gas pneumatic flow to the columns.
WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts.
3. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power
cable from the rear of the GC. This may require loosening the clamp that secures
the power cable to the rear panel.
4. Open the oven door.
5. Remove the columns.
6. Remove the detector capillary adapters from each detector using the 10-mm
open-ended wrench. A flat silver-coated washer inside this fitting seals the fitting
to the detector base.
7. Remove the autosampler if present.
8. Remove the detector inlet cover.
NOTE
102
If an autosampler mounting bracket is installed, it may be necessary to remove it. The mounting
screw that secures the autosampler bracket and GC top to a standoff is located under the top
cover.
Service Manual
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Motor
Figure 4.1-1 shows the retaining screws on the GC top cover.
Retaining Screws
Figure 4.1-1. Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover
9. Remove the GC top cover by loosening the two retaining screws (Figure 4.1-1).
Push the cover back approximately 3 cm. Lift the cover off the GC.
10. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these
screws using the 3.0-mm Allen wrench.
11. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Notice that the cooling fan is attached
to the rear panel.
NOTE
Pay attention to the orientation of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same
way that it was removed.
12. Unplug the power cord to the rear panel cooling fan. Set the rear panel off to the
side of the GC.
Remove the Pneumatic Flow Module
The pneumatic flow module should be partially lifted from the GC. This will allow
access to the blower motor. It is not necessary to remove the plumbing or the electrical
connections. The pneumatic flow module is attached with six screws. Four screws
mount to the GC upper deck. Two screws secure it to the rear of the GC upper deck.
NOTE
The four screws securing the pneumatic flow module to the GC upper deck are different than
the two screws securing the pneumatic flow module to the rear of the GC upper deck. Keep
these screws separate for correct reassembly.
1. Remove the six screws securing the pneumatic flow module to the GC.
2. Lift the pneumatic flow module (with cables intact) high enough to expose the
blower motor.
3. Prop the pneumatic flow module out of the way on the GC upper deck as
illustrated in Figure 4.1-2.
Service Manual
103
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Motor
Figure 4.1-2 shows the pneumatic flow module propped on the GC upper deck. Note
the blower motor screws.
1
2
1. Pneumatic Flow Module
2.Blower Motor Screws
Figure 4.1-2. Pneumatic Flow Module Propped on the GC Upper Deck
Remove the Oven Heater Baffle and Oven Fan
The oven heater baffle is attached to the oven wall by four adjustable tabs. These tabs
are attached to the oven heater baffle with four Allen screws. The four tab adjustment
screws are located on the inside edge of the oven heater baffle (Figure 4.1-3). The tabs
are adjusted by loosening these four Allen screws.
104
Service Manual
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Motor
Figure 4.1-3 shows the tab adjustment screws and the tab screws for the four
adjustable tabs on the oven heater baffle.
1
2
1. Tab Adjustment Screws
2.Tab Screws
Figure 4.1-3. Tab Adjustment Screws and Tab Screws on the Oven Heater Baffle
NOTE
Anti-seize compound is applied to all screws removed from inside the oven.
1. Loosen the four tab adjustment screws.
2. Remove the four Allen screws that secure the tabs to the oven heater baffle.
3. Slide each of the four tabs inward to allow each tab to clear the oven wall.
4. Rotate the oven heater baffle counterclockwise approximately 2 cm.
5. Push in on the right-hand side of the oven heater baffle, while pulling out on the
left-hand side of the oven heater baffle. Swing the oven heater baffle so that it
parallels the right oven wall. This will expose the oven blower fan.
6. The oven blower fan is attached to the shaft of the oven blower motor with a
setscrew. This setscrew can be loosened with a 4-mm Allen wrench.
7. Loosen the setscrew. Carefully remove the oven fan from the blower motor shaft.
Service Manual
105
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Motor
Remove the Blower Motor
1. The blower motor plugs into J17 on the power control PCB (PN 236 995 00).
Unplug the blower motor electrical plug by pushing down on the plug tab and
pulling out.
2. The ground strap from the motor is secured to chassis ground on a terminal just
below the starting capacitor. Locate this terminal.
3. Remove the terminal nut using a 4-mm nut driver; or, unplug the connector.
Remove the ground wire.
4. The blower motor is secured to the rear of the oven wall with three #4
self-locking nuts. Using the same 4-mm nut driver, remove these nuts.
5. Locate and note the orientation of the six shoulder washers on each side of the
three grommets, before removing the blower motor.
6. Locate the three flat washers between the locking nut and the shoulder washers.
Remove and retain these washers for reassembly.
7. Remove the blower motor from the oven by pulling outward.
Assemble the Oven Motor
The replacement blower motor will contain the mounting brackets with the three
grommets in place. The existing blower motor will have a total of six shoulder
washers. Three shoulder washers are installed on each side of the grommets.
1. Remove the all of the shoulder washers from the old blower motor.
2. Place three of the shoulder washers over the mounting studs located on the rear
oven wall.
3. Install the motor on the studs.
4. Place the remaining three shoulder washers over the studs, mating them with the
grommets and the blower motor mounting bracket.
5. Place the three flat washers over the studs and against the shoulder washers.
6. Carefully screw the locking nuts back onto the studs, after all of the washers are
in place.
7. Tighten the locking nuts until the grommets are flat. Loosen each locking nut by
one complete turn.
8. Attach the ground wire to the grounding terminal on the rear oven wall. Secure it
with the locking nut.
9. Connect the blower motor electrical plug to J17.
10. Reassemble the remaining components on the rear of the GC in the reverse order
in which they were removed.
106
Service Manual
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Motor
11. Plug in the rear panel cooling motor.
12. Carefully apply a small amount of anti-seize compound on the end of the blower
motor shaft inside the GC oven.
13. Remove the setscrew from the fan. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound
to the setscrew. Replace the setscrew in the blower.
14. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to each one of the four Allen
screws that hold the oven heater baffle to the tabs.
15. Reinstall the oven blower fan onto the shaft. The fan should be even with the
beveled edge on the motor shaft. The motor shaft should not extend more than
1 mm beyond the blower fan.
16. Secure the fan to the motor shaft using the number M4 Allen wrench. Be sure that
the setscrew is in place on the flat side of the blower motor shaft.
17. Replace the oven heater baffle in the reverse order in which it was removed.
18. Secure the oven heater baffle to the oven wall with the four Allen screws in
the tabs.
19. The tab adjustment screws should be loose. Carefully center the oven heater
baffle inside of the oven. Be sure that the center hole in the oven heater baffle
screen is centered over the blower motor shaft. The tolerance is very small. The
oven heater baffle will not move left or right, nor up or down more than a couple
of millimeters. However, be sure that it is centered in the oven over the blower
wheel. This will ensure that whenever the GC is turned on, the blower wheel will
not be touching the heater coils mounted to the oven heater baffle.
20. Turn the GC on.
21. Close the oven door. Be sure that the oven blower is running.
22. Verify that the heater heats, and the fan rotates without contacting the
heater coils.
23. Open the oven door.
24. Reinstall the capillary adapter to the detectors using new silver seals #290 07100.
25. Reinstall the column.
26. Reestablish all flows and temperatures.
27. Perform a column leak check and continue.
Service Manual
107
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Required Tools
You will need the following tools:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
•
4-mm Allen wrench
•
10-mm x 8-mm open-ended wrench
•
Appropriate column wrench for removal of the gas chromatograph columns
•
Flat-tip screwdriver
•
Phillips screwdriver
Required Parts
You will need the following parts:
•
Silver seal M8 x 1 for column adapter fitting (PN 290 071 00)
•
Tube of anti-seize compound (PN 76460-0014)
Introduction
To remove and replace the oven heater baffle, the following items will be partially or
completely removed:
108
•
Top cover
•
Rear panel
•
Right side panel
•
Power supply module (partial)
Service Manual
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
1. Reduce the oven temperature to 25 °C. Turn off all temperature zones. Allow the
oven to cool.
CAUTION
Be sure that the oven has cooled to room temperature.
2. Turn off all carrier gas pneumatic flow to the columns.
WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts.
3. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power
cable from the rear of the GC. This may require loosening the clamp that secures
the power cable to the rear panel.
4. Open the oven door.
5. Remove the columns.
6. Remove the detector capillary adapters from each detector using the 10-mm
open-ended wrench. A flat silver-coated washer inside this fitting seals the fitting
to the detector base.
7. Remove the autosampler if present.
8. Remove the detector inlet cover.
NOTE
If an autosampler mounting bracket is installed, it may be necessary to remove it. The mounting
screw that secures the autosampler bracket and GC top to a standoff is located under the top
cover.
9. Remove the GC top cover by loosening the two retaining screws (Figure 4.1-1).
Push the cover back approximately 3 cm. Lift the cover off the GC.
Service Manual
109
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Figure 4.1-4 shows the retaining screws on the GC top cover.
Retaining Screws
Figure 4.1-4. Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover
10. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these
screws using the 3-mm Allen wrench.
11. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Notice that the cooling fan is attached
to the rear panel.
NOTE
Pay attention to the orientation of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same
way that it was removed.
12. Unplug the power cord to the rear panel cooling fan. Set the rear panel off to the
side of the GC.
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
The power control module is attached with five Phillips screws. Access to these
screws requires removal of the right side panel of the GC. To remove the right side
panel, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the large screw that secures the right side panel on the right upper rear
corner of the GC. Unscrew this screw at least 1 cm.
2. Slide the side panel back until the panel contacts the thumbscrew.
3. Tilt the top of the side panel outward. Continue to slide the side panel toward
the rear.
4. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC and pull the lower edge of the panel away
from the GC.
110
Service Manual
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Remove the Power Control Module
Six screws attach the Power Control Module. Two large Phillips screws are located in
the rear of the right side of the GC (see Figure 4.1-5. Right Side View of GC Rear
Panel). While the remaining four large Phillips screws are located just behind the front
panel of the GC (Figure 4.1-6. Right Side View of GC Front Panel).
Figure 4.1-5 shows the two large Phillips screws located towards the rear of the GC.
Note the Motherboard, Microprocessor PCB, and Temperature Feedback and Digital
I/O PCB.
2
4
3
1
GC Rear Panel
1. Two Large Phillips Screws
2. Motherboard
3. Microprocessor PCB
4. Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O PCB
Figure 4.1-5. Right Side View of GC Rear Panel
Service Manual
111
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Figure 4.1-6 shows three large Phillips screws behind the GC front panel and one
large Phillips screw located above the third expansion slot guide. Note the detector
controllers plugged into expansion slots 1 and 2. In this illustration the third expansion
slot is empty.
2
1
GC Front Panel
1. Four Large Phillips Screws
2. Detector Controller Expansion Slots
Figure 4.1-6. Right Side View of GC Front Panel
1. Remove all of the screws.
NOTE
It is only necessary to slide the power control module out a few centimeters to gain access to
the heater wire terminals. It may be necessary to remove a number of the connectors, so the
power control module can be slid out far enough to gain access to the heater wire connections.
Be sure to identify the location of these heater wire connections for reassembling purposes.
2. Slide the power control module outward toward the rear of the GC.
Remove the Temperature Sensor
CAUTION
The temperature sensor wires are small and delicate, so care should be taken when
disconnecting the sensor.
The temperature sensors used for the various heating zones in the TRACE GC 2000
are located on the rear portion of the motherboard.
112
Service Manual
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
1. The oven temperature sensor is connected to J41. Disconnect the oven
temperature sensor.
2. Feed the wires for the oven temperature sensor over the motherboard and into the
rear of the oven. The oven heater is connected directly to the power control
module board.
Remove the Oven Heater Baffle
The oven heater baffle is attached to the oven wall by four adjustable tabs. These tabs
are attached to the oven heater baffle with four Allen screws. The four tab adjustment
screws are located on the inside edge of the oven heater baffle
(Figure 4.1-7). The tabs are adjusted by loosening these four Allen screws.
Figure 4.1-7 shows the tab adjustment screws and the tab screws for the four
adjustable tabs on the oven heater baffle.
1
2
1. Tab Adjustment Screws
2.Tab Screws
Figure 4.1-7. Tab Adjustment Screws and Tab Screws on the Oven Heater Baffle
NOTE
Anti-seize compound is applied to all screws that you have removed from inside the oven.
1. Loosen the four tab adjustment screws.
2. Remove the four Allen screws that secure the tabs to the oven heater baffle.
3. Slide each of the four tabs inward to allow each tab to clear the oven wall.
Service Manual
113
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
4. Rotate the oven heater baffle counterclockwise approximately 2 cm.
NOTE
Before proceeding, it may be necessary to remove the capillary column adapters from the
detector bases.
5. Pull the heater and temperature sensor wires through the holes located in the top
right-hand corner of the rear oven wall.
6. Remove the baffle.
Replace the Oven Heater
Replacement of the oven heater requires replacing the complete oven heater baffle.
This includes the plate, heaters, and temperature sensor.
1. Remove the oven heater baffle.
2. A single clamp attaches the oven heater temperature sensor. This clamp is located
on the back of the oven heater baffle (Figure 4.1-8). Loosen the clamp.
Figure 4.1-8 shows the clamp that attaches the oven heater temperature sensor to the
oven heater baffle.
Figure 4.1-8. Clamp for Oven Heater Temperature Sensor
3. Remove the oven heater temperature sensor.
4. Replace the oven heater temperature sensor in the reverse order in which it was
removed.
114
Service Manual
Replace the Oven Heater Baffle
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Reassemble the Oven Heater Baffle
1. Replace the oven heater baffle in the reverse order in which it was removed.
2. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to each one of the four Allen
screws that hold the oven heater baffle to the tabs.
3. Secure the oven heater baffle to the oven wall with the four Allen screws in the
tabs.
4. The tab adjustment screws should be loose. Carefully center the oven heater
baffle inside of the oven. Be sure that the center hole in the oven heater baffle
screen is centered over the blower motor shaft. The tolerance is very small. The
oven heater baffle will not move left or right, nor up or down more than a couple
of millimeters. However, be sure that it is centered in the oven over the blower
wheel. This will ensure that whenever the GC is turned on, the blower wheel will
not be touching the heater coils mounted to the oven heater baffle.
5. Connect the oven heater wires to the power control module terminals.
6. Plug the oven heater temperature sensor into J41 on the motherboard.
7. Reconnect the remaining wires previously disconnected from the power control
module.
8. Slide the power control module in place and resecure it.
9. Replace the GC rear panel and side panel.
10. Turn the GC on.
11. Confirm that all circuits are functioning correctly.
12. Verify that the oven fan does not touch any part of the oven heater baffle.
Service Manual
115
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Flapper Motor
Replace the Flapper Motor
Required Tools
You will need the following tools:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
•
Phillips screwdriver
Required Parts
You will need the following parts:
•
Stepper motor (PN 318 070 46)
•
Self-locking Allen screws M4 x 10 (PN 76909-L410)
Introduction
To replace the oven flapper motor, you must remove the complete motor flapper and
cooling duct assembly. The flapper motor plugs into the motherboard on the GC.
Therefore, you must remove the right side panel of the GC.
116
Service Manual
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Replace the Flapper Motor
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Replace the Flapper Motor
1. Cool all temperature zones to room temperature.
WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts.
2. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power
cable from the rear of the GC. This may require loosening the clamp that secures
the power cable to the rear panel.
3. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these
screws using the 3-mm Allen wrench.
4. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Notice that the cooling fan is attached
to the rear panel.
NOTE
Pay attention to the orientation of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same
way that it was removed.
5. Unplug the power cord to the rear panel cooling fan. Set the rear panel beside
the GC.
6. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the cooling ducts to the oven wall.
Remove these screws.
Each cooling duct has a self-tapping screw on the outer edge nearest the rear panel.
These screws are accessible from a hole in the top of the cooling duct.
7. Locate the self-tapping screw that secures each cooling duct to the lower GC
base. Remove the screw from each cooling duct. This will allow the complete
motor flapper and cooling duct assembly to be removed from the rear of the GC.
Disconnect the Flapper Motor Electrical Plug
1. Remove the right side cover of the GC.
2. Locate connector J12 in the rear upper corner of the motherboard. Disconnect the
oven flapper motor electrical plug from J12.
Service Manual
117
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
CAUTION
Replace the Flapper Motor
Be very careful not to cut any wires in the harness.
3. Use a pair of side-cutters to cut and remove the tie wraps that secure this cable to
the main harness leading into the rear of the GC.
4. Feed the flapper motor cable through the rear of the GC. Remove the complete
flapper motor cable.
Remove and Replace the Flapper Motor
The flapper motor is secured to the left-hand cooling duct with two Phillips screws.
The flapper motor shaft is secured to the flapper with an M4 Allen screw. This Allen
screw is accessible through a small hole located on the top portion of the left-hand
cooling duct.
CAUTION
Be very careful not to rotate the flapper motor by applying pressure to the flappers.
Rotate the flapper motor by gripping the lower portion of the railing that attaches to the
flappers.
1. Loosen the M4 Allen screw.
2. Remove the flapper motor.
3. Reinstall the new motor. Align the flat side of the motor shaft with the
Allen screw.
Reassemble the Flapper Motor
1. Reassemble the flapper motor and cooling duct assembly in the reverse order in
which it was removed.
2. Reconnect the power plug to connector J12.
3. Turn the GC on.
4. Turn on all zones, including the oven.
5. Confirm that all heated zones are functioning correctly.
6. Reestablish flows.
7. Perform a column leak check.
118
Service Manual
Remove the Power Control Module
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Remove the Power Control Module
Required Tools
You will need the following tools:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
•
Phillips screwdriver
Required Parts
In this procedure, you may require any of the items listed in the section below. Their
part numbers have been included.
Introduction
The Power Control Module contains the following:
•
Main power input filter (PN 24128-0085)
•
Circuit breaker 115 V (PN 237 099 15)
Circuit breaker 230 V (PN 237 099 16)
•
Varistor—attaches to circuit breaker (PN 119949-0001)
•
Main power thermal shutdown relay 20 A (PN 76269-0120)
•
Power supply module (PN 76330-0031)
•
Power Control Module PCB with fuses (PN 236 995 00)
•
ECD/FID detector transformer (PN 119917)
•
NPD detector transformer (PN 119918)
•
FID detector transformer (PN 119916)
•
Oven heater triac (PN 76379-0025)
To remove the Power Control Module, it is necessary to remove the following:
Service Manual
•
Power cord
•
GC rear panel
•
GC right side panel
119
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Remove the Power Control Module
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Remove the Power Control Module
Remove the GC Rear Panel
WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts.
1. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power
cable from the rear of the GC. This may require loosening the clamp that secures
the power cable to the rear panel.
NOTE
If an autosampler mounting bracket is installed, it may be necessary to remove it. The mounting
screw that secures the autosampler bracket and GC top to a standoff is located under the top
cover.
2. Remove the GC top cover by loosening the two retaining screws (Figure 4.1-1).
Push the cover back approximately 3 cm. Lift the cover off the GC.
Figure 4.1-9 shows the retaining screws on the GC top cover.
Retaining Screws
Figure 4.1-9. Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover
3. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these
screws using the 3-mm Allen wrench.
120
Service Manual
Remove the Power Control Module
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
4. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Notice that the cooling fan is attached
to the rear panel.
NOTE
Pay attention to the orientation of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same
way that it was removed.
5. Unplug the power cord to the rear panel cooling fan. Set the rear panel off to the
side of the GC.
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
The Power Control Module is attached with five Phillips screws. Access to these
screws requires removal of the right side panel of the GC. To remove the right side
panel, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the large thumbscrew that secures the right side panel on the right upper
rear corner of the GC. Unscrew the thumbscrew at least 1 cm.
2. Slide the side panel back until the panel contacts the thumbscrew.
3. Tilt the top of the side panel outward. Continue to slide the side panel toward
the rear.
4. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away
from the GC.
Service Manual
121
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Remove the Power Control Module
Remove the Power Control Module
Six screws attach the Power Control Module. Two large Phillips screws are located in
the rear of the right side of the GC (see Figure 4.1-10. Right Side View of GC Rear
Panel). While the remaining four large Phillips screws are located just behind the front
panel of the GC (Figure 4.1-11. Right Side View of GC Front Panel).
Figure 4.1-10 shows the two large Phillips screws located in the rear of the GC. Note
the Motherboard, Microprocessor PCB, and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O
PCB.
2
4
GC Rear Panel
3
1
1. Two Large Phillips Screws
2. Motherboard
3. Microprocessor PCB
4. Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O PCB
Figure 4.1-10. Right Side View of GC Rear Panel
122
Service Manual
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Remove the Power Control Module
Figure 4.1-11 shows three large Phillips screws behind the GC front panel and one
large Phillips screw located above the third expansion slot guide. Note the detector
controllers plugged into expansion slots 1 and 2. In this illustration the third expansion
slot is empty.
2
1
GC Front Panel
1. Four Large Phillips Screws
2. Detector Controller Expansion Slots
Figure 4.1-11. Right Side View of GC Front Panel
1. Remove the screws.
2. Slide the Power Control Module outward toward the rear of the GC.
3. As the Power Control Module is being removed, disconnect the following in the
order listed below:
Service Manual
•
J1, 16-pin white connector
•
J8, 2-pin connector
•
J11, 16-pin white connector located in the upper rear quadrant of the chassis
•
J13, ribbon cable
•
Oven heater wire connected to the oven heater triac
•
TB1 and TB2, orange terminal strips for the heater wire connections
123
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Remove the Power Control Module
•
J17, oven blower motor
•
J18, second oven heater wire
•
Chassis ground wire from the GC rear oven terminal
NOTE
It may be necessary to remove or unclip tie wraps that may bind some of the disconnected
harnesses to the Power Control Module internal harnesses.
CAUTION
Be very careful not to cut any wires in the harness.
Reinstall the Power Control Module
1. Reconnect the previously disconnected connections in the reverse order of their
removal.
2. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
3. Secure the five Phillips screws that hold the Power Control Module in place.
4. Replace the GC rear panel. Be sure to reconnect the rear panel cooling fan.
5. Reconnect the main power.
6. Turn on main power.
7. Verify all keypad functions.
124
Service Manual
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and
Digital I/O Unit
Required Tools
You will need the following tools:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
•
Phillips screwdriver
Required Parts
You may need the following replacement assemblies:
•
Central Processing Unit (CPU) (PN 236 483 45)
•
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit (PN 236 483 40)
Introduction
It may be necessary to replace the CPU or the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O
unit. This section describes how to remove and replace both of these units.
Service Manual
125
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit
WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts.
1. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC.
NOTE
If an autosampler mounting bracket is installed, it may be necessary to remove it. The mounting
screw that secures the autosampler bracket and GC top to a standoff is located under the top
cover.
2. Remove the GC top cover by loosening the two retaining screws (Figure 4.1-1).
Push the cover back approximately 3 cm. Lift the cover off the GC.
Figure 4.1-12 shows the retaining screws on the GC top cover.
Retaining Screws
Figure 4.1-12. Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
After removing the GC right side panel you will have access to the CPU and
temperature feedback and digital I/O unit.
1. Locate the large screw that secures the right side panel on the right upper rear
corner of the GC. Unscrew this screw at least 1 cm.
2. Slide the side panel back until the panel contacts the thumbscrew.
3. Tilt the top of the side panel outward. Continue to slide the side panel toward
the rear.
4. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC and pull the lower edge of the panel away
from the GC.
126
Service Manual
Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit
Chapter 4.1
GC Base Unit
Remove the CPU
The CPU is located in the fifth slot behind the keypad and display panel. The CPU is
held in place with one 3-mm Allen screw that is located on the top of the GC under the
top cover.
1. Remove the RS232 cables connected to the computer and the autosampler.
2. Remove the Allen screw.
3. Grasp the CPU.
4. Slide the unit outward away from the electronic compartment.
Reinstall the CPU
1. Reinstall the CPU in the reverse order in which it was removed.
2. Turn the GC on.
3. Verify that the system completes the initial startup test.
4. Replace all covers.
5. Resume normal operation.
Remove the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit
The Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit is located in the fourth slot behind the
keypad and display panel. The Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit is held in
place with one 3-mm Allen screw that is located on the top of the GC under the top
cover.
1. Remove the Allen screw.
2. Grasp the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit.
3. Slide the unit outward away from the electronic compartment.
Reinstall the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit
1. Reinstall the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit in the reverse order in
which it was removed.
2. Turn the GC on.
3. Verify that the system completes the initial startup test.
4. Verify all temperature zones read and control correctly.
5. Replace all covers.
6. Resume normal operation.
Service Manual
127
Digital Pressure Flow
Control for Carrier Gases
This chapter contains information about the Digital Pressure Flow Control modules of
the TRACE GC 2000. It also addresses maintenance and troubleshooting issues.
Chapter at a Glance…
Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules ................................................................... 130
Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 134
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 135
Service Manual
129
Chapter 4.2
Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases
Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules
Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules
Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) modules refer to the TRACE GC 2000 inlet
flow modules. These modules are specifically designed to control carrier gas, either
by means of pressure sensing or actual flow sensing.
DPFC flow modules are available in two pressure ranges:
•
0–250 kPa (0–35 psig)
•
0–700 kPa (0–100 psig)
DPFC Purged Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module
The DPFC purged packed carrier module is identified on the module as
PKD-1100-250 or PKD-1100-700. The GC diagnostics identify this module as PKD.
This configuration supplies carrier gas to the GC inlet and offers septum purge vent
control. It is most commonly used with packed columns, wide-bore (megabore)
columns, and the purged packed injector. For wide-bore columns, it operates in
constant flow through calculated pressure. For packed columns, it operates in true
closed loop flow control. The packed flow module uses a high and low auto range
flow sensor, which sets to the high flow range for closed loop flow control. In inlets
for packed column with septum purge operation, the flow control module supplies the
requested column flow plus 5 cc/min for the septum purge.
Figure 4.2-1 shows the DPFC purged packed carrier pneumatic module.
Purged
Packed
Injector
Filter
F Sensor
Prop
Valve
P Sensor
Fixed Flow
Regulator
Outlet to Ambient
On/Off
Valve
Purge
5 mL/min
77001-1600
980416
Figure 4.2-1. DPFC Purged Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module
130
Service Manual
Chapter 4.2
Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases
Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules
DPFC Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module
The DPFC purged packed carrier module is identified on the module as
PKD-1100-250 or PKD-1100-700. The GC diagnostics identify this module as PKD.
The packed column module is the simplest in operation. This type of system is used
for packed columns only, which operate in true constant flow mode. The packed
column module is closed loop flow control design. This means that the module
contains a flow sensor, and directly measures the flow being supplied to the column.
The packed flow module uses a high and low auto range flow sensor, which sets to the
high flow range for closed loop flow control. The packed column module does not
require the column evaluation calculation to adjust column pressures during an
analytical run. The packed column module operates from direct flow sensor readings
in flow-controlled mode.
Figure 4.2-1 shows the DPFC packed carrier pneumatic module.
Packed
Injector
Filter
F Sensor
Prop
Valve
P Sensor
77001-1600
980416
Figure 4.2-2. DPFC Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module
Calibration: The packed carrier pneumatic module is calibrated at 50 mL/min ± 5 mL
and 250 mL/min ± 12 mL/min.
Service Manual
131
Chapter 4.2
Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases
Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules
DPFC On-Column Carrier Pneumatic Module
This DPFC on-column carrier module is identified on the module as OC-1100-250 or
OC-1100-700. The GC diagnostics identify this module as OC.
This configuration is most commonly used with cold on-column injectors. This
module controls column flow by means of pressure feedback. The flow sensor is only
used during column characterization. Column characterization is necessary when used
in this configuration.
DPFC flow modules are available in two pressure ranges:
•
0–250 kPa (0–35 psig)
•
0–700 kPa (0–100 psig)
This module has no septum purge or split vent flow control.
Figure 4.2-3 shows the DPFC on-column carrier pneumatic module.
Filter
F Sensor
Prop
Valve
P Sensor
77001-1602
980417
Figure 4.2-3. DPFC On-Column Carrier Pneumatic Module
Calibration: The On-Column carrier pneumatics module is calibrated to deliver
2.5 mL of flow ± 2 mL at the column exit.
132
Service Manual
Chapter 4.2
Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases
Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules
DPFC for S/SL and PTV Carrier Pneumatic Module
This DPFC module is identified as option on the module as SSL-1100-250 or
SSL-1100-700. The GC diagnostics identify this module as SSL. This configuration is
used with the split/splitless injector and the PTV split/splitless injector. This module
controls column flow by means of pressure feedback. Carrier flow range
is 0–10 cc/min.
DPFC flow modules are available in two pressure ranges:
•
0–250 kPa (0–35 psig)
•
0–700 kPa (0–100 psig)
This module has septum purge and split vent flow control.
Figure 4.2-4 shows the DPFC for S/SL and PTV carrier pneumatic module.
SSL/PTV
Filter
Gas Saver
F Sensor
Prop P Sensor
Valve
Outlet to Ambient
Outlet to Ambient
Prop
Valve
On/Off
Valve
Fixed Flow
Regulator On/Off
Valve
Filter
Split
Purge
5 mL/min
77001-1601
980416
Figure 4.2-4. DPFC for S/SL and PTV Carrier Pneumatic Module
The module used for split/splitless or PTV inlets is equipped with a dual range flow
sensor and a pressure sensor. It also has a proportioning valve for split flow, and
ON/OFF valves for split and purge flows. The mass flow sensor measures all flow
moving into the inlet.
Since capillary column flows are traditionally low (0.5–3 mL/min), flow through the
capillary column is controlled by means of pressure. The mass flow sensor feedback is
used to control split flow. Septum purge is maintained at a constant by means of a
fixed flow regulator.
The lowest column pressure that must be maintained to control flow is:
Service Manual
•
0–250 kPa module—5 kPa (0.7 psig)
•
0–700 kPa module—14 kPa (14 psig)
133
Chapter 4.2
Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases
Maintenance
Maintenance
Calibration
NOTE
The DPFC electronic control module is trimless. All components are solid-state. Calibration of
the A/D and D/A is a factory-performed operation requiring specialized test equipment. Any
errors in calibration require the replacement of the DPFC module.
Factory calibration is accomplished by measuring the appropriate parameter with a
reference fixture. Then, the actual result is entered in the software. The module is
calibrated for both pressure and flow.
Figure 4.2-5 shows the DPFC electronic diagram of the carrier pneumatic module.
Flow Sensor
Diff Amp
Gain full scale
@ 500 mL/min He
Gain full scale
@ 10 mL/min He
10 mL/min Out
500 mL/min out
+V
Press/Flow mode
+
Press
Sensor
P
P Out
_
Dual
D/R
12
bite
Comparator
Carrier
Prop Valve
Comparator
Split
Prop Valve
E2Prom
77001-1
98042
Figure 4.2-5. DPFC Electronic Diagram of the Carrier Pneumatic Module
134
Service Manual
Chapter 4.2
Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
The DPFC module is not designed for component level troubleshooting. Table 4.2-1
shows the input and output voltages that may assist in isolating problems with the
DPFC module.
Table 4.2-1. DPFC Input and Output Voltages
Pin
CAUTION
Service Manual
Voltage
Pin 1
+15 V Analog
Pin 2
–15 V Analog
Pin 3
Analog GND
Pin 9
Digital GND
Pin 10
+5 V Digital
Pin 19
+15 V Valve Power
Pin 20
+15 V Valve Power
Pin 21
Return Ground of Proportional Valves
Pin 22
Return Ground of Proportional Valves
Pin 23
Split Valve +24 V
Pin 24
Split Valve Return
Pin 25
Purge Valve +24 V
Pin 26
Purge Valve Return
Valve power must be closed on the return ground of the valves.
135
Detector Gas Flow
Control for Detector
Gases
This chapter contains information about the Detector Gas Flow Control modules of
the TRACE GC 2000. It also addresses maintenance and troubleshooting issues.
Chapter at a Glance…
Detector Gas Flow Control Modules ........................................................................ 138
Detector Gas Connections......................................................................................... 143
Service Manual
137
Chapter 4.3
Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases
Detector Gas Flow Control Modules
Detector Gas Flow Control Modules
Detector Gas Flow Control (DGFC) modules are used primarily to control detector
gas flow. Flow control is accomplished by applying pressure to a fixed restrictor. The
GC microprocessor provides pressure control. The flow range of the module is
determined by the fixed restrictor. The pressure sensor gage is accurate to 700 kPa
(100 psig). Recommended inlet pressure is 480 kPa (60 psig). Each module is capable
of controlling three independent gases.
Hardware Configuration AA, Option 401
Figure 4.3-1 shows hardware configuration AA, option 401 for ECD only.
Filter
Prop
Valve
Gage
P Sensor
Make-up path
Restrictor
200 cc H2 @ 60 psi
77001-160
980417
Figure 4.3-1. Hardware AA, Option 401 for ECD Only
The make-up gas used for the ECD is either N2 (highest sensitivity) or 5% CH4/Ar
(greater dynamic range).
Calibration
The AA module is calibrated with N2 at 13.5 mL/min and 45 mL/min. The tolerance is
<2%.
138
Service Manual
Chapter 4.3
Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases
Detector Gas Flow Control Modules
Hardware Configuration AB, Option 402
Figure 4.3-2 shows hardware configuration AB, option 402 for ECD, PID, FPD, and
FID without make-up.
Filter
Prop
Valve
Gage
P Sensor
H2 path
Gas 1
Restrictor
200 cc H2 @ 60 psi
Filter
Prop
Valve
ECD
PID
FPD
FID
Gage
P Sensor
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
1
1, 2 (1=make-up)
1, 2
1, 2
Air path
Gas 2
Restrictor
600 cc H2 @ 60 psi
Make-up path not mounted
77001-1604
980417
Figure 4.3-2. Hardware AB, Option 402 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID Without Make-Up
This module can be configured with a gas # 2 restrictor for delivering reference gas to
the TCD (HWD). He, H2, N2, or Ar can be used for this purpose.
For ECD operation, N2 or 5% CH4/Ar is plumbed to the Gas 1 input. The Air path is
not used.
For PID operation, He or N2 can be used as make-up, and is plumbed to the Gas 1
input. He or N2 is also used for the sheath gas, and is plumbed to the Gas 2 input.
Calibration
The AB module is calibrated using H2 for Gas 1. Gas 1 is calibrated at 20 mL/min and
100 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%.
Gas 2 is calibrated using air. Gas 2 is calibrated at 90 mL/min and 300 mL/min. The
tolerance is <2%.
Service Manual
139
Chapter 4.3
Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases
Detector Gas Flow Control Modules
Hardware Configuration AC, Option 403
Figure 4.3-3 shows hardware configuration AC, option 403 for ECD, PID, FPD, and
FID with make-up.
Filter
Prop
Valve
Gage
F Sensor
H2 path
Gas 1
Restrictor
200 cc H2 @ 60 psi
Filter
Prop
Valve
Gage
F Sensor
Air path
Gas 2
Restrictor
600 cc Air @ 60 psi
Filter
Gas 3
Prop
Valve
ECD
FID
PID
FPD
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
3
1, 2, 3
2, 3
1, 2, 3
Gage
F Sensor
Make-up path
Restrictor
200 cc H2 @ 60 psi
77001-1605
980417
Figure 4.3-3. Hardware AC, Option 403 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID With Make-Up
For PID operation, He or N2 can be used as make-up, and is plumbed to the Gas 3
input. Sheath gas is connected to the Gas 2 input. The H2 path is not used.
Calibration
The AC module uses H2 as Gas 1. Gas 1 is calibrated at 30 mL/min and 100 mL/min.
The tolerance is <2%.
Gas 2 is calibrated using air. Gas 2 is calibrated at 90 mL/min and 300 mL/min. The
tolerance is <2%.
Gas 3 is calibrated using N2. Gas 3 is calibrated at 13.5 mL/min and 45 mL/min. The
tolerance is <2%.
140
Service Manual
Chapter 4.3
Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases
Detector Gas Flow Control Modules
Hardware Configuration AD, Option 404
Figure 4.3-4 shows hardware configuration AD, option 404 for NPD, ECD, PID, FPD,
and FID without make-up.
Filter
Prop
Valve
Gage
P Sensor
H2 path
Gas 1
Restrictor
10 cc H2 @ 60 psi
Filter
Prop
Valve
Gage
P Sensor
Air path
Gas 2
Restrictor
600 cc Air @ 60 psi
Filter
Gas 3
Prop
Valve
NPD
PID
FPD
FID
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
1,
2,
2,
2,
2, 3
3
3 (H2)
3 (H2)
Gage
P Sensor
Make-up path
Restrictor
200 cc H2 @ 60 psi
77001-1606
980417
Figure 4.3-4. Hardware AD, Option 404 for NPD, ECD, PID, FPD, and FID Without Make-Up
For PID operation, He or N2 may be used as make-up, and is plumbed to the Gas 3
input. He or N2 may also be used as sheath gas, and is plumbed to the Gas 2 input. The
H2 path is not used.
For FPD and FID operation, the H2 path is not used. Instead, H2 is plumbed to the
Gas 3 path.
Calibration
The AD module is calibrated using H2 as Gas 1. Gas 1 is calibrated at 1.5 mL/min and
5 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%.
Gas 2 is calibrated using air. Gas 2 is calibrated at 90 mL/min and 300 mL/min. The
tolerance is <2%.
Gas 3 is calibrated using N2. Gas 3 is calibrated at 13.5 mL/min and 45 mL/min. The
tolerance is <2%.
Service Manual
141
Chapter 4.3
Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases
Detector Gas Flow Control Modules
Hardware Configuration AE
Figure 4.3-5 shows hardware configuration AE, which is used for auxiliary gas
control.
Filter
Prop
Valve
Filter
Prop
Valve
Filter
Prop
Valve
Gage
P Sensor
Gage
P Sensor
Gage
P Sensor
7700
98
Figure 4.3-5. Hardware AE for Auxiliary Gas Control
This module is used for auxiliary gas control. This module is recognized by the GC
controller when mounted in detector position three. It includes up to three
electronically controlled pressure regulators on a single module. It is necessary to
supply this gas to an external restrictor to achieve flow control.
142
Service Manual
Chapter 4.3
Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases
Detector Gas Connections
Detector Gas Connections
The following table simplifies the versatility of the different gas modules. The left
column describes the information supplied in the column or row to the right of the first
column. When the GC is configured for a specific detector/gas module, the
microprocessor will automatically turn of the appropriate gas flow path to the detector.
For example, an FID used with an AD module would require that H2 be connected to
the input fitting labeled Mkup. Or, an ECD used with an AB module would require
that the make-up/detector gas be connected to the input fitting labeled H2.
Table 4.3-1. Detector Gas Connections
Detector Type:
FID
ECD
NPD
Installed Module:
AB
AC
AD
AA
AB
AC
AD
AD
Connect Hydrogen to
fitting labeled:
H2
H2
Mkup
—
—
—
—
H2
Connect Air to fitting
labeled:
Air
Air
Air
—
—
—
—
Air
Connect Make-up gas to1
fitting labeled:
—
Mkup
—
Mkup
H2
Mkup
Mkup
Mkup
Detector Type:
FPD
PID
TCD
Installed Module:
AB
AC
AD
AA
AB
AC
AD
AB
Connect Hydrogen to
fitting labeled:
H2
H2
Mkup
—
—
—
—
—
Connect Air to fitting
labeled:
Air
Air
Air
—
—
Air
—
—
Connect Make-up gas to
fitting labeled:
—
—
—
—
Mkup
Mkup
Mkup
Mkup
Connect Sheath gas to2
fitting labeled:
—
—
—
—
Air
—
Air
—
1.
2.
For ECD detectors, the make-up gas is N2 or 5% CH4/Ar.
For PID detectors, the sheath gas is N2 or He.
WARNING! Hydrogen is a potentially dangerous gas. Refer to Using Hydrogen on page xxiv for
safety information.
Service Manual
143
Handshake Cables
This chapter contains information regarding the different types of handshake cables
and connections used with the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 Handshake Cable ................................................ 146
TRACE to TSQ Handshake Cable............................................................................ 147
TRACE to Generic Data System Remote Start ........................................................ 148
TRACE to GCQ........................................................................................................ 149
Autosampler Handshake Cables ............................................................................... 150
Service Manual
145
Chapter 4.4
Handshake Cables
TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 Handshake Cable
TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 Handshake Cable
MINIDIN 6 POS (M)
HP - DB25
3
3
5
1
3
22
4
21
(HP - DB25)
5
6
1
2
3
PIN 13
PIN 25
PIN 1
PIN 14
4
MINIDIN 6 POS (M)
.650 O.D. MAX
CABLE ASSEMBLY
REMOTE START
TRACE 2000 TO TEKMAR
3000
Figure 4.4-1. TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 handshake cable, # b119521-0002
146
Service Manual
Chapter 4.4
Handshake Cables
TRACE to TSQ Handshake Cable
TRACE to TSQ Handshake Cable
3
6
1
4
7
2
8
5
COLOR CODE :
MD-8P
REMOTE START IN
INHIBIT READY
GROUND
START RUN
READY OUT
END RUN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
N/A 8
SHELL
PURPLE
BLACK
YELLOW
ORANGE
BLUE
GREEN
BROWN
RED
DRAIN
TRACE - TSQ
INTERFACE
3801 - 4004
Figure 4.4-2. TRACE to TSQ handshake cable, #3801-4004
Service Manual
147
Chapter 4.4
Handshake Cables
TRACE to Generic Data System Remote Start
TRACE to Generic Data System Remote Start
3
6
1
4
7
2
8
5
COLOR CODE :
MD-8P
REMOTE START IN
INHIBIT READY
GROUND
START RUN
READY OUT
END RUN
N/A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SHELL
BROWN
RED
ORANGE
YELLOW
GREEN
BLUE
PURPLE
BLACK
23043457 GC INTEGRATOR START
Figure 4.4-3. TRACE to generic data system remote start, #23043457
148
Service Manual
Chapter 4.4
Handshake Cables
TRACE to GCQ
TRACE to GCQ
3
6
1
4
5
9
1
6
7
2
8
5
PIN OUT :
MD-8, MALE
DE-9, MALE
2ND
3
INH_READY 2
ST_RUN
4
SHELL
3
6
4
5
SHELL
TRACE GENERIC TO GCQ REMOTE
3801 - 4003
Figure 4.4-4. TRACE to GCQ, # 3801-4003
Service Manual
149
Chapter 4.4
Handshake Cables
Autosampler Handshake Cables
Autosampler Handshake Cables
THE PRIMARY AS IS THE
ONE INTERFACED TO THE
AS/GC HANDSHAKE INPUT
SECONDARY AS
TWIN OUTPUT
TWIN OUTPUT
GND
GC READY
INJECT OUT
12
13
19
20
24
(AUX)
*
PRIMARY AS
*
*
*
12
13
19
20
24
TWIN OUTPUT
TWIN OUTPUT
GND
GC READY
INJECT OUT
(AUX)
Two independent autosampler (AS or HS) use these
connections to allow independent operation of either as
without moving the AS/GC Handshake Cable. The
GC/AS cable should be conneted to the Primary AS. The
Primary AS must remain turned on with power even
though it may not be used.
Figure 4.4-5. Connections for AS2000 Gemini Interconnect Cable and Dual Autosampler Start
Cable
150
Service Manual
Autosampler Handshake Cables
Service Manual
Chapter 4.4
Handshake Cables
151
SECTION
V
Electronic Board
Description
This section provides a description of the electronic boards in the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.1, Analytical Unit, describes the Analytical Unit of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.2, Control Unit, describes the Control Unit of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.3, Motherboard, describes the Motherboard of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.4, Central Processing Unit (CPU), describes the PCB for the
Central Processing Unit (CPU) of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.5, Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O, chapter describes the
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.6, Power Control Module, describes the PCB for the Power
Control Module (PCM) of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.7, Digital Pressure Flow Control, describes the PCB for the
Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.8, Keypad and Display Panel, describes the PCB for the Keypad
and Display Panel of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.9, Theory of Detector Cards, describes the Flame Ionization
Detector (FID) controller of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.10, Flame Ionization Detector Controller, describes the Electron
Capture Detector (ECD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.11, Electron Capture Detector Controller, describes the Nitrogen
Phosphorous Detector (NPD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.12, Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller, contains a
representative block diagram for the following 3 detectors (FPD, PID, and
TCD).
Chapter 5.13, Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD), describes the
Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.14, Photoionization Detector Controller (PID), describes the
Photoionization Detector (PID) controller of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.15, Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD), describes
the Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) controller of the TRACE GC
2000.
Chapter 5.16, Thermocouple Preamplifiers, describes the PCB for the
thermocouple preamplifiers of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 5.17, On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator, describes the PCB for
an on-column semiautomatic actuator of the TRACE GC 2000.
Special Printing Instructions:
All schematics in Section 5 (Electronic Board Description) must be
printed on Tabloid size paper in order to be viewed correctly. This applies
only to the schematics sections of Section 5. The Section 5 chapters
themselves can be printed on normal Letter or A4 Letter size paper.
Schematic Drawings List
Use this table for a listing of all schematics and component layouts in each
chapter of Section V. The drawing and layout numbers have been included
and chapter numbers are noted for easy reference.
PCB
Drawing
Layout
Chapter
Analytical Unit
Wiring Diagram
SC750
—
5.1
Control Unit
Wiring Diagram
SC751
—
5.2
Motherboard
119828E
119826
5.3
BKPLN-Right
Motherboard (alternate)
119828E
119991
5.3
CPU
Central Processor Unit
119825B
119823
5.4
TF & DIO
Temperature Feedback
& Digital I/O
119822E
119820
5.5
Thermocouple Amplifier
119834
119832
5.5
RN4 Temperature Stabilizer
119978
119976
5.5
BKPLN-Standard
Description
PCM
Power Control Module
119837D
119835
5.6
DPFC
Digital Pressure Flow
Control
SE 1391 sh.2
PC 1111
5.7
KYPD & DISP
Keypad and Display Panel
119841B
FID
Flame Ionization Detector
SE 1388 sh.4
PC 1105
5.9
ECD
Electron Capture Detector
SE 1389 sh.5
PC 1106
5.10
NPD
Nitrogen Phosphorus
Detector
SE 1424 sh.5
PC 1107
5.11
FPD
Flame Photometric Detector
SE 1436 sh.4
PC 1109
5.12
PID
Photoionization Detector
SE 1437 sh.5
PC 1437
5.13
TCD
Thermal Conductivity
Detector
SE 1390 sh.3
PC 1113
5.14
Thermocouple
Preamplifiers
119834E
119832
5.15
On-Column Semiautomatic
Actuator
119947B
119945
5.16
NOTE
5.8
Schematics and component layouts are located in the
Schematics and Component Layout section of the chapters
listed in the table above.
Analytical Unit
This chapter describes the Analytical Unit of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
General Description .................................................................................................. 158
Service Manual
157
Chapter 5.1
Analytical Unit
General Description
General Description
The TRACE GC 2000 Analytical Unit is divided in four main compartments:
•
Oven compartment
•
Injector/Detector (INJ/DET) cassette
•
Digital Pressure Flow Control/Detector Gas Flow Control (DPFC/DGFC)
compartment
•
Power Control Module (PCM) compartment
The following parts are located in the Oven compartment:
•
Oven fan
•
Oven motor
•
Oven heater
•
Oven temperature sensor
The following parts are located in the INJ/DET cassette:
•
Two injectors
•
Two base bodies for detectors
•
Heaters
•
Temperature sensors
The following parts are located in the DPFC/DGFC compartment:
•
Main DPFC PCB
•
Two DPFC modules (carrier gases)
•
Three DGFC modules (detector gases)
The following parts are located in the Power Control Module compartment:
•
Main input voltage components (breaker, filter, and others)
•
Power supply
•
SSR devices
The TRACE GC 2000 Wiring Diagram (see next page) illustrates internal cables and
connectors used to connect all heaters, temperature sensors, boards, fans and
transformers.
158
Service Manual
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
FIRMA/VISTO
DATA
FAIR-RATE
P/N 0443167251
GI/VE
FAN OF
REAR PANEL
GI/VE
FC1281
S.P.I.
FC1293
FC1262-J34 BP
FC367-L=500 J33 BP
FC1261-J32 BP
FC1271
J37 BP NPD DET
OVEN RTD
TC PTV-FC1277
DET B RTD
INLET B RTD
J12 BP
DET A RTD
J21 BP
P6
STEPPER MOTOR
FC1275 J18 BP
FC1051 - L=650
FC1032 J4
OC ACT PCB
FC1032 J3
OC ACT PCB
J20 BP
FC1263-J29 BP
FC1265-J31 BP
FC1265
FC803 - L=1200
FC428
FC428
P9
FC1293-J30 BP
P1
CARR.1-RIGHT
FC367
L=150
P3
DET.1-RIGHT
L=250
SEC COOL
VALVE
P5
DET.3-AUX
L=250
EPC P.C.B.
FC367
P4
DET.2-LEFT
L=150
P2
CARR.2-LEFT
2 x FC1032
FC803 - L=1200
FC1282
P8
A1
B2
B1
N
L
OC1
L
A2
POWER
OC2
N
SAFETY RELAY
MAIN FILTER
FC1263
K1
S1-2
J22
BREAKER
FC1275
FC1288
GI/VE
FC1051
J2
FC1277
TB2
DET B
DET B
DET A
DET A
INLET B
INLET B
J16
J17
1
II ˚
J19
K1-A2
FC1288
FC1277
HEATER
HEATER
DUAL NPD
TRF
K1-A1
K1-B1
S1-4
S1-2
FC1281
INLET A
FC1289
J11
TB1
J13
INLET B COOL FAN
VALVE OVEN
JET SEPARATOR
1
J18
K1-B2
Q1-3
Q1-2
I˚
J8
COOL FAN
FC1267
FC1282
OVEN HEATER
J15
GI/VE
J16 = SINGLE VOLTAGE
BLOWER MOTOR
J20
J21
J22
J23
RTD
RTD
Jumper 1-3 for Ignitor TRF
Jumper 2-3 for Main TRF
J9
J14
J19
OVEN BLOWER
STEPPER MOTOR
J7
INLET A
HEATER
RTD
OVEN HEATER
J20
FC1290
FC1274 L=250
1
J10
Q1-2
GI/VE
FC1274 L=250
Jumper 1-3 for Single NPD
Jumper 2-3 for Dual NPD
J6
J5
J12
Q1-3
FC1274 L=250
Jumper 1-2 for 120V
Jumper 2-3 for 230V
1
THREE WAY
VALVE
SVE
VALVE
1
J4
OVEN
HEATER
J3
J1
FC1282
OVEN BLOWER
FC1051 - L=650
FC1275
FC1288
RTD
S1-3
S1-4
J18
J20
J22
J21
S1-3
S1-1
FC803
2 x FC1032
S1-1
J21
COIL
FC1271
POWER CONTROL P.C.B.
J24
POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.
II˚
I˚
FC1290
FID TRF
INLET B
DET B
DET A
FC1269
INLET A
J2
J1
FC1267
FC1289
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
GC TRACE 2000 Series
DOOR SWITCH
PEZZI
assieme
A.Lamperti
CODICE
data
21/7/98
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
ANALITICAL UNIT (230V)
particolare
A2
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
Wiring Diagram
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
modif.
disegno n
SC750
159
Control Unit
This chapter describes the Control Unit of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
General Description .................................................................................................. 162
Service Manual
161
Chapter 5.2
Control Unit
General Description
General Description
The primary requirement for any GC is multiple independent temperature controlled
zones. A GC also needs various input and output signals to synchronize and control
peripheral devices. In the TRACE GC 2000, a Motorola 68332 microprocessor
controls all functions.
NOTE
Throughout this manual, the term microprocessor pertains to the Motorola 68332, unless
otherwise specified.
Figure 5.2-1 shows a generalized block diagram of the TRACE GC 2000 base unit.
Figure 5.2-1. Block Diagram of Base Unit
The base unit contains six PCBs in the main electronic chassis, plus the Power Control
Module (PCM). The main electronic chassis contains the following PCBs:
•
Motherboard
•
Central processing unit
•
Temperature feedback and digital I/0
•
Detector controllers (three boards)
The Power Control Module (PCM) contains an additional PCB. The functional blocks
shown in Figure 5.2-1 are distributed among the PCBs.
162
Service Manual
Chapter 5.2
Control Unit
General Description
Figure 5.2-2 illustrates the circuit functions in greater detail.
Figure 5.2-2. Expanded Block Diagram of Circuit Functions
The TRACE GC 2000 Block Diagram and the wiring drawing SC751 (see next two
pages) show all internal cables and connectors used to connect all boards.
Service Manual
163
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
STEWARD
P/N 28A2029-0A0
FC1261-J1 PWR
3WAY
J12
J6
DISP
LAY
J7
FC1265-P9 EPC
SVE VLV
FC1275
J34
J8
GI/VE
FC1051-L=650
FC803-L=1200
SEC COOL VLV
FC1032 OPEN VLV
FC1032 CLOSE VLV
FC1293-P6 EPC
STEPPER
MOTOR
FC1294 OC ACT
J13 PWR
FC367-L=500
FC1263
P8 EPC
FC1262-J11 PWR
DET A RTD
DET B RTD
OVEN RTD
TC PTV-FC1277
FC1271 TRASFORMER
INLET B RTD
VLV
FAIR-RITE
P/N 0443665806
GI/VE EARTH
J5
J4
J3
J1
J2
J46 J47
J45
J43
HYDROGEN
SENSOR
CPU BOARD
DETECTOR C
DETECTOR B
DETECTOR A
J19
J25
J18
J26
J17
J27
J16
J28
J38
J21
J33
8P
J30
AS SIMUL.
J3
SIGNALS
J4
J10
J1A
J32
AUTOSAMPLER
6P
OC ACT P.C.B.
THERMOCOUPLE
CARD ADAPTER
GENERIC
HANDSHAKE
J40
J42 = INLET A RTD
J46 = JET SEP. RTD
J47 = VLV OVEN RTD
J37
FAIR-RITE
P/N 0443166651
START/STOP INT
238.450.40
FC1293 (GND)
J36
FC1278
J31
J2
J35
TIMED EVENTS
SUB "D"
15 P. MALE
J39
J15
(close)
TEMP FEEDBACK BOARD
J41 J42
GI/VE EARTH
J23
J24
TB1
RTD
INPUTS
POWER UNIT
J44
J22
J20
VALVE OUTPUTS
FAIR-RITE
P/N 0443166651
J14
GC PHASE
(open)
KEYB
OAR
D and
J29
J48
OVEN CRYO
4P
VALVE
J11
INLET CRYO
4P
VALVE
BACKPLANE P.C.B.
CPU CARD
POL
SOURCE
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
GND
10V
1V
0V
SIGNAL
GND
10V
1V
0V
GND
10V
1V
0V
FC445
FC445
FC1276
AUTOSAMPLER
POL/IGN
COMPUTER
NPD CARD
HEATER
ECD CARD
FID CARD
HWD CARD
FPD CARD
PID CARD
FC1266
NPD DET SECONDARY
L=2500
COMPUTER
FC1276
L=1500
AUTOSAMPLER
FC445
FC445
DENOMINAZIONE
POS.
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
GC TRACE 2000 Series
assieme
A.Lamperti
CODICE
data
21/7/98
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
CONTROL UNIT
A2
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Wiring Diagram
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
modif.
disegno n
SC751
165
DET A BASE
2
DET_BASE_B_HI-9TB2-8)
DET_BASE_B_LO_(TB2-7)
VALVE_OV_HI_(TB1-4)
VALVE_OV_LO_(TB1-3)
DET B BASE
1
2
JET SEPARATOR
1
2
PTV_HI_48V_(J7-1)
PTV_LO_48V_(J7-2)
1
2
PRI2_HI
PRI2_LO
SEC2_HI
SEC2_LO
PRI1_HI
PRI1_LO
PRI2_HI
PRI2_LO
PIN HEADER - INTERNAL
CS0*
+5VDC
MOSI
+5VDC
MISO
GND
SCLK
GND
SCLK*
GND
TRACE
J48
SPI
ISOLATOR
BOARD
VALVE OVEN
1
2
3
1
2
3
PRI1_HI
PRI1_LO
Voltage Selection Header
J?
J?
Heaters For Temperature
Controlled Zones
JET_SEP_HI_(TB1-2)
JET_SEP_LO_(TB1-1)
J12
STEPPER
MOTOR
TF and DIO
(TC Amps Optional)
CPU
Detector C
Detector B
Detector A
J3-1
Line Voltage
J3-2
Selection
J3-3
J4-1
NPD
J4-2
Transformer
J4-3
Selection
Power Module
OC FAN
OC FAN
OVEN
BLOWER
TRACE GC 2000
Block Diagram
+5VDCB
GNDB
+15VDCB
J29
15VRETB
EPC
-15VDCB
POWER
SPARE
+15V_VALVE
15V_VRET
1
Power Control PCB
DC_8.5VAC_2 J37
DC_8.5VAC_0 NPD DET 3
DC_8.5VAC_1 XFMR SEC
2
DET_BASE_A_HI_(TB2-6)
DET_BASE_A_LO_(TB2-5)
TPU0
TPU1
TPU2
TPU3
TPU4
TPU5
TPU6
TPU7
TPU8
TPU9
TPU10
TPU15
QSM_CS6*
QSM_SCLK
QSM_MOSI
QSM_MISO
WD_TIM
OVERTEMP
VMON
IA_CF
IB_CF
+5V_PRES
+15V_PRES
+24V_PRES
-15V_PRES
DB_8.5VAC_2 J36
DB_8.5VAC_0 NPD DET 2
DB_8.5VAC_1 XFMR SEC
OV_HTR_LO_(J18)
SM_PH0
SM_PH1
SM_DP0&1
SM_PH2
SM_PH3
SM_DP2&3
DA_8.5VAC_2 J35
DA_8.5VAC_0 NPD DET 1
DA_8.5VAC_1 XFMR SEC
OV_TRIAC_MT2_(J20)
OV_TRIAC_G_(J19)
TPU0_(J13-7)
TPU1_(J13-8)
TPU2_(J13-9)
TPU3_(J13-10)
TPU4_(J13-11)
TPU5_(J13-12)
TPU6_(J13-13)
TPU7_(J13-14)
TPU8_(J13-15)
TPU9_(J13-16)
TPU10_(J13-17)
TPU15_(J13-20)
QSM_CS6_(J13-1)
QSM_SCLK_(J13-4)
QSM_MOSI_(J13-2)
QSM_MISO_(J13-3)
WD_TIM_(J13-5)
OVERTEMP_(J13-6)
VMON_(J13-23)
IA_CF_(J13-21)
IB_CF_(J13-22)
+5V_PRES_(J13-18)
+15V_PRES_(J13-19)
+24V_PRES_(J13-24)
-15V_PRES_(J13-25)
J32
POWER CONTROL
MODULE
DRIVE SIGNALS
INLET B
OVEN_INT_COM_(J8-1)
OVEN_INT_NO_(J8-2)
TB1
H2 MONITOR
DETA_AX48
DETA_AX48
DETA_AXRT
DETA_AXRT
DETB_AX48
DETB_AX48
DETB_AXRT
DETB_AXRT
DETC_AX48
DETC_AX48
DETC_AXRT
DETC_AXRT
8.0VAC_2
8.0VAC_2
8.0VAC_1
8.0VAC_1
1
INLET_B_HI_(TB2-4)
INLET_B_LO_(TB2-3)
J6-1
Ignitor/Main
J6-2
Transformer
J6-3
Selection
H2_SENS
GND
J34
POWER SUPPLY
2
+5VDC
+5VDC
GND
GND
+15VDC
15VRET
-15VDC
+24VDC
+24VDC
24VRET
24VRET
+24VUN
+24VUN
24VUNRET
24VUNRET
SPARE
INLET A
SPARE_(J11-9)
24V_RET_(J11-14)
24V_RET_(J11-15)
+24V_(J11-1)
+24V_(J11-16)
-15V_VLV_(J11-12)
-15V_VLV_(J11-13)
-15V_VLV_RET_(J11-10)
-15V_VLV_RET_(J11-11)
-15VDC_(J11-2)
15RET_(J11-3)
+15VDC_(J11-4)
GND_(J11-5)
GND_(J11-6)
+5VDC_(J11-7)
+5VDC_(J11-8)
1
INLET_A_HI_(TB2-1)
INLET_A_LO(TB2-1)
8.0VAC_1_(J1-9)
8.0VAC_1_(J1-10)
8.0VAC_2_(J1-11)
8.0VAC_2_(J1-12)
DETC_AXRT_(J1-13)
DETC_AXRT_(J1-14)
DETC_AX48_(J1-15)
DETC_AX48_(J1-16)
DETB_AXRT_(J1-1)
DETB_AXRT_(J1-2)
DETB_AX48_(J1-3)
DETB_AX48_(J1-4)
DETA_AXRT_(J1-5)
DETA_AXRT_(J1-6)
DETA_AX48_(J1-7)
DETA_AX48_(J1-8)
2
INLET_B_OC_FAN_HI_(TB1-6)
INLET_B_OC_FAN_LO_(TB1-5)
OVEN
+5V_(J10-1)
+5V_(J10-2)
+5V_(J10-3)
RET_(J10-4)
RET_(J10-5)
RET_(J10-6)
RET_(J10-7)
+15V_(J10-8)
+15V_(J10-9)
-15V_RET_(J10-10)
-15V_(J10-11)
KEY_(J10-12)
+24V_(J10-13)
1
BREAKER
INLET_A_OC_FAN_HI_(TB1-8)
INLET_A_OC_FAN_LO_(TB1-7)
1
PS_LINE_HI_(J24-2)
PS_LINE_LO_(J24-1)
FAN_LINE_LO_(J23-2)
FAN_LINE_HI_(J23-1)
RELAY_CONT+_(J2-2)
RELAY_CONT-_(J2-1)
BLOWER_LEAD_1_(J17-1)
BLOWER_LEAD_2_(J17-2)
BLOWER_LEAD_3_(J17-3)
BLOWER_LEAD_4_(J17-4)
BLOWER_LEAD_5_(J17-5)
OVEN
TRIAC
LINE_IN_SW_HI_(J20)
LINE_IN_SW_LO_(J18)
XFMR2_P1_HI_(J14-1)
XFMR2_P1_LO_(J14-2)
XFMR2_P2_HI_(J14-3)
XFMR2_P2_LO_(J15-4)
RELAY
XFMR1_P1_HI_(J15-1)
XFMR1_P1_LO_(J15-2)
XFMR1_P2_HI_(J15-3)
XFMR1_P2_LO_(J15-4)
XFMR1_8VAC_1_(J5-1)
XFMR1_8VAC_2_(J5-2)
XFMR1_48VAC_LO_(J5-3)
XFMR1_48V_HI_(J5-4)
LINE_IN_HI_(J21)
LINE_IN_LO_(J22)
+24V
NC-KEY
-15V
-15V_RET
+12V
+12V
RET
RET
RET
RET
+5V
+5V
+5V
166
PL_HI
PL_LO
CHASSIS
LINE FILTER
POWER
J30
EPC
COMM
J31
EPC
VALVE
CONTROL
J15
INLET A
VALVE 1
J16
INLET A
VALVE 2
J17
INLET A
VALVE 3
J18
INLET B
VALVE 1
J19
INLET B
VALVE 2
J20
INLET B
VALVE 3
J22
DET A
VALVE 1
J23
DET A
VALVE 2
J24
DET A
VALVE 3
J25
DET B
VALVE 1
J26
DET B
VALVE 2
J27
DET B
VALVE 3
J28
DET C
VALVE
J21
THREE
WAY
VALVE
TWV
CS10*
MOSI
MISO
SCLK
GND
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
+24VUN
IA_V1
+24VUN
IA_V2
+24VUN
IB_V1
+24VUN
IB_V2
+24VUN
IA_V1
+24VUN
IA_V2
+24VUN
IA_V3
+24VUN
IB_V1
+24VUN
IB_V2
+24VUN
IB_V3
+24VUN
DA_G1
+24VUN
DA_G2
+24VUN
DA_G3
+24VUN
DB_G1
+24VUN
DB_G2
+24VUN
DB_G3
+24VUN
DC_XM
+24VUN
FAN
J40 AUTOSAMPLER
SIGNALS
SUPPLY
J39 GENERIC
HANDSHAKE
J33
POWER CONTROL
MODULE CONTROL
SIGNALS
J13
KBRD
&
DISP
MOTHERBOARD
J47
VALVE OVEN RTD
J42
INLET A RTD
J41
OVEN RTD
SPARE
RUNNING
END_RUN
RDY_OUT
ST_RUN
GND
INH_RDY
RMT_ST
SPARE
RDY_OUT
ST_RUN
GND
INH_RDY
RMT_ST
J11 INLET
CRYO VALVE
+5VPU
TPU12
J10 OVEN
CRYO VALVE
+5VPU
TPU11
J38
TIMED
EVENTS
J14
GC
PHASE
TEV8
GND
TEV7
GND
TEV6
GND
TEV5
GND
TEV4
GND
TEV3
GND
TEV2
GND
TEV1
4 PIN DIN CONNECTOR
GC_PH0
GC_PH1
GC_PH2
GC_PH3
GC_PH4
GC_PH5
GND
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
CHASSI
DISP_SER
+5VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
GND
GND
GND
DISP_CLK
CS1*
SCLK
MOSI
MISO
CHASSI
J46
JET SEP RTD
JS_RTD+
RET10
J45
DET B BASE RTD
DB_RTD+
RET6
J44
DET A BASE RTD
DA_RTD+
RET5
J43
INLET B RTD
IB_RTD+
RET3
T
T
T
T
T
T
MOTOR
STEPPER
15V_VRET
+15V_VALVE
SPARE
-15VDCB
15RETB
+15VDCB
GNDB
+5VDCB
CS10*
MOSI
MISO
SCLK
GND
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
+24VUN
IA_V1
+24VUN
IA_V2
+24VUN
IB_V1
+24VUN
IB_V2
DOOR LOCK
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
VALVE
Miscellaneous Gas Control Valves
EPC MODULE
Electronics Compartment
8 PIN DIN CONNECTOR
6 PIN DIN CONNECTOR
4 PIN DIN CONNECTOR
Rear
Panel
15 PIN "D" CONNECTOR
PIN HEADER - INTERNAL
CHASSI
DISP_SER
+5VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
GND
GND
DISPLAY MODULE
GND
DISP_CLK
CS1*
SCLK
MOSI
MISO
CHASSIS
VO_RTD+
RET11
OV_RTD+
RET0
IA_RTD+
RET1
1
PTV (48V)
2
SEC1_HI
SEC1_LO
SEC1_A
SEC1_CT
SEC1_B
SEC2_A
SEC2_CT
SEC2_B
T
RTD Feedback for Temperature Controlled Zones
Motherboard
This chapter describes the Motherboard of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 168
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 173
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 173
Service Manual
167
Chapter 5.3
Motherboard
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
The Motherboard provides communication between the TRACE GC 2000 PCBs and
external devices.
NOTE
The schematic for the motherboard is labeled backplane. Throughout this manual, the term
motherboard will be used instead of backplane; however, the two terms refer to the same thing.
Most of the temperature control channels use RTDs (PT100) as feedback elements. All
of these signals are routed through the motherboard. Most are connected to the
motherboard in an area near PCB connector J1. Certain detectors require an additional
temperature control channel. These detectors route the signals through the detector
PCB and onto the motherboard. Any time that a temperature channel does not have an
RTD connected, the RTD signal must be shorted to ground. In the connector area near
J1, shorted connectors are installed wherever an open RTD connector exists. For the
detectors, there are jumpers (J6-J8) located adjacent to each of the detector card
connectors (J3–J5). When a detector is installed that requires an additional heater, the
jumper should be positioned on the top two pins. When a detector is installed that does
not require an additional heater, the jumper should be positioned on the bottom two
pins.
Three connectors (J3–J5) on the motherboard are dedicated to detector PCBs. Any
detector card can be installed in any of these three locations. If the detector card is for
a Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector (NPD), then a cable from the optional nitrogen
phosphorous (NP) transformer must be plugged into the appropriate NP power
connector (J35-J37). There are three NP power connectors on the motherboard, one
for each detector card location. These are located at the bottom of the motherboard
adjacent to each detector card location.
One connector (J2) is dedicated to the CPU PCB. One connector (J1) is dedicated to
the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB. See Schematics and
Component Layout.
A set of connectors is provided for ON/OFF control of the various gases when the
DPFC option is not installed. These are located on the right end of the motherboard in
an area labeled VALVE OVEN FTD. Table 5.3-1 indicates the function of each nonDPFC gas ON/OFF control connector.
168
Service Manual
Chapter 5.3
Motherboard
Theory of Operations
Table 5.3-1. Non-DPFC Gas ON/OFF Control Connectors
Connector / Description
Valve Voltage
J15 / Inlet A Valve 1
24 Volt
J16 / Inlet A Valve 2
24 Volt
J17 / Inlet A Valve 3
24 Volt
J18 / Inlet B Valve 1
24 Volt
J19 / Inlet B Valve 2
24 Volt
J20 / Inlet B Valve 3
24 Volt
J22 / Detector A Valve 1
12 Volt
J23 / Detector A Valve 2
12 Volt
J24 / Detector A Valve 3
12 Volt
J25 / Detector B Valve 1
12 Volt
J26 / Detector B Valve 2
12 Volt
J27 / Detector B Valve 3
12 Volt
J28 / Detector C
12 Volt
J21 / Three Way Valve
24 Volt
In the lower right corner of the motherboard is a connection (See the PCB
Motherboard/Backplane Standard [119826] Layout for J48 in the section labeled
On_Col Semi Auto Actuator and/or SPI Isolator Board), for a piggy-back PCB, which
controls the semiautomatic on-column actuator. Two piggy-back boards may be
stacked if the TRACE GC 2000 has two semiautomatic on-column actuators.
Five connectors are positioned on the motherboard to provide control signals to
peripheral devices from the rear panel of the TRACE GC 2000. These connectors are:
Service Manual
•
Timed Event
•
Generic Handshake
•
Autosampler
•
Oven Cryo Valve
•
Inlet Cryo Valve
169
Chapter 5.3
Motherboard
Theory of Operations
Figure 5.3-1 shows the Timed Event connector, which provides generically timed
control signals.
Figure 5.3-1. Front View of Timed Event Connector (J38, 15-Pin Female)
Individual pin assignments for the Timed Event connector, and associated control
signals and electrical characteristics, are indicated in Table 5.3-2.
Table 5.3-2. Timed Event Connector
Pin Number
Signal
Electrical Characteristics
1
TEV 1
Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink
3
TEV 2
Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink
5
TEV 3
Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink
7
TEV 4
Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink
9
TEV 5
Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink
11
TEV 6
Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink
13
TEV 7
Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink
15
TEV 8
Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink
2,4,6,8,10,12,14
GND
Figure 5.3-2 shows the Generic Handshake connector (J39, MINIDIN 8-Pin Female
Circular), which provides generic handshake input/output control signals.
Figure 5.3-2. Front View of Generic Handshake Connector
NOTE
170
Signals on the Generic Handshake connector and the Autosampler connector are electrically
parallel.
Service Manual
Chapter 5.3
Motherboard
Theory of Operations
Individual pin assignments for the Generic Handshake connector, and associated
control signals and electrical characteristics, are indicated Table 5.3-3.
Table 5.3-3. Generic Handshake Connector
Pin
Number
Signal
Electrical
Characteristics
1
Remote Start—This signal is an input to the
GC to signal that the run should start. Polarity
is software selectable.
TTL Input
2
Inhibit Ready—This signal is an input to the
GC to indicate that the GC is not ready to start
a run. Polarity is software selectable.
TTL Input
3
Ground
4
Start Run—This signal is an output from the
GC to signal external devices that a run has
started. Polarity is software selectable.
Open Collector, 20 V
Max, 150 mA
Current Sink
5
Ready Out—This signal is an output from the
GC to signal external devices that the GC is
ready to start a run. Polarity is software
selectable.
Open Collector, 20 V
Max, 150 mA
Current Sink
6
End Run—This signal is an output from the
GC to signal external devices that the GC run
has ended. Polarity is software selectable.
Open Collector, 20 V
Max, 150 mA
Current Sink
7
Prep Run—This signal is an output from the
GC to signal external devices that the GC is in
the Prep Run condition. Polarity is software
selectable.
Open Collector, 20 V
Max, 150 mA
Current Sink
8
Not Used
N/A
Figure 5.3-3 shows the Autosampler connector (J40, MINIDIN 6-Pin Female
Circular), which provides autosampler input/output control signals.
Figure 5.3-3. Front View of Autosampler Connector
NOTE
Service Manual
Signals on the Autosampler connector and the Generic Handshake connector are electrically
parallel.
171
Chapter 5.3
Motherboard
Theory of Operations
Individual pin assignments for the Autosampler connector, and associated control
signals and electrical drive capabilities, are indicated in Table 5.3-4.
Table 5.3-4. Autosampler Connector
Pin
Number
Electrical Drive
Capability
Signal
1
Remote Start—This signal is an input to the
GC to signal that the run should start. Polarity
is software selectable.
TTL Input
2
Inhibit Ready—This signal is an input to the
GC to indicate that the GC should not go
Ready. Polarity is software selectable.
TTL Input
3
Ground
4
Start Run—This signal is an output from the
GC to signal external devices that a run has
started. Polarity is software selectable.
Open Collector, 20 V
Max, 150 mA
Current Sink
5
Ready Out—This signal is an output from the
GC to signal external devices that the GC is
Ready to start a run. Polarity is software
selectable.
Open Collector, 20 V
Max, 150 mA
Current Sink
6
Not Used
N/A
Figure 5.3-4 shows the Oven Cryo Valve (J10, MINIDIN 4-Pin Female Circular) and
Inlet Cryo Valve connector (J11, MINIDIN 4-Pin Female Circular), which provide all
input/output control signals to control an external cryo valve module.
Figure 5.3-4. Front View of Oven Cryo Valve and Inlet Cryo Valve Connector
Pin assignments for both the Oven Cryo Valve and the Inlet Cryo Valve connectors are
indicated in Table 5.3-5.
Table 5.3-5. Oven Cryo Valve and Inlet Cryo Valve Connectors
Pin
Number
172
Signal
1
Current Drive
2,3
No Connect
4
Cryo Control Signal
Electrical Drive Capability
~10 mA drive for LED in Optoisolator
Service Manual
Chapter 5.3
Motherboard
Adjustment Procedures
Other connectors provide interchassis power distribution and communication. These
connectors are itemized in Table 5.3-6.
Table 5.3-6. Other Connectors
Connector
Function
J13
Communication with Keypad and Display Panel
J34
System Power Distribution to Motherboard
J29
Power to DPFC Module
J30
Communication with the DPFC
J31
Valve Control (ON/OFF) in the DPFC
J33
Communication with the Power Control Module
J12
Oven Stepper Motor Control
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary.
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the motherboard (backplane) is
listed below in Table 5.3-7. The number of drawings has been included for each
schematic and its corresponding layout. There are nine drawings for reference in this
section.
Table 5.3-7. Motherboard Schematics
Board
BKPLN-Standard
BKPLN-Right
NOTE
Service Manual
PN
Drawing
Layout
23648350
119828E, 1–7
119826, 1
119996-0001
119828E, 1–7
119991, 1
The last two drawings in this section are the layout of the motherboard.
One drawing is for the standard version, and the other is for the right version.
173
A
B
C
D
REV
1
ECO NO.
DATE
1
Initial Proto04-18-97
2
Alpha Hwr
05-29-97
DRN 4183
01-19-98
A
B
C
D
BY
CHK
1
ECO 31529
2-1-98
M GARRETT
ECO 31549
4-8-98
L BALDWIN
ECO 31552
4-8-98
L BALDWIN
J COTTRELL
2
2
3
3
M. GARRETT
M. GARRETT
4
01-19-98
04-10-97
TRACE,
BACKPLANE
4
E
119828
01-19-98
A
B
C
B
1
7
D
175
A
B
BLOCK
1
C
D
DIAGRAM, MOTHERBOARD
VALVE OUTPUTS
J15 - J28
J1
INLET
VALVE
GC PHASE
J14
EPC VALVE CTL
(SPI)
J31
TEMP
FEEDBACK
BOARD
RTD INPUTS
J41 - J47
SPI
PCB
2
J5
DETECTOR
B
DETECTOR
A
STEPPER MOTOR
CTRL
J12
IFACE
J13
DETECTOR
BUS
C
DETECTOR
BUS
B
DETECTOR
BUS
B
DETECTOR
BUS
A
DETECTOR
BUS
A
J30
PWR CTRL MOD
(SPI) J33
AUTOSAMPLER
J40
J4
DETECTOR
C
CPU
BOARD
EPC COMM
(SPI)
GEN HNDSHK
J39
J3
J2
CRYO
J11
KBD-DISPL
(SPI)
TIMED EVENTS
OUTPUTS J38
1
OVEN
CRYO
VALVE
J10
ISOLATOR
(SPII)
J9
ON-COL
SEMI-AUTO
ACTUATOR J9
CPU BUS
CPU BUS
DETECTOR
BUS
CPU BUS
A
2
CPU BUS
SPI ISO.
BOARD
+5VDC
GND
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
SPI BUS
3
NPD DET1
XFMR
J35
+5V
GND
+15V
-15V +24VDC
AGND 24VRET
4
SERIAL
EEPROM
3
+5VDC
GND
POWER CONTROL
MODULE INPUT
J34
+5V
GND
+15V
-15V
AGND
+24VDC
POWER CONTROL
MODULE INPUT
J32
+5V
GND
+15V
-15V
AGND
8.5VAC
0V
8.5VAC
+5V
GND +24VDC
+15V 24VRET
-15V 8.0VAC
48VAC
AGND
NPD DET2
XFMR
J36
8.5VAC
0V
8.5VAC
NPD DET3
XFMR
J37
8.5VAC
0V
8.5VAC
+5V
GND +24VDC
+15V 24VRET
-15V 8.0VAC
48VAC
AGND
+5V
GND +24VDC
+15V 24VRET
-15V 8.0VAC
48VAC
AGND
12-15-97
PWR BUS
PWR BUS
PWR BUS
4
24VRET
TRACE,
8.0VAC
BACKPLANE
48VAC
119828
A
176
B
C
2
D
7
A
B
C
D
TEMPERATURE-FEEDBACK BOARD CONNECTOR
J38
J1
-15VDC
15VRET
TEV6
TEV7
+24VDC
TEV8
TP27
TP81
TP83
TP85
TP87
TP82
TP84
TP86
1
-15V_VALVE
TP60
8
7
5
6
4
2
R7
3
Generic
Handshake
1
1
15
21.00W
1
TP59
R6
1
SHIELD
15
1.00W
2
CR23
1
2
J28
-15V_VALVE
J_DC_XM
1
2
-15V_VALVE
J_DB_V3
1
2
-15V_VALVE
J_DB_V2
1
2
-15V_VALVE
J_DB_V1
1
2
-15V_VALVE
J_DA_V3
1
2
-15V_VALVE
J_DA_V2
1
2
-15V_VALVE
J_DA_V1
1
2
CR21
2
Detector C
Valve
J27
Detector B
Valve 3
1
9 10 11
TP58
R5
15
21.00W
R4
15
21.00W
R3
15
21.00W
1
1
2
CR17
J26
Detector B
Valve 2
TP88
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-15V_VALVE
TP28
1
1
TP41
ST_RUN
RDY_OUT
END_RUN
RUNNING
J40
17
16
TP21
Timed Events
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
+24VDC
15VALVE_RET
24VRET
-15V_VALVE
RESET~
J39
RMT_ST~
INH_RDY
1
TEV5
1
SHIELD
To
To
To
To
To
To
J2
J33
J33
J33
J33
J33
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
TP57
RMT_ST~
INH_RDY
ST_RUN
RDY_OUT
TB1
H2_SENS
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
1
3
2
1
1
2
CR20
J25
Detector B
Valve 1
Autosampler
Signals
TP56
1
SHIELD
1
2
CR16
1
VMON
OVERTEMP
WD_TIM
IB_CF
IA_CF
TEV8
TEV7
TEV6
TEV5
TEV4
TEV3
TEV2
TEV1
TWV
DC_XM
DB_V3
DB_V2
DB_V1
DA_V3
DA_V2
DA_V1
IB_V3
IB_V2
IB_V1
IA_V3
IA_V2
IA_V1
H2_SENS
GC_PH5
GC_PH4
GC_PH3
GC_PH2
GC_PH1
GC_PH0
1
J24
Detector A
Valve 3
7 8 9
H2 Monitor
TP54
2
R1
1
15
1.00W
1
2
CR19
1
2
TP55
R2
1
15
21.00W
1
2
J23
CR13
1
Detector A
Valve 2
J22
Detector A
Valve 1
2
TP53
CR9
2
TP63
CR14
2
CR10
2
TP62
2
J47
Valve Oven RTD
(AD Ch 11)
VO_RTD+
RX4
RET11
2
1
GC_PH0
GC_PH1
GC_PH2
GC_PH3
GC_PH4
GC_PH5
J46
Jet Separator RTD
(AD Ch 10)
JS_RTD+
RX5
RET10
2
1
2
RET6
2
1
2
1
CR24
2
+24VDC
IA_V2
1
2
+24VDC
IA_V1
1
2
+24VDC
TWV
1
2
IB_V2
IB_V1
IA_V2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J17
Inlet A
Valve 3
J16
Inlet A
Valve 2
Inlet A
Valve 1
3
J21
1
CR22
2
1
CR18
2
1
Three Way
Valve
CR15
2
1
2
1
CR12
J31
IA_V1
+24VDC
+24VDC
+24VDC
+24VDC
To J5 - Det C Aux RTD
[5]
(AD Ch 9)
RET9
DBX_RTD+
+24VDC
[5]
To J4 - Det B Aux RTD
(AD Ch 8)
RET8
EPC
Valve Control
1
DAX_RTD+
RX3
1
2
Inlet B
Valve 1
J15
TP61
DCX_RTD+
RX1
+24VDC
IA_V3
Inlet B
Valve 2
J18
TP66
Det A Base RTD
(AD Ch 5)
DA_RTD+
RX2
1
2
J19
GC Phase
J44
RET5
+24VDC
IB_V1
Inlet B
Valve 3
Det B Base RTD
(AD Ch 6)
DB_RTD+
RX6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
1
1
J45
RX7
VO_RTD+
RET10_11
JS_RTD+
DCX_RTD+
RET8_9
DBX_RTD+
DAX_RTD+
RET6_7
DB_RTD+
DA_RTD+
RET3_5
IB_RTD+
IA_RTD+
RET0_1
OV_RTD+
CR8
J14
1
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[4]
[4] +5VDC
[4]
[4]
[4]
ALM1
[6]
1
[6]
1
J3.A25
J3.C26
J3.A26
J4.A25
J4.C26
J4.A26
J5.A25
J5.C26
J5.A26
J2.B11
J2.A11
J2.C10
J2.B10
J2.B9
U2.21
U2.37
+24VDC
IB_V2
1
1
TP65
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
To
2
BEEPER~
CR11
1
2
1
1
RUNNING
END_RUN
RDY_OUT
ST_RUN
INH_RDY
RMT_ST~
DETC_2
DETC_1
DETC_0
DETB_2
DETB_1
DETB_0
DETA_2
DETA_1
DETA_0
QSM_CS5~
QSM_CS4~
QSM_CS3~
QSM_CS2~
QSM_MISO
TFB_SCLK
TFB_MOSI
+24VDC
IB_V3
1
1
TP64
J20
1
1
4
TEV4
+15VDC
1
3
TEV3
+5VDC
1
2
TEV2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
1
C32
B32
A32
C31
B31
A31
C30
B30
A30
C29
B29
A29
C28
B28
A28
C27
B27
A27
C26
B26
A26
C25
B25
A25
C24
B24
A24
C23
B23
A23
C22
B22
A22
C21
B21
A21
C20
B20
A20
C19
B19
A19
C18
B18
A18
C17
B17
A17
C16
B16
A16
C15
B15
A15
C14
B14
A14
C13
B13
A13
C12
B12
A12
C11
B11
A11
C10
B10
A10
C9
B9
A9
C8
B8
A8
C7
B7
A7
C6
B6
A6
C5
B5
A5
C4
B4
A4
C3
B3
A3
C2
B2
A2
C1
B1
A1
TEV1
96
64
32
95
63
31
94
62
30
93
61
29
92
60
28
91
59
27
90
58
26
89
57
25
88
56
24
87
55
23
86
54
22
85
53
21
84
52
20
83
51
19
82
50
18
81
49
17
80
48
16
79
47
15
78
46
14
77
45
13
76
44
12
75
43
11
74
42
10
73
41
9
72
40
8
71
39
7
70
38
6
69
37
5
68
36
4
67
35
3
66
34
2
65
33
1
RMT_ST~
[5]
To J3 - Det A Aux RTD
(AD Ch 7)
RET7
J43
IB_RTD+
RX8
RET3
1
2
Inlet B RTD
(AD Ch 3)
2
All diodes located adjacent to the associated connector pin.
12-16-97
4
RX9
J42
IA_RTD+
RET1
NOTE: SIGNAL AND RETURN LINES
ARE PAIRED AS SHOWN.
COMMON RETURN CONNECTION
POINTS SHOULD BE AS CLOSE
AS POSSIBLE TO J1.
1
A
1
2
Inlet A RTD
(AD Ch 1)
TRACE, BACKPLANE
J41
OV_RTD+
RX10
RET0
B
1
2
Oven RTD
(AD Ch 0)
3
119828
C
7
D
177
A
B
C
+5V
CPU BOARD CONNECTOR
D
1
1
1
330
R10
1
2
3
4
4
J11
2
2
TPU_11
-15VDC
+5VDC
330
R11
J10
+15VDC
3
2
1
Oven
Cryo Valve
TPU_12
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
Inlet
Cryo Valve
Power LED On-board
Display Orientation
1
+5V
+15V
-15V
TP48
TP47
TP46
TP45
TP44
SHIELD
SHIELD
5 6 7
5 6 7
+24V
STEPPER MOTOR
CABLE DETAIL
TP42
1
1
1
1
BLU-WHT
WHT
BLK
BLK-WHT
RED
BLU
Stepper
Motor
2
7
3
6
4
5
J1.A27
J1.A26
J1.C25
TP17
1
TP39
1
TP38
J1.C26
J1.B26
U2.25
U2.9
U2.39
TP16
TP40
[3]
+5VDC
TP6
TP18
TP5
TP7
TP4
TP8
TP9
TP3
TP10
TP11
TP2
TP12
TP13
TP15
[6]
U1.1
J3.A16 [5]
J4.A16 [5]
J5.A16 [5]
J30.5/U1.7
J1.A14
QSM_CS5~
QSM_CS4~
QSM_CS3~
QSM_CS2~
QSM_CS1~
To
To
To
To
To
QSM_MISO
QSM_SCLK
QSM_MOSI
QSM_SCLK~
To U2.15
To U2.3
To U2.4
RMT_ST~
QSM_CS7~
[3]
QSM_CS8~
[6]
QSM_CS9~
SPII_MOSI
[6]
QSM_MISO
J1.C10 [3]
J1.B10 [3]
J1.A10 [3]
J1.C9 [3]
J13.10 [4]
To U2.26
[6]
To U2.27
[6]
[6]
[6]
[6]
SPII_SCLK
AGND2
SPII_SCLK~
+24VDC
GND
GND
1
1
1
1
1
DISP_SER
To J13.2
[6]
DISP_CLK
To U2.2
[6]
1K
R13
2
2
2
3
+5V
1
1K
R12
1
1
1
178
SPI Isolator Board
.1UF
C33
To
To
To
To
To
To
J3.C14 [5]
J3.A14 [5]
J4.C14 [5]
J4.A14 [5]
J5.C14 [5]
J5.A14 [5]
01-08-98
4
TRACE, BACKPLANE
119828
A
J48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
TP23
DISP_CLK
DETC_VFOUT
DETC_GOUT
DETB_VFOUT
DETB_GOUT
DETA_VFOUT
DETA_GOUT
2
TP22
DISP_SER
1K
R14
Power Control
Module
Control Signals
2
C32
.1UF
2
J33
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
QSM_CS0~
To U2.40
TP24
[3]
[3]
[6]
[6]
[6]
TP14
To
To
To
To
To
TP26
VMON
IB_CF
IA_CF
TPU_15
+15V_PRES~
+5V_PRES~
TPU_10
TPU_09
TPU_08
TPU_07
TPU_06
TPU_05
TPU_04
TPU_03
TPU_02
TPU_01
TPU_00
OVERTEMP
WD_TIM
PCM_SCLK
PCM_MISO
PCM_MOSI
QSM_CS6~
[3]
[3]
[3]
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
QSM_CS14~
QSM_CS13~
QSM_CS12~
QSM_CS11~
QSM_CS10~
QSM_CS9~
QSM_CS8~
QSM_CS7~
QSM_CS6~
QSM_CS5~
QSM_CS4~
QSM_CS3~
QSM_CS2~
QSM_CS1~
QSM_CS0~
QSM_MISO
QSM_SCLK
QSM_MOSI
QSM_SCLK~
TP25
1
-15V_PRES~
+24V_PRES~
1
TP37
1
TP36
1
TP35
1
TP34
1
TP33
1
TP32
1
TP31
1
TP30
1
1
1
1
TP29
To J1
8
555-5303
TPU_15
TPU_12
TPU_11
TPU_10
TPU_09
TPU_08
TPU_07
TPU_06
TPU_05
TPU_04
TPU_03
TPU_02
TPU_01
TPU_00
RESET~
DIS1
J12
1
2
3
4
5
6
SM_RET23
SM_PH3
SM_PH2
SM_RET01
SM_PH1
SM_PH0
1
4
C34
.1UF
2
+5VDC
1
3
1
1
2
96
64
32
95
63
31
94
62
30
93
61
29
92
60
28
91
59
27
90
58
26
89
57
25
88
56
24
87
55
23
86
54
22
85
53
21
84
52
20
83
51
19
82
50
18
81
49
17
80
48
16
79
47
15
78
46
14
77
45
13
76
44
12
75
43
11
74
42
10
73
41
9
72
40
8
71
39
7
70
38
6
69
37
5
68
36
4
67
35
3
66
34
2
65
33
1
1
C32
B32
A32
C31
B31
A31
C30
B30
A30
C29
B29
A29
C28
B28
A28
C27
B27
A27
C26
B26
A26
C25
B25
A25
C24
B24
A24
C23
B23
A23
C22
B22
A22
C21
B21
A21
C20
B20
A20
C19
B19
A19
C18
B18
A18
C17
B17
A17
C16
B16
A16
C15
B15
A15
C14
B14
A14
C13
B13
A13
C12
B12
A12
C11
B11
A11
C10
B10
A10
C9
B9
A9
C8
B8
A8
C7
B7
A7
C6
B6
A6
C5
B5
A5
C4
B4
A4
C3
B3
A3
C2
B2
A2
C1
B1
A1
1
J2
B
C
4
D
7
A
B
C
D
DETECTOR BOARD CONNECTORS
J5
1
DETA_AX48
48V
J8
RET7
To J1.B4
[3]
DAX_RTD+
To J1.C4
DETA_1
To J1.B11
DETA_0
To J1.A11
DETA_2
To J1.C11
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
+5VDC
QSM_MISO
To J2.B9
DA_MOSI
[4]
To U2.30
[4]
To U2.18
[6]
To J2.B13
[4]
DA_SCLK
QSM_CS11~
DETA_VFOUT
To J2.B2
[4]
DETA_GOUT
To J2.A2
+24VDC
1
[4]
+24VDC
24V
GND
AC8V1
1 8.0VAC
AC8V2
2 8.0VAC
J35
DA85VAC_2
DA85VAC_0
DA85VAC_1
1
2
3
NPD Det. 1
Xfmr Secondary
C32
B32
A32
C31
B31
A31
C30
B30
A30
C29
B29
A29
C28
B28
A28
C27
B27
A27
C26
B26
A26
C25
B25
A25
C24
B24
A24
C23
B23
A23
C22
B22
A22
C21
B21
A21
C20
B20
A20
C19
B19
A19
C18
B18
A18
C17
B17
A17
C16
B16
A16
C15
B15
A15
C14
B14
A14
C13
B13
A13
C12
B12
A12
C11
B11
A11
C10
B10
A10
C9
B9
A9
C8
B8
A8
C7
B7
A7
C6
B6
A6
C5
B5
A5
C4
B4
A4
C3
B3
A3
C2
B2
A2
C1
B1
A1
J3
96
64
32
95
63
31
94
62
30
93
61
29
92
60
28
91
59
27
90
58
26
89
57
25
88
56
24
87
55
23
86
54
22
85
53
21
84
52
20
83
51
19
82
50
18
81
49
17
80
48
16
79
47
15
78
46
14
77
45
13
76
44
12
75
43
11
74
42
10
73
41
9
72
40
8
71
39
7
70
38
6
69
37
5
68
36
4
67
35
3
66
34
2
65
33
1
DETB_AXRT
48VRET
DETB_AX48
48V
J7
RET8
To J1.B5
[3]
To J1.A5
[3]
DBX_RTD+
DETB_1
DETB_0
DETB_2
To J1.B12
[3]
To J1.A12
[3]
To J1.C12
[3]
+5VDC
QSM_MISO
To J2.B9
DB_MOSI
[4]
To U2.31
[6]
To U2.19
[6]
To J2.C13
[4]
DB_SCLK
QSM_CS12~
DETB_VFOUT
To J2.A3
[4]
To J2.C2
[4]
DETB_GOUT
+24VDC
1
+24VDC
24V
GND
AC8V1
1 8.0VAC
AC8V2
2 8.0VAC
J36
DB85VAC_2
DB85VAC_0
DB85VAC_1
1
2
3
NPD Det. 2
Xfmr Secondary
C32
B32
A32
C31
B31
A31
C30
B30
A30
C29
B29
A29
C28
B28
A28
C27
B27
A27
C26
B26
A26
C25
B25
A25
C24
B24
A24
C23
B23
A23
C22
B22
A22
C21
B21
A21
C20
B20
A20
C19
B19
A19
C18
B18
A18
C17
B17
A17
C16
B16
A16
C15
B15
A15
C14
B14
A14
C13
B13
A13
C12
B12
A12
C11
B11
A11
C10
B10
A10
C9
B9
A9
C8
B8
A8
C7
B7
A7
C6
B6
A6
C5
B5
A5
C4
B4
A4
C3
B3
A3
C2
B2
A2
C1
B1
A1
96
64
32
95
63
31
94
62
30
93
61
29
92
60
28
91
59
27
90
58
26
89
57
25
88
56
24
87
55
23
86
54
22
85
53
21
84
52
20
83
51
19
82
50
18
81
49
17
80
48
16
79
47
15
78
46
14
77
45
13
76
44
12
75
43
11
74
42
10
73
41
9
72
40
8
71
39
7
70
38
6
69
37
5
68
36
4
67
35
3
66
34
2
65
33
1
DETC_AXRT
48VRET
DETC_AX48
1
48V
J6
1
2
3
4
48V
1
2
3
3
J4
DETA_AXRT
96
64
32
95
63
31
94
62
30
93
61
29
92
60
28
91
59
27
90
58
26
89
57
25
88
56
24
87
55
23
86
54
22
85
53
21
84
52
20
83
51
19
82
50
18
81
49
17
80
48
16
79
47
15
78
46
14
77
45
13
76
44
12
75
43
11
74
42
10
73
41
9
72
40
8
71
39
7
70
38
6
69
37
5
68
36
4
67
35
3
66
34
2
65
33
1
1
2
3
2
C32
B32
A32
C31
B31
A31
C30
B30
A30
C29
B29
A29
C28
B28
A28
C27
B27
A27
C26
B26
A26
C25
B25
A25
C24
B24
A24
C23
B23
A23
C22
B22
A22
C21
B21
A21
C20
B20
A20
C19
B19
A19
C18
B18
A18
C17
B17
A17
C16
B16
A16
C15
B15
A15
C14
B14
A14
C13
B13
A13
C12
B12
A12
C11
B11
A11
C10
B10
A10
C9
B9
A9
C8
B8
A8
C7
B7
A7
C6
B6
A6
C5
B5
A5
C4
B4
A4
C3
B3
A3
C2
B2
A2
C1
B1
A1
RET9
To J1.B5
[3]
To J1.C5
[3]
DCX_RTD+
DETC_1
DETC_0
DETC_2
To J1.B13
[3]
To J1.A13
[3]
To J1.C13
[3]
+5VDC
2
QSM_MISO
DC_MOSI
To J2.B9
[4]
To U2.32
[6]
DC_SCLK
To U2.20
QSM_CS13~
To J2.A14
DETC_VFOUT
[6]
[4]
To J2.C3
[4]
To J2.B3
[4]
DETC_GOUT
+24VDC
1
+24VDC
3
24V
GND
NOTES
1. Jumpers E1, E2, and E3 are RTD shunts. These must be installed when a detecto
present for the system to operate properly.
AC8V1
1 8.0VAC
AC8V2
2 8.0VAC
J37
1
2
3
DC85VAC_2
DC85VAC_0
DC85VAC_1
NPD Det. 3
Xfmr Secondary
12-17-97
4
TRACE,
BACKPLANE
119828
A
B
C
5
7
D
179
A
B
C
D
SIGNAL BUFFER CIRCUIT
J2.C6
[4]
DISP_SER
J13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DISP_SER
+5VDC
+5VDC
1
+5VDC
BUF_DISP_CLK
QSM_CS1~
KB_SCLK
KB_MOSI
KB_MISO
1
1
1
C15
.1UF
2
C14
.1UF
1
C36
47UF
1
2
2
1
CR1
SA6.0
2
1
2
[4]
J2.C8
[4]
J2.B9
2
[4]
[4]
J2A10
[4]
J2.C11
[4]
J2.A13
[4]
2
QSM_SCLK
3
QSM_MOSI
4
QSM_MISO
15
QSM_CS1~
5
QSM_CS6~
6
QSM_CS10~
7
VCC2
DISP_CLK
QSM_SCLK
QSM_MOSI
QSM_MISO
QSM_CS1~
BUF_DISP_CLK
KB_SCLK
KB_MOSI
KB_MISO
ISPLSI1016E
EPC_SCLK
EPC_MOSI
EPC_MISO
EEPROM_SCLK_NOT
EEPROM_MOSI
J9
P_SDO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Key
14
P_ISPEN
13
P_MODE
36
P_SCLK
1
C13
.1UF
24
P_SDI
33
16
17
29
8
22
38
10
28
41
SPI_ISO_SCLK 26
SPI_ISO_SCLK_NOT 27
SPI_ISO_MOSI 40
PCM_SCLK 25
PCM_MOSI 39
PCM_MISO 9
QSM_CS6~
QSM_CS10~
SDO
TFB_SCLK
TFB_MOSI
DA_SCLK
DA_MOSI
DB_SCLK
DB_MOSI
DC_SCLK
DC_MOSI
SDI
ISPEN
MODE
SCLK
GND2
GND1
23
1
CR2
SA6.0
CR7 2
SA6.0
2
NOTE: CR6 not used
VCC1
+5VDC
In-System Programming Plug
2
34 12
1
21
37
18
30
19
31
20
32
NC
NC
QSM_CS10~
EPC_SCLK
EPC_MOSI
EPC_MISO
EE_SCLK~
EE_MOSI
SPII_SCLK
SPII_SCLK~
SPII_MOSI
PCM_SCLK
PCM_MOSI
PCM_MISO
J48.15
J48.17
J48.11
J33.4
J33.2
J33.3
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
TFB_SCLK
TFB_MOSI
DA_SCLK
DA_MOSI
DB_SCLK
DB_MOSI
DC_SCLK
DC_MOSI
J1.A9
J1.C8
J5.C16
J5.A18
J4.C16
J4.A18
J3.C16
J3.A18
[3]
[3]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
J30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
EPC
Communication
2
1
J2.A6
J2.A9
DISP_CLK
1
CR5
SA6.0
CR6 2
SA6.0
1
510
R15
2
U2
119914
1
CR3
SA6.0
CR4 2
SA6.0
Keyboard
And
Display
1
C37
30PF
2
2
+5VDC
1
1
R8
10K
Backplane Serial EEPROM
510
R18
J2.B14
[4]
2
2
3
2
1
2
R17
510
1
C26
47UF
1
C29
.1UF
2
2
U1
1
QSM_CS14~
1
R9
10K
2
WP_PU
3
4
CS
Vcc
SO
HOLD
WP
GND
SCK
SI
8
7
3
HOLD_PU
6
5
R16
1
2
510
01-19-98
4
4
TRACE,
BACKPLANE
119828
A
180
B
C
6
D
7
A
B
C
MOUNTING AND ACCESS HOLES
MISC I/O AND DECOUPLING
1
1
1
1
2
C49
100PF
1
2
C50
100PF
1
2
C51
100PF
1
2
C52
100PF
1
2
C35
100PF
MH1
MH3
MH4
MH5
1
2
C48
100PF
1
C47
100PF
1
C46
100PF
2
MH8
MH9
1
Chassis Ground (signal CGND) is tied to the case via a FastOn connector attached at MH18,
located near MH1 in the uppermost right corner of the board when looking at the component Mounting holes MH2, MH6, MH7, MH8, MH9 are for mec
6
stability only and have NO electrical connection.
side with silk screened nomenclature right side up, and to MH19, another FastOn connector
located adjacent to J13, providing Chassis Ground to the keyboard module.
The 0.01uF capacitor, located adjacent to MH1 and MH18, is for AC coupling of Digital and
Chassis Grounds for noise reduction.
5
+24VDC
-15VDC
MH14
MH101
+15VDC
1
100PF
C45
1
1
1
1
MH7
1
1
2
100PF
C44
1
1
2
100PF
C43
1
1
2
100PF
C42
MH6
MH2
MH19
1
1
2
100PF
C41
MH18
1
1
2
100PF
C40
MH13
1
MH15
MH16
MH17
MH102
1
1
+5VDC
1
MH101 and MH102 are 0.75 inch diameter access holes
to screws for mounting the Power Control Module chassis.
These have NO electrical connection.
7
1
POWER CONTROL
MODULE
DC VOLTAGES
TP68
TP69
TP72
TP73
TP76
TP77
1
1
1
1
1
1
J34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
100PF
C39
MH12
1
1
2
100PF
C38
MH11
1
2
POWER SUPPLY INPUTS
MH10
2
1
1
D
POWER AND GROUND TEST POINTS
1
-15V_VALVE
DIGITAL GROUND
(+5VDC Return)
TP51
TP71
TP75
TP79
TP19
TP43
TP80
TP50
ANALOG GROUND #1 ANALOG GROUND #2
(+/-15VDC Return) (+24VDC Return)
TP20
TP49
TP67
TP89
TP52
TP1
TP70
CHASSIS
GROUND
TP74
TP78
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
J29
RX12
2
RX13
RX14
RX16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15VRETB
GNDB
AVRG
AVRG
A15V
+15VDCB
-15VDCB
+5VDCB
2
EPC
Power
RX15
+5VDC
+15VDC -15VDC +24VDC
MOTHER BOARD FILTER CAPACITORS
RX17
Adjacent to J34 and J1
RX11
4
Jumpers (RX) for all connections from J29 should be located as close as possible to J34.
These should be the same width as the traces they connect.
Between J1and J2
Adjacent to J2
Between J2and J3
Adjacent to J3
Between J3 and J4
Adjacent to J4
Between J4 and J5
Adjacent to J5
+5VDC
+5VDC
1
1
C22
47UF
C23
.1UF
2
2
1
C12
47UF
1
C11
.1UF
2
2
1
C9
47UF
1
C8
.1UF
2
2
1
C6
47UF
2
1
C5
.1UF
2
1
C3
47UF
1
C2
.1UF
2
2
GND
POPWER CONTROL
MODULE
AC VOLTAGES
3
J32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DETB_AXRT
DETB_AXRT
DETB_AX48
DETB_AX48
DETA_AXRT
DETA_AXRT
DETA_AX48
DETA_AX48
AC8V1
AC8V1
AC8V2
AC8V2
DETC_AXRT
DETC_AXRT
DETC_AX48
DETC_AX48
DETB_AXRT
48VRET
DETB_AX48
48V
DETA_AXRT
48VRET
DETA_AX48
AC8V1
AC8V2
+15VDC
+15VDC
1
48V
8.0VAC
48VRET
DETC_AX48
48V
C25
.1UF
2
1
C19
47UF
1
2
3
C18
.1UF
2
15VRET
8.0VAC
DETC_AXRT
1
C24
47UF
2
1
1
C28
47UF
2
2
1
C17
47UF
1
C16
.1UF
2
2
-15VDC
-15VDC
+24VDC
C27
.1UF
1
1
2
1
C31
47UF
35V
C30
.1UF
2
1
2
C21
47UF
35V
1
C20
.1UF
2
1
2
C10
47UF
35V
1
C7
.1UF
1
2
2
C4
47UF
35V
1
C1
.1UF
2
12-17-97
4
4
TRACE,
BACKPLANE
119828
A
B
C
7
7
D
181
PCB Layout for Motherboard/Backplane Standard (119826)
182
Central Processing
Unit (CPU)
This chapter describes the PCB for the Central Processing Unit (CPU) of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 184
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 186
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 187
Service Manual
183
Chapter 5.4
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
The Central Processing Unit (CPU) PCB provides the control for all TRACE GC 2000
functions.
Inside the main microcontroller resides:
•
A Motorola 68332 microprocessor
•
2MB of flash memory
•
750KB of static RAM
If the PCB is not fully populated, the memory amounts will be less.
NOTE
Throughout this manual, the term microprocessor pertains to the Motorola 68332, unless
otherwise specified.
Three programmable logic devices (PLDs) provide most of the miscellaneous logic
required. The decode required for the memory chip-selects is generated in PLD U17.
The decode required for the on-board peripherals is generated by PLD U19.
One 256KB bank of RAM has its power supplied from a battery circuit, so that it will
retain its data when system power is off. The chip-selects for these two ICs are
buffered by U10 and U11.
The microprocessor incorporates a variety of subsystems that enhance its usefulness.
These include the Queued Serial Module (QSM) and the Time Processor Unit (TPU).
The QSM provides up to 16 channels of synchronous serial communication with
peripheral devices. Motorola calls this communication type Serial Peripheral Interface
(SPI). SPI communication is always between a master and a slave. In the TRACE GC
2000 the microprocessor is always the master.
The SPI requires four signals:
•
Serial clock (SCLK)
•
Device select (CS)
•
Two serial data lines
The serial data line carrying data from the master to the slave is labeled Master Out
Slave In (MOSI). The data line for communication in the other direction is Master In
Slave Out (MISO).
184
Service Manual
Chapter 5.4
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Theory of Operations
In the TRACE GC 2000, SPI communication is used with all peripheral devices not
located on the CPU PCB. Since there are multiple devices to be serviced, multiple
device select (CS) signals are needed. The microprocessor provides four select lines
(PCS0–PCS3). These four lines are decoded in PLD U19 to provide 16 device select
lines (QSM_CS*0–QSM_CS*15). Table 5.4-1 identifies the device serviced by each
select line.
Table 5.4-1. Select Lines and Devices
Select Line
Device
QSM_CS*0
Not Used—Future Expansion
QSM_CS*1
MMI—Keyboard
QSM_CS*2
A/D Converter TFB PCB
QSM_CS*3
D/A Converter TFB PCB
QSM_CS*4
PCB Digital Input/Output TFB PCB
QSM_CS*5
Serial EPROM on TFB PCB
QSM_CS*6
Power Control Module
QSM_CS*7
Not Used—Future Expansion
QSM_CS*8
Not Used—Future Expansion
QSM_CS*9
Not Used—Future Expansion
QSM_CS*10
DPFC
QSM_CS*l l
Detector PCB A
QSM_CS*12
Detector PCB B
QSM_CS*13
Detector PCB C
QSM_CS*14
Serial EPROM on Motherboard
QSM_CS*15
Not Used—Idle State
The TRACE GC 2000 has three serial channels. The first of these is the Serial
Communication Interface (SCI), which is part of the microprocessor. This channel is
used for driving the display panel. The other two channels are supplied by U22. These
two channels are used for communication with the computer and the autosampler. The
device that provides these two serial channels also provides a parallel port which is
not used in the TRACE GC 2000.
Time information for the TRACE GC 2000 is maintained by a Real Time Clock
(U15). The power for this device is supplied by a battery circuit. Its chip-select is
buffered by U12.
Service Manual
185
Chapter 5.4
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Adjustment Procedures
The TRACE GC 2000 uses the TPU functions for most of the controls required for
temperature control. TPU Channel 15 is an input that receives a clock signal, which is
twice the power line frequency, and is synchronized with the zero crossing of the
power line. The functions of the other 15 TPU channels are listed in Table 5.4-2.
Table 5.4-2. TPU Channels and Functions
TPU Channel
Function
0
Inlet A (Right Inlet) Heater
1
Inlet B (Left Inlet) Heater
2
PTV Heater
3
Detector A (Right Detector) Base Heater
4
Detector B (Left Detector) Base Heater
5
Detector A Auxiliary Heater
6
Detector B Auxiliary Heater
7
Detector C Auxiliary Heater
8
Aux (Jet Separator) Heater
9
Aux (Valve oven) Heater
10
Oven Heater
11
Oven Cryo Valve
12
Inlet Cryo Valve
13
Oven Door Stepper—Step
14
Oven Door Stepper—Direction
The oven door stepper motor is driven by U21, which receives step and direction
signals from the microprocessor through TPU channels.
In order to minimize RF emissions, the CPU is enclosed in a metal shield. An
auxiliary connector on the PCB will allow future expansion of devices that may
require access to the data and address buses.
Each detector card generates a frequency proportional to the analog voltage output.
This frequency must be counted with a consistent sampling gate time. U19 controls
the sample gate. Its time duration is managed by the software. U20 contains counters
for all three detectors.
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary.
186
Service Manual
Chapter 5.4
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Schematics and Component Layout
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the CPU PCB is listed below in
Table 5.4-3. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its
corresponding layout. There are eight drawings for reference in this section.
Table 5.4-3. CPU Schematics
Board
CPU
PN
Drawing
Layout
23648345
119825B, 1–7
119823, 1
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
Service Manual
187
A
B
C
D
REV
1
ECO NO.
DATE
BY
CHK
A
DRN 4175
12/8/97
L. Baldwin
L. Baldwin 1
B
ECO 61510
1/5/98
L. Baldwin
L. Baldwin
C
ECO 31693
7/6/98
L. Baldwin
D
ECO 31702
7/6/98
L. Baldwin
2
2
3
3
4
L. Baldwin
12/8/97
L. Baldwin
12/8/97
L. Baldwin
12/8/97
CPU PCB
4
119825
12/8/97
A
B
C
D
B
1
D
189
A
B
C
D
+5V
QSM_CS*15
1
TV67
+5V
QSM_CS*14
QSM_CS*13
QSM_CS*12
QSM_CS*11
QSM_CS*10
QSM_CS*9
QSM_CS*8
QSM_CS*7
QSM_CS*6
QSM_CS*5
QSM_CS*4
QSM_CS*3
QSM_CS*2
QSM_CS*1
QSM_CS*0
QSM_MISO
QSM_SCLK
QSM_MOSI
QSM_SCLK*
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ISP6
ISP3
ISP2
SDO
SDI
ISPEN
ISP0
MODE
ISP1
SCLK
C15
1
2
.01
Test Points
C38
1
1
1
100PF
2
100PF
C39
2
2
J6
100 R60
1 DISP_SER
2
C37
100PF
VF[0:2]
DISP_CLK
VF2
GVF2
VF1
GVF1
VF0
GVF0
GVF[0:2]
C35
C36
1
1
2
2
220PF
100PF
190
B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10K
TYP
R44
2
R30
2
R4
2
R5
2
R6
2
R18
2
R17
2
R16
2
R15
2
R21
2
R20
2
R7
2
R19
2
R14
2
R22
2
R13
2
R24
2
R25
2
R29
2
R41
2
TV54
TV60
TV58
TV55
TV61
TV56
2
2
1
1
R31
2
1
R32
2
1
R33
2
1
R34
2
1
R35
2
1
R36
2
1
1
R37
2
R38
2
1
R9
1
R8
2
2
TV87
TV85
TV86
TV29
TV69
2
TV72
TV62
TV71
TV68
~MCS[0:12]
DATA7
DATA8
~MCS0
~MCS1
~MCS2
~MCS3
~MCS4
~MCS5
~MCS6
~MCS7
~MCS8
~MCS9
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
DSACK1*
AS*
RESET*
~CS8_9
DISABLE_CPU_MEM*
WR*
RD*
~MCS11
(RAM4_HI)
~MCS10
~MCS12
(RAM4_LO)
(CSBOOT)
DSACK0*
MISC_CONT7
(DS*)
MISC_CONT14
MISC_CONT2
(R/W*)
(BGACK)
MISC_CONT1
MISC_CONT0
(BG)
(BR)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TV48
TV49
TV50
TV4
TV20
TV16
TV52
TV46
TV47
TV51
3
MISC_CONT[0:14]
+5V
MISC_CONT3
MISC_CONT4
MISC_CONT5
MISC_CONT6
1
1
1
1
MISC_CONT13
1
TV66
TV45
TV35
TV32
~MCS[0:12]
TV25
MISC_CONT[0:14]
7-6-1998_11:54
4
RQI_4
CPU PCB
119825
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TV53
DATA5
DATA6
10K
2
QSM_CS*[0:15]
+5V
MISC_CONT14 R55
1
3
4.75K
2
4
R40
1
5
MISC_CONT9
6
U16
10K
2
100PF
~CS8_0
~CS8_1
~CS8_2
~CS8_4
~CS8_5
~CS8_6
~CS8_8
~CS8_10
~CS8_11
TV59
DATA3
DATA4
R39
1
1
ISP[0:6]
MISC_CONT8
U16
10K
2
1
R48
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
TV23
DATA1
DATA2
MISC_CONT6
9
MISC_CONT18(~CS10)
DATA0
10K
2
8
U16
C34
MISC_CONT16(~CS8)
MISC_CONT17(~CS9)
R54
1
U16
ADD19
MISC_CONT15(~CS7)
MISC_CONT0
RESET*
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
TV63
~CS8_[0:11]
ADD17
ADD18
R10
TPU_[0:15]
1
1
1
1
ADD15
ADD16
1
1
51K
R57
ADD13
ADD14
2
2
1
2
2
10UF
ADD11
ADD12
R11
BIAS
1
PCS0
PCS1
PCS2
PCS3
IRQ[1:6]
ADD9
ADD10
1
U21
6
9
4
5
12
13
1
10K
R56
L1
L2
L3
L4
GND1
GND2
GND3
GND4
GND5
TPU_10
TPU_9
TPU_8
TPU_7
TPU_6
TPU_5
TPU_4
TPU_3
TPU_2
TPU_1
TPU_0
10
7
8
ADD7
ADD8
10K
2
TPU_12
TPU_11
VCC
CCW/CW*
STEP
HS/FS*
ADD5
ADD6
R50
1
TPU_15
VM
VD
10K
R58
TPU_14
3
1
16
14
TPU_13
2
10K
R59
1
1
11
CR1
1N5333A
2
2
SM_RET
SM_PH3
SM_PH2
SM_RET
SM_PH1
SM_PH0
PCS[0:3]
ADD3
ADD4
2
1N5333A
DATA[0:15]
R12
+5V
2
1
CR2
ADD1
ADD2
1
-15V
ADD0
2
10UF
10UF
R1
10UF
1
10UF
R2
10UF
1
10UF
TYP
10K
2
10UF
J4
96
C32
64
B32
32
A32
95
C31
63
B31
31
A31
94
C30
62
B30
30
A30
93
C29
61
B29
29
A29
92
C28
60
B28
28
A28
91
C27
59
B27
27
A27
90
C26
58
B26
26
A26
89
C25
57
B25
25
A25
88
C24
56
B24
24
A24
87
C23
55
B23
23
A23
86
C22
54
B22
22
A22
85
C21
53
B21
21
A21
84
C20
52
B20
20
A20
83
C19
51
B19
19
A19
82
C18
50
B18
18
A18
81
C17
49
B17
17
A17
80
C16
48
B16
16
A16
79
C15
47
B15
15
A15
78
C14
46
B14
14
A14
77
C13
45
B13
13
A13
76
C12
44
B12
12
A12
75
C11
43
B11
11
A11
74
C10
42
B10
10
A10
73
C9
41
B9
9
A9
72
C8
40
B8
8
A8
71
C7
39
B7
7
A7
70
C6
38
B6
6
A6
69
C5
37
B5
5
A5
68
C4
36
B4
4
A4
67
C3
35
B3
3
A3
66
C2
34
B2
2
A2
65
C1
33
B1
1
A1
R3
+15V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
4
TV1
2
3
ADD[0:19]
TV44
15
2
1
1
+5V
1
J5
96
64
32
95
63
31
94
62
30
93
61
29
92
60
28
91
59
27
90
58
26
89
57
25
88
56
24
87
55
23
86
54
22
85
53
21
84
52
20
83
51
19
82
50
18
81
49
17
80
48
16
79
47
15
78
46
14
77
45
13
76
44
12
75
43
11
74
42
10
73
41
9
72
40
8
71
39
7
70
38
6
69
37
5
68
36
4
67
35
3
66
34
2
65
33
1
C32
B32
A32
C31
B31
A31
C30
B30
A30
C29
B29
A29
C28
B28
A28
C27
B27
A27
C26
B26
A26
C25
B25
A25
C24
B24
A24
C23
B23
A23
C22
B22
A22
C21
B21
A21
C20
B20
A20
C19
B19
A19
C18
B18
A18
C17
B17
A17
C16
B16
A16
C15
B15
A15
C14
B14
A14
C13
B13
A13
C12
B12
A12
C11
B11
A11
C10
B10
A10
C9
B9
A9
C8
B8
A8
C7
B7
A7
C6
B6
A6
C5
B5
A5
C4
B4
A4
C3
B3
A3
C2
B2
A2
C1
B1
A1
+5V
C
2
D
7
A
B
C
D
DATA[0:15]
ADD[0:19]
TV27
2
2
10K
1
R51
VSS0
VSS1
VSS2
VSS3
VSS4
VSS5
VSS6
VSS7
VSS8
VSS9
VSS10
VSS11
VSS12
VSS13
VSS14
VSTBY
2
8
17
29
34
40
51
59
67
83
95
101
106
127
117
19
C44
10K
PCS[0:3]
1
.01
C48
2
2
.01
.01
.01
.01
TV42
.01
C49
C50
C51
C52
2
TV41
2
1
C47
2
1
.01
.01
.01
.01
1
1
C46
2
22PF
C45
2
2
.01
TV38TV36
S
2
AS*
DISABLE_CPU_MEM*
QSM_SCLK*
SYSTEM_CLK
1
DISP_CLK
TV43
TPU_[0:15]
4
.01
3
2
.01
1
1
TV14
.01
C43
+5V
1
G
1
C42
2
Q1
2N7002LT1
QSM_SCLK
RESET*
.1
32.768KHZ
22PF
TV40
2
2
D
C41
.1+5V
4
1
TV88
2
3
.01
2
2
2
1
1
330K
Y1
1
TV34
TV28
2
1
10M
R46
R47
820
1
C40
+5V
1
1
R45
1
10K
R43
+5V
TV30
1
1
18
35
52
1
10K
2
CS_EN
R42
ISP2
ISP0
ISP1
ISP3
ISP4
1
11
+5V
DS*
R/W*
SCLK_IN
RESET*
19
ISPEN
55
MODE
49
PCLK
21
SDI
34
SDO
66
C11
1
MISC_CONT12
46
47
2
48
RESET* 68
RESET
+5V
12
ENABLE
44
DISPCLK
42
SCLK*OUT
79
1
1
MISC_CONT7
MISC_CONT14
55
IFETCH*/DSI
54
IPIPE*/DSO
57
TSC
1
MISC_CONT10
RESET*
MISC_CONT11
MISC_CONT11
MISC_CONT12
MISC_CONT13
R/W*
CLKOUT
2
MISC_CONT9
85
DS*
70
BERR*
56
BKPT*/DSCLK
58
FREEZE/QUOT
1
MISC_CONT14
2
MISC_CONT7
MISC_CONT8
MISC_CONT7
MISC_CONT8
MISC_CONT9
MISC_CONT10
TV24
53
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RXD
2
J2
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
DATA9
DATA11
CSBOOT
2
.01
U17
112
1
2
+5V
8
7
6
5
4
3
67
66
65
64
63
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
DATA9
DATA11
ADDR19
ADDR18
~MCS0
~MCS1
~MCS2
~MCS3
~MCS4
~MCS5
~MCS6
~MCS7
~MCS8
~MCS9
~MCS10
~MCS11
DISP_SER
1
C20
10
9
~MCS12
27
28
29
30
31
38
32
39
33
40
37
41
52
1
ADD19
ADD18
+5V
5
TXD
119817
FLASH1
FLASH2
FLASH3
FLASH4
RAM1LO
RAM1HI
RAM2LO
RAM2HI
RAM3LO
RAM3HI
RAM4LO
RAM4HI
HALT
1
MXD1210
CE
69
PCS0
PCS1
PCS2
PCS3
1
U10
MISC_CONT6
2
QSM_MISO
QSM_MOSI
QSM_SCLK
1
GND
2
VB1
7
VB2
13
16
U14
VALUE=MC68332-132PIN
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
1
4
CEO
TOL
VCC
BOOT
SYSCLK
MISO
MOSI
SCLK
PCS0
PCS1
PCS2
PCS3
1
6
3
~CSBUF4
1 TV15
VCCO
8
CS10~
CS9~
CS8~
CS7~
CS5~
CS4~
BR*
BG*
BGACK*
CS3*
CS4*
CS5*
DSACK0*
1
22
14
24
23
26
25
113
114
115
118
119
120
SIZ0
SIZ1
+5VSTBY1
TV33
81
80
CE
MISC_CONT0
MISC_CONT1
MISC_CONT2
MISC_CONT3
MISC_CONT4
MISC_CONT5
DSACK1*
MXD1210
+5V
5
TV37
1
DSACK0*
DSACK1*
AVEC*
RMCC*
AS*
GND
U11
8
2
VB1
7
VB2
17
36
53
68
CEO
TOL
VCC1
VCC2
VCC3
VCC4
4
VCC
VCCO
GND1
GND2
GND3
GND4
6
3
~CSBUF5
1 TV21
MISC_CONT4
MISC_CONT5
MISC_CONT15
MISC_CONT16
MISC_CONT17
MISC_CONT18
1
2
1
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
1
V_BATT
+5V
89
88
87
86
82
~MCS[0:12]
+5VSTBY2
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
1
MISC_CONT[0:14]
MODCLK
IRQ1*
IRQ2*
IRQ3*
IRQ4*
IRQ5*
IRQ6*
IRQ7*
2
TV10
MISC_CONT[0:18]
1
+5V
1
4
TV12
R52
2
1
1
R49
TV26
DATA15
DATA14
DATA13
DATA12
DATA11
DATA10
DATA9
DATA8
DATA7
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
IRQ[1:7]
1
10K
1
1
R53
2
STDP
20
CS1
2
RTC-72423
CS0*
GND
GND
TESTOUT
TV39
10K
1
1
TV13
4
16 TPUCH0
15 TPUCH1
14 TPUCH2
13 TPUCH3
12 TPUCH4
11 TPUCH5
10 TPUCH6
9 TPUCH7
6 TPUCH8
5 TPUCH9
4 TPUCH10
3 TPUCH11
132 TPUCH12
131 TPUCH13
130 TPUCH14
129 TPUCH15
1
ALE
ADDR18
ADDR17
ADDR16
ADDR15
ADDR14
ADDR13
ADDR12
ADDR11
ADDR10
ADDR9
ADDR8
ADDR7
ADDR6
ADDR5
ADDR4
ADDR3
ADDR2
ADDR1
ADDR0
TPU_0
TPU_1
TPU_2
TPU_3
TPU_4
TPU_5
TPU_6
TPU_7
TPU_8
TPU_9
TPU_10
TPU_11
TPU_12
TPU_13
TPU_14
TPU_15
1
1
11
RD*
13
WR*
RD*
WR*
42
41
38
37
36
35
33
32
31
30
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
90
128 T2CLK
TV17
TV11
ADD18
ADD17
ADD16
ADD15
ADD14
ADD13
ADD12
ADD11
ADD10
ADD9
ADD8
ADD7
ADD6
ADD5
ADD4
ADD3
ADD2
ADD1
ADD0
TPU_15
TV18
1
1
2
1
U15
12
HDR1X2
J1
TV8
TV19
61 VDDSYN
1
1
1
1
2
TV7
2
5
6
10
12
14
16
15
ADD19
XFC
TV9
VOUT
BATT_ON
LOW_LINE*
9
PFO*
PFI
13
CEOUT*
CEIN
U12
11
WDO*
WDI
7
RESET
OSC_IN
8
RESET*
OSC_SEL
VBATT
19 DATA8
D0
16 DATA9
D1
15 DATA10
D2
14 DATA11
D3
EXTAL
1
1
BT1
5
A0
7
A1
9
A2
10
A3
64
ADD0
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
VCC
91
DATA15
92
DATA14
93
DATA13
94
DATA12
97
DATA11
98
DATA10
99
DATA9
100
DATA8
102
DATA7
103
DATA6
104
DATA5
105
DATA4
108
DATA3
109
DATA2
110
DATA1
111
DATA0
1
VDD
62
MAX691
CS10*
CS9*
CS8*
CS7*
ADDR19
1
TV31
60 XTAL
3
10
24
2
1
1
125
124
123
122
121
MISC_CONT18
MISC_CONT17
MISC_CONT16
MISC_CONT15
R28
VDD0
VDD1
VDD2
VDD3
VDD4
VDD5
+5V
V_BATT
1
1
7
18
28
39
50
+5VSTBY
63
VDD7
65
VDD8
84
VDD9
VDD10 96
VDD11 107
VDD12 116
VDD13 126
+5V
RD*
WR*
~CS8_4
7-6-1998_11:54
4
ISP[0:6]
CPU PCB
119825
A
B
C
3
7
D
191
A
B
C
D
ADD[0:19]
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
DATA[0:15]
TV2
TV22
11
AM29F400BB
CE
~MCS1
26
28
C1
OE
12
RESET
1
WR*
+5V
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
48
17
.01
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
DO9
DO10
DO11
DO12
DO13
DO14
DO15
U13
BYTE
29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
34
36
39
41
43
45
47
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
+5V
AM29F400BB
CE
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
ADD18
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
48
17
~MCS2
26
C6
OE
RESET
.01
28
12
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
RY/BY*
VCC
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
DO9
DO10
DO11
DO12
DO13
DO14
DO15
U5
BYTE
29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
34
36
39
41
43
45
47
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
+5V
~MCS3
AM29F400BB
CE
C8
OE
RESET
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
ADD18
.01
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
48
17
26
28
12
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
1
15
RY/BY*
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
DO9
DO10
DO11
DO12
DO13
DO14
DO15
U9
BYTE
29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
34
36
39
41
43
45
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
47
+5V
AM29F400BB
CE
OE
C10
2
12
47
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
ADD18
VCC
37
2
RESET*
BYTE
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
RY/BY*
2
28
U1
29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
34
36
39
41
43
45
2
2
RD*
DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DO8
DO9
DO10
DO11
DO12
DO13
DO14
DO15
TV6
15
2
RESET
1
26
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
VCC
37
1
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
48
17
RY/BY*
15
1
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
ADD18
37
1
VCC
15
1
37
1
1
1
TV3
11
WE
11
WE
11
WE
.01
WE
GNDB
GNDA
GNDB
GNDA
GNDB
GNDA
GNDB
46
27
46
27
46
27
46
27
~MCS0
GNDA
~MCS[0:12]
3
3
7-6-1998_11:54
4
4
CPU PCB
119825
A
192
B
C
4
D
7
A
B
C
+5VSTBY1
D
+5V
ADD[0:18]
DATA[0:15]
8
8
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
+5VSTBY1
1
8
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
+5V
.01
6
CS2
30
CS1*
5
WE*
32
OE*
~MCS6
C7
R23
.01
10K
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
3
2
31
1
12
4
11
7
10
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
A0
VCC D0
A1
D1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
D5
A5
D6
A6
D7
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
U2
A13
KM681000
A14
A15
A16
6
CS2
30
CS1*
5
WE*
32
OE*
VSS
VSS
VSS
24
24
24
1
2
8
+5VSTBY2
2
R26 10K
6
CS2
30
CS1*
5
WE*
32
OE*
A0
VCC
D0
A1
D1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
D5
A5
D6
A6
D7
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
U8
A12
KM681000
A13
8
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
+5V
A14
A15
A16
C21
.01
~MCS7
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
3
2
31
1
12
4
11
7
10
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
VSS
24
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
+5V
3
C4
.01
6
CS2
30
CS1*
5
WE*
32
OE*
~MCS9
24
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
A14
A15
A16
.01
6
CS2
30
CS1*
5
WE*
32
OE*
VSS
A0
VCC D0
A1
D1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
D5
A5
D6
A6
D7
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
U6
A12
KM681000
A13
2
C9
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
3
2
31
1
12
4
11
7
10
2
2
A14
A15
A16
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
1
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
1
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
1
1
3
C2
.01
+5V
8
A0
VCC
D0
A1
D1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
D5
A5
D6
A6
D7
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
U7
A12
KM681000
A13
+5V
TV5
+5VSTBY2
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
3
2
31
1
12
4
11
7
10
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
6
CS2
30
CS1*
5
WE*
32
OE*
~MCS8
2
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
1
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
2
A0
D0
VCC
A1
D1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
D5
A5
D6
A6
D7
A7
A8
A9
A10
U4
A11
KM681000
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
2
~CSBUF4
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
3
2
31
1
12
4
11
7
10
2
C3
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
1
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
2
A0
VCC
D0
A1
D1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
D5
A5
D6
A6
D7
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
U3
A13
KM681000
A14
A15
A16
2
10K
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
3
2
31
1
12
4
11
7
10
1
1
R27
ADD1
ADD2
ADD3
ADD4
ADD5
ADD6
ADD7
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
ADD12
ADD13
ADD14
ADD15
ADD16
ADD17
1
1
VSS
1
24
TV70
~MCS[0:12]
~CSBUF4
9-11-1997_10:27
4
~CSBUF5
4
RD*
CPU PCB
WR*
119825
A
B
C
5
7
D
193
A
B
C
D
VCC2 65
VF2
VF1
~CS8_8
59
INTP*
45
INTA
60
INTB
RQI_1
RQI_2
RQI_3
55
56
57
58
63
65
66
68
67
GND
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
19
26
27
29
2
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
TV91
TV97
1
4
5
9
10
12
13
INB1
INB2
INC1
INC2
IND1
IND2
DS14C88M
TV109
-12V
+12V
V+
OUTA
OUTB
OUTC
OUTD
V-
14
3
6
8
11
2
1
TV105
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
7
-12V
TV75
1
14
1
OUTA VCC INA
2
CA
6
4
OUTB
INB
5
CB
8
10
OUTC
INC
9
CC
11
13
OUTD
IND
12
GND CD
DS14C89AM
7
+5V
TV113
1
TV82
1
TV114
1
1
.01
1
TV102
1
TV111
1
TV119
1
TV101
DB9MALE_RT
J9
+15V
14
1
OUTA VCC INA
2
CA
6
1
4
OUTB
INB
5
CB
8
10
1
OUTC
INC
9
CC
11
13
OUTD
IND
12
GND CD
DS14C89AM
7
+5V
1
VOUT
MC78L12ACD
+12V
1
TV117
TV116
GND1
GND2
GND3
GND4
.1
TV92
1
2
3
6
7
1
.1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TV99
TV108
TV107
TV106
TV115
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TV98
TV95
+5V
U25
14
3
5
.01
MC79L12ACD
1
-12V
1
TV93
2
3
6
7
1
70
1
OUTA VCC INA
2
CA
4
OUTB
INB
5
CB
8
10
OUTC
INC
9
CC
11
13
OUTD
IND
12
GND CD
DS14C89AM
7
J8
6
GND
VOUT
.1
1
U24
.1
VIN1
VIN2
VIN3
VIN4
C22
FEMALE_9PIN_D
VIN
U23
3
3
8
~CS8_[0:11]
U27
1
LATCHCNTR
7
INA1
1
1
J7
1
U29
58 ~CS8_8
CS8_8B
59 ~CS8_9
CS9_8B
60 ~CS8_10
CS10_8B
68 ~CS8_11
CS11_8B
71 IOW
72 IOR
31 RESETOUT
32 RESETIN*
30 TESTOUT
1
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
13
14
15
16
17
18
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
VCC1
VCC2
GND1
GND2
GND3
GND4
1
22
43
64
~CS8_0
~CS8_1
~CS8_2
~CS8_4
~CS8_5
~CS8_6
V-
3
6
8
11
3
2
MODE
SCLK
ISPEN
SDI
SDO
CS0_8B
CS1_8B
CS2_8B
CS4_8B
CS5_8B
CS6_8B
52
53
54
55
56
57
OUTA
OUTB
OUTC
OUTD
14
U26
+5V
2
42
61
23
25
44
PCS0
PCS1
PCS2
PCS3
CS8BIT
CLK
R/W
DS
QSM_CS*0
QSM_CS*1
QSM_CS*2
QSM_CS*3
QSM_CS*4
QSM_CS*5
QSM_CS*6
QSM_CS*7
QSM_CS*8
QSM_CS*9
QSM_CS*10
QSM_CS*11
QSM_CS*12
QSM_CS*13
QSM_CS*14
QSM_CS*15
INB1
INB2
INC1
INC2
IND1
IND2
DS14C88M
+12V
V+
+5V
C28
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
4
5
9
10
12
13
2
TV64
2
ISP0
ISP1
ISP2
ISP4
ISP5
U19
44 1
INA1
1
MISC_CONT3
SYSTEM_CLK
MISC_CONT14
MISC_CONT7
9
10
11
12
83
20
73
74
ADD0
ADD1
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
CLR_INT
TV77
+5V
2
PCS0
PCS1
PCS2
PCS3
21
65
+5V
4
5
6
7
8
3
67
QSM_CS0
QSM_CS1
QSM_CS2
QSM_CS3
QSM_CS4
QSM_CS5
QSM_CS6
QSM_CS7
QSM_CS8
QSM_CS9
QSM_CS10
QSM_CS11
QSM_CS12
QSM_CS13
QSM_CS14
QSM_CS15
RDOUT*
TV76
2
ADD0
ADD1
ADD8
ADD9
ADD10
ADD11
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
RQI_5
2
PCS[0:3]
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
RQI_4
1
3
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
2
7
27
54
IRQ[1:6]
43 INTSEL*
1
1
1
~CS8_2 32
CSA*
~CS8_1 3
CSB*
~CS8_0 38
CSP*
TV89
BIDEN
TV90
GND1
GND2
GND3
GND4
TV65
QSM_CS*[0:15]
RESET*
2
MALE_9PIN_D
39
TV96
U28
TV79
GND
64 GND4
43 GND3
GND1
ADD[0:23]
TXB
RXB
RTSB*
CTSB*
DSRB*
DTRB*
RIB*
CDB*
ST16C452PS
TV103
TV100
TV80
1
2
37
IOR*
36
IOW*
10
62
12
13
5
11
6
8
TV78
1
1
CLK
TV57
TV110
1
4
1
U22
TV118
1
1
35
A0
34
A1
33
A2
TV81
1
ADD0
ADD1
ADD2
TXA
RXA
RTSA*
CTSA*
DSRA*
DTRA*
RIA*
CDA*
TV83
1
TV73
TV84
26
41
24
28
31
25
30
29
1
1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
1
CLRINT
TV74
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1
1
57
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
STROBE*
AUTOFDX
INIT
SLCTIN*
ERROR*
SLCT
BUSY
ACK*
PE
55
DATALATCH
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
VF2_
17
F2
18 GVF2
G2
VCC1 23
VCC2 40
VCC3 64
VCC1 21
119811
22 GND2
1
+5V
VF1_
15
F1
16 GVF1
G1
1
33
IOR
34
CS
13 VF0_
F0
14 GVF0
G0
U20
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
ADD0
ADD1
ADD2
U18
74VHC14
1
83
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
28
26
27
U18
74VHC14
1
DATA8
DATA9
DATA10
DATA11
DATA12
DATA13
DATA14
DATA15
ADD0
ADD1
ADD2
U18
74VHC14
2
2
.01
MODE
SCLK
ISPEN
SDI
SDO
12
C23
42
61
23
25
44
4
ISP0
ISP1
ISP2
ISP5
ISP6
1
+5V
3
+5V
1
13
VF0
ISP[0:6]
CONN26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
VF[0:2]
DATA[0:15]
RIBBON_HEADER_TO_25D_ON_CHASSIS
GVF[0:2]
1
TV104
1
TV112
1
TV94
DB9FEMALE_RT
-15V
TESTOUT
12-1-1997_15:50
4
4
RESET*
CPU PCB
WR*
RD*
119825
A
194
B
C
6
D
7
A
B
C
D
1
1
5
U18
74VHC14
6
9
U18
74VHC14
8
11
U18
74VHC14
10
MH6
MH7
MH4
MH3
U16
74LS04
12
13
MH5
FID3
MH2
FID1
MH1
FID2
2
2
U16
11
74LS04
10
3
3
9-11-1997_10:27
4
4
CPU PCB
119825
A
B
C
7
7
D
195
PCB Layout for CPU (119823)
196
Temperature Feedback
and Digital I/O
This chapter describes the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB of
the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 198
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 201
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 201
Service Manual
197
Chapter 5.5
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
The Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB provides the
microprocessor with the following information:
•
Temperature of temperature controlled zones
•
Ambient temperature inside the electronics compartment
•
Value of the line voltage
•
State of various digital control inputs
In addition, it provides digital output control for values, timed events, handshake
signals, and other functions.
Figure 5.5-1 shows a more detailed block diagram of the temperature feedback circuit.
Figure 5.5-1. Block Diagram of Temperature Feedback Circuit
Input channels are provided for 10 RTDs (temperature sensors), 2 thermocouples,
ambient temperature, and power line voltage.
The temperature channels are separated into two classes: low priority and high
priority. The high priority channels are those that require the most stable temperature
control or the most frequent temperature monitoring.
198
Service Manual
Chapter 5.5
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O
Theory of Operations
Figure 5.5-2 shows a more detailed block diagram of the temperature feedback circuit
for a high priority channel.
Figure 5.5-2. Detailed Block Diagram of Temperature Feedback Circuit
The voltage across the RTD is amplified by Al and input into one channel of the A/D.
This signal provides the microprocessor with information about the RTD temperature.
The signal resolution is approximately 0.2 °C/bit on the A/D. The microprocessor uses
a D/A to generate a voltage representing the desired setpoint temperature. The setpoint
and the actual temperature from Al are fed into error amplifier A2. The output of the
error amplifier represents the difference between the desired temperature and the
actual temperature. This signal is presented to a second channel on the A/D with a
resolution of about 0.0025 °C/bit. The low priority channels function the same way,
except the signals are multiplexed instead of having dedicated A/D channels.
The signal names of the temperature controls are listed in Table 5.5-1.
Table 5.5-1. Temperature Controls
Temp Zone
Signal Name on Schematic
RTDs
Service Manual
Oven
OV-RTD
Right Detector Base
DA-RTD
Left Detector Base
DB-RTD
Right Inlet
IA-RTD
Left Inlet
IB-RTD
Detector 1 Secondary
DAX-RTD
Detector 2 Secondary
DBX-RTD
Detector 3 Secondary
DCX-RTD
Jet Separator
JS-RTD
Valve Oven
VO-RTD
199
Chapter 5.5
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O
Theory of Operations
Table 5.5-1. Temperature Controls (Continued)
Temp Zone
Signal Name on Schematic
Thermocouples
PTV
Inlet-A-TC
OCI
Inlet-B-TC
Most of the required binary input and output signals are controlled or monitored
through PLD U42. The signals that control devices external to the PCB are listed in
Table 5.5-2. In addition, U42 provides the control signals for the analog multiplexer.
All of the RTD input channels are monitored with comparator circuits. This allows
checking of the oven temperature conditions. If any channel goes over approximately
525 °C, a signal is generated to the power control module that turns off all heaters. An
open RTD represents a very high temperature. Therefore, all unused RTD channels
must have a jumper in place of the RTD. Some temperature zones are controlled
through the detector cards. If no detector is installed, or if the detector installed does
not have a secondary heater, a jumper must be installed on the motherboard adjacent
to the detector card connector.
Table 5.5-2. External Input/Output Signals
Input Signals
Detector A ID (3 bits)
Detector B ID (3 bits)
Detector C ID (3 bits)
Handshake Signals (2 bits) and Inhibit Ready
Output Signals
Handshake Signals (4 bits) and Start Run, Ready Out, End
Run, Running
GC Phase (6 bits)
Right Inlet Valves (3 bits)
Left Inlet Valves (3 bits)
Right Detector Valves (3bits)
Left Detector Valves (3 bits)
Auxiliary Makeup Valve (1 bit)
Three-way Inlet Valve (1 bit)
Timed Events (8 bits)
Right Inlet Cooling Fan
Left Inlet Cooling Fan
Watch Dog
Two options for the TRACE GC 2000 require temperature feedback using
thermocouples instead of RTDs. These options are the PTV and the OCHOT.
200
Service Manual
Chapter 5.5
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O
Adjustment Procedures
When a thermocouple is required, an additional amplifier circuit is needed. This
circuit is in the form of a “piggyback” PCB which is plugged onto the TF & DIO
PCB. Up to two of these amplifiers may be installed. When installed, they plug on to
connector J1 or J2.
Some of the early assemblies of the TF & DIO PCB included a special circuit which
stabilized the temperature of RN4. The network RN4 was moved onto a special
piggyback PCB and the temperature of RN4 was controlled by the circuitry on the
piggyback PCB.
Adjustment Procedures
The Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) card is factory-calibrated with
values stored in EEPROM on the card. No field adjustments are possible.
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the Temperature Feedback and
Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB is listed below in Table 5.5-3. Also included are the
schematics and component layout information for the Thermocouple Amplifier
piggyback circuit (used for PTV and OCHOT options) and the RN4 Temperature
Stabilizer piggyback circuit (used on some early assemblies). The number of drawings
has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are 13
drawings for reference in this section.
Table 5.5-3. Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Schematics
Board
PN
Drawing
Layout
TF & DIO
23648340
119822F, 1–8
119820, 1
Thermocouple Amplifier
23648400
119834, 1
119832, 1
119977
119978, 1
119976, 1
RN4 Temperature Stabilizer
NOTE
Service Manual
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
201
A
B
C
D
1
REV
ECO NO.
DATE
BY
CHK
B
DRN 4175
12/8/97
L BaldwinL Baldwin 1
C
ECO 31511
1/6/98
L BaldwinL Baldwin
D
ECO 31537
4/8/98
L BaldwinG Phinney
E
ECO 31607
4/8/98
L BaldwinG Phinney
F
ECO 31693
7/6/98
L Baldwin
2
2
3
3
Larry Baldwin
10/16/97
Larry Baldwin
10/16/97
Larry Baldwin
10/16/97
Temperature Feedback and Digital I
4
4
F
119822
12/8/97
A
B
C
B
1
8
D
203
A
B
C
D
J3
1
2
3
4
A1
B1
C1
A2
B2
C2
A3
B3
C3
A4
B4
C4
A5
B5
C5
A6
B6
C6
A7
B7
C7
A8
B8
C8
A9
B9
C9
A10
B10
C10
A11
B11
C11
A12
B12
C12
A13
B13
C13
A14
B14
C14
A15
B15
C15
A16
B16
C16
A17
B17
C17
A18
B18
C18
A19
B19
C19
A20
B20
C20
A21
B21
C21
A22
B22
C22
A23
B23
C23
A24
B24
C24
A25
B25
C25
A26
B26
C26
A27
B27
C27
A28
B28
C28
A29
B29
C29
A30
B30
C30
A31
B31
C31
A32
B32
C32
1
33
65
2
34
66
3
35
67
4
36
68
5
37
69
6
38
70
7
39
71
8
40
72
9
41
73
10
42
74
11
43
75
12
44
76
13
45
77
14
46
78
15
47
79
16
48
80
17
49
81
18
50
82
19
51
83
20
52
84
21
53
85
22
54
86
23
55
87
24
56
88
25
57
89
26
58
90
27
59
91
28
60
92
29
61
93
30
62
94
31
63
95
32
64
96
DGND
A
204
TFB[0:14]
A1
OV_RTD+
RET_0
IA_RTD+
IB_RTD+
RET_1
DA_RTD+
DB_RTD+
RET_2
DAX_RTD+
DBX_RTD+
RET_3
DCX_RTD+
JS_RTD+
RET_4
VO_RTD+
VMON
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
1
BEEPER
A1 QSM[0:6]
QSM_MOSI
QSM_SCLK
QSM_MISO
QSM_CS2*
QSM_CS3*
QSM_CS4*
QSM_CS5*
DETA_0
DETA_1
DETA_2
DETB_0
DETB_1
DETB_2
DETC_0
DETC_1
DETC_2
RMT_ST
INH_RDY
ST_RUN
RDY_OUT
END_RUN
RUNNING
GC_PH0
GC_PH1
GC_PH2
GC_PH3
GC_PH4
GC_PH5
H2_SENS
IA_V1
IA_V2
IA_V3
IB_V1
IB_V2
IB_V3
DA_G1
DA_G2
DA_G3
DB_G1
DB_G2
DB_G3
DC_XM
TWV
TEV1
TEV2
TEV3
TEV4
TEV5
TEV6
TEV7
TEV8
IA_CF
IB_CF
WD_TIM
OVERTEMP
VMON
~RESET
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
DETID[0:8]
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
2
CB[0:5]
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A1
PHA[0:5]
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A1
VLV[0:13]
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A1
TEV[1:8]
3
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
-15VNVLV
+24VUN
-15V
+15V
GND_N15VLV
+5VD
1
1
C61
2
.01uF
C56
2
1
.01uF
4-8-1998_16:09
4
C51
2
.01uF
Temperature Feedback and Digital I
119822
AGND
B
C
2
D
8
A
B
TP2
.1UF C45
7
1
1
10K0
A2 OV_RTD+
95K3
3
C69
100PF
3
U23
ACT_TEMP[0:11]
2
2
.1UF C46
R1
AGND
C1 100PF
CER
1
10K0
OP-470
7
6
5
A1
OV_ACT
DA_ACT
DB_ACT
IA_ACT
IB_ACT
DAX_ACT
DBX_ACT
DCX_ACT
JS_ACT
VO_ACT
TCA_ACT
TCB_ACT
5
U23
825K
AGND
RX2
11
.1UF C55
CER
10K0
95K3
DB_RTD+ 9
10
OP-470
8
9
825K
14
10
10K0
A4
95K3
IA_RTD+ 12
U23
RET_1
9M09
R5
+5VB
ISO[0:7]
2
12
2
AGND
RX3
1
.1UF C39
1
C4
2
.01uF
14
FSIN*
16
CLKIN
15
SDIN
11
SDOUT
CER
10K0
95K3
6
9M09
825K
4
2
OP-470
1
3
95K3
RET_0
RET_1
RET_2
RET_3
RET_4
10
U14
AGND
9M09
825K
RX4
.1UF C52
CER
14
10K0
-15VA
13
119908
-10VREF
12
3
8
7
9M09
+15VA
AD7564
9
AGND1
1
7
6
R/C
C
Q 5
9 A*
U1
Q*12
12
10B
10
C8
15PF
13
AGND
U4
14
CLR*
11
74LS123
AGND1
3
C34
+2.5VREF
MUX[0:3]
+15VA
.1UF C50
-15VA
.1UF C47
C16
4.7UF
1
2
.1UF C48
200K
1
2
1
R10
10.0K
2
R9
C37
-15VA
.1UF
C38
AGND
LT1014
U6
AGND1
AGND1
AGND
9
Decoupling Caps for PreAmps
8
10
1
2
10.0K
R23
OP-470
1
R17
200K
4
Temperature Feedback and Digital
8
119822
3
2
AGND1
7-6-1998_13:41
U6
LT1014
U22
RX6
AGND1
B
.1UF
1
3
R15
1.00K
119908
+15VA
2
R13
3.74K
3
2
1
309K R28
1.00M R20
2
RET_4
-15VA
AGND
2
.1UF C49
2
CER
1
+2.5VREF
1
2
+15VA
+2.5VREF
R22
10.0k
.1UF C15
J2
INLET_B_TC
2
CER
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J5
13
2
10.0
AGND
AMB_TEMP
VMON
A
1
1
.1UF C43
14
AGND
RN3
R6
10K
1
5
4
3
2
1
825K
8
LT1014
LT1014
5
95K3
4
OP-470
7
U22
10K0
A16 VO_RTD+ 12
3
9M09
2
1
J1
5
10
U4
10
R19
10.0K
INLET_A_TC
10K0
4
9
+5VA
OP-470
8
5
95K3
C9
15PF
147K R18
6
A14 JS_RTD+ 9
1
12
.1UF C44
AGND
11
2
10.0
2
RX5
4
95K3
825K
1
DGND
10
10K0
9M09
LT1014
2
.01uF
CER
A13 DCX_RTD+6
5
2
CER
2
825K
U4
R8
9
RFBD
8
IO1D
7
IO2D
AV[0:10]
DAX_ACT A2
DBX_ACT A3
DCX_ACT A4
OV_ACT A5
TCA_ACT A6
DB_ACT A7
MUX_ACT A8
OT_SET A9
TCA_SET A10
DB_SET A11
MUX_SET A12
7
AGND
U22
9M09
6
R4
1
95K3
A1
C7
15PF
2
+5VB
-15VA
825K
1
50V
.1UF C53
10K0
A11 DBX_RTD+3
+5VB
AGND
U22
RET_3
+2.5VREF RN2
OP-470
14
2
10.0
27
13
.01uF
V+
I16
I15
I14
28
I13
OUT
I12
I11
DG506A
I10
12
I9
GND
U11
I8
18
EN
I7
I6
14
A3
I5
15
A2
I4
16
A1
I3
17
A0
I2
I1
V-
1
1
95K3
12
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
11
10K0
27 AGND
825K
CER
MUX0
MUX1
MUX2
MUX3
9M09
A3
A6
A9
A12
A15
+15VA
.1UF C36
R7
20
RFBA
21
IO1A
22
IO2A
5
RFBC
4
IO1C
2
IO2C
U2
C26
RET_2
5
LT1014
24
RFBB
25
IO1B
28
IO2B
U14
95K3
9
OP-470
7
5
10K0
A10 DAX_RTD+6
18
A0
17
A1
2
1
IB_RTD+ 3
U4
3
ISO_A2DCVT
ISO_4MHZ
ISO_MOSI
ISO_SCLK
ISO_CS2
ISO_CS3
ISO_SCLK*
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
1
R44
2
7
OP-470
14
U23
A5
C6
15PF
2
1
1
13
825K
+2.5VREF
A1
10.0K
R43
-10VREF
9M09
1
2
10.0K
8
2
10.0
CER
119908
+2.5VREF
1
AGND
.1UF C54
13
RN4
CLR*
3
DGND
A8
GND
8
10
6
23
19
9M09
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
REFD
REFC
REFB
REFA
95K3
DA_RTD+ 6
1
A7
+5VA
RET_0
4
2
2
1
20.0K
15 14
16
VCC R/C
C
1 A*
Q 13
U1
2 B
Q* 4
VDD 3
825K
1
1
+5VB
9M09
12 CLR*
13 LDAC*
TFB[0:14] A1
R45
1.00K
OP-470
1
2
825K
2
9M09
D
1 1
-10VREF
8
1
+2.5VREF
C
TP1
C
D
205
A
B
4.99K
804K
4
1
2
1
.01uF
3
4K99
804K
2
2
6
R33
715
10UF
8
4K99
.22UF
1
7
2
2 10UF
2
.01uF
50V
1
715
402K
C19
5
Normally TCA Error
May be Det A or
any of the Det
Aux Channels
RX7
+15V
AGND1
LT1014
7
6
4K99
11
12
AGND1
13
.22UF
Normally Det B Error
May be any of the Det
Aux Channels
1
.01uF
4K99
LT1014
8
9
402K
C5
+15VA
C20
4K99
804K
2
1
1
U7
10
1
2
1
4.99K
R12
R49
4.99K
402K
2
804K
C2
100UF
2
1
2
.1UF
50V
1
C14
C3
2
RX1
10
14
U7
AGND1
15
AGND
4K99
17
C17
1
NOTE: C17 NOT USED
2
2
1
4.99K
R48
2
4K99
MUXed Channel Error
13
119909
C12
.01UF
1
16
NOTE:
JUMPER TO SELECT
INPUT CHANNEL
RN1
LT1014
14
C13 1
.01uF
10UF2 16V
50V
2
2
10UF
RX8
-15VA
12
-15V
J8
(NORMAL)
AUX
AUX
AUX
7
5
3
1
U7
8
6
4
2
AGND1
+5VA
AV[0:10] A1
C28
A2 DAX_ACT
A3 DBX_ACT
A4 DCX_ACT
A5 OV_ACT
A6 TCA_ACT
A7
DB_ACT
A8 MUX_ACT
A9 OT_SET
A10 TCA_SET
A11 DB_SET
A12 MUX_SET
C35
TANT
.01UF 10UF
+5VB
+15VA
50V
C10
LT1014
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LT1014
LT1014
3
4
C22
C23
5
C41
TANT
50V
CER
CER
.1UF
C27
CER
.01UF
.01UF
50V
.01UF
10UF
C24
.1UF
C29
C42
.01uF
U6
LT1014
CH0
CH4
CH1
CH5
CH2
U10
CH6
AD7858
CH3
CH7
C32
C31
10K
TANT
DVDD
DGND
18
C11
.01UF 10UF
50V
AGND
.01UF
19
-15VA
AGND
3
22
CLKIN
1
CONVST*
2
BUSY
3
SLEEP*
REF
7
CREF1
8
CREF2
17
CAL*
6
7
+2.5VREF
AVDD 5
8
10
21 DIN
7
5
.01UF
AGND1
24 SYNC*
1
3
R25
U8
9
AGND 6
U8
6
20 DOUT
U8
2
23 SCLK
B
C
B
A
C21
R32 ADJ
1
243
5
J10
DET
DET
DET
DET
1
C59
R21
4.99K
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
7&8
5&6
3&4
1&2
C25
U7
2
R46
R11
4.99K
J7
2
3
R24 ADJ
1
243
AGND1
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
LT1014
1
2
1
2
4&5
VI
C57
2
5&6
2&3
2
4.99K
3
1
2&3
HIGH
R47
COPPER PAD FOR HEATSINK
VI
1
Oven Error
4K99
2
NORMAL
VO
1
1
J9
6
5
4
3
2
1
5&6
2
+5VA
1
2
JUMPER PINS
1&2
U9
LM317T
C18 .22UF
402K
2
4.99K
1
VO
1
9
3
LOW
2
+5VB
2
1
R3
-2.5VREF
2
R2
NOTE
1
D
U27
LM317T
J6
6
5
4
3
2
1
DESIRED GAIN
C
10UF
C40
AGND1
40.2K
-10VREF
+5VA
R30
10UF
2
6
1
Q2
C33
9
1
8
2
2N4403
C30
1
2
.01uF
R26
3
10
U14
OP-470
VOUT
10.0K
R29
VIN
AD780
5
TRIM
VSEL GND
-15VA
ISO[0:9] A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
ISO_A2DCVT
ISO_4MHZ
ISO_MOSI
ISO_SCLK
ISO_CS2
ISO_CS3
ISO_SCLK*
ISO_MISO
4
AD780
R27
4
R35
2
1
10.0K
13
100PF
2
1
2
100
14
12
1
-2.5VREF
3
TEMP
U12
8
2
1
10.0K 13
14
12
U14
OP-470
4
2
AGND1
LT1014
U8
AMB_TEMP
119822
AGND
A
206
Temperature Feedback and Digital
C58
B
C
4
D
8
A
B
C
D
VLV[0:13]
+5VD
1
2
SCLK
2
18
1
119912
CLEAR
C66
5000pF
U42
2
19
4MHZ
23
25
42
44
61
+5VD
J4
24
A2D_CLK
ISPEN
SDI
MODE
SDO
PCLK
A2D_CVT
RESET
SCLK_OUT
DGND
GND1
GND2
GND3
GND4
1
15
19
16
18
17
17
18
2
1
12
11
8
6
15
13
4
3
2
14
2
12
GND1 GND2
V1
V2
A1
GND_N15VLV
1
20
2
19
3
18
4
17
5
16
6
15
7
14
IA_V1
IA_V2
IA_V3
IB_V1
IB_V2
IB_V3
DA_G1
DA_G2
DA_G3
DB_G1
DB_G2
DB_G3
DC_XM
TWV
DGND
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
VLV[0:13]
2
79
13
8
80
U40
81
82
UDN2588A
DGND
3
-15VNVLV
28
3
1
8
9
11
13
VCC
U38
20
4
4
MOSI_G
SCLK*
U38
U38
DGND
U38
15
TEV1
TEV2
TEV3
TEV4
TEV5
TEV6
TEV7
TEV8
A2D_CVT
U38
10
5
6
7
14
15
16
17
SCLK_G
19
12
UDN2596A
GND1 GND2
DGND
18
1
22
43
64
U39
2
DGND
11
U41
+5VD
SO
C63
.01UF
2
G_SO
G_SCLK
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
11
C64
100pF
SI
OUT0
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
OUT17
OUT18
OUT19
OUT20
OUT21
OUT22
OUT23
OUT24
OUT25
OUT26
OUT27
OUT28
OUT29
OUT30
OUT31
OUT32
OUT33
OUT34
OUT35
OUT36
OUT37
OUT38
OUT39
8
1
~RESET
3
7
12
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
A2 QSM_MOSI
A3
QSM_SCLK
A4 QSM_MISO
A5 QSM_CS2*
A6 QSM_CS3*
QSM_CS4*
A7
A8 QSM_CS5*
2
6
13
16
CS_DIO
26
CS_A2D
27
CS_D2A
C65
5000pF
2
C67
5000pF
8
6
1
IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
A1
1
5
1
U38
10
2
DGND
QSM[0:6]
1
+24VUN
11 VSS
2
U38
+5VD
H2_SENS
OVERTEMP
C68
5000pF
U43
9
DETB_2
DETC_0
DETC_1
DETC_2
1
U43
4
3
DETA_0
DETA_1
DETA_2
DETB_0
DETB_1
21
VCC1
65
VCC2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DGND
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
U43
U43
U43
3
2
A1
DETID[0:8]
U43
U43
16
.1uF
10
10UF
1
1
UDN2596A
VCC
14
U43
2
16
+5VD
17
18
1
RMT_ST
INH_RDY
ST_RUN
RDY_OUT
END_RUN
RUNNING
5
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
7
A1
CB[0:5]
GC_PH0
GC_PH1
GC_PH2
GC_PH3
GC_PH4
GC_PH5
13
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
20
A1
PHA[0:5]
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
BEEPER
DGND
A2
A3
A4
A5
4
A1 TEV[1:8]
A1
MUX[0:3]
MUX0
MUX1
MUX2
MUX3
TEV[1:8]
U38
WD_TIM
14
5
IB_CF
4
Temperature Feedback and Digital
8
119822
5
IA_CF
A
B
C
D
207
A
B
C
1
+5VB
1
D
+5VD
+5VD
R42
U35
2
619
A2D_CVT
3
SG51P-4MHZ
GND
7
2
EN
OUT
1
619
8
8
7
6
5
VI
EN
VO
GND
2
1
ISO_A2DCVT
HCPL2400
U29
R36
14
VCC
8
7
6
5
VI
EN
VO
GND
2
1
3
ISO_4MHZ
HCPL2400
U36
DGND
4MHZ
2
2
MOSI_G
SCLK_G
R37
U30
2
619
3
2
3
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
QSM_MOSI
2
U37 25320
1
QSM_MISO
2
3
3
4
CS
Vcc
SO
HOLD
WP
SCK
GND
SI
8
619
+5VD
3
7
6
2
619
3
2
619
3
SCLK*
8
7
6
5
VI
EN
VO
GND
2
1
3
ISO_CS3
HCPL2400
U34
R41
DGND
8
7
6
5
VI
EN
VO
GND
2
1
ISO_CS2
HCPL2400
U33
R40
5
ISO_SCLK
8
7
6
5
VI
EN
VO
GND
2
1
QSM_CS5*
ISO[0:7]
HCPL2400
U32
R39
QSM_MISO
QSM_CS2*
QSM_CS3*
QSM_CS4*
QSM_CS5*
8
7
6
5
VI
EN
VO
GND
2
619
QSM[0:6]
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
ISO_MOSI
HCPL2400
U31
R38
1
8
7
6
5
VI
EN
VO
GND
2
1
ISO_SCLK*
HCPL2400
AGND
Q1
1
ISO_MISO
2
2N4403
3
+5VD
U28
8
7
6
5
4
VI
EN
VO
GND
R34
AGND
2
2
1
619
3
4
HCPL2400
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/
6
8
119822
DGND
A
208
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
U16
+5VD
1M
U13 1M
U18 1M
1
R31
10K
+2.5VREF
1M
2
1
U25 10K
R16
1.00K
13
9
2
14
1
12
1
7
U25
U6
2
1
8
10K
10
U17 10K
9
10
U24 10K
9
10
2
U26
4
R14
7.32K
2
10
9
5
2.232 Volts
1
2
U16
1
1
LM339
U16
1M
8
2
7
7
LT1014
U16
5
U25
1M
1
U26
6
AGND1
6
10K
LM339
6
5
9
14
U26
8
3
U25
4
10K
U16
LM339
1M
4
3
11
1
U25
U18
LM339
6
2
2
U21
4
7
U17
2
10K
1M
5
5
2
8
10K
LM339
U18
1M
10
9
ACT_TEMP[0:11]
13
U26
10
A1
7
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
OV_ACT
DA_ACT
DB_ACT
IA_ACT
IB_ACT
DAX_ACT
DBX_ACT
DCX_ACT
JS_ACT
VO_ACT
TCA_ACT
TCB_ACT
U18
1M
1
U21
6
5
U17
6
10K
LM339
8
7
9
8
3
U17
14
U21
4
10K
U18
LM339
1M
4
3
11
10
1
U17
3
U13
LM339
3
1M
4
3
11
13
U20
10
7
U24
13
U21
2
10K
8
10K
LM339
U13
1M
6
5
5
U13
1M
2
U20
4
5
U24
6
10K
LM339
10
9
7
6
3
U24
4
10K
U20
1
U13
LM339
1M
8
7
9
8
1
U24
4
2
10K
U20
14
LM339
4
Temperature Feedback and Digital I
7
8
119822
OVERTEMP
A
B
C
D
209
A
B
C
D
1
1
2
2
MHP1
MHP2
MHP3
3
3
4
4
Temperature Feedback and Digital I
8
8
119822
A
210
B
C
D
PCB Layout for Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (119820)
211
A
B
European
Thermocouple
United States
Thermocouple
Chromel
Constatan
1
C
Chromel
Red
Purple
Constantan
Black
Red
D
REV
ECO NO.
DATE
BY
D
DRN 4215
5/1/98
L BALDWIN
E
ECO 31652
7/6/98
L BALDWIN
CHK
L BALDWIN
1
1
2
J2
2
2.5VREF
1
3
.01uF
C5
50V
2
C3
50V
.01uF
1
+15VDC
2
OP-470
U1
1
3.65K
+15VDC
6
VOUT
5
R1
TEMP
OP-470
U1
OP-470
U1
5
TRIM
14
2
U2
1
3.65K
R3
R12
249K
8
1.00K R6
+5VDC
1.00K
2
2
R5
7
2
1
1
GND VSEL
4
2
1
R4
12
1
3
2
1
AD780
2
2
1
1.00K R11
13
2
VIN
46.4K
R2
7
2
261K R7
2
1
113K
6
2
1
1.00K R8
U3
2
9
1
6
3
2
1 5
8
AD780
4
AD820
2
2
1
1.00K R9
U1
OP-470
R10
1.00K
1
1
R13
249K
2
10
-15VDC
MH1
3
3
MH2
+15VDC
J1
+5VDC
-15VDC
MH3
1
2
3
4
5
MH4
1
2
C4
.01uF
50V
1
2
C8
10UF
16V
1
2
C1
.01uF
50V
2
1
16V
10UF
C7
1
2
C2
.01uF
50V
1
2
C6
10UF
16V
4
Larry Baldwin
4/29/98
Larry Baldwin
4/29/98
THERMOCOUPLE PRE-AMPLIFIER
4
E
119834
B
A
212
B
C
1
D
PCB Layout for Thermocouple Amplifier (119832)
213
B
C
C6
Not Used
2
1
1
R1
R8
1
1
1
Temperature Sensor RT1
1
2
499K
2
R5
2.94K
D
+15V
A
REV
ECO NO.
A
DRN ______
DATE
BY
CHK
1
220
2
2
C5 Not Used
10K_25C
1
2
LT1014
R7
6
5
U1
LT1014
10.0K
3
2
7
1
2
3
U1
1
LT1014
C
Q1
2N4401
1E
R2
9
U1
8
1
10
2
2
2
1
R6 10.0K
B
499K
R4
3.01K
C
3
E
Q2
TIP31A
1
1
1
R3
3.01K
2
B
DGND
2
2
1
DGND
2
R10
5
Oven Heater
2
119908
1
Resistor Network in Oven
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 RNet
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
R11
0
Shorted
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
2
RN1
J1
R9
0
Shorted
DGND
1
Oven
OV1
2
3
3
13
12
U1
14
LT1014
1
C1
.01uF
50V
1
2
C4
10UF
35V
+15V
2
J2
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
C2
.01uF
50V
4/28/98
Larry Baldwin
4/28/98
MH1
MH2
4
1
Larry Baldwin
2
119978
Not Used
4/15/98
-15V
A
214
R-Net Temperature Controller
4
C3
B
C
A
B
1
D
1
PCB Layout for RN4 Temperature Stabilizer (119976)
215
Power Control Module
This chapter describes the PCB for the Power Control Module (PCM) of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 218
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 219
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 219
Service Manual
217
Chapter 5.6
Power Control Module
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
The Power Control Module (PCM) provides the system power supply and the controls
for all of the heaters.
The dc voltages required by the GC are supplied by a commercial power supply. This
supply provides +5 V, +15 V, –15 V, and +24 V. The +5 V is used by the
microprocessor and the logic circuits. The +15 V and –15 V are used by the analog
circuitry in the basic frame and oven of the GC. The +24 V is used by the detectors to
provide local voltages for the analog circuitry and for driving valves.
A relay in the PCM chassis controls power to all of the heaters. If it is open, no power
is available to any of the heaters. The watchdog signal generated on the Temperature
Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB triggers a retriggerable one-shot (U13)
that controls the relay. The software must trigger the one-shot several times per second
to maintain power availability to the heater and the inlet cooling fans. The PCM has a
thermal cutout (SW1 on the PCB) that will disable the heater power if the temperature
in the PCM exceeds 55 °C.
Each line voltage heater channel is controlled by a triac interfaced to the
microprocessor with an optocoupler. Each low-voltage heater is controlled by a triac
interfaced to the microprocessor with a transistor.
The PCB in the PCM contains a transformer with two secondary windings. One
winding drives a comparator (U10) that generates a square wave from the line voltage
sine wave. The square wave drives two one-shots (U11) that trigger on opposite edges.
The outputs of the one-shots are combined in the PLD (U3) to create a clock two times
the power line frequency and synchronized to the zero crossing of the power line
voltage.
The second winding of the transformer generates an unregulated DC voltage. This
voltage is proportional to the line voltage and is monitored by the microprocessor.
Circuits are provided to monitor the voltages from the DC power supply. If any supply
is not present, the power available to the heaters is disabled. The status of the DC
supplies is input to the microprocessor through the PLD (U3). In addition, these
signals drive LEDs on the motherboard.
An oven door interlock switch provides an override for the control of the oven heater
and the oven blower. If the door is open, both the heater and the blower are disabled.
Depending on the GC configuration, a combination of up to two out of three possible
transformers may be installed in the PCM.
Transformer 1 (119916) provides voltage for the FID ignitor. This transformer is used
when an FID is present, but there are no requirements for low-voltage heaters.
Transformer 2 (119917) provides voltage for ignitors and low-voltage heaters. This
transformer is used when there is a requirement for low-voltage heaters.
218
Service Manual
Chapter 5.6
Power Control Module
Adjustment Procedures
Transformers 1 and 2 are mutually exclusive. A pigtail on the transformer leads must
be plugged into J6 on the Power Control PCB to indicate to the microprocessor which
transformer (if any) is present.
Transformer 3 (PN 230 43444) (119917) provides power for the NPDs. It is present
only when the NPD is present. A pigtail on the transformer leads must be plugged into
J4 on the Power Control PCB to indicate that the transformer is present.
The Power Control PCB can be configured for 115- or 230-volt operation. A jumper
on J3 indicates the selected voltage configuration to the microprocessor. Place the
jumper between pins 1 and 2 for 115 V ac or between pins 2 and 3 for 230 V ac. The
jumper assembly on J 12 changes the connections to the transformers and the oven fan
motor. For 115 V ac, position the block with the black lead toward the end near the
transformer on the PCB. For 230 V ac, position the block with the black lead away
from the end near the transformer on the PCB.
WARNING! For conversion from 120 V ac to 230 V ac, all line voltage heaters must be changed. For
European configuration, it is necessary to convert from 230 V ac to 120 V ac. Again, all
line voltage heaters must be changed.
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary.
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the Power Control Module
(PCM) PCB is listed below in Table 5.6-1. The number of drawings has been included
for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are six drawings for reference
in this section.
The Power Supply PCB schematics and component layout are not included in this
manual because the PCB must be replaced as a unit. When ordering a replacement
Power Supply PCB, refer to the part number (PN) in Table 5.6-1.
Table 5.6-1. Power Control Module PCB Schematics
Board
PCM PCB
Power Supply PCB
NOTE
Service Manual
PN
Drawing
Layout
23699500
119837D, 1–5
119835, 1
76330 0031
—
—
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
219
A
B
C
D
REV
1
ECO NO.
DATE
BY
CHK
B
DRN 4175
12/8/97
L BaldwinL Baldwin
C
ECO 31512
1/7/98
L BaldwinL Baldwin
D
ECO 31601
4/7/98
L Baldwin
1
2
2
3
3
4
L Baldwin
12/8/97
L Baldwin
12/8/97
L Baldwin
12/8/97
L Baldwin
12/8/97
Power Control PCB
119837
12/8/97
A
B
C
4
D
B
1
5
D
221
A
B
C
D
LINE_VOLTAGE_HI_SW
LINE_VOLTAGE_LOW_SW
1
1
+5V
RX16
1
IA_CF
1
6
2
4
F5
2
2
MOC3021
U12
1
1
1
1
6
5
IB_SW
4
UDN2595A
5
14
U18
TPU_4
2
4
G_DB_B 3
1
UDN2595A
13
Q25
1
BTA06-600T
6
DB_A
25
U19
Inlet B Cooling Fan
5
4
Valve Oven
3
2
Jet Separator
1
1
6
2
4
2
G_DB_A 3
MOC3021
U12
Det Base B
7
6
Det Base A
5
4
4
G_IB
Q27
1
BTA06-600T
1
6
2
4
2A_250V
1
2
F12
2
R36
2
100
2
MOC3021
G_IA
3
Q28
1
BTA06-600T
C24
.1UF
500V
1
2
MOLEX_39-28-804
3-26-1998_16:30
4
J7
4
J1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
J5
1
2
3
4
PTV_HI
PTV_RT
DETA_AX_HI
DETA_AXRT
DETB_AX_HI
DETB_AXRT
DETC_AX_HI
U12
1
C23
.1UF
500V
IA
_IA
U21
2
UDN2595A
11
100
1
2
2
2
2
DETC_AXRT
8VAV_2
8VAC_1
3
3
RX23
1
R22
200
8
2
R35
F11
2
MOC3021
U12
TPU_0
3
2A_250V
1
2
1
2
Inlet A
1
C22
.1UF
500V
IB
2
1
2
100
_IB
6
1
Inlet B
3
2A_250V
1
2
TPU_1
U20
1
F4
5A_250V
1
F2
F1
5A_250V
1
1
F3
5A_250V
1
5A_250V
UDN2595A
7
12
R34
Q26
1
BTA06-600T
1
R27
200
2
F10
2
1
2
C21
.1UF
500V
2
_DB_A
2
6
TPU_3
100
F9
2
MOC3021
R21
200
C1
.1UF
500V
R33
_DB_B
6
2
1
1
1
C3
.1UF
500V
2
3
IA_SW
R26
200
1
BTA06-600T
C20
.1UF
500V
2A_250V
1
2
1
RX1
7
DB_A_SW
100
DB_B
RX22
1
48VAC-1
48VAC-2
R32
Q24
1
BTA06-600T
2
BTA06-600T
3
1
U2
G_JS
RX20
1
2
Q1
2
100
2
2
U2
4
RX21
1
2
1
6
2
MOC3021
R1
100
3
3
1
6
TB2
8
8
F8
2
1
U12
2
3
UDN2595A
15
1
1
Q10
2N4403
2
2A_250V
1
2
2
1K
4
TPU_8
2
2
1
C2
.1UF
500V
1
1
JS_SW
C19
.1UF
500V
JS
RX19
1
2
2
U4
TPU_7
Q23
1
BTA06-600T
_JS
U17
U12
Q3
4
100
3
4
DB_B_SW
R3
100
3
+5V
3
1
3
VO_SW
1
2
1K
G_VO
MOC3021
2
4
2
5
Inlet A OC Cooling Fan
7
1
TPU_6
3
1
Q9
2N4403
1
4
R20
200
2
U4
5
2
U12
2
Q2
6
100
100
2
1
R2
100
3
+5V
6
F7
2
1
U2
3
6
2A_250V
1
1
1K
2
R31
_VO
U16
1
1
2
6
5
UDN2595A
16
2
BTA06-600T
TPU_5
3
TPU_9
Q8
2N4403
1
R25
200
C4
.1UF
500V
1
U4
VO
1
BTA06-600T
U2
1
IBCF_SW
C18
.1UF
500V
3
2
8
100
2
2
Q4
Q22
1
BTA06-600BW
2
7
MOC3021
U12
2
2
+5V
G_IABF 3
RX18
1
3
100
1
3
R30
7
2A_250V
1
2
1K
4
2
8
7
2
R5
100
1
Q7
2N4403
1
2
1
U4
TPU_2
2
F6
2
6
TB1
8
8
IACF_SW
_IABF
U15
1
C17
.1UF
500V
IBCF
2
1
1
Q21
1
BTA06-600BW
RX17
1
R19
200
+5V
100
2
G_IACF 3
TPU_[0:15]
UDN2595A
2
17
R29
2
1
2A_250V
1
2
_IACF
U14
IB_CF
UDN2595A
1
18
IACF
1
R24
200
MOLEX_39-31-016
PTV Heater
Power Control PCB
Connector to Motherboard
119837
A
222
B
C
2
D
5
A
B
C
D
+5V
+5V
1
1
R15
249K
R13
1.0K
2
1
100K
1
5000pF
1
2
2
C7
C14
2
+15V
2
R12
1
.01UF
6 5 8
7
LM311N
3
1 4
1
2
1
1
2
XFMR_P1LO
XFMR_P2HI
3
4
9
10
LINE_VOLTAGE_LOW
6
12
1N914A
CR5
R9
200PF
.01UF
U10
C11
50V
2 B
U11
Q* 4
1
CR7
1N914A
1
C10
.01UF
50V
2
2
1
10.0K
7
+
2
1
2
LINE_VOLTAGE_HI
16
15 14
R/C
VCC
C
Q 13
1 A* 74LS123
1
2
R10
C9
GND
8
-15V
CLR*
3
2
1
1.00K
+5V
1
T1
MAGNATEK_VPP24-100
CR2
+5V
2
2
1
VMON
1
1
1N4001
R8
174K
2
2
1
10UF
35V
C6
2
+5V
2
1
2
3
MOLEX_22-23-2031
3
TPU_10
+5V
J8
1
Oven Door Interlock 2
C5
.01uF
7
6
R/C C
9 A*
Q 5
U11
10
Q*12
12
10B
74LS123
CLR*
11
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
24
SDO
14
SDI
13
ISPEN*
36
MODE
33
PCLK
34
119815
PLSI1016-60
U3
OUT0
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
18
19
20
21
22
25
26
27
28
PLFX2
29
PLF1
30
PLF2
1
GND1
23
GND2
1
R4
10K
J3
Jumper 1-2 for 120V
Jumper 2-3 for 230V
IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
10
SCLK
15
MOSI
16
MISO
17
CS*
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+5V
VCC2
MOLEX_22-23-2031
VCC1
J4
Jumper 1-3 for Single NPD 1
2
Jumper 2-3 for Dual NPD
Pigtail on Xfmr Cable
3
12
2
1
MOLEX_22-23-2031
5000pF
2
J9
J6
Jumper 1-3 for Ignitor Xfmr1
Jumper 2-3 for Main Xfrmr 2
Pigtail on Xfmr Cable
3
R14
249K
C12
RESET
TPU10_BUF
TPU_15
3
31
OVEN_EN
+5V
+15V_PRES
1-6-1998_12:11
10
-15V_PRES
+5V_PRES
QSM_CS6*
4
+24V_PRES
QSM_MISO
Q11
2N4401
QSM_MOSI
E
QSM_SCLK
1
2
9
U1
10K
1
C
2
R40
499
2
2
3
B
R39
499
R38
499
8
R7
2
1
1.0K
1
1
7
U1
10K
4
Power Control PCB
119837
A
B
C
3
5
D
223
A
B
C
Line Voltage Switched
D
Oven & Fan Control
Line Voltage High
1
"RELAY"
Line Voltage Low
2
1
MH3
J20
J18
2
J22
1
2
J21
1
J2
1
1
3
LINE_VOLTAGE_LOW_SW
RX15
1
RX26
1
RX14
1
RX13
1
RX24
1
1
RX25
MOLEX_39-28-8020
J24
1
2
RX12
LINE_VOLTAGE_HI_SW
2
1N4001
1
1
J19
CR1
LINE_VOLTAGE_HI
LINE_VOLTAGE_LOW
J14
+5V
1
C13
C16
47UF
16V
1
RX11
74LS123
2 B
GND
8
1
3
XFMR_P2HI
XFMR_P1LO
Q* 4
CLR*
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
White
Brown
Blue
Orange
Yellow
2
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
Jumper for 230 VAC Operation
2
+5V
1
Thermal
Cut Out
+24V
SW1
OT
R6
1
5
R28
U5
10K
1
6
1N5250B
CR3
2
1
1.00K
3
5
8
7
C 10K
Q14
2
2N440110K
U5 1 E
2
6
9
3
J23
1
2
200
B
3
3
4OTG
MOC3021
+24V_PRES
+15V_PRES
R23
U5
+5V_PRES
+24V
U23
1
6
BMT
2
4
BMTG
2
1
200
10
10K
2
C
Q12
2N4401
1E
B
6
2
1
TPU10_BUF
U5
U22
1
OVEN_EN
2
7
6
R/C
C
9 A*
Q
-15V_PRES
4
MOC3021
U1
10K
10
10B
1
2
+5V
OVERTEMP
Q5
2N4403
2
1
2
1
10
4
10
4
3
U1
10K
1
E
Q6
2N4401
12-23-1997_13:14
4
Power Control PCB
119837
2
2
4
2
1
1
224
B
C
2
-15V
12V
A
3
B
U5
CR9
U8 1N914A
1K
CR8
1N5242B
Loss of any supply will disable this relay driver.
4
10
2
Q18
2N4401
E
10K
U7
10K
E
1
1
U6
10K
U6
10K
8
Q20
2N4401
E
6
2
10K
Q19 U7
2N4401
3
5
B
E
9
3
U9
10K
1
C
1
3
2
7
3
2
10K
U6
2
B
E
B
Q17
2N4401
2
C
U13
Q*12
12
74LS123
CLR*
11
U1
10K
C
1
1
C
B
8
7
3C
10K
Q15 U6
2N4401
1E
9
2
9
3
10K
10
8
2
8
7
3 C
Q13
2N4401
1 E
Q16
2N4401
2
C
B
B
U9
3
10K
B
2
1
3
U7
10K
9
7
U9
U8
1K
3
U8
1K
2
3
4
6
6
CR6
1N5221B2
6
CR4
U6
10K
1
1
U7
10K
U7
10K
5
5
1
U9
10K
1N5242B
12V
3
5
+15V
10K
5
1
WD_TIM
U8
1K
BLOWER
Single Voltage
Blower Motor
1
2
Jumper for 115 VAC Operation
+24V
MOLEX_39-28-802
U9
OVEN
MOLEX_39-28-806
J16
2
1
10.0K
RX2
4
SEC2_HI
SEC2_LO
2
R37
100
J12
R17
U8
1K
Fan
PRI2_HI
PRI2_LO
J17
MOLEX_26-48-1241
+24V_MAIN
SEC1_HI
SEC1_LO
1
C8
.01uF
PRI1_HI
PRI1_LO
Q29
+5V
RX8
1
SEC2_A
SEC2_CT
SEC2_B
BM2
BM3
BM4
BM5
BM6
-15V
1
J11
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
BM1
16V
15 14
R/C
C
U13
Q 13
16
VCC
1 A*
RX9
+15V_MAIN
MOLEX_26-60-413
R11
10K
1
MOLEX_39-31-016
1
RX10
1
2
To Motherboard
RX6
PRI2_HI
PRI2_LO
BTA06-600BW
R16
10.0K
RX3
2
1
1
2
3
4
2
RX5
+15V
XFB1
XFB2
XFB3
XFB4
SEC1_A
SEC1_CT
SEC1_B
PRI1_HI
PRI1_LO
J15
1
1
1
2
3
4
+5V
R18
20.0K
C15
1
2100UF
RX7
1
2
1
SUPPLY
3
RX4 DGND_MAIN
1
2
2
J10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
.01uF
1
POWER
+5V
+5V
+5V
RET
RET
RET
RET
+15V
+15V
-15V_RET
-15V
NC-KEY
+24V
-15V_MAIN
CHASSIS
PL_LO
PL_HI
+5V
1
2
+5V_MAIN
XFA1
XFA2
XFA3
XFA4
C
D
4
5
A
B
C
D
1
1
SO1
MH2
MH4
SO2
MH1
SO3
J13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
2
MH5
QSM_CS6*
QSM_MOSI
QSM_MISO
QSM_SCLK
WD_TIM
OVERTEMP
TPU_0
TPU_1
TPU_2
TPU_3
TPU_4
TPU_5
TPU_6
TPU_7
TPU_8
TPU_9
TPU_10
MH6
2
TPU_[0:15]
TPU_15
IA_CF
IB_CF
VMON
3M_3429-6302
+5V_PRES
+15V_PRES
+24V_PRES
3
3
-15V_PRES
3-26-1998_16:33
4
4
Power Control PCB
119837
A
B
C
5
5
D
225
PCB Layout for Power Control Module (119835)
226
Digital Pressure
Flow Control
This chapter describes the PCB for the Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 228
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 229
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 229
Service Manual
227
Chapter 5.7
Digital Pressure Flow Control
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
Circuit Function
The Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) PCB is located on the rear of the
Analytical Unit. The DPFC PCB is controlled by SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface)
signals that come from the motherboard through the P6 connector (MOSI, MISO, SS,
OVEN, SCK), and take the +5L, +/–15A, +15P, COMMON (Analog, Digital, Power)
through the P8 connector.
An X1 quartz crystal generates the clock frequency of 8 MHz. The crystal is
connected directly to the local MC68HC11A1 microprocessor (U14, Xtal and Extal)
through the resistor (R11).
NOTE
The DPFC PCB uses an on-board MC68HC11A1 microprocessor. In this section, the term
microprocessor refers specifically to the MC68HC11A1.
The 8-bit single-chip microprocessor 68HC11A1 (U14) includes 512B of EPROM
and 256B of static RAM. This microprocessor controls:
•
EPROM 27C512 memory (U13, 64KB)
•
Data bus (AD0–AD7)
•
Address (A8–A15) bus
Two stages of the integrated circuit 74HCT00 (U19) generate the RESET signal
(active low) to initialize the microprocessor to a known startup state. The
microprocessor provides an E output frequency signal on pin 5 (used as reference
timing). Pin 5 is actually one-fourth of the input frequency of 8 MHz at the Xtal and
Extal pins. Two CNY17/II optocouplers (U4, U5) read the PURG1 and PURG2 input
signals to recognize the presence of the purge line of the split/splitless injectors
controlled by DPFC devices.
Chip-selects (O10–O16, O20–O24) are generated by two 74HCT374 3-State buffers.
The other two stages of the integrated circuit 74HCT00 generate the digital output
signals to select the 74LS138 decoder (U23) and the 27C512 EPROM (U13).
The following connectors control all signals for five DPFC devices:
228
•
DET1 (right)
•
DET2 (left)
•
DET3 (aux)
•
CAR1 (right)
•
CAR2 (left)
Service Manual
Chapter 5.7
Digital Pressure Flow Control
Adjustment Procedures
The circuit consists of two TL082 integrated circuits (U17, U21) and the NPC1210.
The purpose of the circuit is to read the ambient pressure.
Integrated circuits 74LS139 (U12) and 74LS04 (U11) generate three enable signals to
select three ADG408 integrated circuits (U2, U6, U8), which read all analog inputs for
DPFC pressure and flow data. The output D of the ADG408 is an analog serial data
output. The microprocessor will digitally read this output (DADY, AMISO, ASCLK,
AMOSI, RES) through the AD7715 (U1).
The voltage regulator 78L05 (U26) supplies the +5 V dc.
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary.
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the Digital Pressure Flow
Control (DPFC) PCB is listed below in Table 5.7-1. The number of drawings has been
included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are three drawings for
reference in this section.
Table 5.7-1. Digital Pressure Flow Control Schematics
Board
DPFC (EPC)
NOTE
Service Manual
PN
Drawing
Layout
23648330
SE 1391 - sh. 2, 1–2
PC 1111, 1
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
229
MOD/RDM
SH2
SH2
SH2
SH2
SH2
5/2/98
SH2
499R
P6
VCC
SS'
MOSI
SH2
2
4
6
8
10
1
3
5
7
9
OVEN
SCK
MISO
1
1
1
D
A
MODB
RN1
19 5
18 7 RN1
6
8
4K7
4K7
4K7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
D
S.P.I.
10K
R18
1/4-1
2
2
3
U19
5
U19
(14=VCC,7=D)
2
22uF16V
C37
+1
1
C32
HCT00
HCT00
6
1
2
(14=VCC,7=D)
D
22pF
2
C30
O17
SH2
SH2
SH2
SH2
SH2
SH2
SH2
O10
O11
O12
O13
O14
O15
O16
SH2
SH2
SH2
SH2
SH2
O20
O21
O22
O23
O24
SH2
CLK2
VCC
1
10M
R11
1/4-1
D
4
D
3
1D
4
2D
7
3D
8
13 4D
14 5D
17 6D
18 7D
8D
2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
U24
OC'
CP
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
1Q
2Q
3Q
4Q
5Q
6Q
7Q
8Q
D
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
O25
O26
O27
HCT374
U23
HCT373
D
A11
RW
A15
1
2
3
A13
6
4 G1G'2A
5 G'2B
A
B
C
VCC
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
D
74LS138
CLK2
2
C29
1
1
11 OC'
C
C40
2
22pF
2
1
12
8MHz
VCC
VCC
1
X1
1
1Q 25
2Q 6
3Q 9
4Q 12
5Q 15
6Q 16
7Q 19
8Q
VCC 100nF
1
C31
2
D
U25
D
100nF
1
2 VCC
4
1
OE'
8
7
5
4K7
31
2 3 RN1
HCT374
11
22
RN1
100nF
1
D
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
100nF
RW
1
D
26
27
20
4
6
17
SH2
D
52
51
2
13
14
17
18
1Q
2Q
3Q
4Q
5Q
6Q
7Q
8Q
100nF
499R
2
R20
21/4-1
R21
21/4-1
R19
1/4-1
499R
PE7
20
21
22
23
24
25
25
24
21
23
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
2
D
D
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
OC'
CP
C39
4
2
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
3
4
7
8
1
VCC
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
D
U20
2
1
U14
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
CS'
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
11
C38
2K21
2
R3
1/4-1
43
45
47
49
44
46
48
50
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
10
(20=VCC,10=D)
D
6
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
(20=VCC,10=D)
U5
1
AD1
AD2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
(16=VCC,8=D)
VCC
4
5
SH2
1
U13 27C512
VCC
PA0
(28=VCC,14=D)
1
2K21
2
R2
1/4-1
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
1
5
D
26
2
6
2
4K74
2
R4
1/4-1
100nF
68HC11A1
U4CNY17/II
1
100nF
1
VCC
C18
4K74
2
R1
1/4-1
SH2
SH2
22/7/97
1
(20=VCC,10=D)
2
CNY17/II
OVEN
22/12/97
C20
P24V5 SH2
PVRG2
A PR/REV DEL.TEST & RS232 CIRCUIT;MASTER REV. 1.1.
B PR/REV ADDED R19,R20,R21 ON SPI CONN. - MASTER REV. 1.2 .
C PR/REV MOD. U21 FROM TL082 TO OP200,ON SHEET 2 .
FIRMA/VISTO
VCC
P24V4 SH2
PVRG1
DATA
1
DRDY'
AMISO
ASCLK
AMOSI
RES'
MODIFICHE
A15
U19
13
11
HCT00
(14=VCC,7=D)
9
D
A14
U19
10
8
(14=VCC,7=D)
HCT00
disegnatore
strumento
TRACE GC
data
BOLLA C.
assieme
16/5/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
EPCTRC - Rev. 1.2
particolare
CPU & MEM SECTION
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
mod
SE1391-1/2
C
231
MOD/RDM
DET3
CAR1
CAR2
C5 100nF
1
SPLIT&PURGE
2
U3
A
A
100nF
8
A
2
SH1
D2
CLK2
PR
D
CLK2
Q'
+15V
VCC
OVEN
SH1
3
A
1
U22
1
+
10K
R16
1/4-1
6
2
5
7
+
8
-15V
U21
+
10
(14=VCC,7=D)
PR12
Q9
D
14
A
11
Y1
13
B
9
11 CP
CLR
13
D
Y3
74LS139
(16=VCC,8=D)
232
5
100nF
-
2 1
(16=VCC,8=D)
1
6
O10
O11
O12
U11
74LS04
(14=VCC,7=D)
2
8
3
1
4
3
2
1
C7
-15V
VCC
100nF
2
1
C9
A0 1
16
15
U8
2
R14
1/4-1
OP200GP
4
7
C16
2
100nF
B
Y2
Y3
EN
-15V
C34
A
D
D
U11
74LS04
(14=VCC,7=D)
12
D
11
78L05
+5V
-15V
A
U11
74LS04
(14=VCC,7=D)
9
U11
D
74LS04
(14=VCC,7=D)
O14
O15
O16
1
SH1
SH1
A
AVRG
AVRG
A15V
VCC
+15V
-15V
+15V
1
3
A
C42
100uF35v
C43
100uF35v
A
D
A
+
P8
P8
P8
P8
P8
P8
3
4
5
8
6
7
P8
P8
1
2
D
-15V
disegnatore
strumento
TRACE GC
BOLLA C.
assieme
8
data
16/5/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
EPCTRC - Rev. 1.2
A
10
3
U12
particolare
13
15
EN
O13
O10
O11
O12
2
8
32
Y1
2
A
U26
14 1
A
D
2
C10
Y0
74LS139
1
CER25
7
U17
5
6
U11
VCC
D
4
U11
74LS04
2
13
-
5
2
4
7 1 10K
U21
+
C17 100nF
74LS04
(14=VCC,7=D)
TL082
2
5
U12
10
Y2
U18
Q'8
C33
A6
A
12
Y0
+15V
6
8
2 1
C27
-15V
16K5
1
R10
1/4-1
74LS74
100nF
2 1
NPC1210
100nF
4
1
5
6
3
+IN
U16
2
+
A
-15V
4
8
100K
1
R12
1/4-1
1
C25
A
1
U17
R13
1/4-1
A
(14=VCC,7=D)
4
5
6
7
12
11
10
9
2
2
3
C26
-
1 1 10K
100K
1
R15
1/4-1
TL082
8
2
2
FLO13
FLO23
FLO33
FBAK3
FB24
3
FB25
OP200GP
2 100nF
A0 1
16
15
U6
ADG408
2
8 +15V
A
4
100nF
+15V
SH1
SH1
SH1
SH1
SH1
D
74LS138
C6
+15V
+15V
2 1
O10
O11
O12
O13
O14
1
O20
A2
O21
B3
O22
C
VCC
6
4
G12AG'
O24
5
2BG'
-15V
1
A
1
100nF
SH1
SH1
SH1
SH1
SH1
3 2
1
13
14
4
P10
3
14
100nF
+
-15V
-
O10
O11
O12
7
U10
A
2
A
DACS1
E2CS1
DACS2
E2CS2
DACS3
E2CS3
2
A
U7
15
14Y0
13Y1
12Y2
11Y3
10Y4
9 Y5
7 Y6
Y7
O20
O21
O22
O23
O24
2
8
A
4
5
6
7
12
11
10
9
2
1K66
1
R5
1/4-1
C36
TL082
-
1
2
2 1
10K
R17
1/4-0,1
4
15K
R8
1/4-0,1
-
U22
FLO11
FLO21
FLO31
FBAK1
FLO12
FLO22
FLO32
FBAK2
+15V
4
100nF
-15V
5
2
TL082
2
2
1
-15V
8
6
U2
+15V
ADG408
74LS74
1 (14=VCC,7=D)
100nF
C35
A0 1
16
15
C4
6
CLR
2 1
2
C3
4
5
6
7
12
11
10
9
100nF
D
KTY10-6
CP
1
5
Q
A
8
1
CER25
U18
3
VCC
SH1
SH1
SH1
SH1
C28
4
2
IN4148
A
C14
TL082
C41
100nF
VCC
D1
1N4148
2 1
+15V
PRES4
FLOW4
SPFL4
FB14
PRES5
FLOW5
SPFL5
FB15
2
4 100nF
100nF
+15V 13
D
+5V
+
-15V
ADG408
16
A
2
U10
3
2
1
1
TL082
C15
-
1
2
1
2
D
RES'
ASCLK
AMOSI
AMISO
DRDY'
U1
DGND
11
C13
15K
1
R7
1/4-1
2 1
+15V
2
2
D
C1
5
1
14
13
12
4
D
74LS138
C8100nF
1
PVRG1
P24V4
PVRG2
P24V5
+12
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+1
10nF
P9
P9
P9
P9
P9
P9
P9
P9
2
4
2
PVRG2
SVRG2
PVRG1
SVRG1
S24V4
P24V4
S24V5
P24V5
1
O20
A2
O21
B3
O22
C
VCC
6
G12AG'
4
O23
5
2BG'
(16=VCC,8=D)
SH1
15K
R6
1/4-1
9
10
7
8
2
3
-15V
PRES5
SPFL5
FB25
VCC
E2CS5
AMOSI
LDA5'
O16
A15V
AVRG
SVRG2
PVRG2
15
14Y0
13Y1
12Y2
11Y3
10Y4
9 Y5
7 Y6
Y7
DACS4
E2CS4
DACS5
E2CS5
LDA4'
LDA5'
C12
10uF25v
1
15
DVDD
REF+
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
2
16K5
1
R9
1/4-1
RES'
1
6
C2
6
VIN
VOU
100nF
P2
(16=VCC,8=D)
A
U9
VCC
2
-15V
+15V
PRES4
A
SPFL4 FLOW5
FB24
FB15
D
VCC
11
E2CS4 DACS5
13
AMOSI ASCLK
15
LDA4' AMISO
17
O15
LDA5'
19
A15V
A15V
21
AVRG AVRG
23
SVRG1 S24V5
25
PVRG1 P24V5
1
3
5
7
9
C11
1
REF03
2
5
11
13
15
17
19
100nF +5V
AD7715
+15V
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
+1
VCC
E2CS3
AMOSI
A15V
A15V
AVRG
-15V
+15V
FLO23
A
FBAK3FLOW4
D
FB14
D
DACS3
11
ASCLKDACS4
13
AMISOASCLK
15
A15V AMISO
17
AVRG LDA4'
19
AVRG
A15V
21
AVRG
23
S24V4
25
P24V4
P1
1
3
5
7
9
2
11
13
15
17
19
+15V
FLO13
FLO33
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
10uF25v
A
VCC
E2CS2
AMOSI
A15V
A15V
AVRG
-15V
FLO22
FBAK2
D
DACS2
ASCLK
AMISO
A15V
AVRG
AVRG
P5
1
3
5
7
9
TE1
+15V
FLO12
FLO32
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
2
11
13
15
17
19
-15V
FLO21
FBAK1
D
DACS1
ASCLK
AMISO
A15V
AVRG
AVRG
P4
1
3
5
7
9
T
A
VCC
E2CS1
AMOSI
A15V
A15V
AVRG
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
1
+15V
FLO11
FLO31
P3
1
3
5
7
9
FIRMA/VISTO
VCC
D
+1
DET2
DATA
2
DET1
MODIFICHE
ADC SECTION
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
mod
SE1391-2/2
C
20
10
2
20
10
2
1
1
C17
+
C40
C38
10
1
2
2
C43
+
7
8
U25
1
C42
C18
R18
U23
U13
1
P10
1
1
C36
C30
C29
C28
1
1
R16
R17
R14
R15
C27
4
1
1
C34
1
1
1
1
POWER
R9
R10 C14
C16
R5 1
R6 1
D1
C25 D2
C26 R7 11
R8
5
8
R12
R13
C33
C35
1
C12
1
U16
U20
+
1
C32
C31
U19
R11
U26
R20
R21
U18
C37
U22
P6
R19
1
1
+
U21
SPLIT &
X1
RN1
C39
+
U17
PURGE VALVES
U14
C20
U24
1
1
1
1
U12
S.P.I.
U5
R3
R4
U4
R1
R2
U7
1
U11
C15
C13
C2
U8
TE1
C11
CARR.1-RIGHT
C10
U10
U6
C7
C4
U9
DET.1-RIGHT
C8
C5
U3
P9
C9
U2
P1
1
DET.3-AUX
C6
U1
20
1
P3
1
DET.2-LEFT
C3
C1
C41
CARR.2-LEFT
10
2
20
P5
P4
1
P2
10
2
20
10
2
4 PEM KFSE-M3-3
P8
PCB Layout for Digital Pressure Flow Control (PC 1111)
233
Keypad and
Display Panel
This chapter describes the PCB for the Keypad and Display Panel of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 236
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 236
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 236
Service Manual
235
Chapter 5.8
Keypad and Display Panel
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
The keypad and display panel are the primary means by which the user communicates
with the GC.
Drawing 119841 shows the keypad schematic. See Schematics and Component
Layout. One PLD provides control for scanning the display and for driving the status
display LEDs. The microprocessor communicates with the PLD through the SPI bus
several times per second. With each communication, the PLD sends data to the
microprocessor to indicate which key, if any, is pressed. The microprocessor then
interprets this information and takes the appropriate action.
The display receives serial data from the microprocessor’s SCI output and displays it
on the vacuum florescent display.
NOTE
The display is a purchased assembly. It is a non-repairable component. The keypad and display
panel module is designed to be replaced and not repaired.
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are possible.
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the keypad and display panel
PCB is listed below in Table 5.8-1. The number of drawings has been included for
each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are two drawings for reference in
this section.
Table 5.8-1. Keypad and Display Panel Schematics
236
Board
PN
Drawing
Layout
Keypad and Display Panel
43210025
119841B, 1–2
not available
Service Manual
A
B
C
D
REV
ECO NO.
DATE
BY
CHK
1
1
Key Definition
2
SW1
STOP
SW28
STATUS
SW2
PREPARE RUN
SW29
PRESS
SW3
START
SW30
TEMP
SW4
OVEN
SW31
FLOW
SW5
LEFT INLET
SW32
TIME
SW6
RIGHT INLET
SW33
RAMP #
SW7
LEFT DETECTOR
SW34
3
SW8
RIGHT DETECTOR
SW35
2
SW9
LEAK CHECK
SW36
1
SW10
AUX
SW37
INFO/DIAG
SW11
LEFT CARRIER
SW38
RUN LOG
SW12
RIGHT CARRIER
SW39
0
SW13
LEFT SIGNAL
SW40
. (DECIMAL)
SW14
RIGHT SIGNAL
SW41
- (MINUS)
SW15
COLUMN EVAL
SW42
SEQUENCE
SW16
CONFIG
SW43
METHOD
SW17
"UP ARROW"
SW44
STORE
SW18
"DOWN ARROW"
SW45
LOAD
SW19
9
SW46
EDIT/ACTIVE
SW20
8
SW47
RUN TABLE
SW21
5
SW48
CLOCK TABLE
SW22
7
SW49
VALVE #
SW23
ENTER
SW50
AUTO SAMPLER
SW24
MODE/TYPE
SW51
ON/YES
SW25
OFF/NO
SW52
"INFINITY SIGN"
SW26
6
SW53
CLEAR
SW27
4
SW54
SEQ CONTROL
2
3
3
4
L Baldwin
12/10/97
L Baldwin
12/10/97
Keyboard Assembly
4
B
119841
12/10/97
A
B
C
B
1
2
D
237
A
B
C
D
NOTES:
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
1. U1 IS A 44 PIN PLCC DEVICE AND MUST BE SOCKETED
2. ALL COMPONENTS SHOWN ON THE SCHEMATIC CAN BE MOUNTED ON THE SIDE
OF THE PCB OPPOSITE THE KEY PATTERN.
SW8
SW9
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
SW25
SW26
SW27
SW28
SW29
SW30
SW31
SW32
SW33
SW34
SW37
SW36
SW37
SW38
SW39
SW40
SW41
SW42
SW43
SW44
SW45
SW46
SW47
SW48
SW49
SW50
SW51
SW52
SW53
SW54
1
3. J2-1 AND J2-14 CONNECT TO A COPPER TRACE WHICH ENCIRCLES
THE KEYPAD AND WILL BE IN CONTACT WITH THE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
HOUSING WHEN ASSEMBLED.
4. ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/8 WATT
SW6
5% OR BETTER
+5VDC
2
510
12
VCC1
2
510
44
36
6
2
510
SCLK
SS*
KD6
KD5
KD4
KD3
KD2
KD1
KD0
2
+5VDC
CLK
1
200
2
NON ACTIVE MET/SEQ EDIT
D1 ORANGE
1
510
2
28
21
26
19
37
8
9
22
OUT14
20
OUT13
16
OUT12
2
27
STAT
OUT11
41
OUT10
15
OUT9
25
OUT8
7
OUT7
29
OUT6
38
OUT5
43
119810 OUT4
40
OUT3
31
OUT2
39
OUT1
32
OUT0
GND1 GND2
1
23
11
1
MOSI
2
1
MISO
2
42
2
3
5
17
4
18
10
30
24
STANDBY
D2 YELLOW
1
2
1
200
200
2
1
1
INITIAL TEMP
D3 YELLOW
2
1
34
VCC2
KR7
KR6
KR5
KR4
KR3
KR2
KR1
KR0
2
1
RAMP
D4 YELLOW
1
2
1
200
FINAL TEMP
D5 YELLOW
2
200
2
1
1
+5VDC
2
1
SW6
3
200
2
1
1
2
200
COOL
D7 BLUE
1
2
1
3
RUN LOG
D6 ORANGE
1
2
1
2
2
.01UF
2
1
GAS SAVER
D8 YELLOW
1
10UF
BASELINE COMP
D9 YELLOW
2
200
2
1
1
2
200
CLOCK TABLE
D10 YELLOW
1
2
1
SEQUENCE
D11 YELLOW
2
200
2
1
2
1
READY TO INJECT
D12 GREEN
1
200
1
200
2
1
238
This may either be a connector or a pigtail
This may either be a connector or a pigtai
A
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4
J1
J2
2
200
NOT READY
D13 ORANGE
4
KEYBOARD / DISPLAY MODULE - ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
119841
B
C
2
D
2
Theory of Detector Cards
This chapter contains a representative block diagram for the following 6 detector
chapters:
•
5.10, Flame Ionization Detector Controller
•
5.11, Electron Capture Detector Controller
•
5.12, Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller
•
5.13, Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD)
•
5.14, Photoionization Detector Controller (PID)
•
5.15, Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD)
The diagram is representative of only the detector cards in the above listed chapters.
Chapter at a Glance…
Block Diagram for Detector Cards ........................................................................... 240
Service Manual
239
Block Diagram for Detector Cards
DIN64A
Bus Motherboard
24V
+15V/-15v
DC-DC Converter
+5V
MISO
MOSI
SPI I/O decoder
SCLK
CS
Det.
Cell
+5V
Detector Cell
amplifier & control
detector signal
Det type
Diodes
1V & 10V
analogic outputs
A
B
C
S
D/A
zero suppression
F-OUT
V/F Converter
GF
Figure 5.9-1. Block Diagram for Detector Cards
Flame Ionization
Detector Controller
This chapter describes the Flame Ionization Detector (FID) controller of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 242
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 243
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 244
Service Manual
241
Chapter 5.10
Flame Ionization Detector Controller
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
Circuit Function
The main purpose of the Flame Ionization Detector (FID) PCB is to control the IGNIT
(flame igniter coil), –300 V (flame jet polarization), and input (low current produced)
of the FID. The FID PCB takes all digital inputs/outputs (P1 connector) and the power
voltages (+5 V dc, +/–15 V dc, +24 V dc) from the motherboard.
The low-current signal (DET CABLE) produced from the FID is connected to the
input of the 2N5909 preamplifier (U24) by a dedicated cable with coaxial connector.
The output signal then goes to the OP07 amplifier (U25).
There are four J201 FETs (Q8–Q11) to select the range of the input current. The input
current then goes to the first analog input of the amplifier OP77 (U26) on pin 3,
together with the second analog input on pin 2 as a back-off current signal (VBO).
A back-off bucking current is generated from the DAC0801 converter (U18, U19) and
the OP07C amplifier (U23). The LM324 integrated circuit (U22) generates four
signals to select the range input current (PN1–PN4).
Three 74HC595 integrated circuits (U13, U15, U16) generate the output chip-select
(O1–O6) and the background chip-select (Z0–Z15).
Integrated circuit 74HC240 takes the input serial data (CLOCK, MOSI, MISO), the
chip-select (CS), the +5 V dc, and GND from the motherboard.
Custom chip 24SCR4.5D15M (U12) takes the input voltage of +24 V dc to generate
the +/–15 V dc and the +5 V dc through the 78L05 regulator (Q1).
The integrated circuit MOC3020 (U20) takes the input voltage of 8 V dc through the
BTA06 triac to supply the flame igniter coil of the FID (P5). The integrated circuit
MOC3020 (U20) is selected from two signals (O4, O5) generated by 74HC595 (U16).
The electronic circuit includes:
•
BC107–BC177 transistors (Q2–Q7)
•
IN4148 diodes (D3–D13)
•
Capacitors (C12–C45)
The function of the electronic circuit is to generate a negative voltage of –300 V to
polarize the flame jet of the FID. The P2 connector gives 0 V (signal common), 1 V,
10 V, and GND (chassis) outputs to connect an integrator or to handle chromatograph
data externally.
242
Service Manual
Chapter 5.10
Flame Ionization Detector Controller
Adjustment Procedures
Output Specifications
+/–15 V @ 130 mA
+5 V @ 25 mA
Adjustment Procedures
Calibration Adjustments
Refer to the calibration of potentiometers shown in the F1/4 drawing located in
Schematics and Component Layout.
Special Notes
In order to verify the FID electrometer noise level, follow this technical procedure:
1. Remove the coaxial connectors of the signal cable from the FID
2. Wrap up the coaxial connectors using aluminum foil
3. Connect the analog output signal (0–10 mV) to recorder
4. Set parameters ATT=0 and RNG=0 (max sensitivity)
The noise level must be within 1% of full scale.
Service Manual
243
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the FID controller is listed
below in Table 5.10-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic
and its corresponding layout. There are two sets of five drawings for reference in this
section. The first set of drawings is for version 1.3 of the FID controller. The second
set of drawings is for version 1.4 of the FID controller.
Table 5.10-1. FID Controller Schematics
Board
NOTE
PN
Drawing
Layout
FID 1.3
23648320
SE 1388 - sh. 4, 1–4
PC 1105, 1
FID 1.4
23648320
SE 1388 - sh. 4, 1–4
PC 1105, 1
The last drawing in each set is the layout of the board.
MOD/RDM
A
B
C
D
MODIFICHE
DATA
ADDED RV10 ON SH4
CHANGE R78,R79 FROM 2K21 TO 332R ON SH1
CHANGE U27 FROM TL082 TO OP200G ON SH1
CHANGE R83 FROM 1K TO 150 Ohm ON SH2
PR/REV
PR/REV
PR/REV
PR/REV
FIRMA/VISTO
3/6/97
8/9/97
9/12/97
28/01/98
+15A
IO
12
CNTRL
11
IO
13
A
A
2
1
1
1
10K
R17
+15A
OP07C
2
2
3
2
0.1uF
1
-U3 7 C8
+ 4 0.1uF
A
3
2
A1
2
1
P2
P2
P2
3
4
O6
1N4148
2
D221
CNTRL
A
-15A
0.1uF
1
C53
8
9
7
2
4
C10
A
6
+ 5
A
5
2.5V
3
- 6
1
U27
5
7
8
IO
OI
1/4-1
A
2
4
3
1/4-1
1
4066
0.47uF
10K
1K1
R3 2 2 R4
U4
1
R77
1/4-1
4
2
1
A
14
22K1
C2
C54
C11
8
OP200G
VFC110AP
2
U5
0.1uF
1
F OUT
14C
M
A
AGND
+15A
13
2
P1
-15A
10
-
0.1uF
2
6N137
+15A
0.1uF
3
1
5
2
U27
1/4-1
+
1
1
2
C14
8
6
12
11
4
475R
R76
1
U6
2
7
C7
-15A
+5M
2
1
A
2
2
2
3
1/4-0,1
A
309K
R15
1/4-0,1
1/4-1
+15A1
1/4-0,1
C5
A -15A
2
14A
2.5V
0.1uF
1
C1
0.47uF
22K1
1
R5
1/4-1
1
OI
P1
2
20C
P2
GND CASE
20A
P1
1
GND CASE
2
2
3
2
-U1 7 C6
+ 4 0.1uF
IO
1
2
1
10
3K32
1 R21
1/4-0,1
649K
R75
2
+15A
OP07C
2
1
0.1uF
OI
GF
6N137
7
1
1/4-0,1
1
SHEET4
8K87
1
R2
1/4-0,1
1
9K09
R16
1
649K
R8
2
3
P3
2
P3
1
P3
2K21
2
R1
1/4-0,1
2
1/4-0,1
6
2K
1
3
9
A
P1
5
2K
A
VDET
CW
8K06
R13
OI
3
CNTRL
1
2 RV2
U4
2
A
8
0.1uF
1/4-1
1
-15A
2
1/4-1
CNTRL
2
6
14 0.1uF
6
1
2
2
C13
332R
R78
2
1/4-1
100K
R14
4066
+5M
8
7
2
RV3
A
1
C9
1
1N4148
1/4-0,1
8
D2
2
+U2
- 4
22K1
R12
1
2
+15A
CW
A
10K
R9
1
Z2
2
CW
500K
1
1N825A
2
2
1
U7
2
2
1/4-1
1K21
R7
1
2
1
RV1
3
M
10uF25V
SHEET3
M
393
3
2
1/4-0,1
+1
+5M
2
SHEET3
0.1uF
C4
+5M
2
-15A
1N825
SHEET2
Z1
-15A
221K
R10
1
C3 1
A
SHEET2
+15A
1
1K21
1
R6
1/4-1
A
2
+15A
SHEET2
+5M
1
+15A
7
332R
1 R79
1
1/4-1
+15A
+U2
-
6
1/4-1
22M1
R11
2
-15A
1/4-1
+15A
A1
SHEET2
6K81
R18
+15A1
1
A
5
6
+15A
SHEET2
SHEET3
O6
SHEET3
A
A
2
A
A
GND
10V
0V
WEIDMULLER ANALOGUECONNECTOR
CALIBRATION:
1 V-DET= 0mV
ADJ RV1 FOR F.OUT=400KHz
2 V-DET=250mV ADJ RV2 FOR F.OUT=2.9MHz
3 V-DET=10V ADJ RV3 FOR F.OUT=3.137MHz
4 REPEAT POINT 1...3 UNTIL ALL OK
strumento
disegnatore
TRACE
assieme
FID
particolare
Schematic diagram
E.CARRARA
data
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
F1/4
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
SE 1388
mod
D
245
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
+15B
D13
2 1
1N4148
1
P1
BTA06-200B
2
182R
R27
1/4-1
2
U20
4
1N4148
10nF400V
2
C31
0.1uF100V
1
2
C23
1
C18
D3
D4
0.1uF100V
2
C12
D6
1
C15
2
1
IGNIT
CABLE
P5
1
-300V
P5
2
IGNITER
2
0.1uF100V
1
D5
10M
R20
D8
2 1
1/4-1
D7
2 1
B
B
0.1uF400V
2
2 1
1
1N4148
100K 1
R26
1/4-1
D10
0.1uF100V
B
2 1
10M
R19
1/4-1
1
C16
1
2 1
2
1N4148
10nF400V
C19
1N4148
1
2
1N4148
10nF400V
C24
1N4148
1
2
1N4148
10nF400V
1
1N4148
2
1
22nF
2 1
D9
2
P1
C32
1N4148
2
1
1
2 1
2
2 1
2
2 1
BC107
1
2 1
BC107
BC107
D12
3
2
Q2
3
D11
Q6
2
P1
1
Q4
1
2
15k
R35
1/4-1
1
8Vac-1
8A
8C
7A
1
BC177
3
2
1
1N4148
Q7
3
22nF
15K
R25
1/4-1
1/4-1
2
3K92
R37
1/4-1
C45
2
1
BC107
2
332R
R28
1/4-1
3
2
C41
2
C44
2
15K
R38
1/4-1
1
2
1
1
1
C40
100pF
2
2
BC107
1
1
Q5
100pF
1
3
33K2
R36
2
22K1
R44
1/4-1
2
332K
R43
1
1/4-1
2
332K
R42
1/4-1
1
1
B
22K1
R41
1/4-1
2
Q3
2
+15B
-15B
2
1
150R
R83
1/4-1
A3
2
SHEET3
05
SHEET3
04
5
U17
1
1
3
6
MOC3020
12A
12C
11A
11C
P1
P1
A3
+15B
+15A
P1
SHEET1
+15A1
P1
SHEET3
+15B
P1
2
5
C29
A1
SHEET4
A2
SHEET3
B
2
GI
A
SHEET1
1
24SCR4.5D15M
4
S1-3-4
1
3
+
U12
C30
2
VI
+
1
100uF25V
P1
P1
1
78L05
Q1
2
P1
2
+
1
3
S1-3-4
-15A
SHEET3
-15B
SHEET3
+5L
100uF25V
C33
P1
+24V-2
-15B
S1-3-4
100uF25V
10A
10C
9A
9C
B
P1
+24V-1
P1
8Vac-2
7C
6A
6C
SHEET3
D1
25C
P1
DET TYPE
2 1
P1
26A
1N4148
DET TYPE-A
strumento
assieme
particolare
disegnatore
TRACE
FID
F2/4
Schematic diagram
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME.
246
E.CARRARA
data
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
disegno n.
SE 1388
L
A3
mod
D
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
SHEET2
+15B
B
-15B
SHEET2
SHEET2
B
-15B
2
10M
R47
1/4-1
2
5K62
R46
1
1/4-1
2
1/4-1
221K
R48
1
2
7K5
R29
2
1K
R49
1/4-1
1
2
7K5
R33
1/4-1
8
TL081
2
D15
2
O2
-15B
7 5
100K
RN2
100K
1
PN2
6
PN3
RN1
6K81
R32
2
2
2
1
33K2
R40
1
RN2
PN4
C28
1
U14
7
12
U14
10
U14
8
U14
2
0.1uF
L
SHEET4
SHEET4
+15B
2
1/4-1
2.5V
SHEET1
disegnatore
TRACE
FID
particolare
Schematic diagram
SHEET4
PN4
+U22
-
3
1
4
1
1N4148
D14
1
1N4148
2
PN4
100K
2
RN2
8 3
33K2
R39
1/4-1
C35
1
100K
SHEET4
1
4
6 7
SHEET4
PN5
2
1
2
0.1uF
2
2K21
R80
1/4-1
U21
+
1
C20
1
2
0.1uF
3
data
E.CARRARA
assieme
13
+15B
11
-15A
-
1/4-1
9
SHEET2
2
PN1
-15B
+U22
-
5
strumento
A
-15A
8
+5L
6
SHEET2
1
2
B
U14
+15A
O3
6
L
5
A
SHEET2
Z0
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z7
L
6N137
M
PQH
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
5
-5M
SHEET1
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
SER
7
5
RN2
22K1
R31
1/4-1
3
4
+15A
6
L
SHEET2
SHEET1
M
8
7
9
+15B
SRCLR'
SRCK
+5L
14
+5M
2
3
L
+5L
2
10
100K
14 1
4
14
+5L
909R
R22
1/4-1
-15A
RN1
L
U13
+U224 324
+U22
- 11
13
100K
6N137
10
11
16
G'
RCK
A
12
6
RN1
3
L
HC04
1
100K
1
13
12
2
5
U9
5
1N4148
1
2
U14
2
+15B
A
1
SHEET4
0.1uF
1
C42
A
A
D16
3
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
4
IOUT
B6
2
B7
IOUT'
B8
VLC
COMP
VREF+
VREFV+
V-
74HC595
7
VBO
6
A
U19
O1
A
2
C43
-15A
1
8
2
+5L
C25
U10
2
C21
2
0.1uF
909R
R23
1/4-1
6
SHEET2
A
L
2K21
R81
1/4-1
M
1
+5L
7K5
R34
2
P1
+5L
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
16
14
15
13
3
1/4-1
C36
+5L
1
1
P1
+15A
0.1uF
8
24A
24C
1/4-1
1
PQH
Z8
Z9
Z10
Z11
Z12
Z13
Z14
Z15
2
L
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
0.1uF
1
- U237
+ 4
3
1
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
10nF
SER
2
14
C37
6N137
SRCLR'
SRCK
2
C46
+15A
2
-15A DAC0801
Z7
Z6
Z5
Z4
Z3
Z2
Z1
Z0
2
5
10
11
U15
1
3
L
10
MAIN
MAIN
A
74HC595
2
6
2
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
G'
RCK
0.1uF
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
1
7
U8
13
12
C26
P1
16
8
1
OP07C
A
+5L
1
P1
U11
2
20
1 1G
19 2G
2 1A1
4 1A2
6 1A3
8 1A4
11 2A1
13 2A2
15 2A3
17 2A4
P1
+5L
C22
1 2K21
R82
1/4-1
C17
1
2
74HC240
A
+5L
2
2
18A
P1
909R
R24
1/4-1
0.1uF
MOSI
16A
16C
1
L
0.1uF
CS
CLK
22A
22C
18C
0.1uF
+5 MAIN
+5 MAIN
MISO
P1
P1
10nF
1
A
2
1/4-1
DAC0801
0.1uF
8
2
5K11
R45
1
+15A
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
4
IOUT
B6
2
B7
IOUT'
B8
VLC
COMP
VREF+
VREFV+
V-
1
1
U18
1
7K5
R30
1/4-1
C38
+15A
2
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
C34
+5M
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
16
14
15
13
3
1
PQH
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
10nF
SER
2
14
C39
SRCLR'
SRCK
2
10
11
U16
Z15
Z14
Z13
Z12
Z11
Z10
Z9
Z8
1
O6
G'
RCK
0.1uF
L
13
12
C27
O5
0.1uF
SHEET1
16
1
SHEET2
O4
2
SHEET2
74HC595
+5L
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
F3/4
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
SE 1388
mod
D
247
MOD/RDM
D17
2
2
22M1
R50
1/4-1
1
G5
3
G
Q9
2
1
100pF
1G
R73
2
D18
2
C50
2
1
1
SHEET3
FIRMA/VISTO
1
BA129
PN2
DATA
D
SHEET3
S
PN1
MODIFICHE
1
J201
C51
2
BA129
2
SHEET3
Q10
S
1
3
G
G4
2
+15A
1
D19
PN3
100M
R74
2
1
22M1
R53
1/4-1
2
1nF
D
1
J201
1
1
C48
20K
R51
2
1/4-1
2
BA129
22M1
R59
1/4-1
1
3
G
S
10K
R55
1/4-1
2
3
2
J201
1
2
SHEET3
1
1 8
7
+U26
- 4
6
SHEET1
VDET
SHEET3
VBO
OP77
10G
R72
100K
R56
1/4-1
C47
-15A
1
1
22M1
R65
1/4-1
A
1
D
S
1
22pF
1
Q11
2
2
G7
1
C52
3
G
2
BA129
0.1uF
2
PN4
2
Q8
1
D20
G3
2
D
1
1
2
2
10nF
10M
R70
1/4-1
10K
R52
1
A
2
1/4-1
J201
G6
2
1
+15A
90K9
R54
1/4-1
2
20K
1
2
RV10
1
C49
3
1
22K1
R57
1/4-1
+15A
2
-15A
A
-15A
A2
SHEET2
+15A
SHEET2
A
SHEET2
-15A
SHEET2
A2
2
RV6
-15A
A
strumento
disegnatore
TRACE
FID
particolare
Schematic diagram
data
E.CARRARA
assieme
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
F4/4
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME.
248
RV7
2
2
10M
R66
1/4-1
1
10K
1
2
RV5
1
10K
RV4
2
1
200K
3
3
3
10K
1
3
2
221R
R61
1/4-1
1
10K
R64
1/4-1
1
A
+15A
2
1
-15A
+15A
6
332R
R62
1/4-1
2
3
200K
2
1
1
100K
R67
1/4-1
2
1
RV8
2
-15A
OP07C
3K32
R63
1/4-1
A
1M
R69
1/4-1
182R
R68
1/4-1
3
RV9
2
1
1
3
- U257
+ 4
2
2
1N4148
2
S1
A
200K
1
5
1
4
+15A
D21
SHEET3
U24
C
A2
PN5
S2
2
3 G1
6
D2
1
SCHERMO
D1
2
7 G2
681K
R58
1/4-1
2
1/4-1
2N5909
1
5M6
R71
2
681K
R60
1/4-1
1
DET CABLE
G2
1
G1
P4
2
2
10pF
disegno n.
SE 1388
mod
D
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
A REV/PR AGGIUNTO RV10 ESEGUITO REV 1.2 DEL MASTER
B REV/PR MOD.U27 DA TL082 A OP200G. ESEGUITO REV 1.3 DEL MASTER
RV1 RV2 RV3
P3
1
C8
C7
U1
1
1
1
U3
1
1
1
U9
U14
C28
R51
R52
R54
R55
R56
R57
R58
R60
R61
R62
R63
R64
R66
R67
R68
R69
1
R53
D18
D1
c
32 a
1
C47
R59
D19
1
R65
D20
P1
U22
1
RN2
C39
C27
C35
C21
U13
R81
R80
C25 C26
U15
U18
C34
C20
C38
1
1
1
1
1
1
R34
R33
R32
R31
R30
R29
1
1
1
1
1
D16
D15
D14
R40
1
1
R39
C37
C32
U12
15
14
13
24
23
22
R27
2
1
RN1
R82
1
P5
1
3/06/97
9/12/97
R49
R48
R47
R46
R45
C46
C43
U23
C42
R83
U20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R50
D17
U21
C36 U19
U16
C30
Q1
C33
C29
10
11
12
Q9
G5
R21
R79
R78
R24
R23
R22
1
2
3
1
G6
1
1
1
C22
Q11
Q10
G4
U10
C13
C11
U17
G2
U26
FEMMINA /FEMALE= 1 P5
MASCHIO/MALE = 2 P5
1
U5
1
U8
U6
C10
R17
U25
1
7
G7
Q8
R16
R15
U11
C14
D21
G1
G3
C53
1
1
U7
U27
R77
D22
1
RV4 RV5 RV6 RV7 RV8 RV9 RV10
U24
G2
U4
R12
R11
R10
R9
R75
C5 C6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C17
C54
1
R20
C12
C24
1
1
C16
C19
+
1
U2
1
R8
Z2
R7
Z1
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
P4
R18
1
+
C1 C2 C3
+
D2
C9
1 R76
+
P2
R14
R13
1
1
C4
FIRMA/VISTO
R19
D10
D9
C31
D4
D3
C15
D6
D5
C18
D8
D7
C23
Q6
C45
Q7
1
R26
D12
Q2
1 D11
R25
C44
Q4
Q3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R28
1
C40
R44
R43
R42
R41
R38
Q5
R37
R36
D13
R35
C41
R71
G1
U24
G2
U25
C52
strumento
G6
C51
R74
U26
assieme
Q10
C50
G4
Q8
R73
G3
G7
R72
C49
C48
R70
Q11
particolare
disegnatore
TRACE
C.S. FID
data
E.CARRARA
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
Q9
G5
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
PC 1105
mod
B
249
MOD/RDM
A
B
C
D
E
MODIFICHE
DATA
ADDED RV10 ON SH4
CHANGE R78,R79 FROM 2K21 TO 332R ON SH1
CHANGE U27 FROM TL082 TO OP200G ON SH1
CHANGE R83 FROM 1K TO 150 Ohm ON SH2
ADDED J6 CONN. ON SH2. MASTER REV. 1.4 .
PR/REV
PR/REV
PR/REV
PR/REV
PR/REV
FIRMA/VISTO
3/6/97
8/9/97
9/12/97
28/01/98
9/4/98
+15A
1
2
1N4148
A
CNTRL
11
IO
13
CNTRL
10
OI
2
1
10K
R17
1/4-0,1
2
1
- U3
+ 4
3
2
0.1uF
7
2
0.1uF
1
1
C5
A -15A
A
A
A
1
5
4
1N4148
2
O6
0.1uF
1
2
332R
R78
1/4-1
8
9
7
2
12
4
6
5
1
A
3
A
C10
U5
+ 5
-15A
1
2.5V
2.5V
SHEET3
O6
SHEET3
A
A
2
C53
A
P2
P2
P2
P2
1
2
3
4
3
1
A
D22
1
U27
- 6
IO
1K1
R4
1/4-1
OI
2 2
U4
10K
R3
1/4-1
7
4
CNTRL
0.47uF
1
R77
1/4-1
2
8
A
1
1
4066
2
C2
22K1
C54
VFC110AP
14
2
8
OP200G
-15A
0.1uF
1
14C F OUT
A1
+15A
+15A
P1
5
M
A
AGND
2
0.1uF
6N137
C7
13
-
2
2
1
3
2
10
U27
1
6
0.1uF
1
C14
8
7
2
C8
-15A
0.1uF
1
3
2
2
+
C11
1
475R
R76
1/4-1
U6
2
P1
4
1
2
3
+15A
OP07C
332R
R79
1/4-1
C6
2
1
- U17
+ 4
2
+5M
3K32
R21
1/4-1
9K09
R16
1/4-0,1
A
309K
R15
1/4-0,1
2K
2
1
+15A1
1
1
14A GF
6N137
0.1uF
C1
2
OI
0.1uF
5
1
22K1
R5
1/4-1
9
3
A
2
2
IO
OI
11
20C
0.47uF
2
GND CASE
20A
IO
U4
7
1
0.1uF
OP07C
3
GND CASE
8
2
6
0.1uF
CW
649K
R75
1/4-0,1
+15A
2
2
1/4-0,1
2K
2
1
8K06
R13
1
3
1
P3
P3
SHEET4
1 8K87
R2
1/4-0,1
CNTRL
12
1
649K
R8
1/4-0,1
CW
2
3
2
1
P3
2 2K21
R1
1/4-0,1
6
1
2
A
14
2
+5M
C13
8
7
RV3
1
6
A
P1
1
2
2
100K
R14
1/4-1
1
22K1
R12
1/4-1
RV2
1
U7
C9
1
4066
1
2
+5M
2
+15A
2
2
1/4-0,1
+ U2
- 4
8
-15A
1
A
393
D2
3
2
10K
R9
1N825A
1
Z2
A
VDET
7
6K81
R18
1/4-1
+15A
1
221K
R10
1/4-0,1
2
500K
M
SHEET3
+15A
2
2
M
+ U2
-
6
1
2
1
RV1
3
CW
1
10uF25V
+
1
2
Z1
+5M
SHEET3
1
+5M
1
0.1uF
C4
-15A
SHEET2
1
A
SHEET2
22M1
R11
1/4-1
2
1K21
R7
1/4-1
2
+15A
-15A
1K21
R6
1/4-1
SHEET2
+15A
1N825
C3 2
-15A
A1
1
A
SHEET2
2
+15A
+15A1
6
A
SHEET2
P1
+15A
5
A
A
GND
10V
0V
WEIDMULLER ANALOGUECONNECTOR
CALIBRATION:
1 V-DET= 0mV
ADJ RV1 FOR F.OUT=400KHz
2 V-DET=250mV ADJ RV2 FOR F.OUT=2.9MHz
3 V-DET=10V ADJ RV3 FOR F.OUT=3.137MHz
4 REPEAT POINT 1...3 UNTIL ALL OK
250
disegnatore
strumento
assieme
particolare
TRACE
FID Rev. 1.4
Schematic diagram
data
E.CARRARA
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
F1/4
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
SE 1388
mod
E
2
P1
P1
1
BTA06-200B
2
182R
R27
1/4-1
4
1
28A
28C
2
1
2
B
0.1uF100V
1
2
C31
1
0.1uF100V
2
C23
1
C18
D3
D4
0.1uF100V
2
1
D6
10M
R20
D7
D5
1/4-1
0.1uF100V
D8
1
1
D10
10M
R19
1
B
C15
P5
1
-300V
P5
2
IGNITER
1/4-1
B
0.1uF400V
2
C12
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
C16
1N4148
10nF400V
2
1
1N4148
10nF400V
2
C19
1N4148
2
1
1N4148
10nF400V
1
1N4148
C24
1N4148
2
1
2
D12
2
1N4148
C32
1N4148
10nF400V
22nF
15K
R25
1/4-1
1
22nF
150R
R83
1/4-1
A3
2
SHEET3
05
SHEET3
04
S1-3-4
+15A
P1
P1
A3
+15B
B
-15B
P1
P1
P1
U12
100uF25V
C29
C30
Q1
3
P1
2
SHEET1
A1
SHEET4
A2
SHEET3
B
GNDCASE
P1
P1
strumento
P1
assieme
P1
HEATER
5
6
2
8
P1
S1-3-4
-15A
SHEET3
-15B
SHEET3
+5L
SHEET3
L
2
100uF25V
P1
7
A
C33
78L05
1
P1
P1
S1-3-4
1
P1
+
5
GI
+15B
2
P1
2
SHEET3
2
4
24SCR4.5D15M
P1
+15A1
1
100uF25V
P1
P1
+
VI
3
SHEET1
1
1
+
P1
J6
PT100-B
PT100-A
1
1
P1
3
48V-B
30A
30C
29A
29C
1
2
J6
J6
J6
48V-A
32A
32C
31A
31C
2
MOC3020
9
+24V-2
10A
10C
9A
9C
1
2
3
4
+24V-1
12A
12C
11A
11C
1
5
U17
J6
J6
8Vac-2
2
IGNIT
CABLE
-15B
U20
2
6
7C
6A
6C
1
P1
1
D9
2
BC107
BC107
2
1
D11
1
2
1N4148
2
1
1
BC107
J6
J6
J6
8A
8C
7A
3
Q2
3
2
1
2
15k
R35
1/4-1
1
8Vac-1
Q6
3
2
1
Q4
1/4-1
Q7
BC177
3
3K92
R37
C45
2
1
2
1
C44
2
332R
R28
1/4-1
1
BC107
2
2
33K2
R36
1/4-1
1
3
2
1/4-1
2
1
15K
R38
1
1
C40
2
1
2
1
Q5
100pF
C41
2
2
1/4-1
1
1
1
1/4-1
22K1
R44
2
2
332K
R42
332K
R43
1/4-1
2
22K1
R41
1/4-1
1
100pF
3
BC107
2
2
1N4148
Q3
B
FIRMA/VISTO
1
+15B
1
25C
DET TYPE
DATA
D13
2
P1
MODIFICHE
+15B
1N4148
100K 1
R26
1/4-1
D1
1
26A
DET TYPE-A
1N4148
MOD/RDM
P1
particolare
disegnatore
TRACE
FID Rev. 1.4
Schematic diagram
data
E.CARRARA
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
F2/4
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
SE 1388
mod
E
251
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
2
2
-15A
+15B
SHEET2
+15B
-15B
SHEET2
B
SHEET2
-15B
2
10M
R47
1/4-1
2
5K62
R46
1
1/4-1
221K
R48
1/4-1
2
1
2
7K5
R29
1/4-1
2
2
7K5
R33
1/4-1
1
1N4148
+
4
-15B
SHEET4
8 3
100K
7 5
100K
TL081
+ U22
-
6
3
1
O2
1
100K
RN1
6K81
R32
1/4-1
RN2
4
PN2
6
PN3
+U22
-
2
2
2
1
33K2
R40
1/4-1
RN2
2
C28
1
0.1uF
U14
7
12
U14
TRACE
FID Rev. 1.4
particolare
Schematic diagram
2
L
SHEET4
PN4
1
PN4
SHEET4
+15B
2.5V
SHEET1
disegnatore
data
E.CARRARA
assieme
SHEET4
1
2
2
1N4148
1
D14 1N4148
PN4
SHEET4
PN5
2
8
PN1
33K2
R39
1/4-1
RN2
2
1
100K
RN2
2
6 7
100K
-15B
5
D15
U21
14 1
22K1
R31
1/4-1
C35
C36
1
3
324
1
1
2
0.1uF
2
2K21
R80
1/4-1
O3
5
-
1
C20
1
0.1uF
2
1
strumento
13
SHEET2
+5L
10
A
7
2
A
B
11
SHEET2
9
L
U14
+15A
Z0
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z7
8
8
SHEET2
PQH
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
C42
+U224
+ U22
- 11
10
L
6N137
6
M
-15A
B
252
-5M
SHEET1
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
SER
5
U14
A
L
5
+15A
6
3
SHEET1
M
7
4
+5M
SHEET2
8
14
L
+5L
2
9
SHEET2
2
3
+5L
909R
R22
1/4-1
+15B
+5L
U14
1
U13
SHEET4
2
4
+5L
SRCLR'
SRCK
12
6
RN1
RN1
L
10
11
14
100K
100K
6N137
G'
RCK
5
3
L
HC04
13
12
-15A
13
A
16
2
VBO
+15B
2
U14
1
1
A
A
5
U9
4
2
D16
6
3
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6IOUT
B7IOUT'
B8
VLC
COMP
VREF+
VREFV+
V-
74HC595
7
2
A
U19
1
8
0.1uF
1
- U237 C43
+ 4 0.1uF
-15A
+5L
C25
U10
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
16
14
15
13
3
1
2
C21
909R
R23
1/4-1
1
1
DAC0801
O1
A
L
2K21
R81
1/4-1
M
3
A
2
P1
0.1uF
24A
24C
+5L
2
MAIN
MAIN
+5L
2
1/4-1
8
P1
7K5
R34
1
1
C38
1
+15A
2
Z8
Z9
Z10
Z11
Z12
Z13
Z14
Z15
10nF
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
PQH
2
1
SER
L
10
74HC595
14
2
6N137
SRCLR'
SRCK
0.1uF
5
10
11
C37
3
L
2
6
0.1uF
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
A
Z7
Z6
Z5
Z4
Z3
Z2
Z1
Z0
1
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
U15
C26
P1
7
U8
G'
RCK
1
18A
P1
1 1G
19 2G
2 1A1
4 1A2
6 1A3
8 1A4
11 2A1
13 2A2
15 2A3
17 2A4
2
P1
16
13
12
2
C46
+15A
OP07C
-15A
A
+5L
8
1
16A
16C
U11
2
20
0.1uF
74HC240
A
+5L
+5L
10nF
1
DAC0801
2
2
P1
909R
R24
1/4-1
C22
1 2K21
R82
1/4-1
C17
1
2
1
0.1uF
MOSI
P1
2
1/4-1
6
L
2
CS
CLK
22A
22C
18C
0.1uF
+5 MAIN
+5 MAIN
MISO
P1
+15A
1K
R49
A
8
5K11
R45
1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
IOUT 4
B7
2
IOUT'
B8
VLC
COMP
VREF+
VREFV+
V-
1/4-1
7K5
R30
1/4-1
U18
1
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
16
14
15
13
3
1
+5M
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
+15A
C34
PQH
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10nF
C27
1
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
1
SER
2
14
0.1uF
SRCLR'
SRCK
L
U16
C39
O6
10
11
2
G'
RCK
0.1uF
13
12
0.1uF
SHEET1
O5
2
SHEET2
16
Z15
Z14
Z13
Z12
Z11
Z10
Z9
Z8
1
O4
SHEET2
74HC595
+5L
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
F3/4
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
SE 1388
mod
E
MOD/RDM
D17
2
100pF
1
Q9
2
2
1
2
D18
SHEET3
G5
1G
R73
S
1
22M1
R50
1/4-1
2
G
1
2
C50
BA129
PN2
FIRMA/VISTO
1
3
SHEET3
DATA
D
PN1
MODIFICHE
1
J201
C51
2
BA129
PN3
2
SHEET3
G
3
G4
1
+15A
1
D
S
2
2
D19
22M1
R53
1/4-1
2
Q10
1
1nF
100M
1
R74
J201
1
1
C48
20K
R51
1/4-1
2
2
BA129
22M1
R59
1/4-1
3
G
D
S
10K
R55
2
3
1/4-1
2
J201
1
2
SHEET3
1
1 8
+ U267 6
- 4 OP77
SHEET1
VDET
-15A
1
1
C47
0.1uF
22M1
R65
1/4-1
A
1
D
S
1
22pF
10K
R52
1
A
2
1/4-1
J201
10G
R72
1
Q11
2
2
G7
1
C52
3
G
2
BA129
100K
R56
1/4-1
2
PN4
2
Q8
1
D20
G3
2
2
1
1
1
2
10nF
10M
R70
1/4-1
G6
2
1
+15A
90K9
R54
1/4-1
2
1
20K
3
SHEET3
VBO
2
RV10
1
C49
1
22K1
R57
1/4-1
+15A
2
-15A
A
-15A
A2
SHEET2
+15A
SHEET2
A
SHEET2
-15A
SHEET2
A2
3
2
1
10M
R66
1/4-1
2
1
200K
1
RV6
2
3
1
10K
2
RV5
10K
1
RV4
2
3
3
1
10K
R64
1/4-1
RV7
2
221R
R61
1/4-1
1
A
+15A
2
-15A
3K32
R63
1/4-1
-15A
+15A
10K
3
1
200K
2
2
182R
R68
1/4-1
100K
R67
1/4-1
RV8
1
1
2
-15A
6
1
A
1M
R69
1/4-1
2
2
RV9
3
200K
1N4148
1
3
OP07C
1
A
2
1
1
SHEET3
1
-U257
+ 4
332R
R62
1/4-1
D21
2
2
4
+15A
5
S1
C
A2
PN5
U24
S2
2
3 G1
D1 6
D2
2
7 G2
681K
R58
1/4-1
2
2N5909
1
SCHERMO
5M6
R71
1/4-1
2
681K
R60
1
DET CABLE
G2
1/4-1
G1
1
P4
2
2
10pF
A
strumento
disegnatore
TRACE
FID Rev. 1.4
particolare
Schematic diagram
data
E.CARRARA
assieme
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
F4/4
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME.
disegno n.
SE 1388
mod
E
253
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
A REV/PR AGGIUNTO RV10 ESEGUITO REV 1.2 DEL MASTER
B REV/PR MOD.U27 DA TL082 A OP200G. ESEGUITO REV 1.3 DEL MASTER
C REV/PR AGGIUNTO CONN. HEATER J6.ESEGUITO REV. 1.4 DEL MASTER.
RV1 RV2 RV3
1
1
C4
+
U2
1
1
1
1
1
1
P3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
P4
G2
2
U1
U24
1
R18
U27
R77
D22
1
C53
1
1
R16
R15 C10
C8
C7
U7
1
U3 R17
C22
C14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R21
R79
R78
1
R24
R23
R22
1
1
U9
U16
U19
C36
U13
R81
R80
C25 C26
U15
C38
C34
U18
C20
Q9
G5
6
1
1
J6
R51
R52
R54
R55
R56
R57
R58
R60
R61
R62
R63
R64
R66
R67
R68
R69
1
1
R59
D19
C47
1
15
14
13
24
23
22
R27
C33
Q1
C30
R65
D20
C29
D1
c
32 a
R53
D18
10
11
12
G6
R50
D17
1
2
3
1
Q8
U12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G4
5
C32
U20
P1
9
5
Q10
RN2
1
R34
R33
R32
R31
R30
R29
1
1
1
1
1
D16
D15
D14
R40
1
1
R39
R49
R48
R47
R46
R45
C46
C43
U23
C42
R83
R20
1
C12
C24
1
1
C16
C19
+
G3
1
1
1
1
1
1
C37
+
U26
U22
1
R82
+
G7
RN1
C39
Q11
1
U21
C27
C21
C13
C11
C28
C35
U10
U17
G2
U14
U11
U8
U6
U5
U25
1
7
C17
C54
RV4 RV5 RV6 RV7 RV8 RV9 RV10
G1
P5
U4
R12
R11
R10
R9
R75
C5 C6
1
C1
C2 C3
R8
Z2
R7
Z1
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
D2
C9 R76
1
R14
R13
D21
P2
FIRMA/VISTO
3/06/97
9/12/97
10/4/98
R19
D10
D9
C31
D4
D3
C15
D6
D5
C18
D8
D7
Q6
C44
Q7
1
R26
D12
Q2
Q4
1
1
Q3
1
1
1
1
1
1
R28 1
R44
R43
R42
R41
R38
Q5
R37
R36
D13
R35
D111
R25
C40
C41
FEMMINA/FEMALE = 1 P5
MASCHIO/MALE = 2 P5
C23
C45
G1
R71
U24
U25
G2
C52
strumento
Q8
G6
C51
R74
C49
U26
C50
R73
G3
G7
assieme
Q10
G4
C48
R70
R72
Q11
disegnatore
TRACE
C.S. FID Rev. 1.4
particolare
E.CARRARA
22/04/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
A3
Q9
G5
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR
ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS SpA AT ANY TIME.
254
data
disegno n.
PC 1105
mod
C
Electron Capture
Detector Controller
This chapter describes the Electron Capture Detector (ECD) controller of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 256
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 258
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 258
Service Manual
255
Chapter 5.11
Electron Capture Detector Controller
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
Circuit Function
The main purpose of the Electron Capture Detector (ECD) PCB is to control the pulse
frequency (FC1034, J5) of the radioactive source (63Ni) and the input (low current
produced) of the ECD. The ECD PCB takes all digital inputs/outputs (J8 connector)
and the power voltages (+5 V dc, +24 V dc, GND) from the motherboard.
The low-current input signal (FC1033) produced by the ECD is connected to the input
of the 5909 preamplifier (U1, point N1) by a dedicated cable with a coaxial connector.
The output signal then goes to the OP07 amplifier (U11). The 48 V dc output voltage
required to supply the heater elements (thermoregulation) and the input signal of the
PT100 sensor (reading temperature) of the ECD are connected to the female connector
(J9). The analog output signal (V DET) of the operational amplifier OP07 (U12) goes
to the VFC110AP converter circuit (U26) through two OP07 operational amplifiers
(U2, U3).
The output frequency signal (F-OUT) of the VFC110AP (pin 8) goes to the
motherboard through 6N137 (I1) and the J8 connector to be read by the main TRACE
microprocessor. The same V DET signal goes to the TL082 output stage (U4A) and
three resistors (R50, R56, R57) to generate the output voltages of 0–1 V and 0–10 V.
These outputs are used for external connections to:
•
A recorder
•
An integrator
•
A data handling system (ChromCard or ChromQuest)
The circuit for the autozero function consists of the OP200 (U4B) and 4066 (U5A),
which are controlled from the DOING AZ input signal.
The autozero analog signal is generated by:
•
Two 74HC273 integrated circuits (U27, U28)
•
Two DAC0800 converters (U22, U23)
•
OP07 amplifier (U20)
A local MC68HC705 microprocessor (U24) controls the following:
256
•
Data bus
•
Address bus
•
Clock
•
Interrupt
•
Reset
•
SPI signals
Service Manual
Chapter 5.11
Electron Capture Detector Controller
Theory of Operations
The integrated circuits 74HC240 (U29A–B) and four 6N137 (I3–I6) are used to
perform the serial communication with the motherboard through the J8 connector. The
pulse width (0.1µS, 0.5µS, 1µS) of the outpulse frequency (J5 connector) is generated
by four 74LS221 circuits (U8, U13) and the 74LS153.
The circuit consists of:
•
Diodes
•
Resistors
•
Capacitors
•
Transistors (Q3–Q7)
The current circuit consists of:
•
Integrated circuit 74HC273 (U18)
•
Converter DAC0800 (U14)
•
Amplifier OP07 (U9)
The voltage circuit consists of:
•
Integrated circuit 74HC273 (U19)
•
Converter DAC0800 (U15)
•
Amplifier OP07 (U10)
The regulator LM7805 (U31) generates the +5 V dc. Two regulators, LM7815 (U32)
and LM7915 (U33), generate the +/–15 V dc. The J2 connector gives the 0 V (signal
common), 1 V, 10 V, and GND (chassis) outputs to connect an integrator or to handle
chromatograph data externally.
Detector Heat
The Electron Capture detectors require additional heat control for the detector cell.
This heater voltage is furnished from the Power Control PCB on the power control
module. The heater voltage output from the power control PCB is passed through the
detector control electronic module which is mounted on the right side of the GC. The
heater voltage enters the detector control module through the main jack on the
motherboard slot A, B, or C. The voltage is then passed through J9 to the ECD Heater.
Each detector control module slot has an independent heater channel on the Power
Control PCB. The temperature feedback from the detector RTD is also fed through
this module to the motherboard.
A jumper must be made on the motherboard to enable the RTD. Module A uses J8,
module B uses J7 and module C uses J6. The top two pins must be jumped to enable
the RTD.
Service Manual
257
Chapter 5.11
Electron Capture Detector Controller
Adjustment Procedures
Output Specifications
+/–15 V @ 165 mA
+5 V @ 25 mA
Frequency read @ 0–1000 kHz
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary.
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the ECD controller is listed
below in Table 5.11-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic
and its corresponding layout. There are six drawings for reference in this section.
Table 5.11-1. ECD Controller Schematics
Board
ECD
NOTE
258
PN
Drawing
Layout
23648325
SE 1389 - sh. 5, 1–5
PC 1106, 1
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
Service Manual
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
TP23
C51
+5L
SCH
22pF
XT1
22pF
+5
C50
1nF
35
37
0
R73
D13
10K
+5
R72
47.5K
2
OSC1
OSC2
TCMP
TCAP
1
RESET
RESET
36
PD7
RESET
C46
1uF
29
30
+5
J6
1
2
3
4
0
31
32
33
34
MISO
MOSI
SCK
CSI
CON4
SCI/RDI
SCI/TDO
SPI/MISO
SPI/MOSI
SPI/SCK
SPI/SS
0
3
+5
VPP
8
909
R108
2K2
3
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
U29B
SEL_A
SEL_B
19
17
15
13
11
CLK
CS
6
G
DOING_AZ
MOSI
5 7
3
5
7
9
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
A4
A3
A2
A1
C82
100nF
74HC240
IRQ
D14
1N4148
2
U24
39
38
IRQ
+5
R107
PIN10
R74
10M
4Mhz
C52
+5L
PIN20
C76
100nF
PIN40 (VDD) = Vcc
PIN20 (VSS) = gnd0
+5L
+5
0
R105
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
TX
909
3
G
8
6
4
2
6
12
14
16
18
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
A4
A3
A2
A1
CLKL
CLKM
CLKI
CLKV
5 7
C81
100nF
74HC240
+5L
2
CCLK
CCLKEN
CCLR
MC68HC705C8
13
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
RCLK
14
+5
0
R103
U21
11
12
10
R106
2K2
U29A
1
RX
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
8
G
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
9
RCO
8
909
R104
2K2
0VL
3
6
CSI
5 7
C80
100nF
IRQ
74HC590
+5L
+5
0
R102
8
R101
2K2
U8A
+5
U17
R16
1K
V/F
C12
22pF
1
2
3
6
5
4
3
0.1uS
0.5uS
1uS
A
B
CLR
Q
Q
13
10
11
12
13
V/F
4
74LS221
14
2
1
15
SEL_A
SEL_B
U8B
6
CEXT
C11
47pF
R15
6.81K
7
9
10
11
1C0
1C1
1C2
1C3
1Y
2C0
2C1
2C2
2C3
2Y
A
B
CLR
909
7
3
+5
MISO
6
7 5
R79
10
9
A
B
1G
2G
C79
100nF
C57
R80
150
TP25
0.47uF
74LS153
REXT/CEXT
2
R81
0
Q
Q
221
5
R75
1K
4W
R77
10K
12
74LS221
R59
1.1K
2
Q3
2N2219A
Q6
2N2905A
TP26
U13A
Q5
0
U16B
8
9
D
11
S
Q
R
Q
13
R14
6.81K
CLK
C10
100pF
1
2
3
A
B
CLR
Q
Q
0
7
9
10
11
R76
221
R78
475
Q
5
5
12
3
D
D15
PULSE
S
Q
R
Q
R62
100
Q7
2N2905A
C56
100nF
D17
10V
U16A
6
REXT/CEXT
1N4148
1
-Vp
CLK
74LS221
0
C59
1uF
D16
Q
OUT
1
2
CON2
4
CEXT
A
B
CLR
J5
Q4
2N2219A
U13B
6
R60
10K
13
74LS221
12
1
0
4013
R61
100
2N2369A
4013
2
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
4
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
0
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
19/11/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. ECD rev. 1.1
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
A3
CPU Freq. & Pulse gen.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
modif.
SE1389 sh.1/5
259
MOD/RDM
+15
+15
MODIFICHE
PIN13
C38
100nF
3
3
R40
R39
7K5
C37
100nF
7K5
-15
PIN3
+24V_COM
+5
U14
1
11
CLKI
18
17
14
13
8
7
4
3
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
U18
15
CLR
CLK
14
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
Q8
Q7
Q6
Q5
Q4
Q3
Q2
Q1
19
16
15
12
9
6
5
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VR-
+24V_POS
1
VLC
3
GF
VR+
C24
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
16
COMP
+15
-15
10nF
2
6
1
2
5.62K
R17
10M
-15
7K5
R42
P12
2K
R18
J8
J7
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
FIRMA/VISTO
+24V_COM
+24V_POS
F-OUT
CLK
TX
GND_CASE
+5L
0VL
D23
1N4148
DETECT for ECD
DIN64A
+15
6
R43
0VL
8
PIN13
C40
100nF
6
+5L
+15
4
3
+15
CURR
4
IOUT
+15
GND_CASE
3
DAC0800
74HC273
RX
U9
OP07
7
R41
IOUT
CS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
DATA
4.75K
C39
100nF
7K5
-15
PIN3
+5
U15
CLKV
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
11
18
17
14
13
8
7
4
3
U19
15
CLR
CLK
14
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
74HC273
Q8
Q7
Q6
Q5
Q4
Q3
Q2
Q1
19
16
15
12
9
6
5
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VR-
VLC
1
VR+
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
J9
6
C25
COMP
16
+15
U10
OP07
7
R44
3
2
6
1
2
5.62K
IOUT
TP16
-15
10nF
IOUT
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
VOLT
GND_CASE
4
48V-A
48V-B
PT100-A
PT100-B
GND
DB9F
+15
DAC0800
4
TP15
R19
10M
8
-15
6
R20
P14
2K
+15
4.75K
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
19/11/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. ECD rev. 1.1
D/A converter & I/O connector
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
260
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
A3
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
SE1389 sh.2/5
modif.
MOD/RDM
TP6
+15
-15
TP2
100nF
C26
R29
R28
10K
+15
-15
475K
J4
C15
10nF
C29
0.47uF
R55
3G
100nF
3
4
C27
1
6
R50
4K7
C28
100nF
100pF
R48
R52
5.62M
30G
R51
R27
90K
50G
J3
J1
2
4
1
7
8
2
5
3
TP4
R23
R66
R67
5.62K
10M
8
R24
C14a
7
4
4
I
O
U
T
1
6
221K
1
C
O
M
P
2
4
U22
DAC0800
V
L
C
4
I
O
U
T
+15
I
O
U
T
1
C
O
M
P
U23
DAC0800
V
L
C
4
+15
TP28
B B B B B B B B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C14
4
100nF
100nF
1K
R68
10nF
1
6
2
4
I
O
U
T
R65
5.62K
+15
3
C13
4
10nF
7
+15
C49
U20
OP07
15K4
-15
C48
3
+15
10nF
R47
150K
-15
R69
-15
4
2
R25
10K
R46
150K
R22
4
1
6
3
R21
470
TP5
330E
4
475K
-15
-15
5909
U1
C64
100nF
PIN13 (V+)= +15
PIN3 (V-) = -15
3
U11
OP07
1
6
4
C62
100nF
+15
22.1K
6
3
+15
4
R45
+15
C65
100nF
7
+15
P15
20K
-15
R49
100K
3
+15
C63
100nF
U12
OP07
C31
N3
V_DET
3
3
+15
VERSO TP8
8
2
R26
10K
N1
FIRMA/VISTO
DATA
TP7
CURR
TP1
MODIFICHE
1 1 1
2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5
3
V
R
+
R63
V
R
1
4
R64
7K5
B B B B B B B B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7K5
1 1 1
2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5
1
5
V
R
+
R70
V
R
1
4
R71
7K5
7K5
1
5
-15
3
3
1 1 1 1
9 6 5 2 9 6 5 2
1 1 1 1
9 6 5 2 9 6 5 2
TP3
R9
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1K
C6
1uF
TP18
+5
C7
1uF
C C
L L
R K
+5
5
5
R13
1K
U7
1
2
C8
1000
pol
3
4
R10
15K
R11
3.65K
6
7
V.OUT
+IN
9
C.IN
8
F.OUT
-IN
ON1
B.O.C.
ON2
O.S.C.
+VS
-VS
A_GND
D_GND
N.C.
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C C
L L
R K
D D D D D D D D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1
8 7 4 3 8 7 4 3
+5
1
1 1
U28
74HC273
D D D D D D D D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1
8 7 4 3 8 7 4 3
CLKM
CLKL
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
V/F
14
13
12
5
11
10
1
1 1
U27
74HC273
R12
243K
AD650
+15
C9
51pF
pol
-15
5
5
-15
TP17
C22
100nF
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
5
0
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
C21
100nF
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
19/11/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. ECD rev. 1.1
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
A3
Electr.,autozero, V/F conv.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
modif.
SE1389 sh.3/5
261
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
+15
5
R36
7
6
+15
-15
22M1
R54
1K21
U6A
393
+5L
R34
100K
4
3
R35
TP11
C35
1N825
D3
1N825
100uF
25V
8
6
8
A
9
B
+15
D2
1N4148
1
GF
5 7
1
C19
100nF
+15
1
3
C
22K1
R37
10K
C34
100nF
2
R99
2K2
U5D
4066
6
1
221K
8
2
1
R38
D4
R100
6K81
C20
100nF
-15
R53
1K21
U6B
393
+15
U5C
4066
5
1
C78
100nF
PIN14 (VDD)
C18
100nF
C
4
A
3
B
+15
0VL
PIN7 (VSS)
R98
3K32
1
+5L
U5B
4066
TP30
2
8
R97
2K2
3
6
TP8
TP9
TP10
R3
R5
649K
TP12
R8
V_DET
C77
100nF
TP13
8K06
7
309K
-15
1
R1
-15
C5
1
R4
649K
1
100nF
4
R2
2
2K21
C16
100nF
+15
U4A
TL082
1
C1
0.47uF
8
8
100nF
1
6
R6
U2
OP07
10K
C2
1
C4
1
+15
+15
7
14
9
100nF
3
+15
C17
100nF
1
10
+15
R31
33K2
1
-15
4
-15
U5A
4066
1
A
C45
0.47uF
J2
3
AGND
DGND
I-COM
I-IN
+5V
EN
C-OS
NC
+VS
V-OUT
-VS
COMP
8
TP29
7
1
3
5
6
12
11
6
1
5
1
OP200
2
1
C73
100nF
7
13
22K1
B
CON4
SIGNAL-OUT
F-OUT
R32
6K81
U4B
R33
C
R56
1K1
4
3
2
1
V-IN
VFC110AP
C72
100nF
R57
10K
2
13
1
4
GND_CASE
U26
1
6
3
7
100nF
1
TP31
8
U3
OP07
1
1
2
R58
470R
4
2
3
8K87
R30
22K1
0VL
TP14
C3
GND
10V
1V
0V
F-OUT
5 7
R7
90K9
D1
1N4148
DOING_AZ
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
19/11/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. ECD rev. 1.1
V/F converter signal out
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
262
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
A3
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
SE1389 sh.4/5
modif.
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
FIRMA/VISTO
DATA
GND_CASE
+24V_POS
TP20
Q16
BC547
U32
LM7815
D27
R115
3
2K2
VI
V+
1N4935
1
VO
G
N
D
+15
D26
C84
47uF
35V
R94
1N4935
1
F1
R95
630mA-T
1
+24V_COM
C32
100uF
25V
2
7
C86
D24
C85
47uF
35V
1nF
1N4935
C33
100uF
25V
U33
LM7915
D25
U30
5
4
6
8
12
PIN14
C61
100nF
PIN7
AST
AST
-T
+T
RET
3
C60
1.5nF
2
Q
11
Q
13
OSC
1
VO
G
N
D
1N4935
-15
VTP19
3
7
RCC
1
VI
10
11
CX
TP24
R113
6K8
2
9
RX
RST
12
4047
2
C71
R114
D9
1.5K
13
C83
D10
1N4935
Q2
MJE350
47uF
R88
10K
R82
3
D5
4
5
7
6
8
R85
100K
D6
1N4935
C70
+15
LM358
2
100nF
C69
100nF
R84
R93
2K2
C58
10uF
100V
R89
30.1K
R87
10K
R91
R92
11K
11K
VOLT
1N4935
475
Q10
8
R83
1
-Vp
MJE340
D19
100
TP27
TR1
1N4148
U25B
10K
2
3
1N4148
100nF
4
R90
5.62K
475
C54
10uF
100V
9
C67
0.1uF
2
1
1N4935
10
D20
U25A
LM358
R86
6
R96
2K2
-15
D18
1N4148
TP22
C68
220uF
35V
R110
4K7
U31
LM7805
R112
4K7
3
Q12
BU806
Q13
BU806
Q14
BC547
Q15
BC547
D12
D11
1N4935
1N4935
D8
D7
1N4935
1N4935
VI
V/F
D/A
VO
G
N
D
1
5
A.ZERO
4
N4
2
C55
220uF
6
+5
C30
220uF
CPU
TP21
0
7
1
2
V/Fout
ALIM
3
ELETT.
PULSE
+5
6
4
3
8
9
10
C47
100uF
25V
11
VDD
1
PIEDINATURA
TRASFORMATORE
VISTA LATO COMP.
7
VCC
12
C23
C36
C41
C42
C43
C44
C66
C75
C74
C53
100nF
100nF
100nF
100nF
100nF
100nF
100nF
100nF
100nF
100nF
13
0
GND
VSS
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
19/11/97
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. ECD rev. 1.1
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
A3
+5/+15/-15/-Vp
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
modif.
SE1389 sh.5/5
263
264
Nitrogen Phosphorous
Detector Controller
This chapter describes the Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector (NPD) controller of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 266
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 267
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 268
Service Manual
265
Chapter 5.12
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
Circuit Function
The main purpose of the Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) PCB is to amplify the
low current produced from the detector and to supply its thermionic source.
A local single-chip microprocessor 68HC05 (U34), part of 74HC240 (U35A–B), and
four optocouplers 6N137 (I4–I7), control the SPI interface bus for the serial
communication (MOSI, SCK, CSI, MISO) to the main microprocessor (CPU PCB)
through the motherboard (J6, J7).
Integrated circuit MAX538 (U12) and amplifier TLO82 (U11A) generate the analog
output command VOLT (0–10 V) to select the polarization source circuit
(LM741, U21).
The input electrometer current amplifier circuit consists of:
•
Integrated circuits 5909 (U2), OP07 (U19), JFN FET (Q1–Q4), and OP07 (U20)
•
Resistors
•
Capacitors
•
Potentiometers
•
Diodes
The integrated circuit LM324 (U3A–U3C) gives the gain (1–3) commands to select
the range (0–3). The LM324 (U3D) gives the filter command to the input electrometer
through JFN FET (Q2).
Two digital/analog converters DAC0800 (U30–U31) and the amplifier OP07 (U25)
make up the zero suppression circuit (back-off current, 16 bits). The analog output of
the amplifier OP07 (U20) goes through TP15–TP16 (split points) to the integrated
circuit OP200 (U6A). The integrated circuit generates the analog output voltages of
0–1 V and 0–10 V for the integrator and computer external connections (J1, 4-pin).
The output of OP07 (U20) also goes to the OP07 amplifiers (U7, U8), a v/f converter
VFC110AP (U13), and an optocoupler 6N137 (I2) to generate a frequency output
(F-OUT, 0–4 MHz) to be read from the main microprocessor (CPU).
The regulator U4 (LM78L05) supplies the +5 VB. The regulator LM7815 (U36)
supplies the +15 VB. The regulator LM79L15 (U17) supplies the –15 VB.
Integrated circuit MAX538 (U5) is selected from the single-chip microprocessor
68HC05 (U34) signal (SEL_I) to enable the driving source current circuit. This circuit
consists of:
266
•
LM358 (U10, U27A)
•
TL082 (U18A–B)
Service Manual
Chapter 5.12
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller
Adjustment Procedures
•
LM311 (U29)
•
NE555 (U32)
•
Transistors (Q7, Q8)
•
Resistors
•
Diodes
The amplifier OP07 (U26) and the amplifier TL082 (U28B) are a protection source
circuit for generating an alarm output signal (STS).
A special oscillator circuit is formed by:
•
Integrated circuit 4047 (U33)
•
Two transistors BC547 (Q16–Q17)
•
Resistors
•
Capacitors
•
A diode
This oscillator circuit is the primary supply of the internal transformer. The amplifier
LM741 (U21) is selected from the input VOLT (variable voltage 0–10 V) for
generating the source polarization voltage (0–100 V).
The regulator LM7815 (U23) supplies +15 V. The regulator LM7915 (U22) supplies
–15 V. The regulator 7805 (U24) supplies +5 V.
Two input voltages (8.5 V ac, 8.5 V ac 2) come from an external transformer in the
GC oven through the motherboard (J6). The P2 connector gives the 0 V (signal
common), 1 V, 10 V, and GND (chassis) outputs to connect an integrator or to handle
chromatograph data externally.
Output Specifications
+/–15 V @ 165 mA
100 V @ 0.01 A
+5 V @ 25 mA
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary.
Service Manual
267
Chapter 5.12
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller
Schematics and Component Layout
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the NPD controller is listed
below in Table 5.12-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic
and its corresponding layout. There are six drawings for reference in this section.
Table 5.12-1. NPD Controller Schematics
Board
NPD
NOTE
268
PN
Drawing
Layout
23648355
SE 1424 - sh. 5, 1–5
PC 1107, 1
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
Service Manual
MOD/RDM
+5L
TP27
C72
4Mhz
SCLK
19
U34
35
37
0
2
+5
OSC1
OSC2
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
TCMP
TCAP
1
RESET
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
RESET
R106
36
PD7
2K21
29
30
STS
0
0
31
32
33
34
MISO
MOSI
SCK
CSI
3
+5
SDATA
SEL_I
SEL_V
SDATA
SEL_I
17
15
13
11
CLK
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
FLT
DAZ
CS
6
G
SCI/RDI
SCI/TDO
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Z0
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z7
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
Z8
Z9
Z10
Z11
Z12
Z13
Z14
Z15
MOSI
5 7
3
5
7
9
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
A4
A3
A2
A1
C93
100nF
74HC240
+5L
I6
6N137
R140
0
+5
8
2
IRQ
1N4148
C88
1uF
R139
2K2
909
22pF
SCLK
8
U35B
39
38
+5
R144
47.5K
+5
2
3
R105
10M
C71
FIRMA/VISTO
R138
PIN20 (VDD)
PIN10 (VSS)
PIN40 (VDD)
PIN20 (VSS)
XT1
DATA
+5L
C89
100nF
SCH
22pF
D43
MODIFICHE
TX
R141
2K21
909
U35A
1
8
6
4
2
RX
3
G
SCK
6
12
14
16
18
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
A4
A3
A2
A1
5 7
C94
100nF
74HC240
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
SPI/MISO
SPI/MOSI
SPI/SCK
SPI/SS
VPP
+5L
I7
6N137
R142
+5
0
8
2
909
R143
2K21
0VL
3
6
CSI
MC68HC705C8
5 7
Z[0..15]
Z[0..15]
C95
100nF
+5
+5L
+5
0
R137
8
C84
100nF
2
R136
2K21
C18
100nF
909
3
MISO
6
7 5
0
C92
100nF
+15
TP24
R7
C4
10M
100nF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
8.5VAC1
R6
-15
8.5VAC2
150K
+5
+15
U12
1
2
3
SDATA
SCLK
SEL_V
4
DIN
SCLK
CS
VDD
VOUT
REFIN
DOUT
AGND
8
7
6
8
R5
2
U11A
24V_COM
1
47.5K
VOLT
3
5
24V_POS
TL082
GF
4
MAX538
R4
47.5K
CS
RX
-15
GND_CASE
2
2
+5L
0VL
+15
+15
R3
12K5
C16
100nF
U11B
7
+2.5
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
8.5VAC1
8.5VAC2
24V_COM
24V_POS
F-OUT
CLK
TX
GND_CASE
+5L
0VL
2
5
D42
TL082
C17
100nF
2
1
J6
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DIN64A
6
3
J7
1N4148
DETECT for NPD
U1
LM336
-15
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
2
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
5/2/98
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. NPD rev. 1.1
A3
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
CPU A/D & SPI Interface
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
modif.
SE1424 sh.1/5
269
MOD/RDM
FIRMA/VISTO
DATA
-15
1
1
U3A
3
GAIN3
MODIFICHE
U3C
U3B
5
GAIN2
1
2
U3D
10
GAIN1
7
8
12
FLT
G1
14
9
6
FLTR
+15
13
LM324
LM324
LM324
+15
LM324
4
+15
C44
100nF
+15
R2
100K
R61
100K
1nF
R150
R1
15K
R38
100K
100K
R60
22M
5%
1N4148
N9
R154
100M
D11
-15
-15
D10
C103
1N4148
100pF
4
+15
8
2
N6
R151
10M
V_DET
U20
OP07
R59
22M
5%
R49
10K
R44
10M
R50
100K
7
PIN13 =+15
PIN3 =-15
+15
C26
-15
100nF
R21
100K
C104
1
6
3
R40
22M
5%
TP5
3
R68
N5
R52
TP1
1
6
R152
J3
-15
R45
10K
0.01uF
R19
U2
6
22.1K
4
3
1
2
7
5
3
8
3
R23
681K
I
O
U
T
221K
1
C
O
M
P
B B B B B B B B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C37
100nF
V
L
C
4
I
O
U
T
+15
1
6
2
4
U30
DAC0800
I
O
U
T
1
C
O
M
P
U31
DAC0800
V
L
C
4
+15
4
1 1 1
2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5
V
R
+
V
R
1
4
R101
R102
7K5
7K5
B B B B B B B B
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1
2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5
1
5
V
R
+
V
R
1
4
R108
R107
7K5
7K5
1
5
3
R48
221
R47
332
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5
C36
100nF
7
+15
R41
I
O
U
T
4
10nF
1
6
2
C73
1K
R70
TP20
U19
OP07
R24
681K
+15
+15
1
6
5909
4
R42
R67
5.11K
OP07
7
J2
+15
4
TP3
C98
+15
2
4
10nF
2
C105
10pF
C61
U25
3
90.9K
10G
3
4
-15
R71
-15
4
-15
20pF
5M6
4
5.11K
R22
22M
5%
8
R153
-15
R51
10K
3
10nF
C74
100nF
+15
1G
C102
4
C43
100nF
D6
R39
C101
N7
C75
100nF
4
-15
Z[0..15]
Z[0..15]
R46
100K
1M
-15
3K32
R43
182
-15
3
TP7
G1
3
3
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
strumento
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
5/2/98
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. NPD rev. 1.1
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
Electrometer & Autozero
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
270
A3
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
SE1424 sh.2/5
modif.
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
+15
5
R34
7
6
+15
-15
R31
1K21
U14A
393
I3
6N137
1
R36
100K
3
R35
1
C21
1N825
C22
100nF
3
8
1
A
2
B
1
+15
D4
C23
100nF
+15
GF
5 7
1
100uF
25V
6
PIN14 (VDD)
PIN7 (VSS)
C
22K1
R33
10K
R134
2K21
U15A
4066
1
3
TP2
2
221K
+5L
8
2
4
R32
D2
R135
6K81
C24
100nF
-15
R30
1K21
U14B
393
+15
22M1
C91
100nF
1N4148
1
U15B
4066
1
2
1
C25
100nF
C
11
A
+15
10
B
R133
3K32
1
U15C
4066
5
0VL
I2
6N137
TP12
+5L
2
8
C
4
A
R132
2K21
3
B
3
6
TP15
TP11
TP9
R13
R15
649K
V_DET
TP4
R18
C90
100nF
TP6
8K06
309K
R11
-15
C10
1
R14
649K
1
100nF
4
R12
2
U6A
OP200
2K21
C5
100nF
8K87
R10
22K1
1
8
8
100nF
1
6
R16
U7
OP07
10K
C8
1
7
C11
1
+15
+15
2
7
14
9
+15
C6
100nF
10
C19
100nF
U15D
4066
A
C53
0.47uF
J1
I-IN
+5V
EN
C-OS
V-OUT
-VS
COMP
TP13
7
1
3
5
6
12
11
6
6
1
7
5
22K1
B
C20
100nF
R9
6K81
U6B
R37
C
R91
1K1
4
3
2
1
I-COM
8
VFC110AP
8
R92
10K
DGND
+VS
4
-15
AGND
NC
1
+15
R8
33K2
1
F-OUT
V-IN
13
100nF
3
-15
U13
1
4
GND_CASE
1
6
3
100nF
1
TP19
8
U8
OP07
1
1
2
R93
475
4
2
3
C7
0.47uF
0VL
TP8
C9
+15
0
-15
3
GND
10V
1V
0V
F-OUT
5 7
R17
9K09
1
OP200
9
D5
1N4148
DAZ
CON4
3
SIGNAL-OUT
1
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
5/2/98
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. NPD rev. 1.1
A3
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
V/F Converter Signal-out
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
modif.
SE1424 sh.3/5
271
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
+12B
C54
100nF
+24B
+12B
+12B
C82
R94
2K21
100nF
R124
10K
+15B
U32
Q8
BD137
U29
8 5 6
2
R125
10K
3
2K21
4
1
R104
R103
L1
47.5
2K21
150 uH
R95
7
Q7
BD138
LM311
NE555
C48
R78
1
5
I1A
ISQ74
2
R53A
2
+15B
SCLK
R73
470
4
3
1
3
R28
C14
10M
100nF
5
R76
4
R74
3.32K
-15B
1
1
5
R58
1
2
1
2
3
5
1
3
4
R53C
6
DIN
SCLK
CS
VDD
VOUT
REFIN
DOUT
AGND
8
7
6
8
R29
+2.5B
2
8
2
U10A
R54
1
47.5K
3
10K
LM358
5
R80
10K
2M2
5%
+15B
3
+5
3.32K
TL082
47.5K
4
I1D
ISQ74
4
R26
47.5K
R115
+15B
-15B
7K5
-15B
SEL_I
R20C
R79
TL082
R56
U18A
R62
2.21K
TL082
1
R55
2
4
7
5
+15B
D8
+15B
MAX538
2k2
2k2
2k2
470
6
7
5
C69
2.2uF
U18B
6
10K
200K
CONV
+5B
5
U28B
6
R27
U5
6
10K
R57
RES_CURR
10K
+5B
-15B
I1C
ISQ74
R113
10K
0
+5
R131
0.1
3W
10nF
6
LM358
LM358
I1B
ISQ74
R100
3.32K
7
+15B
10K
3
1
4
47
C55
7
1
TP17
3
R97
3.32K
3
U27B
2
4
+15B
R98
2
R75
10K
8
+5B
U26
4
1
6
2M2
5%
U27A
470
R53B
-15B
8
10K
1
6
1
J5
OP07
R77
R72
T
E
R
M
O
I
O
N
I
C
A
100K
33.2K
100nF
SDATA
S
O
R
G
E
N
T
E
R99
D24
6V8
+5B
1
C79
220uF
25V
10nF
R96
3K3
+5
C70
220uF
25V
D26
SS84P
C83
C81
3.3nF
J4
R20A
R114
3K32
C31
100nF
R20B
R81
R82
10K
332K
STS
RES_CURR
+15B
8
2
1
-15B
3
CONV
D30
TP23
+12B
TP21
+24B
U4
LM78L05
1
+15B
R25
12K5
VI
U36
LM7815
VO
G
N
D
U10B
3
6
7
2
3
+5B
C1
2.2uF
25V
VI
R112
1
+15B
C34
2.2uF
25V
2
C12
100nF
C32
100nF
C45
100nF
C49
100nF
C13
100nF
C33
100nF
C46
100nF
C50
100nF
3.32K
R109
2.21K
+2.5B
-15B
LM358
2
47K
C57
22uF
25V
5
3
R111
-15B
VO
G
N
D
C38
100nF
C2
100nF
R110
15K
4
U28A
TL082
TP30
3
1
C35
2.2uF
25V
2
C39
100nF
VI
G
N
D
VO
1
-15B
U17
LM79L15
-24B
TP22
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
A.Lamperti
TRACE
assieme
CODICE
data
5/2/98
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. NPD rev. 1.1
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
Current Generator
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
272
A3
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
SE1424 sh.4/5
modif.
MOD/RDM
MODIFICHE
DATA
FIRMA/VISTO
GND_CASE
24V_POS
TP18
TP14
U23
LM7815
3
R119
Q10
BC547
VI
C52
47uF
50V
R117
1-5%
R118
FUSE
1-5%
+15
U24
LM7805
1
VO
G
N
D
2K21
F1
V+
3
VI
C27
100uF
25V
2
24V_COM
VO
G
N
D
1
4
+5
A.ZERO
N8
ALI.log.
2
C29
100uF
25V
TP16
ALIM.ana
0
7
7
V/F anal.
C30
47uF
50V
PIN14 (VDD)
PIN7 (VSS)
C87
100nF
3
C86
1nF
2
Q
AST
AST
-T
+T
RET
Q
OSC
10
VI
1
VO
G
N
D
11
ELETTR.
-15
V-
U22
LM7915
13
TP10
RCC
1
CX
2
9
RX
RST
4047
7
7
C41
1
R129
2
1K
ZPY12
3
TP25
R130
6K81
D41
2
A/D volt
3
U33
5
4
6
8
12
1
C28
100uF
25V
8
3
D17
+15
D13
1N4148
D19
Q5
C96
10uF
200V
RGP10G
5
U21
7
R64
6
R121
2K21
R120
2K21
10
D37
D38
11
D16
C51
100nF
-15
5
R85
75K
100nF
R66
D18
C56
10uF
200V
4
C42
R65
100K
4
10K
2
LM741
8
9
VOLT
475
MJE350
22uF
25V
R84
8K25
R63
3
6
1
C80
100nF
R83
10K
RGP10G
Q6
12
475
R88
MJE340
475
TP32
1N4148
1N4148
13
C76
470uF
35V
+24B
TP28
R122
8K25
Q13
BU806
Q16
BC547
R123
8K25
Q17
BC547
Q12
BU806
R86
22.1K
D28
C97
0.1uF
250V
TP29
8.5VAC1
D34
8.5VAC2
D36
RGP10G
D33
D35
+12B
SK1540
C64
10uF 35V
C78
10000uF
16V
C77
10000uF
16V
TP26
C63
10uF 35V
RGP10G
POS.
DENOMINAZIONE
PEZZI
DISEGNO
disegnatore
strumento
TP31
A.Lamperti
TRACE
-24B
assieme
CODICE
data
5/2/98
sostituisce
scala
codice
visto
C.S. NPD rev. 1.1
A3
Toll. Gen.
+ 0,1
+ 30'
-
particolare
Schematic Diagram -
Power Supply
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART
FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A.
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME.
Fil. 6H-6g
1,6
disegno n
modif.
SE1424 sh.5/5
273
274
Flame Photometric
Detector Controller (FPD)
This chapter describes the TRACE GC 2000 Flame Photometric Detector (FPD)
controller.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 275
Circuit Functions....................................................................................................... 275
Output Specifications................................................................................................ 277
Adjustment Procedure............................................................................................... 277
Protection Circuits .................................................................................................... 277
Special Notes ............................................................................................................ 277
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 278
Theory of Operations
Circuit Functions
The FPD pcb controls:
• input analogic current
• flame ignition
• photomultiplier voltage through the J5, J3, J4 and J1 connectors on the FPD
detector board.
The cell is independently heated and requires 100W @ 48 Vac (2 resistors 24V 50W
in series). Cell temperature is controlled by a FEEDBACK ANALOG pcb and CPU
pcb through the motherboard and PT100 temperature sensor.
On the J6 and J7 DIN64A connector, all voltages (24vdc, 8v, 5vdc, 0v, GND) and all
digital signals (F-OUT, CLK, Tx, Rx, CS, GF) interfacing with the motherboard bus
pcb are present. Two diodes, IN4148 (D28-D29), set the type of detector controller
automatically recognized by the main CPU microprocessor.
Service Manual
275
The electronic circuit created with 74HC240 (U22A/B), three 6N137 (I1,I3,I6)
and three 74HC595 (U9-U11) is a serial communication interface (SPI) between
the FPD pcb, the motherboard, and the CPU pcb bus connection.
IGNITER 48V A-B (from an additional transformer located in the Power Module)
and PT100 A-B signals are present on the J5 connector. The integrated circuit
2N5909 (U1), OP07 (U7), and OP07 (U14) with some resistors, and FET J201
(Q2) create the electrometer input current amplifier. The low input current signal
(pA) produced from the FPD is present at J2(N1).
The electronic circuit created by two LM358 (U26A/B) select the RANGE (10n;
0-1-2) through two bits, GAIN 1 and GAIN 0.
Two integrated circuits DAC0800 (U3-U4) and OP07 (U2) create the zero
suppression circuit by 16 bits input digital values (Z0-Z15).
The amplifier OP200 (U5A) takes the electrometer amplifier output (V_DET)
giving the analogic output voltages (0V, 1V, 10V, GND), which connect the
integrator or computer through terminal block J1 (SIGNAL_OUT).
Integrated circuits 4066 (U12D) and OP200 (U12B) hold the above analogic
outputs voltage when they are selected during the autozero.
Two amplifiers, 393 (U17A/B) and 6N137 (I5), give the output signal (GF) for a
gain of the frequency (1 bit, L=gain 1 or H=gain 32).
Two amplifiers OP07 (U6, U13), VFC110AP (U16) and 6N137(I4) have voltagefrequency-converter (0-10V to 0-3,5Mhz), which reads the CPU pcb through a
digital signal F-OUT.
The DC-DC converter 4047 (U21) takes the input voltage 24Vdc and using high
voltage resistors, transistors, diodes, transformer TR2, and the elevator voltage
circuit (D12-D19) generates a 800/900 v voltage. This is used for photomultiplier
excitation voltage.
Chapter 5.13
Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD)
Adjustment Procedure
Regulators LM7815 (U19) and LM7915 (U18) supply the +15/-15Vdc (TP17/18).
Regulator LM7805 (U20) takes the input voltage +15Vdc (TP15) to supply +5Vdc.
Two amplifiers LM358 (U25A/B), transistor PNP (Q3) and transistor MJE340 (D11)
select the HIGH (-900V) or LOW (-800V) voltage for the photomultiplier through the
input signal HIGH_V.
The electronic circuit created by integrated circuit MOC3020 (I2) and triac BTA06400 (Q7) supplies the igniter voltage 8Vac for the flame detector.
Output Specifications
+15/-15 Vdc @ 165mA (generated by 5W DC-DC converter from 24Vdc).
FPD may use +5Vdc @25mA max taken from main system.
FPD flame ignition 2.0A@8Vac.
Adjustment Procedure
No field adjustments are necessary
Protection Circuits
None.
Special Notes
FPD cell temperature is variable from ambient to 350 ºC in increments of 1 ºC.
Service Manual
277
Chapter 5.13
Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD)
Schematics and Component Layout
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component information for the FPD controller is listed below in
table 5.13-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its
corresponding layout. There are 5 drawings in this section.
Table 5.13-1.
Board
NOTE
278
PN
Drawing
Layout
FPD
236 48365
SE 1436 sh. 1/4
PC 1109
FPD
236 48365
SE 1436 sh. 2/4
PC 1109
FPD
236 48365
SE 1436 sh. 3/4
PC 1109
FPD
236 48365
SE 1436 sh. 4/4
PC 1109
FPD
236 48365
SE 1436 PCB
PC 1109
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
Service Manual
279
280
281
282
283
284
Photoionization Detector
Controller (PID)
This chapter describes the TRACE GC 2000 Photoionization Detector (PID)
controller.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 285
Circuit Function ........................................................................................................ 285
Output Specifications................................................................................................ 287
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 287
Protection Circuits .................................................................................................... 287
Special Notes ............................................................................................................ 287
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 288
Theory of Operations
Circuit Function
The PID pcb controls:
• input analogic current
• lamp current
• polarization voltage through J2, J6 and J7 connectors present on the PID detector
board.
On the J9 and J10 DIN64A connector all voltages (24v, +5v dc, 0v, Gnd) and all
digital signals (FOUT, CLK, Tx, Rx, CS, GF) interfacing with Mother board bus pcb
are present. Two IN4148 diodes (D38-D39) set the type of detector controller
automatically recognized by the main CPU microprocessor on the motherboard. The
electronic circuit created with 74HC240 (U28), three 6N137 (I4-I6) and three
74HC595 (U9-U11) is a serial communication interface (SPI) between PID pcb, the
Motherboard, and CPU pcb bus connections.
Integrated circuits 74HC165 (U8) and 6N137 (I7) read the Status lamp (ON, OFF and
Open Circuit) in serial mode.
Service Manual
285
Integrated circuits 2N5909 (U1), OP07 (U14), OP07 (U15) with some resistors,
and FET J201 (Q1-Q4) realize the electrometer input current amplifier. The low
input current signal (pA) produced from the PID detector is present to J2.
The electronic circuit is created by three 74HC00 (U7) and four LM324 (U2). The
RANGE (10n; 0-1-2-3) is selected by two bits, RNG L and RNG H.
Two integrated circuit DAC0800 (U4-U5) and OP07 (U3) create the autozero
circuit (Az) by 16 bits digital values.
The amplifier OP200 (U12A) takes the electrometer amplifier output (V_DET)
and passes it to the analogic output terminal (0V, 1V, 10V, GND), which connects
the integrator or computer.
Integrated circuits 4066 (U13D) and OP200 (U12B) hold the analogic outputs
voltage when they are selected during the autozero.
Two amplifiers 393 (U27A/B) and 6N137 (I9) select the output signal (GF) for a
frequency gain (1 bit, L=gain 1 or H=gain 32).
Two amplifiers OP07 (U6, U24), VFC110AP and 6N137 (I8) realize a
voltage-frequency-converter (0-10V to 0-3,5Mhz) read from the CPU pcb through
a digital signal F-OUT.
The electronic circuit has three transistors, TIP137 (Q10), BC237 (Q12), and
BU806 (Q9); resistors; capacitors; a transformer (TR1). Diodes (D23, D24, D27,
D32, D33) supplies -2000V to the PID detector lamp through the J7 connector.
The amplifier, LM358 (U23B), and optocoupler, CNY17 (I2), give the output
signal for the detector’s lamp status (LMP_ST; 0=OK, 1=OPEN CIRCUIT).
Two integrated circuits, 4066 (U16A/B) and optocoupler CNY17 (I1), are
selected from the input signal (LMP_H/L), and they activate two equal circuits,
which have two 4066 ( U16C/D) and two amplifiers (LM358 (U21A/B)) to get a
LOW or HIGH lamp current.
Chapter 5.14
Photoionization Detector Controller (PID)
Adjustment Procedures
The electronic circuit created with optocoupler CNY17 (I3), diodes IN4148 (D25,
D26, D35), and amplifier LM358 (U23A) is a safety protection circuit which disables
the -2000V circuit through the output signal (BLOC).
The DC-DC converter 4047 (U25) takes the input voltage (24V) to generate +300V
using resistors, transistors, diodes and transformer TR2 to polarize the PID detector.
Four regulators, two LM7815 (U18,U20) and two LM7915 (U17,U22), supply two
different +15/-15Vdc. The regulator LM7805 (U19) takes the input voltage +15Vdc
(TP16/V+) to supply +5Vdc.
Output Specifications
+15/-15Vdc @ 130mA, +5Vdc @25mA
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary.
Protection Circuits
Lamp Status (1 bit, 0=OK / 1=Open circuit)
Special Notes
+300V polarize is generated by +15/-15Vdc and 4W DC-DC converter from 24Vdc. 2000V is generated from 24V 4W DC-DC converter from 24Vdc
Service Manual
287
Chapter 5.14
Photoionization Detector Controller (PID)
Schematics and Component Layout
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component information for the PID controller is listed below in
table 5.14-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its
corresponding layout. There are 6 drawings in this section.
Table 5.14-1.
Board
NOTE
288
PN
Drawing
Layout
PID
236 48360
SE 1437 sh. 1/5
PC 1110
PID
236 48360
SE 1437 sh. 2/5
PC 1110
PID
236 48360
SE 1437 sh. 3/5
PC 1110
PID
236 48360
SE 1437 sh. 4/5
PC 1110
PID
236 48360
SE 1437 sh. 5/5
PC 1110
PID
236 48360
SE 1437 PCB
PC 1110
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
Service Manual
289
290
291
292
293
294
Thermal Conductivity
Detector Controller (TCD)
This chapter describes the TRACE GC 2000 Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD)
controller.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 295
Circuit Functions....................................................................................................... 295
Output Specifications................................................................................................ 297
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 297
Protection Circuits .................................................................................................... 297
Special Notes ............................................................................................................ 297
Schematics and Component Information.................................................................. 298
Theory of Operations
Circuit Functions
The HWDTRC pcb controls the TCD bridge filaments the 9 pole Male connector (P3).
The differential input amplifier INA114BP (U19) takes the unbalance input signal
from two points of the bridge detector through connector P3 (pin 6 and 2). Two
OP07C buffers (U25,U26) control two other bride detector points (sensing) through
connector P3 (pin 3 and 4).
Use RV1 potentiometer for COARSE ZERO adjustments. Use the AD7541AJP
(U20), with two OP07 amplifiers (U12, U13), is used for FINE ZERO adjustments.
Analogic output signals of the INA114BP (U19, pin 6) go to the input of two OP07
amplifiers (U11, Gain x 10 and U4, Gain x1), which are selected by digital-analogic
switch DG413 (U2, GSET).
A digital input signal (ENA0) selects the DG413 digital-analogic switch (U3) and the
OP07 amplifier (U1) to enable the analogic outputs (0V, 1V, 10V, GND), which are
Service Manual
295
present on the P2 terminal block. These outputs are used for external connections
to:
• A recorder
• An integrator
• A chromatography data handling system
The OP07 amplifier (U7) inverts the analogic signal polarity while the LP311N
comparator (U27) and 6N137 optocoupler (U31) give the "threshold" digital
output to the main microprocessor (P1). The analogic output of the OP07
(U14, pin 6) goes to the OP07 amplifier (U6, gain change) to be converted in
frequency by VFC110AP (U33). The output frequency (0-4Mhz at 0-10V) is then
optoisolated through 6N137 (U32) and read from the main microprocessor.
Integrated circuit PM7524 (U28) and amplifier OP07 (U29) generate two setpoints:
• Filaments Temperature (SETT), which is read through the comparator OP07
(U24) giving a CT (constant temperature) output signal.
• Filaments Voltage (SETV) which is read through the comparator OP07 (U23)
giving a CV (constant voltage) output signal.
Using the comparator OP07 (U10) to give a CC output signal, the amplifier OP07
(U16) reads the filaments current (10V max).
The purpose of the hybrid circuit CE 9760 (U15) is to memorize all internal
signals to be interfaced with the main microprocessor by a serial communication
(SPI). DC/DC converter IMR15 (U18) takes the +24 V input voltage to generate
two +/- 15 V (A-P) output voltages and regulator 7805 (Q3) generates a +5 V
voltage.
Regulator LT1021 (U30) and amplifier OP07 (U39) generate the -10 V voltage
(A). An additional 48V transformer and PT100 sensors are used for a second
TCD transfer line through connectors P7 (9 poles Female) and P1 (Bus mother
board).
Two IN4148 diodes (D19,D20) set the type of detector controller (for example
DETAB = TCD) for an automatic recognition by the motherboard’s main
Chapter 5.15
Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD)
Adjustment Procedures
microprocessor. The P2 connector gives the 1V/10V/OV/GND outputs to connect an
external integrator or data handling.
Output Specifications
+/-15 V @ 350 mA
+5 V @ 25mA
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary. The RV2, RV3, RV4, RV5 and RV7
potentiometers concerning the off-set and full-scale are factory adjusted.
Protection Circuits
The filament current is limited to 250 mA.
Special Notes
The CE9761(U40) hybrid circuit is present and the R54 resistance has a different
value only if the TCD detector bridge has two filaments instead of four.
Service Manual
297
Chapter 5.15
Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD)
Schematics and Component Information
Schematics and Component Information
The schematics and component information for the TCD controller is listed below in
table X.X. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its
corresponding layout. There are 5 drawings in this section.
Table 5.15-1.
Board
298
PN
Drawing
Layout
TCD
236 48335
SE 1390 sh. 1/3
PC 1113
TCD
236 48335
SE 1390 sh. 2/3
PC 1135
TCD
236 48335
SE 1390 sh. 3/3
PC 1135
TCD
236 48335
SC 763 - Wiring
Diagram
PC 1135
TCD
236 48335
SE 1390 PCB
PC 1135
Service Manual
299
300
301
302
303
304
Thermocouple
Preamplifiers
This chapter describes the PCB for the thermocouple preamplifiers of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 306
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 306
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 307
Service Manual
305
Chapter 5.16
Thermocouple Preamplifiers
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
Two inlet configurations require temperature feedback from thermocouples instead of
RTDs. These are the PTV and the OC HOT.
Refer to schematic 119834 in Schematics and Component Layout.
The thermocouple is an optional PCB which plugs onto the TFB & DIO PCB. It
amplifies and offsets the temperature signal, so the A/D on the TFB & DIO PCB can
input the temperature to the microprocessor.
The thermocouple amplifier is designed for use with a type E (Chromel/Constantan)
thermocouple.
Integrated circuit U2 provides a 2.5 V reference and a voltage proportional the
temperature of U2. Circuit U1(output pin 1) buffers the 2.5 V reference from U2 and
supplies it as a fixed offset to the summing amplifier U3.
Circuits U1(output pin 7) and U1(output pin 14) buffer and scale the temperature
output of U2 and supply it to the summing amplifier U3.
The thermocouple feeds the circuit via J2. Amplifier U1(output pin 8) buffers the
signal, which allows the thermocouple to be shorted to ground. The output of this
amplifier also feeds the summing amplifier U3.
The output of U3 is a voltage representing the temperature of the thermocouple. It has
been compensated for the unwanted thermocouple effects at J2.
Adjustment Procedures
No field are adjustments possible.
306
Service Manual
Chapter 5.16
Thermocouple Preamplifiers
Schematics and Component Layout
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the thermocouple preamplifiers
PCB is listed below in Table 5.16-1. The number of drawings has been included for
each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are two drawings for reference in
this section.
Table 5.16-1. Thermocouple Preamplifiers Schematics
Board
Thermocouple Preamplifiers
NOTE
Service Manual
PN
Drawing
Layout
23648400
119834E, 1
119832, 1
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
307
Chapter 5.16
Thermocouple Preamplifiers
308
Schematics and Component Layout
Service Manual
A
B
European
Thermocouple
United States
Thermocouple
Chromel
Constatan
1
C
Chromel
Red
Purple
Constantan
Black
Red
D
REV
ECO NO.
DATE
BY
D
DRN 4215
5/1/98
L BALDWIN
E
ECO 31652
7/6/98
L BALDWIN
CHK
L BALDWIN
1
1
2
J2
2
2.5VREF
1
3
.01uF
C5
50V
OP-470
C3
2
U1
50V
.01uF
2
1
+15VDC
1
3.65K
+15VDC
113K
6
5
R1
5
TRIM
TEMP
U1
OP-470
U1
2
U2
1
3.65K
R3
R12
249K
4
2
+5VDC
8
1.00K
2
2
R5
7
2
1
1
GND VSEL
1.00K R6
2
1
1.00K R8
U3
2
1
2
AD780
6
3
9
1 5
8
4
AD820
2
1
1.00K R9
U1
OP-470
R10
1.00K
1
1
R13
249K
2
10
2
3
14
1
R4
12
1
OP-470
AD780
2
2
1
2
1
1.00K R11
2
6
VOUT
VIN
46.4K
R2
13
7
2
261K R7
2
1
-15VDC
MH1
3
3
MH2
+15VDC
J1
+5VDC
-15VDC
MH3
1
2
3
4
5
MH4
1
2
C4
.01uF
50V
1
2
C8
10UF
16V
1
2
C1
.01uF
50V
2
1
16V
10UF
C7
1
2
C2
.01uF
50V
1
2
C6
10UF
16V
4
Larry Baldwin
4/29/98
Larry Baldwin
4/29/98
THERMOCOUPLE PRE-AMPLIFIER
4
E
119834
B
A
B
C
1
D
309
PCB Layout for Thermocouple Preamplifiers (119832)
310
On-Column
Semiautomatic Actuator
This chapter describes the PCB for an on-column semiautomatic actuator of the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 312
Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 312
Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 312
Service Manual
311
Chapter 5.17
On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator
Theory of Operations
Theory of Operations
Some on-column inlet options include a semiautomatic actuator for opening and
closing the valve. These require a small PCB which must be installed on the
motherboard. If the system has two on-column actuators, then two of these PCBs can
be installed with one on top of the other.
The insertion of the syringe is sensed by an opto-interruptor (see schematic 119947 in
Schematics and Component Layout). A flag mechanism on the assembly causes the
beam to be unbroken when the syringe is inserted.
Inserting the syringe causes light from the LED to strike the phototransistor in the
opto-interruptor. This causes the signal SYR_IN to go high. As a result, the output of
U1 switches low. Transistor Q1 inverts the output of U1. These two signals are
buffered by U3, and control the valves which pneumatically open or close the valve in
the injector assembly.
A start pulse is generated by one-shot U2. Jumper E2 permits selection of the polarity
of the start pulse to be generated.
Adjustment Procedures
No field adjustments are necessary.
Schematics and Component Layout
The schematics and component layout information for the on-column semiautomatic
actuator PCB is listed below in Table 5.17-1. The number of drawings has been
included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are three drawings for
reference in this section.
Table 5.17-1. On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator Schematics
NOTE
312
Board
PN
Drawing
Layout
On-Column Semiautomatic
Actuator
23648395
119947B, 1–2
119945, 1
The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board.
Service Manual
A
B
C
D
1
REV
ECO NO.
B
DRN
DATE
BY
CHK
1
2
2
3
3
4
M. Garrett
01-23-98
M. Garrett
12-01-97
ON-COLUMN SEMIAUTOMATIC ACTUATOR
B
119947
01-23-98
A
B
C
4
B
1
2
D
313
A
B
C
D
ON-COLUMN SEMIAUTOMATIC ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
+5VDC
+5VDC
1
+5VDC
1
+24VDC
+24VDC
1
R1
470
OPTO-INTERRUPTOR
2
1
1
YEL
RED
WHT
GRN
E
1
R8
1K
R7
1K
J2
1
2
3
4
R3
SYR_IN
10K
1
5
SSYR_IN
2
1
C
BEAM IS NORMALLY BROKEN WHEN
NO SYRINGE IS INSERTED OR WHEN
SYRINGE IS REMOVED.
SYRINGE INSERTION CAUSES THE
OPTOSENSOR BEAM TO BE UNBROKEN.
U3
UDN2596A
2
20
VCC
J4
10
8
1
2
6
OPEN~
7
LM311
C1
1
1
R2
470
3
R11
10K
2
2
4
3
OC_OPEN~
2
CR1
2
4
1
1
1
U1
2
2
C2
.1UF
CLOSE~
5
1
OC_CLOSE~
1N4001
RM_ST~
8
6
9
7
RMT_ST~
CR2
2
R5
100K
1
J3
1
2
2
R6
2
1K
1
3
Q1
2N3904
2
2
1
1N4001
1
1
11
14
13
15
19
16
18
17
R4
1K
2
2
2
1 2 3
E B C
PCB COMPONENT SIDE
XSTR ORIENTATION
+5VDC
1
J1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3
NOTES
1
4
HEADER E1 IS NOT INSTALLED ON THE PCB.
CONNECTIONS AT RX1 TAKE ITS PLACE FOR NORMAL
USAGE. IF HEADER E1 IS NEEDED, RX1 MAY BE CUT.
J1A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GND1 GND2
2
12
+5VDC
C5
.1UF
2
R10
100K
R9
1K
2
2
AGND2
QSM_CS8~
1
QSM_CS9~
2
1
SPII_MOSI
SPII_MISO
1
SPII_SCLK
AGND2
SPII_SCLK~
+24VDC
GND
GND
E1
1
2
3
2
U2
14
C3 74LS123 16 15
VCC R/C1
C1
0.1UF
1 A1
2
3
RX1
C10
22UF
16V
Q1
Q1
B1
13
4
RS
RM_ST~
RS~
E2
1
2
3
2
3
CLR1
1
+24VDC
+5VDC
9
A2
Q2
10B2
5
12
Q2
+5VDC
11 CLR2
QSM_CS0~
RMT_ST~
QSM_CS7~
QSM_CS0~
GND
N.C.
QSM_CS8~
N.C.
QSM_CS9~
N.C.
SPII_MOSI
SPII_MISO
SPII_SCLK
AGND2
SPII_SCLK~
+24VDC
GND
GND
8
QSM_CS7~
N.C.
N.C.
R/C2
7
C2
6
QSM_CS8~
QSM_CS9~
SPII_MOSI
SPII_MISO
SPII_SCLK
MOUNTING HOLES
SPII_SCLK~
C11
2
1
1
1
QSM_CS0~
RMT_ST~
QSM_CS7~
C4
.1UF
2
REMOTE START (RMT_ST~)
CONNECT E2 PINS 1 AND 2 (TOP TWO PINS) TO GENERATE ACTIVE
HIGH RMT_ST~ SIGNAL. CONNECT E2 PINS 2 AND 3 (BOTTOM TWO
PINS) TO GENERATE ACTIVE LOW RMT_ST~ SIGNAL (THE NORMAL
SETTING).
REMOVE THE SHUNT ENTIRELY FROM E2 TO PREVENT RMT_ST~
FROM BEING GENERATED.
2
10UF
1 35V
C12
2
10UF
1 35V
MH1
MH2
MH3
MH4
NP
NP
NP
NP
MH5
MH6
MH7
MH8
NP
NP
NP
NP
01-23-98
4
ON-COLUMN SEMIAUTOMATIC ACTUATOR
2
119947
A
314
B
C
D
2
PCB Layout for On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator (119945)
315
SECTION
VI
Service
Equipment
This section provides specifications for recommended test equipment used
with the TRACE GC 2000. The TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit is also
included.
Chapter 6.1, Recommended Test Equipment, provides test equipment
specifications that should enable isolation of problems, repair, and
calibration of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 6.2, TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit, provides a list of the parts found
in the TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit. Part numbers are included.
Recommended Test
Equipment
This chapter provides test equipment specifications that should enable isolation of
problems, repair, and calibration of the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
PCB Replacement ..................................................................................................... 320
Digital Flowmeter ..................................................................................................... 320
Digital Voltmeter (DVM).......................................................................................... 320
Oscilloscope.............................................................................................................. 320
Leak Test Meter ........................................................................................................ 320
Service Manual
319
Chapter 6.1
Recommended Test Equipment
PCB Replacement
PCB Replacement
The TRACE GC 2000 has a modular design intended for printed circuit board (PCB)
replacement. The complexity of the various PCBs used in the TRACE GC 2000
discourages component level troubleshooting. Troubleshooting to the PCB level may
require the use of specialized test equipment.
Digital Flowmeter
A variety of digital flowmeters are available for monitoring flows on the
TRACE GC 2000. Some flowmeters require selection of a specific gas type.
Monitoring detector flows on the TRACE GC 2000 may require the mixing of gas
types. To reduce errors in flow measurement, it is recommended you use a flowmeter
that is not gas type dependent. Hand-held digital flowmeters are available that are
independent of gas type. Digital bubble flowmeters intended for laboratory use are
also available.
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
Troubleshooting and monitoring of voltages and resistance on the TRACE GC 2000
and its associated peripherals can be accomplished with a 3½ digit DVM. It is
recommended that the DVM have manual range selection as opposed to auto ranging.
The input impedance should be >10 meg ohm. Alligator-type clip leads (or similar)
should be available to make reliable contact to test points.
Oscilloscope
Most troubleshooting to isolate problems to the PCB level can be performed with a
DVM. Should an oscilloscope be required, it is recommended to use one with a
100 MHz time base, 5 mV to 50 V/division range, and an X1 and X10 selectable
input probe.
Leak Test Meter
The TRACE GC 2000 can perform an automatic injector leak test. However, it cannot
identify the actual location of the leak or identify leaks other than those associated
with the injector. Liquid leak detectors are not recommended since these may
introduce contaminates into the gas stream.
320
Service Manual
Leak Test Meter
Chapter 6.1
Recommended Test Equipment
Leak testing should be performed using an electronic leak detector. Portable as well
as bench-mounted electronic leak detectors are available for use. Most electronic leak
detectors calibrate using room air as a reference, so the detection of air leaks may not
be possible. Air supplied to a GC may have to be substituted with helium to perform
leak test of the air flow paths.
Service Manual
321
TRACE GC 2000
Service Kit
This chapter provides a list of the parts found in the TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit.
Part numbers are included.
Chapter at a Glance…
Electronics ................................................................................................................ 324
Oven.......................................................................................................................... 325
Injector Assemblies................................................................................................... 325
Injector Consumables ............................................................................................... 325
Large Volume Injections ........................................................................................... 326
Detector Assemblies ................................................................................................. 326
Detector Consumables .............................................................................................. 327
Fans ........................................................................................................................... 327
Pneumatics ................................................................................................................ 328
AS 2000 Left/Right................................................................................................... 328
HS 2000 .................................................................................................................... 328
Service Tools............................................................................................................. 328
Service Manual
323
Chapter 6.2
TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit
Introduction
Introduction
The TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit includes parts necessary for the installation and
repair of the TRACE GC 2000. It is recommended that service representatives have
these parts on hand when performing installation and repair. However, additional parts
may be necessary to resolve unusual service problems.
NOTE
Contents of the TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit are subject to change based on service history.
Table 6.2-1. Electronics
Item
324
PN
Power Supply Assembly
208 060 10
Keypad/Display Panel
432 100 25
Analog Feedback PCB
236 483 40
CPU PCB
236 483 45
Motherboard
236 483 50
DPFC PCB
236 483 30
FID Controller
236 483 20
ECD Controller
236 483 25
Transformer 48V (ECD Heaters)
230 434 43
TCD Controller
236 483 35
Transformer 48V (TCD Heaters)
230 434 43
NPD Controller
236 483 55
Transformer (NPD bead)
230 434 44
PID Controller
236 483 60
Transformer 48V (PID Heaters)
230 434 43
FPD Controller
236 483 65
Transformer 48V (FPD Heaters)
230 434 43
Breaker 16 A (230 V)
237 099 16
Breaker 20 A (115 V)
237 099 15
Service Manual
Chapter 6.2
TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit
Introduction
Table 6.2-2. Oven
Item
PN
Oven Baffle with Heater and RTD PT100 (230 V)
354 080 30
Oven Baffle with Heater and RTD PT100 (115 V)
354 080 20
Replacement Oven Blower Motor with Bracket
155 990 00
Door Switch Assembly
230 434 45
Oven PT100 RTD
119884-0001
Stepper Motor
318 070 46
Table 6.2-3. Injector Assemblies
Item
PN
Terminal Fitting at Bottom of Injector
347 054 51
Septa Support S/SL — Package of Two
350 254 33
Septa Holder S/SL
233 030 15
Table 6.2-4. Injector Consumables
Item
Service Manual
PN
Injector Heater (230 V)
354 250 57
Injector Heater (115 V)
354 250 58
PT100 Temperature Sensor
403 112 30
SVE Heater (230 V)
354 250 59
SVE Heater (115 V)
354 250 60
Split Liner, 5-mm ID — 2 Each
453 200 30
Split Liner, 3-mm ID — 2 Each
453 200 31
Splitless Liner, 3-mm ID — 2 Each
453 200 32
Splitless Liner, 5 mm — 2 Each
45 3200 33
Wide-Bore Liner for S/SL Injector
453 003 10
Wide-Bore Injector, 4-mm Glass Liner — 2 Each
453 220 49
Wide-Bore Injector, 2-mm Glass Liner — 2 Each
453 220 50
Septa, BTO Type, S/SL Injector — Package of 10
313 032 11
Septa, Wide-Bore Injector, High Temp —
Package of 50
313 032 09
Ferrules 0.35 mm for 0.25-mm ID Column —
Set of 2
290 134 88
Ferrules 0.45 mm for 0.32-mm ID Column —
Set of 2
290 134 87
Ferrules 0.8 mm for 0.53-mm ID Column —
Set of 2
290 134 86
Nuts for Column Connection — Package of 5
350 324 23
S/SL Septum Cap Tool
205 070 10
325
Chapter 6.2
TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit
Introduction
Table 6.2-4. Injector Consumables (Continued)
Item
NOTE
PN
Graphite S/SL Liner Seal
290 034 06
S/SL Silver Seal for Terminal Fitting —
Package of 10
290 336 29
The PT100 is the same for all hot injectors except the PTV. Both devices have the same
physical dimensions as the temperature sensing end. The heater is the same for all hot
injectors except the PTV. Each injector has one heater. However, the DoublePro has two. The
entire PTV must be replaced if the PTV heater or thermocouple fails.
Table 6.2-5. Large Volume Injections
Item
PN
OCV80T (for AS2000)
299 022 70
Secondary Cooling Value 24V
405 160 15
SVE Valve Assembly
405 171 46
Seal, PTFE OCI
290 070 01
Clip
426 003 57
Vespel Ferrule, 0.45-mm ID for 0.32-mm
Column — Set of 2
290 134 60
Vespel Ferrule, 0.35-mm ID for 0.25-mm
Column — Set of 2
290 134 61
Vespel Ferrule, 0.8-mm ID for 0.53-mm
Column — Set of 2
290 134 71
Septa for Automatic LVI/OCI — Package of 100
350 158 50
Ferrules 1-mm ID for 0.8-mm ID Tube — Set of 2
290 134 85
Low Volume Tee Connector
347 084 48
Syringe, 250 µL with 80-mm Needle
365 050 23
Backwasher/Cooling Sleeve for OC Injector
452 000 01
Column Retaining Nut and Backwasher
for OC Injector
452 100 01
Table 6.2-6. Detector Assemblies
Item
326
PN
Base Body Heater (230 V)
354 250 53
Base Body Heater (115 V)
354 250 52
PT100 Temperature Sensor
403 112 30
Silver Seal, Base Body Terminal Fitting —
10 Each
290 371 00
Capillary Adapter — 2 Each
347 254 36
Service Manual
Chapter 6.2
TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit
Introduction
Table 6.2-7. Detector Consumables
Item
PN
FID/NPD Jet Tool
205 019 00
FID Jet
404 043 01
FID Collector Electrode Assembly
259 011 15
FID/NPD Ceramic Insulator
302 023 10
FID/NPD Base Retaining Screw
311 060 08
Ignitor/Polarizer Assembly
206 016 03
FID Collector Electrode Assembly
206 016 02
NPD Jet
404 043 02
NPD TD-2 Source
465 002 55
NPD Collector
259 011 10
NPD Ceramic Insulator
302 023 10
ECD Collector
277 003 50
ECD Jet Seal
290 150 60
ECD Tool
205 021 50
ECD Heater and Sensor Assembly
190 500 87
ECD Seal, Top — Package of 10
290 326 08
Table 6.2-8. Fans
Item
Service Manual
PN
OC/PTV Fan, 230 V
406 006 82
OC/PTV Fan, 115 V
406 006 87
Rear Fan (230 V) 24170-0016
406 007 05
Rear Fan (115 V) 24170-0015
406 007 10
327
Chapter 6.2
TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit
Introduction
Table 6.2-9. Pneumatics
Item
PN
Flow Regulator MOD ECD Only, AA
425 090 50
Flow Regulator MOD ECD, PID, FPD FID
(without makeup), AB
425 090 51
Flow Regulator MOD ECD, PID, FPD FID
(with makeup), AC
425 090 53
Flow Regulator MOD NPD, ECD, PID, FPD FID
(without makeup), AD
425 090 54
Flow Regulator MOD 250
for PKD/Megabore Injector
425 090 60
Flow Regulator MOD 700
for PKD/Megabore Injector
425 090 61
Flow Regulator MOD 250 for S/SL Injector
425 090 58
Flow Regulator MOD 700 for S/SL Injector
425 090 59
Flow Regulator MOD 250KPA, Pack/Widebore
425 090 71
Flow Regulator MOD 700 for Packed Injector
425 090 62
Flow Regulator MOD TCD Ref., AB
425 090 52
Table 6.2-10. AS 2000 Left/Right
Item
PN
CNT800/CNS800/CNN810 PCBs (Turret)
236 482 55
CP800 PCB (EPROM DX)
236 483 00
ANB801 PCB
236 482 90
AC801 PCB
236 482 95
Transformer
413 250 56
Motor, Plunger
318 079 00
Motor, Plunger, Tray, Turret
318 078 00
Table 6.2-11. HS 2000
Item
PN
CP850 PCB (EPROM version)
236 483 05
ANB850 PCB
236 483 10
AC850 PCB
236 483 15
Transformer
413 250 57
Table 6.2-12. Service Tools
Item
Service Manual
328
PN
317 092 70
Tools Kit, Standard Metric Wrenches
t.b.d.
Travel Kit with Containers
t.b.d.
Service Manual
SECTION
VII
Replacement
Parts List
For a list of replacement parts and component part numbers for the TRACE
GC 2000 please refer to the Spare Parts Catalog, PN 31709210.
SECTION
VIII
Service
Information
This section provides service and technical information for the
TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 8.1, Service Notes (TSB), contains service notes and Technical
Service Bulletins (TSBs) for the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter 8.2, Additional Technical Information, contains additional
technical information for the TRACE GC 2000.
Service Notes (TSB)
This chapter contains service notes and Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) for the
TRACE GC 2000.
NOTE
Service Manual
Insert any TSBs you receive into this section.
333
Additional Technical
Information
This chapter contains additional technical information for the TRACE GC 2000.
Chapter at a Glance…
How to Update Your TRACE GC 2000 Software .................................................... 336
Using the Configure Menu ....................................................................................... 337
Using the Hidden Configuration Menu .................................................................... 338
Controlling LVOCI Inlet Parameters ........................................................................ 341
Service Manual
335
Chapter 8.2
Additional Technical Information
OPERATING PROCEDURE
How to Update Your TRACE GC 2000 Software
It is necessary to periodically update the software for the TRACE GC 2000. Follow
these steps to update the embedded systems software in the TRACE GC 2000:
For a boot load, it will be necessary to cycle the power on and off before you begin.
1. Turn the GC off.
2. Press the enter key and hold.
3. Turn the GC on.
Now you are ready to load the new software.
4. Insert the diskette into the computer.
5. Run the install.exe program.
•
From the Windows NT Explorer, click on the A drive. Double-click the
install.exe icon.
•
From the Windows NT toolbar, choose Start»Run. Type a:install.
Click OK.
The Install New TRACE 2000 Software dialog box is displayed.
See Figure 8.2-1.
6. Select the GCs to install on. Click OK to continue.
The software installation will be monitored by the computer. The software will be
loaded in 1000-byte increments. A message will be displayed when the installation is
complete.
7. Turn the power off, and then back on. The GC now displays the updated software
version.
336
Service Manual
Chapter 8.2
Additional Technical Information
Figure 8.2-1 shows the Install New TRACE 2000 Software dialog box.
Figure 8.2-1. Install New TRACE 2000 Software Dialog Box
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Using the Configure Menu
Use the Configure menu to view and modify your hardware configurations. Press the
CONFIG key to go to the Configure menu. However, inlets and detector items need
to be added or deleted by going to the Hidden Configuration menu. For example, if
your Right Inlet is a split/splitless, and your Configure menu does not list the Left
Inlet item, you must go into the Hidden Configuration menu.
1. Press Left Inlet to verify that the displayed selection matches your hardware
configuration.
2. Press Right Inlet to verify that the displayed selection matches your hardware
configuration.
3. Press Valves to verify that the displayed selection matches your hardware
configuration.
Service Manual
337
4. Press CONFIG to verify that the displayed selections matches your hardware
configuration.
Table 8.2-1. Configure Menu
Oven
Right CARRIER
LEFT INLET
LEFT CARRIER
AUX ZONES
TIME
AUTOSAMPLER
HANDSHAKING
KEYBOARD & DISPLAY
If an item matches, use the down key to scroll down the menu. Use the up key to scroll up the menu. If they
do not match, press ENTER at the selection and make the change. To get back to the beginning of the
Configure menu press the CLEAR key.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Using the Hidden Configuration Menu
When you need to change items (add or remove inlets and detectors) listed in your
Configure menu, all you have to do is press Config and enter 2000 to enter the
Hidden Configuration menu. While in the Hidden Configuration menu, use the
down key to scroll to options where you can make other hardware selections based on
your hardware configuration. Press ENTER on each configuration display that
matches your hardware. Press CLEAR to step backwards in the menu.
Chapter 8.2
Additional Technical Information
1. After powering on your TRACE GC, press the CONFIG key. The Configure
menu displays your current GC configuration.
Table 8.2-2. Configure Menu
OVEN
RIGHT CARRIER
LEFT INLET
LEFT CARRIER
AUX ZONES
TIME
AUTOSAMPLER
HANDSHAKING
KEYBOARD & DISPLAY
2. Move the cursor to the Left Inlet and press the ENTER key. The CONFIG
LEFT INLET menu displays. If your Configure menu does not list a left inlet
then you must enter the Hidden Configuration menu.
3. Press Enter at the CONFIG LEFT INLET display. A list of available inlets
displays.
OCI*
HOTOC
LVOCI
To change the inlet configuration move the cursor to the appropriate inlet choice and
press the ENTER key twice. A menu showing available inlets display. An asterisk
indicates your current choice.
4. If the desired inlet is not selected, move the cursor to select it and press the
ENTER key to return to the Configure menu.
OCI
HOTOC
LVOCI *
If for example, you see NONE for the Right Inlet listed in the Configure menu,
then you must access the Hidden Configuration menu to activate the Inlet.
Service Manual
339
Chapter 8.2
Additional Technical Information
5. To access the Hidden Configuration, press the key labeled Configure and
then enter 2000. The Hidden Configuration displays.
Table 8.2-3. HIDDEN CONFIGURATION Menu
ver. 3.01.10 R (c) 1998
DS Baud Rate
RTD Offsett
MAX GC Amps
AC
Oven Cryo
Right Detector
Left Detector
Aux Detector
L Det Module
A Det Module
Hydrogen Sensor
Aux 1
Aux 2
Double Pro Inlets
R Inlet
L Inlet
Serial #
Manufactured
Total Runs
Saave Default Mthd
Erase / Mthd / Cnfg
6. Move the cursor to Right Inlet and press ENTER. The Config Right Inlet
menu displays the Right Inlet Type and the current inlet choice.
Table 8.2-4. Config Right Inlet Menu
Right Inlet Type
340
S/SL
Service Manual
Chapter 8.2
Additional Technical Information
7. Press ENTER again to view to view the list of available inlets. Move the cursor
to the inlet choice and press the ENTER key. This marks the inlet choice and
returns you to the beginning of the Configure Right Inlet menu. For
example, if you select the S/SL an asterisk will mark it the next time you enter
the Config Right Inlet menu.
Table 8.2-5. Config Right Inlet Type Menu
S/SL
PKD
PPKD
PTV
OCI
NONE
8. Press the CLEAR key to return to the Hidden Configuration menu.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Controlling LVOCI Inlet Parameters
There may be times you need to manually control your LVOCI parameters. Using
your keypad you can:
•
Check existing LVOCI parameters
•
Verify the carrier flows
•
Open and Close the secondary valve
1. Press the Left Inlet key, the following parameters will be displayed:
Table 8.2-6. Left Inlet Menu
Service Manual
Left Inlet
LVOCI
Pressure
24
Sec. Cool Time
0.50
SVE Temp
150
SVE Duration
0.45
Evap Pressure
100
Evap Duration
0.50
341
Chapter 8.2
Additional Technical Information
2. Press Left Carrier to view the flow rates:
Table 8.2-7. Left Carrier Col Flow Rates Menu
Col. Flow
1.5
Pressure
7
Flow Mode
Con Flow
Vacuum Comp
On
3. Press Valves to LVOCI valves.:Press ENTER to view the left Valves menu.To
Table 8.2-8. Valves Menu
Valves
Inlet Valves
turn the valve on, move the cursor to the appropriate line item and press the ON/
YES key.
:
Table 8.2-9. Left Valves Menu
L SVE Valve
Off
L Sec Cool
Valve Off
4. Press the Right Inlet or Right Carrier key to view Split/Splitless inlet
parameters.
Scroll down to the Save Default Mthd line and press ENTER. OK displays,
indicating you saved your configuration. Press Clear again to return to the Config
menu.
342
Service Manual
Flame Ionization Detector
This appendix contains the manual FID Installation Instructions
(PN M 317 09 327), which provides instructions for installing and configuring the
Flame Ionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Guide at a Glance…
About This Guide ............................................................................................... 344
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 345
Getting Started.................................................................................................... 346
Configuration...................................................................................................... 353
Set FID Parameters............................................................................................. 354
Operating Procedures
Installing FID Upgrade Kit................................................................................. 346
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ............................................................ 353
Parameters Setting.............................................................................................. 354
Service Manual
343
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
About This Guide
About This Guide
It provides the instructions to install and configure the Flame Ionization Detector on
your TRACE GC™ 2000.
NOTE
344
For Conventions, Symbols and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC
2000 Operating Manual.
Service Manual
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Introduction
Introduction
The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Flame Ionization
Detector on your TRACE GC 2000:
CAUTION
•
FID Assembly for TRACE
•
FID Control Card
•
FID Standard Outfit
The detector gas control module is not part of this kit.
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit
If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you
must carefully adhere to the following instructions.
Detector Gases Requirements
The FID requires air and hydrogen as fuel gases. The use of the make-up gas is
optional. Optimum performance with capillary column are achieved with make-up
gas.
According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module may be:
•
Type AB for the control of air and hydrogen.
•
Type AD for the control of air and hydrogen.
•
Type AC for the control of air, hydrogen and make-up gas.
1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is compatible
with the FID gas requirements.
2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the
following table:
Installed
Module
Connect Hydrogen
to
Connect Air
to
Connect Make-up
Gas to
AB
Gas 2
Gas 1
—
AC
Gas 2
Gas 1
Gas 3
AD
Gas 3
Gas 1
—
For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000
Operating Manual.
Transformer for FID
NOTE
Service Manual
If your GC has serial number lower than 983808 (Milan) or TR101089 (Austin), the installation
of a dedicated transformer might be necessary. Please contact us for details.
345
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Getting Started
Getting Started
This paragraph contains the instruction to install the FID on your GC. To properly
install the FID upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must be performed:
•
Remove the top and right side panels of the GC.
•
Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control unit).
•
Mount the FID on the GC.
•
Remount GC panels.
•
Restart the GC.
•
Configure the detector.
Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out:
1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature.
2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free.
3. Close the gas supplies.
4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC.
5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC.
Installing FID Upgrade Kit
Follow this instruction to properly install the FID Upgrade Kit.
1
3
2
4
1. Injector and detector cassette
2. Column oven door
3. Upper cover
4. Right hand-side panel
Figure A-1. TRACE GC 2000
346
Service Manual
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Getting Started
Removing the GC Panels
This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic compartment.
Materials needed:
•
2-mm Allen wrench
•
3-mm Allen wrench
Remove the GC Top Cover
1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover.
2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws.
3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC.
Figure A-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
1. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the right side panel to the right upper
rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to Figure A-3.
2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the side
panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC.
3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away
from the GC.
Service Manual
347
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Getting Started
1
1. Right Panel Securing Screw
Figure A-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel
Installing the FID Control Card
The FID control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A, B or
C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic compartment. Refer
to Figures A-4 and A-5.
NOTE
In the case all the expansion slots are occupied, it is necessary to remove one of the three
detector control card currently installed and replace it with the FID control card.
Materials needed:
348
Service Manual
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Getting Started
•
3-mm Allen wrench
C
1
B
3
2
A
1. Slot cover plate
2. Cover plates fixing screw
3. Free slot
A B C. Extension slot position
Figure A-4. Extension Slots Top View
1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the selected A,
B or C expansion slot on the mother board.
3
2
1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers
Slots
3. Mother board
Figure A-5. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots
Service Manual
349
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Getting Started
2. Verify that the jumper marked Jx, adjacent to the defined detector control card
connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 2 and 3. Refer to
the following table.
Expansion slot
Corresponding Jumper
A
J8
B
J7
C
J6
Jumper Positioning
Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled
Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled
WARNING! The jumper marked “Jx” must be positioned between the pins 2 and 3.
3. Guide through the slot mentioned at point 1 the signal and ignition cables coming
from the top of the card.
4. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother
board.
5. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1.
Mounting the FID on the GC
This operation allows the correct installation of the FID on your TRACE GC 2000.
Materials needed:
350
•
Jet for FID
•
Tool for jet
Service Manual
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Getting Started
1. Place the jet into the detector base body housing and tighten it with the proper
tool. Ensure the jet is perfectly vertically aligned to avoid damaging its ceramic
part.
1
2
3
1. Tool for jet
2. Jet
3. Detector base body
Figure A-6. Jet for FID
2. Install the FID on the detector base body and secure it by using the fixing screw
on the front of the detector cell.
3. Carefully, connect the signal and ignition polarization cables coming from the
detector control card, to the detector cell.
1
2
4
3
1. FID
2. Fixing screw
3. Detector base body
4. Signal cable
5. Ignition polarization cable
Figure A-7. Installation of the FID
Service Manual
351
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Getting Started
Reinstall the GC Panels
This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels
Materials needed:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal (refer
to Removing the GC Panels on page 347) being sure to reconnect the rear panel
cooling fan.
Restarting the GC
1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly performed.
2. Open the gas supplies.
3. Reconnect the main power.
4. Turn on main power.
352
Service Manual
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Configuration
Configuration
This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with FID.
You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to
Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual.
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas
1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector depending
on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open the detector gas
menu.
LEFT DETECTOR
Detector type
<
1
Makeup gas
1 This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note.
2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and the
slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the
submenu.
3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected.
4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER. The
gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An asterisk
appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in parentheses
in the title bar.
5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to confirm
the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected.
Service Manual
353
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Set FID Parameters
Set FID Parameters
To set FID parameters, it is necessary to open the FID menu and the FID Signal menu.
NOTE
•
The DETECTOR (FID) menu contains the detector control parameters.
To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating
Manual.
•
The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the detector
signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000
Operating Manual.
To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the FID Checkout as
described in Section II of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual PN
31709200.
Parameters Setting
1. To open FID menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending on
the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT DETECTOR (FID)1
Flame
Off
Base temp
Signal
250
pA2
(5.5)
Ign.thresh2
3
Air
Off
35 35
3
Mkup N2
2.0
retry2
Flameout
H2
250
350 350
3
30
30<
1. These settings could also be for a right detector.
2. This parameter lines will be displayed according to the Range parameter in the
DETECTOR SIGNAL menu. See Range Parameter on page 16.
3. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can only
turn the flows on and off.
2. To open FID Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according to the
location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT SIGNAL (FID)1
Output
Offset
Auto zero?
(1000)
100
Y/N
Range 10^(0..3)
Analog filter
354
0<
Off
Service Manual
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
Set FID Parameters
1. These settings could also be for a right signal
Range Parameter
The Range 10^ parameter is an input attenuation value. It is set from 0 (high
sensitivity) to 3 (low sensitivity). The dynamic of the FID card is as follows:
Range
Input Signal
Output Signal
0
1 nA
1 Volt
1
10 nA
1 Volt
2
100 nA
1 Volt
3
1 ←A
1 Volt
This means that if we have a small variation (in pA) of the baseline value when the
Range 10^ is set 0 or 1, the input amplifier circuit of FID card can read it, and,
according with threshold value set, can qualify the Flameout retry (if it is set ON).
If the Range 10^ is set 2 or 3, the small variation (in pA) of the baseline is not
detected from the FID card. For this reason, when the Range 10^ is set 2 or 3, the
Signal pA, Ign. thresh and Flameout retry parameters will be not displayed
in the DETECTOR FID menu.
Service Manual
355
Appendix A
Flame Ionization Detector
356
Set FID Parameters
Service Manual
Nitrogen Phosphorus
Detector
This appendix contains the manual NPD Installation Instructions
(PN M 317 09 329) which provides the instructions to install and configure the
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Guide at a Glance…
About This Guide ...............................................................................................358
Introduction ........................................................................................................359
Getting Started....................................................................................................361
Configuration......................................................................................................377
Set NPD Parameters ...........................................................................................379
Operating Procedures
Installing NPD Upgrade Kit ...............................................................................362
Configuring Hardware, Detector and Make-up Gas...........................................377
Parameters Setting ..............................................................................................379
Installation Guide
357
Upgrade Kit
About This Guide
About This Guide
It provides the instructions to install and configure the Nitrogen Phosphorus on
your TRACE GC™ 2000.
NOTE
358
For Conventions, Symbols and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC
2000 Operating Manual.
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Introduction
Introduction
The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Nitrogen
Phosphorus Detector on your TRACE GC 2000:
CAUTION
•
NPD Assembly for TRACE
•
NPD Control Card
•
Transformer for NPD
•
NPD Standard Outfit
The detector gas control module is not part of this kit.
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit
If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you
must carefully adhere to the following instructions.
Detector Gases Requirements
The NPD requires air and hydrogen as fuel gases and nitrogen or helium as makeup gas. Make-up gas is not necessary when packed column is used.
According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module is:
•
Type AD for the control of air, hydrogen and make-up gas.
1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is
compatible with the NPD gas requirements.
2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the
following table:
Installation Guide
Installed
Module
Connect Hydrogen
to
Connect Air
to
Connect Make-up
Gas to
AD
Gas 2
Gas 1
Gas 3
359
Upgrade Kit
Introduction
For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000
Operating Manual.
Transformer for NPD
To supply NPD, the dedicated transformer provided must be installed on the
Power Control Module of the GC.
WARNING! This operation must be carried out by authorized ThermoQuest technical personnel.
360
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Getting Started
This paragraph contains the instruction to install the NPD on your GC.
To properly install the NPD upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must
be performed:
•
Remove the top, right side and rear panels of the GC.
•
Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control
unit).
•
Remove the GC Power Control Module
•
Mount the transformer for NPD.
•
Mount the NPD on the GC.
•
Remount GC panels.
•
Restart the GC.
•
Configure the transformer.
•
Configure the detector.
Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out:
1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature.
2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free.
3. Close the gas supplies.
4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC.
5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC.
Installation Guide
361
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Installing NPD Upgrade Kit
Follow this instruction to properly install the NPD Upgrade Kit.
1
3
2
4
1. Injector and detector cassette
2. Column oven door
3. Upper cover
4. Right hand-side panel
Figure B-1. TR ACE GC 2000
Removing the GC Panels
This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic
compartment.
Material needed:
•
2-mm Allen wrench
•
3-mm Allen wrench
Remove the GC Top Cover
1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover.
362
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws.
3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC.
Figure B-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
1. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the right side panel to the right
upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to
Figure B-3.
2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the
side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC.
3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel
away from the GC.
Installation Guide
363
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
1. Right Panel Securing Screw
Figure B-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel
Remove the GC Rear Panel
1. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove
these screws using the 2-mm Allen wrench. See Figure B-4.
2. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Be aware that the cooling fan is
attached to the rear panel.
NOTE
364
Pay attention to the positioning of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the
same way it was removed.
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
1. Rear Panel Fixing Screws
Figure B-4. GC Rear Panel Fixing Screws
Installing the NPD Control Card
The NPD control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A,
B or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic
compartment. Refer to Figures B-5 and B-6.
NOTE
In the case all the expansion slots are occupied, it is necessary to remove one of the three
detector control card currently installed and replace it with the NPD control card.
Materials needed:
•
Installation Guide
3-mm Allen wrench
365
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the
selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board.
C
1
B
3
2
A
1. Slot cover plate
2. Cover plates fixing screw
3. Free slot
A B C. Extension slot position
Figure B-5. Extension Slots Top View
366
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
3
2
1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers
Slots
3. Mother board
Figure B-6. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots
2. Verify that the jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8), adjacent to the defined detector
control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 2
and 3. Refer to the following table.
Expansion slot
Installation Guide
Corresponding Jumper
A
J8
B
J7
C
J6
367
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Jumper Positioning
Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled
Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled
WARNING! The jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8) must be positioned between the pins 2 and 3.
3. Guide through the slot mentioned at point 1 the signal and ignition cables
coming from the top of the card.
4. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother
board.
5. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1.
Removing the Power Control Module
Materials Needed:
•
Phillips screwdriver
Six screws fix the Power Control Module. Two large Phillips screws are located in
the rear of the right hand-side of the GC, while the remaining four screws are
located just behind the front panel of the GC.
1. Remove the six screws. Refer to Figure B-7.
368
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
1
1. Large Phillips Screws
Figure B-7. TRACE GC 2000 Right Side View
2. Slide the Power Control Module very slowly and gently outward towards the
rear of the GC. See Figure B-8 on page 370.
CAUTION
Installation Guide
This operation requires particular attention because several cables are connected to
the Power Control Module. It must be removed gradually paying attention to
disconnect step by step all the cables available until the power control module is
completely free. Be very careful not to damage any wire during this operation.
369
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
1. Power Control Module
Figure B-8. TRACE GC 2000 Rear View
3. As the Power Control Module is being removed, disconnection of the parts
must be carried out in the following order:
•
J1, 16-pin white connector.
•
J8, 2-pin connector.
•
J11, 16-pin white connector located in the upper rear quadrant of the
chassis.
•
J13, ribbon cable.
•
Oven heater wire connected to the oven heater triac.
•
TB1 and TB2, orange terminal strips for the heater wire connections.
•
J17, oven blower motor.
•
J8, second oven heater wire.
•
Chassis ground wire from the GC rear oven terminal.
4. Place the Power Control Module on a free working table.
370
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Install the Transformer for Detector
Figure B-9 shows the positions on the GC Power Control Module where the
detector trasformer must be installed.
1
1. Installation Position of the Transformer for NPD
Figure B-9. Transformer Installation
Install the transformer proceeding as follows. To identify the parts, refer to
Figure B-10 on page 372.
1. Screw the spacer on the threaded pin.
2. Insert the first protection disk on the spacer.
3. Place the transformer over the protection disk.
4. Place the second protection disk over the transformer.
5. Place the metal plate over the assembly.
6. Insert the fixing screw in the spacer passing through the metal plate.
Installation Guide
371
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
7. Screw until the transformer assembly is blocked.
1
4
5
2
3
1. Transformer
2. Protection disks
3. Spacer
4. Metal Plate
5. Fixing Screw
Figure B-10. Transformer Assembly Identification Parts
The transformer has three cables and four female connectors marked “Px”.
Connect the female connectors to the corresponding male connectors marked
“Jx”on the power control module PCB (J14, J15) and on the mother board PCB
(J35, J36, J37) depending where the NPD board has been installed.
Cable Connector
Connect To...
P15
J15
P4
J4
P35 or 36
J35 or 36
P36 or 37
J36 or 37
The result of the operation is shown in Figure B-11 on page 373.
372
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Figure B-11. Installation of the Transformer for NPD
Reinstall the Power Control Module
CAUTION
This operation requires particular attention because several cables must be
reconnected to the Power Control Module. It must be gradually reinserted paying
attention to reconnect step by step all the cables until the power control module is
completely reinstalled into the GC.
1. Reconnect the previous disconnected connections in the reverse order of their
removal.
2. Secure the six Phillips screws that fix the Power Control Module in place.
3. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
Mounting the NPD on the GC
This operation allows the correct installation of the NPD on your TRACE GC
2000.
Installation Guide
373
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Materials needed:
•
Jet for NPD
•
Tool for jet
1. Place the jet into the detector base body housing and tighten it with the proper
tool. Ensure the jet is perfectly vertically aligned to avoid damaging its
ceramic part. Refer to Figure B-12.
1
2
3
1. Tool for jet
2. Jet
3. Detector base body
Figure B-12. Jet for NPD
2. Install the NPD on the detector base body and secure it by using the fixing
screw on the front of the detector cell. Refer to Figure B-13 on page 375.
3. Carefully, connect the signal and ignition polarization cables coming from
the detector control card, to the detector cell. Refer to Figure B-13 on
page 375.
374
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
2
4
3
1. NPD
2. Fixing screw
3. Detector base body
4. Signal cable
5. Ignition polarization cable
Figure B-13. Installation of the NPD
Reinstall the GC Panels
This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels
Materials needed:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal
(refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 362) being sure to reconnect the
rear panel cooling fan.
Installation Guide
375
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Restarting the GC
1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly
performed.
2. Open the gas supplies.
3. Reconnect the main power.
4. Turn on main power.
376
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Configuration
Configuration
This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with
NPD. The following operations must be performed:
•
Hardware Configuration
•
Detector and Make-up Gas Configuration
Configuring Hardware, Detector and Make-up Gas
Hardware Configuration
This operation must be performed to verify if the GC has recognized the presence
of the transformer previously installed.
1. Press INFO/DIAG twice to open Diagnostics menu.
2. Scroll to Hardware Config and press ENTER.
3. Address the hardware configuration menu. Scroll down until the type of
transformer installed in the system is displayed.
4. If not, verify the transformer connections.
Detector and Make-up Gas Configuration
You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to
Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual.
1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector
depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open
the detector gas menu.
Installation Guide
377
Upgrade Kit
Configuration
LEFT DETECTOR
Detector type
<
1
Makeup gas
1 This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note.
2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and
the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the
submenu.
3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected.
4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER.
The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An
asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in
parentheses in the title bar.
5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected.
378
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Set NPD Parameters
Set NPD Parameters
To set NPD parameters, it is necessary to open the NPD menu and the NPD Signal
menu.
NOTE
•
The DETECTOR (NPD) menu contains the detector control parameters.
To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating
Manual.
•
The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the
detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC
2000 Operating Manual.
To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the NPD Checkout as
described in Section IV of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual
PN 31709200.
Parameters Setting
1. To open NPD menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending
on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT DETECTOR (NPD)1
Source curr.A
Base temp
2.740
300
300
Signal pA
(10.4)
Polarizer V
3.5
H2 delay time
H2
2
Air
2.3 2.3
2
Mkup N2
Off
60 60
2
15 15<
1. These settings could also be for a right detector.
2. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can
only turn the flows on and off.
Installation Guide
379
Upgrade Kit
Set NPD Parameters
2. To open NPD Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according
to the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT SIGNAL (NPD)1
Output
Offset
Auto zero?
Range 10^(0..3)
Analog filter
(1000)
100
Y/N
0<
Off
1. These settings could also be for a right signal
380
Installation Guide
Flame Photometric
Detector
This appendix contains the manual FPD Installation Instructions
(PN M 317 09 331) which provides the instructions to install and configure the
Flame Photometric Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Guide at a Glance…
About This Guide ...............................................................................................382
Introduction ........................................................................................................383
Getting Started....................................................................................................385
Configuration......................................................................................................395
Set FPD Parameters............................................................................................396
Operating Procedures
Installing FPD Upgrade Kit................................................................................386
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ............................................................395
Parameters Setting ..............................................................................................396
Installation Guide
381
Upgrade Kit
About This Guide
About This Guide
It provides the instructions to install and configure the Flame Photometric
Detector on your TRACE GC™ 2000.
NOTE
382
For Conventions, Symbols and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC
2000 Operating Manual.
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Introduction
Introduction
The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Flame Photometric
Detector on your TRACE GC 2000:
CAUTION
•
FPD Assembly for TRACE
•
FPD Control Card
•
FPD Standard Outfit
The detector gas control module is not part of this kit.
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit
If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you
must carefully adhere to the following instructions.
Detector Gases Requirements
The FPD requires air and hydrogen as fuel gases. FPD applications typically do
not require the use of the make-up gas.
According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module may be:
•
Type AB for the control of air and hydrogen.
•
Type AD for the control of air and hydrogen.
•
Type AC for the control of air, hydrogen and make-up gas.
1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is
compatible with the FPD gas requirements.
Installation Guide
383
Upgrade Kit
Introduction
2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the
following table:
Installed
Module
Connect Hydrogen
to
Connect Air
to
Connect Make-up
Gas to
AB
Gas 2
Gas 1
—
AC
Gas 2
Gas 1
Gas 3
AD
Gas 3
Gas 1
—
For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000
Operating Manual.
384
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Getting Started
This paragraph contains the instruction to install the FPD on your GC.
To properly install the FPD upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must
be performed:
•
Remove the top and right side panels of the GC.
•
Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control
unit).
•
Mount the FPD on the GC.
•
Remount GC panels.
•
Restart the GC.
•
Configure the detector.
Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out:
1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature.
2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free.
3. Close the gas supplies.
4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC.
5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC.
Installation Guide
385
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Installing FPD Upgrade Kit
Follow this instruction to properly install the FPD Upgrade Kit.
1
3
2
4
1. Injector and detector cassette
2. Column oven door
3. Upper cover
4. Right hand-side panel
Figure C-1. TRACE GC 2000
Removing the GC Panels
This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic
compartment.
Materials needed:
•
2-mm Allen wrench
•
3-mm Allen wrench
Remove the GC Top Cover
1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover.
386
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws.
3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC.
Figure C-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
1. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the right side panel to the right
upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to
Figure C-3.
2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the
side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC.
3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel
away from the GC.
Installation Guide
387
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
1. Right Panel Securing Screw
Figure C-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel
Installing the FPD Control Card
The FPD control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A,
B or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic
compartment. Refer to Figures C-4 and C-5.
NOTE
If all expansion slots are occupied, remove one of the three detector control cards
currently installed and replace it with the FPD control card.
Materials needed:
•
388
3-mm Allen wrench
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
C
1
B
3
2
A
1. Slot cover plate
2. Cover plates fixing screw
3. Free slot
A B C. Extension slot position
Figure C-4. Extension Slots Top View
1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the
selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board.
Installation Guide
389
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
2
3
1
1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers
Slots
3. Mother board
Figure C-5. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots
2. Verify that the jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8), adjacent to the defined detector
control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 1
and 2. Refer to the following table.
Expansion slot
390
Corresponding Jumper
A
J8
B
J7
C
J6
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Jumper Positioning
Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled
Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled
WARNING! The jumper marked “Jx” must be positioned between the pins 1 and 2.
3. Guide through the slot mentioned at point 1 the signal and ignition cables
coming from the top of the card.
4. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother
board.
5. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1.
6. Connect the ignition/hetaing cable to the connector located on the top of the
detector control card.
Mounting the FPD on the GC
This operation allows the correct installation of the FPD on your TRACE GC
2000.
Materials needed:
Installation Guide
•
Jet for FPD
•
5-mm wrench
•
FPD fixing tool.
391
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1. Place the jet into the detector base body housing and tighten it. Ensure the jet
is perfectly vertically aligned to avoid damage.
2
1. Jet
2 .Detector Base Body
Figure C-6. Jet for FPD
2. Place the FPD on the detector base body, paying attention that the
alluminium ring has been inserted in the correct position.
3. Tighten the fixing nut by using the FPD fixing tool.
392
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
5
3
4
2
1. FPD
2. Detector Base Body
3. Aluminium ring
4. Jet
5. FPD Fixing Tool
Figure C-7. Installation of the FPD
4. Carefully, connect the signal, excitation voltage and ignition/heating cables
coming from the detector control card, to the detector cell.
1
2
3
1. Signal Cable
2. Excitation Voltage Cable
3. Ignition/heating Cable
Figure C-8. Cables Connection
Installation Guide
393
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Reinstall the GC Panels
This procedure reinstalls the GC panels.
Materials needed:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal
(refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 386) being sure to reconnect the
rear panel cooling fan.
Restarting the GC
1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly
performed.
2. Open the gas supplies.
3. Reconnect the main power.
4. Turn on main power.
394
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Configuration
Configuration
This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with
FPD. You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer
to Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual.
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas
1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector
depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open
the detector gas menu.
LEFT DETECTOR
Detector type
<
1
Makeup gas
1. This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note.
2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and
the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the
submenu.
3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected.
4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER.
The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An
asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in
parentheses in the title bar.
5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected.
Installation Guide
395
Upgrade Kit
Set FPD Parameters
Set FPD Parameters
To set FPD parameters, it is necessary to open the FPD menu and the FPD Signal
menu.
NOTE
•
The DETECTOR (FPD) menu contains the detector control parameters.
To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating
Manual.
•
The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the
detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC
2000 Operating Manual.
To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the FPD Checkout as
described in Section V of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual PN
31709200.
Parameters Setting
1. To open FPD menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending
on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT DETECTOR (FPD)1
Flame
Off
Base temp
300 300
FPD temp
150 150
Signal pA
(1.4)
High voltage mode?
H2
2
Air
90 90
2
Mkup N2
N
115 115
2
00
00
1. These settings could also be for a right detector.
2. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can
only turn the flows on and off.
396
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Set FPD Parameters
2. To open FPD Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according
to the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT SIGNAL (FPD)1
Output
Offset
Auto zero?
Range 10^(0..2)
Analog filter
(1000)
100
Y/N
0<
Off
1. These settings could also be for a right signal
Installation Guide
397
Upgrade Kit
Set FPD Parameters
398
Installation Guide
Photoionization
Detector
This appendix contains the manual PID Installation Instructions
(PN M 317 09 333) the instructions to install and configure the Photoionization
Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Guide at a Glance…
About This Guide ...............................................................................................400
Introduction ........................................................................................................401
Getting Started....................................................................................................403
Configuration......................................................................................................416
Set PID Parameters.............................................................................................417
Operating Procedures
Installing PID Upgrade Kit.................................................................................404
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ............................................................416
Parameters Setting ..............................................................................................417
Installation Guide
399
Upgrade Kit
About This Guide
About This Guide
It provides the instructions to install and configure the Photoionization Detector
on your TRACE GC™ 2000.
NOTE
400
For Conventions, Symbols and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC
2000 Operating Manual.
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Introduction
Introduction
The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Photoionization
Detector on your TRACE GC 2000:
CAUTION
•
PID Assembly for TRACE
•
PID Control Card
•
PID Standard Outfit
The detector gas control module and the UV lamp for PID are not parts of this kit.
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit
If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you
must carefully adhere to the following instructions.
Detector Gases Requirements
The PID requires helium or nitrogen as make-up and sheath gas.
According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module may be:
•
Type AB, AC or AD for the control of make-up and sheath gas.
1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is
compatible with the PID gas requirements.
2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the
following table:
Installation Guide
Installed
Module
Connect Make-up
Gas to
Connect Sheath
Gas to
AB
Gas 2
Gas 1
AC
Gas 3
Gas 1
AD
Gas 3
Gas 1
401
Upgrade Kit
Introduction
For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000
Operating Manual.
402
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Getting Started
This paragraph contains the instruction to install the PID on your GC.
To properly install the PID upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must
be performed:
•
Remove the top and right side panels of the GC.
•
Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control
unit).
•
Mount the PID on the GC.
•
Connect the capillary column and the exit line
•
Remount GC panels.
•
Restart the GC.
•
Configure the detector.
Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out:
1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature.
2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free.
3. Close the gas supplies.
4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC.
5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC.
Installation Guide
403
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Installing PID Upgrade Kit
Follow this instruction to properly install the PID Upgrade Kit.
1
3
2
4
1. Injector and detector cassette
2. Column oven door
3. Upper cover
4. Right hand-side panel
Figure D-1. TRACE GC 2000
Removing the GC Panels
This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic
compartment.
Materials needed:
•
2-mm Allen wrench
•
3-mm Allen wrench
Remove the GC Top Cover
1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover.
2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws.
404
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC.
Figure D-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
1. Loosen and remove the screw 1 that secures the right side panel to the right
upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to
Figure D-3.
2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the
side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC.
3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel
away from the GC.
Installation Guide
405
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
1. Right Panel Securing Screw
Figure D-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel
Installing the PID Control Card
The PID control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A, B
or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic
compartment.
NOTE
406
In the case all the expansion slots are occupied, it is necessary to remove one of the three
detector control card currently installed and replace it with the PID control card.
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Materials needed:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
C
1
B
3
2
A
1. Slot cover plate
2. Cover plates fixing screw
3. Free slot
A B C. Extension slot position
Figure D-4. Extension Slots Top View
1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the
selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board.
Installation Guide
407
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
3
2
1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers
Slots
3. Mother board
Figure D-5. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots
2. Verify that the jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8) adjacent to the defined detector
control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 2
and 3. Refer to the following table.
Expansion slot
408
Corresponding Jumper
A
J8
B
J7
C
J6
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Jumper Positioning
Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled
Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled
WARNING! The jumper (marked J6, J7, J8) must be positioned between the pins 2 and 3.
3. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother
board.
4. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1.
Mounting the PID on the GC
This operation allows the correct installation of the PID on your TRACE GC
2000.
Materials needed:
•
UV Lamp
•
Fixing Tool
The PID consists of four main sub units. Refer to Figures D-6 and D-7 to identify
the parts constituiting the PID.
Installation Guide
•
Cell Block
It includes the detector cell assembly, the stainless steel bell and the insulation
jacket.
•
Lamp Housing
It includes the detector cell assembly, the stainless steel bell and the insulation
jacket.
•
Lamp Holder
It contains the UV lamp with the electrical cable for lamp ignition and
operation.
409
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
•
Heat Sink
It dissipates the heat of the detector base body.
1
2
3
4
1. Lamp Holder
2. Heat Sink
3. Lamp Housing
4. Cell Block (not visible)
Figure D-6. PID General View
410
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1. Detector Cell Assembly
2. Insulation Jacket
3. Stainless Steel Bell
4. Seal
5. Seal
6. Detector Base Body
7. Viton™ O-ring for Lamp Holder
8. Lamp Housing
9. Heat Sink
10. UV Lamp
11. Viton™ O-ring for UV Lamp
12. Lamp Holder
13. Two-way Capillary Adapter
14. Silver Seal
15. Fixing Tool
Figure D-7. Explose of the PID Components
Installation Guide
411
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
To install the PID on the GC detector base body, follow the instruction below:
Refer to Figure D-7 to identify the parts.
1. Place the insulation jacket (2) on the stainless steel bell (3).
2. Put the detector cell assembly (1) into the stainless steel bell (3) passing the
lower threaded section of the cell assembly through the bottom hole of the
bell.
3. Install the seal (5) on the detector base body surface (6) and the seal (4) on
the threaded section of the cell that goes out from the hole of the bell.
4. Screw the cell block (detector cell assembly + stainless steel bell + insulation
jacket) on the detector base body, without overtighten, by using the fixing
tool (15) provided.
5. Make sure that the Viton™ O-ring (8) is correctly positioned on the lower
part of the lamp housing (7).
6. Pull the electrical cables of the lamp housing (7) through the heat sink (9)
pay attention that the external knurled area of the heat sink is oriented
upwards and the internal threaded section must be turned towards the
detector base body.
7. Put the lamp housing on the cell block paying attention to the proper insertion
of the two orientation pins into the corresponding slots of the cell block.
8. Mount the heat sink (9) on the lamp housing (7), then screw manually the
heat sink on the stainless steel bell.
9. Install the UV lamp (10), with the Viton ™ O-ring (11) on its flange, into the
lamp holder (12).
WARNING! Never install the UV lamp without the o-ring.
10. Install the lamp assembly (UV lamp + lamp holder) into the lamp housing
and ensure screwing the two knurled screws. Refer to Chapter 12 of the
TRACE GC 2000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual.
412
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
11. Mount the two-way capillary adapter (13) to the lower part of the detector
base body, inside the GC column oven, interposing the seal (14).
The result of the operation is shown in Figure D-8.
1. PID Assembly
2. Detector Base Body
3. Two-way Capillary Adapter
4. GC Column Oven
Figure D-8. PID Installation Result
Installation Guide
413
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Connecting Capillary Column and Exit Line
1. Connect capillary column and exit line to the PID as described in Chapter 14
(on page 237) of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. The result of the
operation is shown in Figure D-9.
1. Detector Base Body
2. Two-way Capillary Adapter
3. Inlet Line
4. Exit Line
5. Capillary Column
6. Exit Line Fused Silica Tubing
Figure D-9. Capillary Column and Exit Line Connections
Reinstall the GC Panels
This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels
Materials needed:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
414
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal
(refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 404) being sure to reconnect the
rear panel cooling fan.
Restarting the GC
1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly
performed.
2. Open the gas supplies.
3. Reconnect the main power.
4. Turn on main power.
Installation Guide
415
Upgrade Kit
Configuration
Configuration
This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with
PID.
You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to
Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual.
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas
1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector
depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open
the detector gas menu.
LEFT DETECTOR
Detector type
<
1
Makeup gas
1. This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note.
2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and
the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the
submenu.
3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected.
4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER.
The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An
asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in
parentheses in the title bar.
5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected.
416
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Set PID Parameters
Set PID Parameters
To set PID parameters, it is necessary to open the PID menu and the PID Signal
menu.
NOTE
•
The DETECTOR (PID) menu contains the detector control parameters.
To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating
Manual.
•
The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the
detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC
2000 Operating Manual.
To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the PID Checkout as
described in Section VI of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual
PN 31709200.
Parameters Setting
1. To open PID menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending
on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT DETECTOR (PID)1
Lamp
Off
Base temp
300 300
High current
Signal pA
Mkup N2
(15.4)
2
Sheath Gas
N <
7.0 7.0
2
40
40
1. These settings could also be for a right detector.
2. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you
can only turn
the flows on and off.
Installation Guide
417
Upgrade Kit
Set PID Parameters
2. To open PID Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according to
the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT SIGNAL (PID)1
Output
Offset
Autozero?
Range 10^(0..3)
Analog filter
(1000)
100
Y/N
0<
Off
1. These settings could also be for a right signal
418
Installation Guide
Electron Capture
Detector
This appendix contains the manual ECD Installation Instructions
(PN M 317 09 335) which provides the instructions to install and configure the
Electron Capture Detector on your TRACE GC 2000.
Guide at a Glance…
About This Guide ...............................................................................................420
Introduction ........................................................................................................421
Getting Started....................................................................................................423
Configuration......................................................................................................432
Set ECD Parameters ...........................................................................................433
Operating Procedures
Installing ECD Upgrade Kit ...............................................................................424
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ............................................................432
Parameters Setting ..............................................................................................433
Installation Guide
419
Upgrade Kit
About This Guide
About This Guide
It provides the instructions to install and configure the Electron Capture Detector
on your TRACE GC™ 2000.
WARNING! The Electron Capture Detector (ECD) contains a 63Ni beta-emitting eadioactive
source of 370 MBq (10 mCi).
NOTE
420
For Conventions, Symbols, Safety Information, Wipe Test and Costumer Communications,
please refer to the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual.
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Introduction
Introduction
The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Electron Capture
Detector on your TRACE GC 2000:
CAUTION
•
ECD Assembly for TRACE
•
ECD Control Card
•
ECD Standard Outfit
•
Wipe Test
The detector gas control module is not part of this kit.
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit
If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you
must carefully adhere to the following instructions.
Detector Gases Requirements
The ECD commonly uses nitrogen or argon/methane as make-up gas.
According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module may be:
•
Type AA, AB, AC or AD for the control of make-up gas.
1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is
compatible with the ECD gas requirements.
2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the
following table:
Installation Guide
Installed
Module
Connect Hydrogen
to
Connect Air
to
Connect Make-up
Gas to
AA
—
—
Gas 3
AB
—
—
Gas 2
421
Upgrade Kit
Introduction
Installed
Module
Connect Hydrogen
to
Connect Air
to
Connect Make-up
Gas to
AC
—
—
Gas 3
AD
—
—
Gas 3
For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000
Operating Manual.
422
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Getting Started
This paragraph contains the instruction to install the ECD on your GC.
To properly install the ECD upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must
be performed:
•
Remove the top and right side panels of the GC.
•
Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control
unit).
•
Mount the ECD on the GC.
•
Remount GC panels.
•
Restart the GC.
•
Configure the detector.
Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out:
1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature.
2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free.
3. Close the gas supplies.
4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC.
5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC.
Installation Guide
423
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Installing ECD Upgrade Kit
Follow this instruction to properly install the ECD Upgrade Kit.
1
3
2
4
1. Injector and detector cassette
2. Column oven door
3. Upper cover
4. Right hand-side panel
Figure E-1. TRACE GC 2000
Removing the GC Panels
This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic
compartment.
Materials needed:
•
2-mm Allen wrench
•
3-mm Allen wrench
Remove the GC Top Cover
1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover.
424
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws.
3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC.
Figure E-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
1. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the right side panel to the right
upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to
Figure E-3.
2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the
side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC.
3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel
away from the GC.
Installation Guide
425
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
1. Right Panel Securing Screw
Figure E-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel
Installing the ECD Control Card
The ECD control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A,
B or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic
compartment. Refer to Figures E-4 and E-5.
NOTE
426
In the case all the expansion slots are occupied, it is necessary to remove one of the three
detector control card currently installed and replace it with the ECD control card.
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Materials needed:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
C
1
B
3
2
A
1. Slot cover plate
2. Cover plates fixing screw
3. Free slot
A B C. Extension slot position
Figure E-4. Extension Slots Top View
1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the
selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board.
Installation Guide
427
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
3
2
1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers
Slots
3. Mother board
Figure E-5. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots
2. Verify that the jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8) adjacent to the defined detector
control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 1
and 2. Refer to the following table.
Expansion slot
428
Corresponding Jumper
A
J8
B
J7
C
J6
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Jumper Positioning
Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled
Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled
WARNING! The jumper (marked J6, J7, J8) must be positioned between the pins 1 and 2.
3. Guide through the slot mentioned at point 1 the signal and excitation cables
coming from the top of the card.
4. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother
board.
5. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1.
6. Connect the temperature sensor/heater cable to the connector located on the
top of the detector control card.
Mounting the ECD on the GC
This operation allows the correct installation of the ECD on your TRACE GC
2000. Refer to Figure E-6.
Materials needed:
•
Installation Guide
ECD Fixing Tool
429
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
6
4
1
3
2
1. ECD
2. Detector Base Body
3. Lower Seal
4. Signal connector
5. Excitation Connector
6. Temperature sensor/heater Connector
7. ECD Fixing Tool
Figure E-6. Installation of the ECD
1. Install the ECD on the detector base body interposing the lower seal. Secure
the detector by using the ECD fixing tool
2. Carefully, connect the signal, excitation and temperature sensor/heater
extension cables coming from the detector control card, to the detector cell.
Reinstall the GC Panels
This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels
430
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Materials needed:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal
(refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 424) being sure to reconnect the
rear panel cooling fan.
Restarting the GC
1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly
performed.
2. Open the gas supplies.
3. Reconnect the main power.
4. Turn on main power.
Installation Guide
431
Upgrade Kit
Configuration
Configuration
This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with
ECD.
You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to
Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual.
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas
1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector
depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open
the detector gas menu.
LEFT DETECTOR
Detector type
<
1
Makeup gas
1. This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note.
2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and
the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the
submenu.
3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected.
4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER.
The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An
asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in
parentheses in the title bar.
5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to
confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected.
432
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Set ECD Parameters
Set ECD Parameters
To set ECD parameters, it is necessary to open the ECD menu and the ECD Signal
menu.
NOTE
•
The DETECTOR (ECD) menu contains the detector control parameters.
To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating
Manual.
•
The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the
detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC
2000 Operating Manual.
To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the ECD Checkout as
described in Section III of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual
PN 31709200.
Parameters Setting
1. To open ECD menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending
on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT DETECTOR (ECD)1
Base temp
250 250
ECD Temp
300 300
Ref current nA
Freq kHz
1.0
(2.20)
Pulse amp V
50
Pulse width us
1.0
Mkup (N2)
2
30 30<
1. These settings could also be for a right detector.
2. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can
only turn the flows on and off.
Installation Guide
433
Upgrade Kit
Set ECD Parameters
2. To open ECD Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according
to the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed:
LEFT SIGNAL (ECD)1
Output
Offset
Auto zero?
(1000)
100
Y/N <
1. These settings could also be for a right signal
434
Installation Guide
Transformer Installation
This appendix contains the manual Transformer Installation which provides the
instructions to install and configure a transformer on your TRACE ™ GC 2000.
Guide at a Glance…
Transformer Overview .......................................................................................436
Getting Started....................................................................................................438
Configuration......................................................................................................446
Operating Procedures
Installing the Transformer ..................................................................................438
Hardware Configuration.....................................................................................446
Installation Guide
435
Upgrade Kit
Transformer Overview
Transformer Overview
All the GC’s are equipped with a proper toroidal transformer already factory
installed according to the type of the detector in use. Refer to TableF-1.
Table H-1. Transformer Types
Transformer
Description
Standard
It supports the detectors FID, ECD, PID, FPD, TCD and the PTV Injector.
For NPD
It supports the NPD only.
It is already factory installed when the GC is equipped with a NPD.
- In the case the GC, equipped with a detector different than NPD, is upgraded
with a NPD, the transformer must be installed on the GC Power Control
Module.
- When the GC is upgraded with a second NPD, this transformer supports both.
NOTE
436
An obsoleted FID transformer is present in TRACE™ GC 2000 with FID having serial
number below than 983808 (Milan) or TR101089 (Austin).
This transformer must be replaced with the standard one when the GC is upgraded with a
detector different than FID.
In the case the GC is upgraded with a second FID, the transformer already present may be
used to supply a second FID.
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Transformer Overview
Figures F-1 shows the positions on the GC Power Control Module where the
detector trasformer must be installed.
1
1. NPD Transformer
2. Standard Transformer
Figure F-1. Standard and NPD Transformers
To install or replace the required transformer into the GC, refer to the Operating
Sequence Installing the Transformer on page 438.
Installation Guide
437
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Getting Started
This paragraph contains the instruction to install or replace the transformer on
your GC.
WARNING! This operation must be carried out by authorized ThermoQuest technical personnel.
To properly install or replace the transformer, the following sequential operations
must be performed:
•
Remove the top, right side and rear panels of the GC.
•
Remove the GC Power Control Module
•
Mount the transformer.
•
Remount GC panels.
•
Restart the GC.
•
Configure the transformer.
Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out:
1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature.
2. Close the gas supplies.
3. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC.
Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC.
Installing the Transformer
This operation allows to install or replace the toroidal transformer.
WARNING! This operation must be carried out by authorized ThermoQuest technical personnel.
Removing the GC Panels
This operation allows to access the GC electronic compartment.
438
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Materials needed:
•
2-mm Allen wrench
•
3-mm Allen wrench
1
1. Right hand-side panel
Figure F-2. TRACE GC 2000 View
Remove the GC Right Side Panel
1. Loosen and remove the screw 1 that secures the right side panel to the right
upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench.
2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the
side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC.
Installation Guide
439
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel
away from the GC.
1
2
3
1. Right Panel Securing Screw
2. Reap Panel Fixing Screws
3. GC Right Side Panel
Figure F-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel
Remove the GC Rear Panel
1. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove
these screws using the 2-mm Allen wrench. See Figure F-F-3.
2. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Be aware that the cooling fan is
attached to the rear panel.
Pay attention to the positioning of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the
same way it was removed.
Remove the Power Control Module
Materials needed:
•
440
Phillips screwdriver
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Six screws fix the Power Control Module. Two large Phillips screws are located in
the rear of the right hand-side of the GC, while the remaining four screws are
located just behind the front panel of the GC.
1. Remove the six screws. Refer to Figure H-F-4.
1
1
1
1. Large Phillips Screws
Figure F-4. TRACE GC 2000 Right Side View
2. Slide the Power Control Module very slowly and gently outward towards the
rear of the GC.
CAUTION
Installation Guide
This operation requires particular attention because several cables are connected to
the Power Control Module. It must be removed gradually paying attention to
disconnect step by step all the cables available until the power control module is
completely free. Be very careful not to damage any wire during this operation.
441
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
1
1. Power Control Module
Figure F-5. TRACE GC 2000 Rear View
3. As the Power Control Module is being removed, disconnection of the parts
must be carried out in the following order:
•
J1, 16-pin white connector.
•
J8, 2-pin connector.
•
J11, 16-pin white connector located in the upper rear quadrant of the
chassis.
•
J13, ribbon cable.
•
Oven heater wire connected to the oven heater triac.
•
TB1 and TB2, orange terminal strips for the heater wire connections.
•
J17, oven blower motor.
•
J8, second oven heater wire.
•
Chassis ground wire from the GC rear oven terminal.
4. Place the Power Control Module on a free working table.
442
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Install the Transformer for Detector
Figure F-6 shows the positions on the GC Power Control Module where the
detector trasformer must be installed.
1
2
1. Transformer for FID, ECD, PID, 2. Transformer for NPD
FPD , TCD and PTV Injector
Figure F-6. Transformer Installation
Install the transformer proceeding as follows. Refer to Figure F-7.
1. Screw the spacer on the threaded pin.
2. Insert the first protection disk on the spacer.
3. Place the transformer over the protection disk.
4. Place the second protection disk over the transformer.
5. Place the metal plate over the assembly.
6. Insert the fixing screw in the spacer passing through the metal plate.
Installation Guide
443
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
7. Screw until the transformer assembly is blocked.
1
4
5
2
3
1. Transformer
2. Protection disks
3. Spacer
4. Metal Plate
5. Fixing Screw
Figure F-7. Transformer Assembly Identification Parts
The transformer has three cables and three female connectors marked “Px”1.
Connect the female connectors to the corresponding male connectors on the
power control module PCB marked “Jx”1.
1. “x” is equal to a number defined by the table below.
Transformer
Standard
For NPD
444
Cable Connector
Connect To...
P14
J14
P5
J5
P6
J6
P15
J15
P4
J4
P35/36
J35/36
P36/37
J36/37
Installation Guide
Upgrade Kit
Getting Started
Reinstall the Power Control Module
CAUTION
This operation requires particular attention because several cables must be
reconnected to the Power Control Module. It must be gradually reinserted paying
attention to reconnect step by step all the cables until the power control module is
completely reinstalled into the GC.
1. Reconnect the previous disconnected connections in the reverse order of their
removal.
2. Secure the six Phillips screws that fix the Power Control Module in place.
3. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
Reinstall the GC Panels
This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels
Materials needed:
•
3-mm Allen wrench
1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal.
2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal
(refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 438) being sure to reconnect the
rear panel cooling fan.
Restarting the GC
1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly
performed.
2. Open the gas supplies.
3. Reconnect the main power.
4. Turn on main power.
Installation Guide
445
Upgrade Kit
Configuration
Configuration
This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with the
new transformer.
Hardware Configuration
This operation must be performed to verify if the GC has recognized the presence
of the transformer previously installed.
1. Press INFO/DIAG twice to open Diagnostics menu.
2. Scroll to Hardware Config and press ENTER.
3. Address the hardware configuration menu. Scroll down until the type of
transformer installed in the system is displayed.
4. If not, verify the transformer connections.
446
Installation Guide
Reagent Safety
Information
Material Safety Data Sheets for the chemicals mentioned in the procedures contained
in this manual should be requested from the respective manufacturers, in compliance
with the relevant legislation in the country of use.
Chemical safety information is also available from the Internet. For example,
International Chemical Safety Cards can be found at http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/ipcs/
ipcsname.html.
The following are the chemical references for the solvents mentioned in this manual.
ACETONE
ACETONE
2-Propanone
Dimethyl ketone
C3H6O/CH3-CO-CH3
Molecular mass: 58.1
CAS # 67-64-1
RTECS # AL3150000
ICSC # 0087
UN # 1090
EC # 606-001-00-8
Service Manual
447
Appendix G
METHANOL
METHANOL
Methyl alcohol
Carbinol Wood alcohol
CH4O/CH3OH
Molecular mass: 32.0
CAS # 67-56-1
RTECS # PC1400000
ICSC # 0057
UN # 1230
EC # 603-001-00-X
TOLUENE
TOLUENE
Methylbenzene
Toluol
C6H5CH3/C7H8
Molecular mass: 92.1
CAS # 108-88-3
RTECS # XS5250000
ICSC # 0078
UN # 1294
EC # 601-021-00-3
448
Service Manual
Customer
Communication
This appendix contains contact information for ThermoQuest offices worldwide. This
appendix also contains a one-page Reader Survey. Use this survey to give us feedback
on this manual and help us improve the quality of our documentation.
How To Contact Us and Order Spare Parts
ThermoQuest provides comprehensive technical assistance worldwide and is
dedicated to the quality of our customer relationships and services. Use this list to
contact your local ThermoQuest office or affiliate. Please fax any spare parts orders to
the fax number corresponding to your country of residence.
Service Manual
AUSTRALIA
BELGIUM
ThermoQuest Australia
PO Box 239, Unit 20, 38-46 South Street
Rydalmere, NSW 2116
Tel: 2 898 1244
Fax: 2 684 4244
Interscience SPRL
Scientific Parc Einstein –
Avenue Jean-Etienne Lenoir 2
B-1348 Louvain-la-Neuve
Tel: 10 450025
Fax: 10 453080
AUSTRIA
CANADA
ThermoQuest Austria GmbH
Wehlistrasse 27 b, A-1200, Wien
Tel: 1 33350340
Fax: 1 333503426
Also serving BULGARIA, CROATIA,
CZECH REPUBLIC, HUNGARY, POLAND,
SLOVAKIA, SLOVENIA
ThermoQuest/APG
1355 Remington Road, Suite M
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4814
USA
Tel: 847 310 0140
Fax: 847 310 1681
CIS and formerly USSR Republics
ITALY
Neolab
Sretenskii Boulevar, dom 6/1,
entrance 2, no. 16
101000 Moscow, center
Tel: 095 9264148
Fax: 095 9285378
ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A.
Strada Rivoltana
20090 Rodano (Milan)
Tel: 02 95059355
Fax: 02 95059388
439
Appendix H
Customer Communication
440
How To Contact Us and Order Spare Parts
FINLAND
JAPAN
Odior Oy Analytical
Louhelantie 10 – PO Box 86
FIN - 01601 Vantaa
Tel: 9 530 8000
ThermoQuest K.K.
Nishi-Shinjuku, Toyokuni Building
2-5-8 Hatsudai, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151
Tel: 3 3372 3001
Fax: 3 3372 7051
FRANCE
KOREA
ThermoQuest France SA
Hightec Sud
12 Avenue des Tropiques –
Z.A. de Courtaboeuf
BP 141 - 91944 Les Ulis Cedex
Tel: 1 6918 8810
Fax: 1 6929 9382
InSung Hi-Tech Co., Ltd.
InSung Bldg 89-111, Shinjung 2-dong
Yangcheon-Ku – Seoul
Tel: 2 644 19997
Fax: 2 643 4911
GERMANY
NETHERLANDS
ThermoQuest APG Gmbh
Boschring 12, 63329 Egelsbach
Tel: 6103 408 0
Fax: 6103 408 290
Interscience B.V.
Tinstraat 16, Postbus 2148, 4823 CC Breda
Tel: 76 5411800
Fax: 76 5420088
INDIA
NORWAY
Nulab Equipment Co. Pvt. Ltd.
Labhouse Plot No. F-13
Opp. SEEPZ, Marol M.I.D.C.
Andheri (East) Mumbay 400 093
Tel: 22 8376701
Fax: 22 8368275
IT Instrument Teknikk
Skandinavia A/S – PO Box 14
Østerndalen 9-11 – N-1345 Østerås
Tel: 67 149303
Fax: 67 149302
PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF CHINA
SWITZERLAND
Finnigan MAT China
Rm. 315 Hui Zhi Building
No. 68 Xue-yuan-nan-Lu,
Haidian Dist., Beijing 100081
Tel: 10 62172241, 10 62186342,
10 62186341
Fax: 10 62172240
Brechbühler AG
Steinviesenstrasse 3, 8952 Schlieren
Tel: 1 732 3131
Fax: 1 730 6141
SINGAPORE
TURKEY
CE Instruments Enterprise
c/o Sintech Scientific S.E.A. Pte Ltd.
No. 196 Pandan Loop #02-18
Pantech Industrial Complex
Singapore 128384
Tel: 779 0007
Fax: 872 2392
Also serving INDONESIA, MALAYSIA,
THAILAND, PHILIPPINES
Dolunay Teknik Cihazlar Ltd.
Ali Sami Yen Sokak Orman
Apt. No. 3/B Daire: 23
80290 Gayrettepe, Istanbul
Tel: 212 281154
Fax: 212 2885427
Service Manual
Appendix H
Customer Communication
How To Contact Us and Order Spare Parts
SOUTH AFRICA
UNITED KINGDOM
SMM Instruments (Pty) Ltd.
SMM House Kyalami Boulevard
Kyalami Park Midrand
PO Box 11400 Vorna Valley 1686
Tel: 11 466 2200
Fax: 11 466 2220
ThermoQuest Limited
PO Box 45
Wythenshawe, Manchester M23 9TQ
Tel: 161 374 4380
Fax: 161 374 4399
SPAIN
USA and LATIN AMERICA
ThermoQuest Austin
2215 Grand Avenue Parkway
Austin, TX 78728-3812
Tel: 512 251 1445
800 766 9761 (US only)
Fax: 512 251 1578
ThermoQuest – ThermoInstruments S.A.
Avenida Valdelaparra 27
Edifico Alcor – Planta 2
28108 Alcobendas – Madrid
Tel: 1 6574930
Fax: 1 6574937
SWEDEN
Finnigan MAT AB
Pyramidbacken 3
S-141 75 Huddinge
Tel: 8 680 0101
Fax: 8 680 0315
Technical Support
For Canada, the USA, and Latin America:
ThermoQuest Corporation
3661 Interstate Park Road North
Riviera Beach, Florida 33404
USA
(800) 685 9535
For technical support in other areas, contact your local ThermoQuest office or
affiliate.
Service Manual
441
Reader Survey
Product:
Manual:
Part No.:
TRACE GC 2000
Service Manual
M 317 09 270, Rev. B
Please help us improve the quality of our documentation by completing and returning this survey.
Circle one number for each of the statements below.
Strongly
Agree
Agree
Neutral
Strongly
Disagree Disagree
The manual is well organized.
1
2
3
4
5
The manual is clearly written.
1
2
3
4
5
The manual contains all the information I need.
1
2
3
4
5
The instructions are easy to follow.
1
2
3
4
5
The instructions are complete.
1
2
3
4
5
The technical information is easy to understand.
1
2
3
4
5
Examples of operation are clear and useful.
1
2
3
4
5
The figures are helpful.
1
2
3
4
5
I was able to install the system using this manual.
1
2
3
4
5
If you would like to make additional comments, please do. (Attach additional sheets if necessary.)
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Fax or mail this form to:
ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A.
Strada Rivoltana km 4
20090 Rodano (MI)
ITALY
Fax: 39 02 95059388
Glossary
This section contains an alphabetical list and descriptions of terms used in this guide and the help diskette.
This also includes abbreviations, acronyms, metric prefixes, and symbols.
A
A
ampere
ac
alternating current
ADC
analog-to-digital converter
B
b
bit
B
byte (8 b)
baud rate
data transmission speed in events per second
C
ºC
Celsius
CIP
Carriage and Insurance Paid To
cm
centimeter
CPU
central processing unit (of a computer)
CSE
Customer Service Engineer
D
d
depth
DAC
digital-to-analog converter
dc
direct current
DET
Detector
DPFC
Digital Pressure Flow Control
DS
data system
E
Service Manual
ECD
Electron Capture Detector
EMC
electromagnetic compatibility
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
ESD
electrostatic discharge
453
Glossary
F
ºF
Fahrenheit
FET
field effect transistor
FID
Flame Ionization Detector
FOB
Free on Board
FPD
Flame Photometric Detector
ft.
foot
G
g
gram
GC
gas chromatograph
GFC
Gas Flow Control
GND
electrical ground
GSV
gas sampling valves
H
h
height
h
hour
harmonic
distortion
A high-frequency disturbance that appears as distortion of the
fundamental sine wave.
HV
high voltage
HW
hardware
Hz
hertz (cycles per second)
I
ID
identification code or inside diameter
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
impulse
See transient
in.
inch
INJ
injector
I/O
input/output
K
454
k
kilo (103 or 1024)
K
Kelvin
Service Manual
Glossary
kg
kilogram
kPa
kilopascal
L
l
length
l
liter
lb.
pound
LED
light-emitting diode
M
m
meter (or milli [10-3])
M
mega (106)
µ
micro (10-6)
min
minute
mA
milliampere
mL
milliliter
mm
millimeter
m/z
mass-to-charge ratio
N
n
nano (10-9)
NPD
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector
O
OC
on-column
τ
ohm
P
Service Manual
p
pico (10-12 )
Pa
pascal
PCB
printed circuit board
PCKD
packed
PCM
power control module
PID
Photo Ionization Detector
PLD
programmable logic device
PN
part number
455
Glossary
psi
pounds per square inch
PTV
programmable temperature vaporizing
R
platinum temperature sensor
RAM
random access memory; read and write memory
RF
radio frequency
ROM
read-only memory
RS-232
industry standard for serial communications
RTD
reading temperature device
S
s
second
sag
See surge
SC
wiring diagram
slow average
A gradual, long-term change in average RMS voltage level, with
typical durations greater than 2 s.
SPI
serial peripheral interface
S/SL
split/splitless
SSR
solid-state-relay
surge
A sudden change in average RMS voltage level, with typical
duration between 50 µs and 2 s.
SW
software
T
TC
thermocouple
TCD
Thermal Conductivity Detector
TF & DIO
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O
TPU
Time Processor Unit
transient
A brief voltage surge of up to several thousand volts, with a
duration of less than 50 µs.
V
456
V
volt
V ac
volts, alternating current
V dc
volts, direct current
VGA
Video Graphics Array
Service Manual
Glossary
W
Service Manual
w
width
W
Watt
WB
wide-bore
457
Index
A
About This Manual xvii
Additional heat control jumpers 349, 367, 390, 408, 428
Additional Technical Information 335
Analog Pneumatics 8
Analytical Unit 4, 157, 160
ange 10^ parameter 355
B
Blower Motor
Removal 106
C
Carrier Gas Control 8
Central Processing Unit 183
Adjustment Procedures 186
Component Layout 187
Schematics 187
Theory of Operations 184
CLEAR
TRACE key 341
Column Evaluation 9
Column oven door 346, 362, 386, 404, 424
Column Oven. See Oven.
Config Right Inlet Menu 340
Config Right Inlet Type Menu 341
CONFIGURE menu 353, 377, 395, 416, 432
Configure Menu 337, 338, 339
Control Card 345, 359, 383, 401, 421
control card 348, 365, 388, 406, 426
Control Unit 161
Conventions Used in This Manual xxi
cooling fan 364, 440
Cover plates fixing screw 349, 366, 389, 407, 427
CPU
Reinstallation 127
Removal 125, 127
Introduction 125
Operating Procedure 126
Required Parts 125
Required Tools 125
D
Description of Electronic Boards 153
Detection Systems 19
Trace Service Manual
DETECTOR (FID) menu 354, 379, 396, 417, 433
Detector Base Bodies 21
Detector base body 351, 374
detector base body 351, 374, 392
Detector control card expansion Slots 349, 367, 390,
408, 428
Detector Gas Control 13
Detector Gas Flow Control 137, 145
Detector Gas Connections 143
Modules 138
Hardware Configuration AA 138
Hardware Configuration AB 139
Hardware Configuration AC 140
Hardware Configuration AD 141
Hardware Configuration AE 142
DETECTOR SIGNAL menu 354, 379, 396, 417, 433
Detectors 20, 63
DGFC Module 353, 378, 395, 416, 432
DGFC module 345, 359, 383, 401, 421
Diagnostic Messages 90
Digital Flowmeter 320
Digital Pneumatics 8
Digital Pressure Flow Control 129, 227
Adjustment Procedures 229
Component Layout 229
Maintenance 134
Calibration 134
Modules 130
On-Column Carrier 132
Packed Carrier 131
Purged Packed Carrier 130
S/SL and PTV Carrier 133
Schematics 229
Theory of Operations 228
Circuit Function 228
Troubleshooting 135
Digital Voltmeter 320
Display Panel 5, 235
E
Electron Capture Detector 20, 419
Base Frequency 73
Configuration 432
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 432
Constant Current Mode 72
459
Gases 70
Getting Started 423
Installing ECD Upgrade Kit 424
Introduction 421
Menu 74
Operating Principle 71
Overview 69
Response 71
Set ECD Parameters 433
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 421
Wipe Test 70
Electron Capture Detector Controller 255, 260
Adjustment Procedures 258
Component Layout 258
Schematics 258
Theory of Operations 256
Circuit Function 256
Output Specifications 258
Electronic Compartment 5
electronic compartment 347, 362, 386, 404, 424, 438
ENTER
TRACE key 342
Error Messages 86
expansion slot 348, 349, 365, 366, 388, 389, 406, 407,
426, 427
Extension slot position 349, 366, 389, 407, 427
F
Flame 275
Flame Ionization Detector 20, 343
Configuration 353
Detector Gases Requirements 345
Flame Out Conditions 68
Gases 65
Installing FID Upgrade Kit 346
Introduction 345
Jet 64
Menu 67
Overview 64
Selectivity 64
Set FID Parameters 354
Temperature 64
Transformer for FID 345
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 345
Flame Ionization Detector Controller 241
460
Adjustment Procedures 243
Calibration Adjustments 243
Special Notes 243
Component Layout 244
Schematics 244
Theory of Operations 242
Circuit Function 242
Output Specifications 243
Flame Photometric Detector 275, 381
Adjustment Procedure 277
Configuration 395
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 395
Detector Gases Requirements 383
Getting Started 385
Installing FPD Upgrade Kit 386
Introduction 383
Parameters Setting 396
Protection Circuits 277
Schematics and Component Layout 278
Set FPD Parameters 396
Special Notes 277
Theory of Operations 275
Circuit Functions 275
Output Specifications 277
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 383
Flapper Motor
Electrical Plug, Disconnect 117
Reassembly 118
Removal 118
Replacement 116, 118
Introduction 116
Operating Procedure 117
Required Parts 116
Required Tools 116
Free slot 349, 366, 389, 407, 427
fuel gases 345, 359, 383
Functional Tests 79
G
Gas Saver Function 13
Gases
Carrier 129
Connections 143
Control 8, 13
Detector 137, 145
Trace Service Manual
ECD 70
FID 65
NPD 76
GC Base Unit 3, 99
GC Rear Panel
Removal 120
GC Right Side Panel
Removal 110, 121, 126
Glossary 453
gnition polarization cable 351, 375, 393, 430
H
Handshake Cables 145
Hidden Configuration Menu 338, 340
HOT OC Injector
Menu 52
Optional Devices 50
Auxilliary Purge Line 50
Solvent Vapor Exit Valve 51
Overview 50
Hydrogen Sensor xxiv
I
Info Messages 82
Injection Systems 15
HOT Cold On-Column Injector 16
Large Volume On-Column Injector 17
On-Column Injector 16
Overview 16
Packed Column Injector 17
Purged Packed Column Injector 17
Split/Splitless Injector 16
Injector and detector cassette 346, 362, 386, 404, 424
Injectors 35
Instrument Markings and Symbols xxii
Introduction 1
J
Jet 351, 374, 392
jet 351, 374, 392
K
Keypad 5, 235
Keypad and Display Panel 5, 235
Adjustment Procedures 236
Component Layout 236
Trace Service Manual
Schematics 236
Theory of Operations 236
L
Large Volume On-Column Injector
Auxilliary Purge Line 54
Menu 55
Overview 53
Leak Check 9
Leak Test Meter 320
Left Carrier Col Flow Rates Menu 342
Left Inlet Menu 341
Left Valves Menu 342
LVOCI Inlet Parameters 341
M
Maintenance & Troubleshooting 97
Makeup gas 353, 378, 395, 416, 432
Menu
ECD 74
FID 67
HOT OC 52
LVOCI 55
NPD 77
OCI 49
Oven 31
PKD 58
PPKD 61
Mixed Pneumatics 8
Mother board 349, 367, 390, 408, 428
mother board 349, 366, 389, 407, 427
Motherboard 167
Adjustment Procedure 173
Component Layout 173
Schematics 173
Theory of Operations 168
Multidetector System 21
N
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector 20
Gases 76
Menu 77
Overview 75
Thermionic Source Lifetime 75
Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller 265, 270
Adjustment Procedures 267
461
Component Layout 268
Schematics 268
Theory of Operations 266
Circuit Function 266
Output Specifications 267
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector 357
Configuration 377
Configuring Hardware, Detector and Make-up
Gas 377
Detector Gases Requirements 359
Getting Started 361
Installing NPD Upgrade Kit 362
Introduction 359
Set NPD Parameters 379
Transformer for NPD 360
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 359
Non-DGFC module 345, 359, 383, 401, 421
O
On-Column Injector
Menu 49
Optional Devices 48
Automatic Actuator 48
Auxilliary Purge Line 48
HOT OC Device 48
LVOCI 48
Primary Cooling System 46
Secondary Cooling System 47
On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator 311
Adjustment Procedures 312
Component Layout 312
Schematics 312
Theory of Operations 312
Oscilloscope 320
Oven
Configuration 29, 30
Menu 31
Multiple Ramp Program 33
Overview 26
Safety 28
Single Ramp Program 33
Oven Fan
Removal 104
Oven Heater
Replacement 114
462
Oven Heater Baffle
Reassembly 115
Removal 104, 113
Replacement 108
Introduction 108
Operating Procedure 109
Required Parts 108
Required Tools 108
Oven Motor
Assembly 106
Replacement 101
Introduction 101
Operating Procedure 102
Required Parts 101
Required Tools 101
P
Packed Column Injecter
Overview 56
Packed Column Injector
Adapters 57
Liners 57
Menu 58
Septa 56
Parts List 329
PCB Replacement 320
Photoionization Detector 399
Configuration 416
Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 416
Detector Gases Requirements 401
Getting Started 403
Installing PID Upgrade Kit 404
Introduction 401
Parameters Setting 417
Set PID Parameters 417
Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 401
Photoionization Detector Controller 285
Adjustment Procedures 287
Protection Circuits 287
Schematics and Component Layout 288
Special Notes 287
Theory of Operations 285
Circuit Function 285
Output Specifications 287
Pneumatic Compartment 4
Trace Service Manual
Pneumatic Flow Module
Removal 103
Power Control Module 217, 368, 370, 373, 441, 442,
445
Adjustment Procedures 219
Component Layout 219
Reinstallation 124
Removal 111, 119, 122
Introduction 119
Operating Procedure 120
Required Parts 119
Required Tools 119
Schematics 219
Theory of Operations 218
Power Supply Chassis
Removal
Required Parts 125
Required Tools 125
Purged Packed Column Injector
Liners 60
Menu 61
Overview 59
Septa 60
R
Ramps 33
Rear panel 365, 372, 444
Recommended Test Equipment 319
Right hand-side panel 346, 362, 386, 404, 424, 437, 439
Right panel 348, 364, 388, 406, 426
right side panel 347, 363, 387, 405, 425, 439
S
Service Equipment 317
Service Information 331
Service Kit 323
AS 2000 Left/Right 328
Detector Assemblies 326
Detector Consumables 327
Electronics 324
Fans 327
HS 2000 328
Injector Assemblies 325
Injector Consumables 325
Introduction 324
Large Volume Injections 326
Trace Service Manual
Oven 325
Pneumatics 328
Tools 328
Service Notes 333
Signal cable 351, 375, 393, 430
Slot cover plate 349, 366, 389, 407, 427
slot cover plate 349, 366, 389, 407, 427
Software
Update 336
Split/Splitless Injector
Liners 40
Overview 36
Packed Columns 41
Septum 39
Summary of Specifications 23
System Components 4
T
Temperature
Programs 33
Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O 197
Adjustment Procedures 201
Component Layout 201
Reinstallation 127
Removal 125, 127
Introduction 125
Operating Procedure 126
Required Parts 125
Required Tools 125
Schematics 201
Theory of Operations 198
Temperature Sensor
Removal 112
Thermal Conductivity Detector 295
Adjustment Procedures 297
Protection Circuits 297
Schematics and Component Information 298
Special Notes 297
Theory of Operations 295
Circuit Functions 295
Output Specifications 297
Thermocouple Preamplifiers 305
Adjustment Procedures 306
Component Layout 307
Schematics 307
Theory of Operations 306
463
Tool for jet 351, 374, 392
transformer 371, 443
Transformer Installation 435
Configuration 446
Getting Started 438
Hardware Configuration 446
Installing the Transformer 438
Transformer Overview 436
U
Updating Software 336
Upper cover 346, 362, 386, 404, 424
Using Hydrogen xxiv
Using the Configure Menu 337
Using the Hidden Configuration Menu 338
V
Valves Menu 342
464
Trace Service Manual